Home Designer Suite 2021 Reference Manual

Chief Architect®
Home Designer Suite® 2021

3D Home Design Software
Reference Manual
A description of the software interface,
including drawing tools and settings.
Chief Architect, Inc.

6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho 83815
HomeDesignerSoftware.com
© 1990–2020 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this documentation or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and
retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief Architect, Inc.
Chief Architect® and Home Designer® are registered trademarks of Chief Architect, Inc.
This software uses Open CASCADE Technology. 3D input device development tools and related
See www.opencascade.com for details. Open technology are provided under license from
CASCADE is used under the GLPL version 2.1 3Dconnexion. © 3Dconnexion 1992 - 2018. All
license. rights reserved.
This software uses the FreeImage open source image
library. FreeImage is used under the FIPL license, This software uses Intel’s Embree library, which is
version 1.0. See licensed under the Apache License version 2.0. See
http://freeimage.sourceforge.net for details. https://github.com/embree/ for details.
This application incorporates Teigha® software This software uses the OpenCOLLADA SDK.
pursuant to a license agreement with Open Design Copyright © 2008-2012 NetAllied Systems GmbH,
Alliance. Ravensburg, Germany.
Teigha® Copyright © 2003-2018 by Open Design
This software uses the OpenCV open source
Alliance. All rights reserved.
computer vision library. OpenCV is used under the
This software uses the Ruby open source library. See 3-clause BSD License. See
http://www.ruby-lang.org/ for details. https://www.opencv.org/ for details.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of Chief Architect, Inc. or their respective owners.
Created in the United States of America.

Contents
Chapter 1: Program Overview

Startup Options .................................................................................................................. 17
The Home Designer Suite Environment........................................................................... 19
Using Input Devices............................................................................................................ 20
View and Side Windows..................................................................................................... 22
Toolbars and Hotkeys ........................................................................................................ 22
Menus................................................................................................................................... 23
Dialogs ................................................................................................................................. 24
The Status Bar .................................................................................................................... 26
Message Boxes..................................................................................................................... 26
Preferences and Default Settings ...................................................................................... 26
Drawing a Plan ................................................................................................................... 27
Viewing Your Plan ............................................................................................................. 28
Getting Help ........................................................................................................................ 29
About Home Designer ........................................................................................................ 29
Product Upgrade Options.................................................................................................. 29
Home Designer Trial Software.......................................................................................... 29
Chapter 2: File Management

Compatibility with Other Programs................................................................................. 31
Organizing Your Files........................................................................................................ 32
Home Designer Suite Data................................................................................................. 32
Creating a New Plan........................................................................................................... 33
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files......................................................................... 34
Thumbnail Images.............................................................................................................. 36
Auto Archive ....................................................................................................................... 36
Undo Files............................................................................................................................ 37
Opening and Importing Files ............................................................................................ 37
Referenced Files.................................................................................................................. 39
Backup Entire Plan ............................................................................................................ 40
Exiting Home Designer Suite............................................................................................. 40
3
Home Designer Suite 2021 Reference Manual
Chapter 3: Project Planning

Space Planning.................................................................................................................... 41
Room Box Specification Dialog ......................................................................................... 43
Plan Check .......................................................................................................................... 43
Loan Calculator .................................................................................................................. 44
Chapter 4: Preferences and Default Settings

Default Settings vs Preferences ......................................................................................... 47
Dynamic Defaults................................................................................................................ 48
Reset to Defaults ................................................................................................................. 49
General Plan Defaults Dialog ............................................................................................ 49
Preferences Dialog .............................................................................................................. 50
Angle Style Dialog............................................................................................................... 55
Chapter 5: Toolbars and Hotkeys

Toolbar Arrangement ........................................................................................................ 57
Hotkeys ................................................................................................................................ 58
Gamepad Settings Dialog................................................................................................... 59
Chapter 6: Window and View Tools

View Windows .................................................................................................................... 61
Working in Multiple Views................................................................................................ 61
View Tools ........................................................................................................................... 63
Zoom Tools.......................................................................................................................... 63
Undo Zoom.......................................................................................................................... 64
Fill Window......................................................................................................................... 64
Panning the Display............................................................................................................ 64
Closing Views and Files...................................................................................................... 65
Chapter 7: Creating Objects

Architectural vs CAD Objects........................................................................................... 67
Snap Behaviors ................................................................................................................... 67
Object Snaps ....................................................................................................................... 68
Angle Snaps......................................................................................................................... 68
Grid Snaps........................................................................................................................... 68
Creating Objects................................................................................................................. 69
4
Copying and Pasting Objects ............................................................................................ 70
Chapter 8: Displaying Objects

Displaying Objects.............................................................................................................. 73
Layers .................................................................................................................................. 74
Layer Attributes ................................................................................................................. 74
Display Options Dialog....................................................................................................... 74
Layer Sets ............................................................................................................................ 75
Drawing Groups ................................................................................................................. 75
Display Toggles ................................................................................................................... 76
Fill Styles ............................................................................................................................. 76
Select Color Dialog ............................................................................................................. 77
Chapter 9: Editing Objects

Selecting Objects................................................................................................................. 79
Selecting Multiple Objects ................................................................................................. 80
Editing Line-Based Objects ............................................................................................... 82
Editing Arc-Based Objects ................................................................................................ 83
Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects............................................................................... 85
Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects ............................................................................ 87
Editing Box-Based Objects ................................................................................................ 89
Editing Spline-Based Objects ............................................................................................ 90
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses ................................................................................... 91
Moving Objects................................................................................................................... 92
Aligning Objects ................................................................................................................. 93
Resizing Objects.................................................................................................................. 94
Reshaping Objects .............................................................................................................. 95
Rotating Objects ................................................................................................................. 96
Eyedropper and Painter Tools .......................................................................................... 97
Object Eyedropper ............................................................................................................. 98
Deleting Objects.................................................................................................................. 98
Delete Objects Dialog ......................................................................................................... 99
Undo and Redo ................................................................................................................. 100
Chapter 10: CAD Objects

The CAD Drawing Tools.................................................................................................. 101
Line Specification Dialog ................................................................................................. 102
Arc Specification Dialog................................................................................................... 104
5
Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog......................................................................... 105

Polylines............................................................................................................................. 105
Polyline Specification Dialog ........................................................................................... 106
Box Specification Dialog .................................................................................................. 107
Splines................................................................................................................................ 107
Displaying CAD Objects .................................................................................................. 108
Chapter 11: Walls, Railings, and Fencing

Wall Defaults..................................................................................................................... 109
Wall Tools.......................................................................................................................... 110
Railing and Deck Tools .................................................................................................... 111
Fencing Tools .................................................................................................................... 112
Exterior and Interior Walls............................................................................................. 112
Foundation Walls.............................................................................................................. 112
Room Dividers and Invisible Walls................................................................................. 113
Polygon Shaped Decks ..................................................................................................... 114
Hatch Wall ........................................................................................................................ 114
Creating Walls .................................................................................................................. 114
Connecting Walls.............................................................................................................. 116
Displaying Walls ............................................................................................................... 117
Measuring Walls............................................................................................................... 118
Editing Walls..................................................................................................................... 119
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations ................................................................ 121
Aligning Walls................................................................................................................... 121
Roof Directives in Walls................................................................................................... 122
Attic Walls......................................................................................................................... 123
Wall Type Definitions....................................................................................................... 124
Wall Specification Dialog................................................................................................. 124
Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs ..................................................................... 127
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ..................................................................................... 130
Chapter 12: Rooms

Room Definition................................................................................................................ 131
Floor and Room Defaults................................................................................................. 132
Room Types....................................................................................................................... 132
Displaying Rooms ............................................................................................................. 134
Selecting Rooms ................................................................................................................ 134
Editing Rooms................................................................................................................... 135
Room Labels...................................................................................................................... 136
6
Room Label Specification Dialog .................................................................................... 137
Decks.................................................................................................................................. 138
Floor and Ceiling Heights ................................................................................................ 138
Stepped Floor and Ceiling Platforms ............................................................................. 139
Special Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 139
Room Moldings................................................................................................................. 141
Room Specification Dialog............................................................................................... 141
Chapter 13: Dimensions

Dimension Unit Defaults .................................................................................................. 147
Dimension Defaults Dialog............................................................................................... 147
The Dimension Tools........................................................................................................ 149
Displaying Dimension Lines ............................................................................................ 151
Editing Dimension Lines.................................................................................................. 151
Editing Extension Lines ................................................................................................... 152
Moving Objects Using Dimensions ................................................................................. 154
Dimension Line Specification Dialog .............................................................................. 154
Chapter 14: Text

Text Defaults ..................................................................................................................... 157
Fonts and Alphabets......................................................................................................... 158
The Text Tools .................................................................................................................. 158
Creating Text .................................................................................................................... 159
Displaying Text ................................................................................................................. 159
Rich Text Specification Dialog ........................................................................................ 159
Editing Text ...................................................................................................................... 161
Copying and Pasting Text................................................................................................ 162
Find/Replace Text............................................................................................................. 163
Text Arrows ...................................................................................................................... 164
Text Styles ......................................................................................................................... 165
Object Labels .................................................................................................................... 166
Chapter 15: Doors

Door Defaults .................................................................................................................... 169
Door Tools ......................................................................................................................... 169
Displaying Doors............................................................................................................... 171
Editing Doors .................................................................................................................... 172
Changing Door Swings..................................................................................................... 173
7
Special Doors..................................................................................................................... 175

Door Specification Dialog ................................................................................................ 176
Chapter 16: Windows

Window Defaults .............................................................................................................. 183
Window Tools ................................................................................................................... 183
Special Windows............................................................................................................... 185
Grouped Windows............................................................................................................ 186
Displaying Windows......................................................................................................... 186
Editing Windows .............................................................................................................. 187
Window Specification Dialog........................................................................................... 188
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows........................................................................................... 194
Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs ................................................................................ 195
Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs.......................................................... 196
Chapter 17: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults ............................................................................................................... 199
The Cabinet Tools............................................................................................................. 200
Cabinet Fillers................................................................................................................... 201
Placing Cabinets ............................................................................................................... 201
Displaying Cabinets.......................................................................................................... 202
Editing Cabinets ............................................................................................................... 203
Editing Cabinet Styles...................................................................................................... 204
Special Cabinets................................................................................................................ 204
Cabinet Specification Dialog ........................................................................................... 206
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog................................................................................ 210
Chapter 18: Electrical

The Electrical Tools.......................................................................................................... 213
Placing Electrical Objects................................................................................................ 214
Auto Place Outlets ............................................................................................................ 215
Creating Wiring Schematics............................................................................................ 215
Electrical Library Content .............................................................................................. 216
Displaying Electrical Objects .......................................................................................... 216
Editing Electrical Objects................................................................................................ 217
Electrical Service Specification Dialog ........................................................................... 217
8
Chapter 19: Foundations
Foundation Defaults ......................................................................................................... 221
Building a Foundation...................................................................................................... 222
Displaying Foundations.................................................................................................... 222
Editing Foundations ......................................................................................................... 223
Deleting Foundations........................................................................................................ 224
Foundations and Rooms................................................................................................... 224
Foundations and the Terrain........................................................................................... 225
Library Fireplaces ............................................................................................................ 226
Chimneys ........................................................................................................................... 226
Chapter 20: Multiple Floors

Floor Defaults Dialog ....................................................................................................... 227
Floor Tools ........................................................................................................................ 228
Adding Floors.................................................................................................................... 228
Displaying Floors .............................................................................................................. 229
Exchanging Floors ............................................................................................................ 229
Deleting Floors .................................................................................................................. 229
Split Levels ........................................................................................................................ 229
The Current Floor ............................................................................................................ 230
The Attic Floor.................................................................................................................. 231
The Reference Floor ......................................................................................................... 231
Chapter 21: Stairs, Ramps, and Landings

Stair Defaults .................................................................................................................... 233
The Stair Tools.................................................................................................................. 233
Anatomy of a Staircase .................................................................................................... 234
Drawing Stairs and Ramps.............................................................................................. 235
L- and U-Shaped Stairs.................................................................................................... 236
Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings ....................................................................... 237
Editing Stairs and Ramps ................................................................................................ 237
Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections ..................................................................... 238
Landings ............................................................................................................................ 240
Maintaining Tread Depth ................................................................................................ 241
Starter Treads................................................................................................................... 241
Wrapped Stairs................................................................................................................. 242
Other Special Railings and Stairs ................................................................................... 243
Creating a Stairwell.......................................................................................................... 243
9
Rooms Below Staircases................................................................................................... 244

Staircase Specification Dialog ......................................................................................... 245
Ramp Specification Dialog............................................................................................... 251
Stair Landing Specification Dialog ................................................................................. 252
Chapter 22: Roofs

Roof Defaults..................................................................................................................... 255
The Roof Tools.................................................................................................................. 256
Automatic Roofs ............................................................................................................... 256
Build Roof Dialog ............................................................................................................. 256
Editing Roofs..................................................................................................................... 258
Gable Over Door/Window ............................................................................................... 258
Gable Line Specification Dialog ...................................................................................... 259
Skylights ........................................................................................................................... 259
Skylight Specification Dialog........................................................................................... 260
Dormers ............................................................................................................................. 261
Editing Auto Dormers...................................................................................................... 262
Dormer Specification Dialog ........................................................................................... 262
Roof Returns and Other Details...................................................................................... 263
Chapter 23: Trim Tools

Trim and Molding Defaults ............................................................................................. 265
Corner Boards .................................................................................................................. 265
Corner Board Specification Dialog................................................................................. 266
Quoins................................................................................................................................ 266
Quoin Specification Dialog .............................................................................................. 266
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins ................................................................................ 267
Millwork ............................................................................................................................ 267
Applying Moldings ........................................................................................................... 268
Chapter 24: The Library

The Library Browser ....................................................................................................... 271
Searching the Library ...................................................................................................... 274
Find in Library ................................................................................................................. 275
Library Content................................................................................................................ 276
Downloading Library Content ........................................................................................ 277
Importing Library Catalogs ............................................................................................ 278
Adding Library Content .................................................................................................. 279
10
Organizing the Library.................................................................................................... 279
Exporting Library Catalogs ............................................................................................ 281
Placing Library Objects................................................................................................... 281
Select Library Object Dialog........................................................................................... 283
Replace From Library ..................................................................................................... 283
Displaying Library Objects ............................................................................................. 283
Editing Library Objects................................................................................................... 284
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs .............................................................................. 285
Chapter 25: Architectural Blocks

Displaying Architectural Blocks ..................................................................................... 287
Editing Architectural Blocks ........................................................................................... 287
Architectural Blocks and Sub-Objects ........................................................................... 288
Chapter 26: Other Objects

General Shapes ................................................................................................................. 289
Soffits ................................................................................................................................. 289
Special Applications for Soffits ....................................................................................... 290
Soffit Specification Dialog................................................................................................ 291
Chapter 27: Materials

About Materials ................................................................................................................ 294
Material Defaults .............................................................................................................. 294
Material Painter Tools ..................................................................................................... 295
Materials Panel ................................................................................................................. 296
Select Material Dialog ...................................................................................................... 297
Editing Materials .............................................................................................................. 298
Creating Materials............................................................................................................ 299
Define Material Dialog ..................................................................................................... 300
Chapter 28: 3D Views

OpenGL and Hardware ................................................................................................... 303
Camera Defaults Dialogs ................................................................................................. 303
3D View Tools ................................................................................................................... 304
Creating Camera Views ................................................................................................... 305
Creating Overviews .......................................................................................................... 305
Elevation Views................................................................................................................. 306
11
Displaying 3D Views......................................................................................................... 307

Repositioning Cameras .................................................................................................... 308
Editing 3D Views .............................................................................................................. 311
Cross Section Slider.......................................................................................................... 313
Working in 3D................................................................................................................... 313
Saving and Printing 3D Views......................................................................................... 314
Camera Specification Dialog ........................................................................................... 315
Elevation Camera Specification Dialog .......................................................................... 318
Chapter 29: 3D Rendering

Rendering Tips.................................................................................................................. 319
Lighting ............................................................................................................................. 320
Displaying Lights .............................................................................................................. 321
Lighting Modes ................................................................................................................. 322
Adjust Sunlight Dialog ..................................................................................................... 322
Rendering Techniques...................................................................................................... 323
Rendering Technique Options......................................................................................... 323
Chapter 30: Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs

Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects.................................................................. 326
Images................................................................................................................................ 326
Displaying Images............................................................................................................. 327
Editing Images .................................................................................................................. 327
Image Specification Dialog .............................................................................................. 328
Pictures .............................................................................................................................. 329
Picture File Box Specification Dialog ............................................................................. 330
Metafiles ............................................................................................................................ 330
Metafile Box Specification Dialog ................................................................................... 331
PDF Files ........................................................................................................................... 331
PDF Box Specification Dialog.......................................................................................... 332
Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes............................................................. 332
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes .................................................................. 333
3D Backdrops.................................................................................................................... 333
Backdrop Specification Dialog ........................................................................................ 334
Walkthrough Paths .......................................................................................................... 335
Recording a Walkthrough ............................................................................................... 337
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog......................................................................... 339
12
Chapter 31: Importing and Exporting
Chief Architect Account Login........................................................................................ 341
Export Chief Architect 3D Viewer File .......................................................................... 342
Import Room Planner File............................................................................................... 343
DXF vs DWG File Formats ............................................................................................. 343
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files........................................................................................ 343
Additional 2D Export Information ................................................................................. 344
3D Data Import Requirements........................................................................................ 345
Importing 3D Symbols ..................................................................................................... 345
Symbol Specification Dialog ............................................................................................ 346
3D Symbols and Materials............................................................................................... 347
Export 360 Panorama ...................................................................................................... 348
Chapter 32: Terrain

Terrain Perimeter............................................................................................................. 349
Elevation Data Tools ........................................................................................................ 350
Terrain Modifier Tools .................................................................................................... 352
Terrain Feature Tools ...................................................................................................... 353
Garden Bed Tools ............................................................................................................. 354
Water Feature Tools......................................................................................................... 354
Stepping Stone Tools ........................................................................................................ 355
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools.......................................................................................... 355
Terrain Objects in the Library ....................................................................................... 356
Displaying Terrain............................................................................................................ 356
Editing Terrain Objects ................................................................................................... 356
Terrain Specification Dialog............................................................................................ 357
Elevation Point Specification Dialog............................................................................... 358
Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog................................................................... 359
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog..................................................................................... 359
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog .............................................................. 360
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ............................................................................. 360
Garden Bed Specification Dialog .................................................................................... 362
Terrain Path Specification Dialog................................................................................... 362
Importing Elevation Data ................................................................................................ 363
Import Terrain Assistant ................................................................................................. 364
Import GPS Data Assistant ............................................................................................. 365
13
Chapter 33: Roads, Driveways and Sidewalks

Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools .............................................................................. 367
Displaying Road Objects.................................................................................................. 368
Editing Road Objects ....................................................................................................... 368
Road Specification Dialog................................................................................................ 369
Chapter 34: Plants

Plant Tools......................................................................................................................... 371
Plant Chooser Dialog........................................................................................................ 372
Hardiness Zones................................................................................................................ 373
Plant Image Specification Dialog .................................................................................... 373
Chapter 35: Materials Lists

The Materials List Tools .................................................................................................. 377
Creating an Accurate Materials List .............................................................................. 378
Structural Member Reporting ........................................................................................ 378
Organizing Materials Lists .............................................................................................. 379
Materials List Specification Dialog................................................................................. 380
Editing Materials Lists..................................................................................................... 381
Printing and Exporting the Materials List..................................................................... 381
Conditioned Area Totals.................................................................................................. 382
Chapter 36: Printing

Introduction to Printing................................................................................................... 383
The Printing Tools............................................................................................................ 384
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog ............................................................................................ 384
Print Preview .................................................................................................................... 385
Printing to Scale................................................................................................................ 386
Printing Across Multiple Pages....................................................................................... 386
Printing to a PDF File ...................................................................................................... 387
Print View Dialog ............................................................................................................. 387
Print Image Dialog ........................................................................................................... 389
Appendix A: Resources and Support

Learning and Inspiration................................................................................................. 391
Contacting Technical Support......................................................................................... 392
14
Error Messages ................................................................................................................. 392
Program Paths Dialog ...................................................................................................... 393
15
16
Chapter 1:
Program Overview
Home Designer Suite is designed to help home Chapter Contents

enthusiasts visualize, develop and share their design • Startup Options
ideas. Home Designer Suite uses parametric design • The Home Designer Suite Environment
technology, which means that as you draw, a 3D • Using Input Devices
model is created and is updated as you make • View and Side Windows
changes. You can tile a floor plan view next to a 3D • Toolbars and Hotkeys
view and watch one update automatically as you • Menus
draw in the other. • Dialogs
• The Status Bar
• Message Boxes
• Preferences and Default Settings
• Drawing a Plan
• Viewing Your Plan
• Getting Help
• About Home Designer
• Home Designer Trial Software
Startup Options
When Home Designer Suite opens, the
Startup Options dialog displays, allowing
you to choose how you want to begin working in the
program or access useful resources.
The Startup Options dialog can be opened at any
time by selecting File> Startup Options .
17
1 Select a File command to open a .plan file. • Click Training Videos to access a searchable
collection of videos focused on specific topics.
•Click New Plan to open a new, blank file.
See “Creating a New Plan” on page 33. • Click Download Catalogs to visit our 3D
Library of downloadable bonus and manufacturer
• Choose Open Plan to work on an existing library catalogs. See “Library Content” on page
plan file. See “Opening and Importing Files” on 276.
page 37.
4 When an internet connection is available, the
Announcements section displays updated
2 Recent Files lists the full pathnames of the messages and news from Chief Architect.
most recently opened files. Click on a name to
open the file.
5 Click My Account to launch your default
internet browser to the Log In page on our web
Move your mouse pointer over a name to site.
see the file’s full pathname.
6 Your software version’s Build number and the
first five characters of your Product Key
3 A selection of useful online Getting Started display here for reference.
options and Resources are available here. Click
on an option to launch your default internet browser To prevent the Startup Options dialog from
to HomeDesignerSoftware.com. displaying when you launch Home Designer Suite,
• Click Getting Started to visit the Getting Started uncheck Show Options on Startup in the
page on our web site with links to a variety of Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on page
resources to help you begin using the program. 52.
18
The Home Designer Suite Environment
The Home Designer Suite Environment

Home Designer Suite is designed to be intuitive and Architectural objects take up space in all three
efficient. dimensions and their height, width and depth can be
specified in Imperial or metric units. In addition, the
3D Drafting location of objects can be precisely defined using
coordinates, again specified in Imperial or metric
In Home Designer Suite, the drawing area is laid out units.
on a Cartesian grid, a three dimensional coordinate
system described using the X, Y, and Z axes. The CAD objects such as lines and arcs take up space in
current position of your mouse pointer displays in the two dimensions in the current view. Their
Status Bar at the bottom of the program window. dimensions can also be specified in Imperial or
metric units and their locations precisely defined
using coordinates.
Title
Bar
Menus
Parent
Tools
Library
Tool Browser
Palette
Library
Selected Preview
Object Panes
Temporary
Dimension
Edit Crosshair Pointer Reference Status Bar

Toolbar Lines Grid Lines
Easy Access to Tools rather than work with the many individual lines or
surfaces used to represent them.
You can access Home Designer Suite’s features in
various ways using the mouse and keyboard. You can quickly select and edit the location, size,
shape, style and other properties of objects as well as
• Convenient toolbar buttons allow fast access to
change the materials applied to their surfaces.
frequently-used tools and let you customize the
interface. Use Home Designer Suite’s editing capabilities to
• Menus provide access to most tools and settings. make the objects you place in a plan match the
objects they represent in real life. For example, you
• Keyboard shortcuts are available for most tools. can set up your windows and doors to match those
• Contextual menus display with a right-click of available from your supplier.
the mouse.
• The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen pro- Interface Toggles
vides tool descriptions and other information A number of useful drawing and editing behaviors,
about the current task. as well as the display of important elements in the
interface, can be easily enabled and disabled using
Object-Based Design the menus. For example:
Home Designer Suite’s parametric, object-based • Object Snaps, Angle Snaps, and Grid Snaps can
design technology means you place and edit objects, be toggled on or off as needed. See “Snap
Behaviors” on page 67.
19
• Display Elements like Print Preview, Show Line

Weights, and the Reference Display can be turned Object Snaps is disabled
on when needed and then toggled off.
When a setting is turned on, its icon in the menu will
display a small checkmark at its lower right corner
and have a border around it in. Angle Snaps is enabled
Many of these interface elements are global

Preferences while others are file-specific default
settings. See “Default Settings vs Preferences” on
page 47.
Using Input Devices

You can interact with Home Designer Suite using a Right-click to select any object. If, for example, the
variety of input devices. Straight Exterior Wall tool is active, the left
mouse button only allows you to select walls. You
Keyboard can, however, select other types of objects such as
A keyboard is necessary for entering text and size cabinets with the right mouse button.
values. See “Dialogs” on page 24. You can also use the right mouse button to open a
Your keyboard can also be used to navigate the context sensitive menu with additional editing
dialog panels, as well as navigate the program commands. See “Contextual Menus” on page 23.
menus. Many commands can also be invoked using The Middle button can be used to pan in
keyboard hotkeys. See “Menus” on page 23 and most view types. To close a tabbed view
“Hotkeys” on page 23. window, click on its tab using the middle
In addition to the keyboard, a mouse or other device mouse button. You can also program it to
that can move a pointer is necessary in order to draw, work as a double-click.
select, and edit objects in your drawings. If your mouse does not have a middle mouse button,
in the Mac version of Home Designer Suite you can
Three Button Mice use the left button and the Command key to achieve
the same results.
The left button is the primary button used
in Home Designer Suite. Unless specified The Mouse Wheel can be used to zoom in
otherwise, Home Designer Suite and out in most view types. See “Zoom
documentation refers to the left mouse Tools” on page 63.
button.
Many objects, such as doors and cabinets, are created
by clicking the left mouse button. Others, such as 3D Mice
walls, stairs and dimension lines, are created by 3Dconnexion®'s 3D mice can be used to navigate in
dragging the pointer from one end of the object to the Home Designer Suite. For information about navi-
other. gating in camera views and overviews, see
“3Dconnexion® 3D Mice” on page 308.
Note: If you are left-handed and have re-pro-
grammed your mouse, reverse the instructions for Trackpads
left and right buttons in this manual.
In addition to the standard trackpad gestures on your
system, in Home Designer Suite you can pinch to
The Right button has several uses.
zoom.
In macOS™, you can Command + click to pan.

Panning with a trackpad is not supported in the
Windows version of the software, however.
20
Using Input Devices
Touch Screens
Standard one-finger touch screen gestures are
supported in both the Windows and Mac versions of
the software. In the Windows version, touching with
a second finger to cancel an action is also supported,
as are two-finger pan and two-finger pinch to zoom. The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate the
object. See “Rotating Objects” on page 96.
Gamepads
In the Windows version of Home Designer Suite,
gamepads can be used to navigate in camera views,
overviews, as well as elevation views. See
“Gamepads” on page 309. You can cancel any edit handle operation before it is
completed by pressing the Esc key on your keyboard
Crosshairs or by pressing any two mouse buttons at the same
time.
Crosshairs help you position the pointer
relative to objects in a view while drawing and The edit handles that display depend on the type of
editing. They can be set to display in Plan and object selected, the current view, and how far you are
Elevation views Select View> Crosshairs to toggle zoomed out. Edit handles do not resize as you zoom
crosshairs on or off. in or out. If you are zoomed out far enough, some
edit handles may be hidden so that they do not stack
You can customize the Crosshairs’ appearance in the over one another. As you zoom in, these handles
Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on page 54. become visible again.
Edit Handles Pointer Icons

A selected object has edit handles that can be used to The appearance of the pointer in Home Designer
modify its size, position, and orientation. When you Suite will vary, depending on which tool is active.
move the pointer over an edit handle, information
about what it does displays in the Status Bar and the For example, when the Select Objects tool is
pointer changes to suggest how you can use it. active, it will look like a white arrow, and when a
• A two-headed arrow indicates that the object, Cabinet Tool is active, it will look like a base
corner or edge can be moved in the direction of cabinet with a small cross.
the arrows. In addition, one or more additional icons may follow
• A four-headed arrow indicates that the selected the mouse pointer if Angle Snaps is not in use or if a
object or edge may be moved in multiple direc- problematic condition exists in the file:
tions.
• A circular arrow indicates that the selected object Icon Setting
can be rotated. Angle Snaps
Resize handles display along the edges of the object Fix Wall Connections
are used to change the size. See “Resizing Objects”
Irregular Wall Angles
on page 94.
The Move handle at the object’s center lets you move

the object. Depending on the type of object(s)
selected and how far you are zoomed in or out, the
position of the Move handle may shift so that it
remains on-screen. See “Moving Objects” on page
92.
21
View and Side Windows

Home Designer Suite’s main program window has a to the top or bottom, or undocked entirely. There are
number of important features that let you interact several different types of side window:
with the program, such as toolbars and menus. It also • Child Tool Palette
features two different kinds of windows: view
windows and side windows. • The Library Browser
Each of these side windows can be opened via the
View Windows View menu or by clicking the toolbar button
associated with it. Similarly, each can be closed by
View windows are sometimes referred to as “the
clicking the Close button in its title bar or tab, via the
drawing area” because most of them are windows in
View menu, or by clicking its toolbar button. See
which you can draw or place architectural and/or
“View Tools” on page 63.
CAD objects. There are a number of different types
of view windows in Home Designer Suite: To undock a side window, either drag its title bar out
• Plan views into the drawing area or click the Undock button on
its title bar. To dock a side window, drag its title bar
• Camera views and overviews to any side of the program window. You can also
• Elevation views double-click on its title bar to return it to its last
• Materials Lists docked location.
View windows can be navigated by panning and Two or more side windows can be docked together to
zooming. You can also enable scroll bars on their form a shared side window, and can be tiled and/or
right side and bottom. Select View> Scrollbars to tabbed within that shared window. To create a shared
toggle their display. See “View Tools” on page 63. side window, begin by docking a side window to a
side of the main program window, then:
Although only one view window can be active at any
• To create tabbed side windows, drag a second
given time, there is no limit to the number of view
side window over the first. When the docked
windows that can be open. View windows can be
window becomes highlighted, release the mouse
tiled or tabbed, and you can navigate between them
button.
in a number of different ways. See “Window and
View Tools” on page 61. • To create tiled side windows, drag a second side
window over the first. When the docked window
You can also tear a view window out of the main becomes highlighted, slowly drag the mouse
program window. This creates a second, separate towards one of its sides. When a highlighted
program window complete with toolbars and menus. space is created along that side, release the mouse
Individual view windows can be torn out and button.
transferred between program windows.
You can choose to disable Side Window Drag
Side Windows Docking in the Preferences dialog, and you can also
enable Top/Bottom Docking. See “Appearance
Side windows provide access to a variety of tools and Panel” on page 50.
content that helps you add detail your drawings.
Side windows can also be set to their initial states in
Side windows are so-named because they are the Preferences dialog. See “Reset Options Panel”
typically docked to either the left or right side of the on page 55.
program window - although, they can also be docked
Toolbars and Hotkeys

Using the toolbar buttons is the fastest, easiest way to Status Bar at the bottom of the program window.
access many program features. If a tool is active, a When you see one of these tool tips, press the F1 key
small checkmark will display at the lower left of its to get more information about that item. See “Getting
button icon. When you pass the pointer over a Help” on page 29.
toolbar button, a “tool tip” displays the name of the
Home Designer Suite’s tools are organized into
tool and a more detailed description displays in the
families of related tools which can be accessed using
22
Menus
either of two styles of toolbar interface: the Child The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the options
Tool Palette or Drop Down tools. You can select the in the contextual menu when you right-click on an
interface that you prefer in the Preferences dialog. object. See “Contextual Menus” on page 23.
See “Appearance Panel” on page 50.
Hotkeys
The Edit Toolbar
Many commands can be invoked from the keyboard.
When you select an object, the edit toolbar appears. Press Alt on your keyboard and press the underlined
By default, it is located at the bottom of the program letter in a menu name to access that menu, as well as
window, just above the Status Bar. The buttons on items in the menus and submenus.
the edit toolbar can be used to edit the selected
Other keys or key combinations will invoke a variety
object(s). Which buttons display depends on the type
of program commands. If a Home Designer Suite
of object selected, the current view, and how you
menu item has a keyboard shortcut, or hotkey,
selected the object.
associated with it, that hotkey will display to the
right of its name in the menu.
Menus
Home Designer Suite uses a standard Windows In the Home Designer Suite documentation, menu
menu format. The menus are located below the title paths are written in this format: Build> Window>
bar in the program window and can be used to access Box Window .
nearly all tools in the program. Click on a menu
name to expand it, then click on a menu item to
either activate that tool or access the item’s submenu.
Contextual Menus
Items with a submenu have an arrow to the right of Contextual menus are context-sensitive menus that
the name. display tools relevant to a selected object or view. To
open a contextual menu, right-click on an object, in
Menu items with an icon to their left have a toolbar
an empty space in a view window, or in a text field in
button associated with them.
a dialog box.
The menus can be accessed using the keyboard.
The options in an object’s contextual menu are usu-
Press the Alt key once to enable this functionality -
ally the same as those on an object’s Edit toolbar. See
one letter in each menu will become underlined.
“The Edit Toolbar” on page 23.
Press the key associated with one of these underlined
letters to expand its menu - one letter in each menu
item’s name will be underlined. Press the key
associated with one of these letters to activate that
tool or access the item’s submenu. Press the Esc key
to undo your last selection, or click with the mouse to
exit out of this functionality.
Many tools in Home Designer Suite also have
hotkeys associated with them. If a menu item has a
hotkey, it will display to the right of the item’s name.
See “Hotkeys” on page 58. Contextual menus can be enabled or disabled in the
Preferences dialog. When contextual menus are
disabled, right-clicks perform generic object
selection, much like when the Select Objects
tool is active. See “Appearance Panel” on page 50.
Edit menu items with button icons
to the left and hotkeys to the right
23
Dialogs
Default and preference settings, object press Tab to select the highlighted item in the list
specifications, display settings, and many other and proceed to the next setting.
functions are accessed through dialog boxes.
• Settings with spin control arrows can be
Many dialogs have multiple panels, which are listed adjusted by typing in the text field or using the
in a tree list on the left side of the dialog. Click on a Up and Down arrow keys. When the mouse
panel name in the list to make it active. In Windows, pointer is directly over the setting, the mouse
panels can also be navigated using the keyboard. scroll wheel can also be used.
Press:
• Ctrl + Tab or Ctrl + F6 to navigate forward; • Slider bars can be adjusted by typing in the
text field or using the Left and Right arrow keys.
• Ctrl + Shift + Tab or Ctrl + Shift + F6 to navigate When the mouse pointer is directly over the slider
backward. bar, the mouse scroll wheel can also be used.
When a panel name is active, you can also navigate • Line items in tables can be group selected using
the tree list using the Up and Down arrow keys. the Ctrl or Shift keys, or by pressing Ctrl+A.
By default, dialogs always open to the first panel in • Press Enter on your keyboard to close most dia-
the list; if you prefer, you can choose to Open logs and apply your changes.
Dialogs to the Last Panel Visited. See “General • In the Mac version, Command + . closes dialogs.
Panel” on page 52,
Note: Keyboard navigation in dialogs may vary

Keyboard Navigation somewhat depending on your computer platform.
Dialog panels and settings can be accessed using the
mouse. You can also navigate the settings on a given In the Mac version of the software, Dictation is
dialog panel using the keyboard. For example: supported in dialogs. Select Edit> Start Dictation,
• Line items in tree lists can be browsed using the then open a dialog. Say the word “Numeral” before a
arrow keys. Up and Down navigate the list, while number to enter it as a numeric value or immediately
Left and Right expand and contract categories. follow a number with a unit such as “foot” to enter it
as a measurement.
• Press the Tab key to shift focus from the tree list
to the first setting on the selected panel. The units of measurement used in dialogs are
determined by your choice of template files. See
• Press the Tab key to shift focus from one setting
“Creating a New Plan” on page 33.
to the next, or Shift + Tab to go in the reverse
direction. The number format used in dialogs are set based on
• A check box can be checked or cleared by press- your operating system’s defaults.
ing the Spacebar or the + or - keys, respectively,
while it is in focus. Math Operations in Dialogs
• Columns of radio buttons can be navigated using Basic addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
the Up and Down arrow keys; rows can be navi- division can be performed in the text boxes where
gated using the Left and Right arrows. Select a numeric values are entered.
radio button by pressing the Spacebar while it is
Note that settings for angle, pitch, or bearing do not
in focus.
support math, nor do those with spin controls or
• Settings in list boxes can be navigated using the slider bars.
Up and Down arrow keys. When a check box is
• To add, type the + character followed by the
in focus, it can be checked or cleared by pressing
amount that you wish to add. Spaces are ignored
the Spacebar.
and including a unit of measurement is optional.
• Drop-down lists can be browsed using the Up and
• To subtract, type the - character followed by the
Down arrow keys. When the mouse pointer is
amount you wish to subtract. As with adding,
directly over the drop-down, the mouse scroll
spaces are ignored and a unit of measurement is
wheel can also be used; on a Mac, the list must
optional.
also be expanded. In Windows only, you can
24
Dialogs
• To multiply, type the * character followed by the

amount you wish to multiply by. Spaces are Note: Some of the dialog box images in the soft-
ignored, and only one of the values being multi- ware documentation have been resized smaller
plied can have a unit of measurement. than their actual minimum size.
• To divide, type the / character followed by the

Specification Dialogs
amount you wish to divide by. To divide, there
must be a space before the / - if there is not, the Each object in Home Designer Suite has a
input may be treated as a fraction. The denomina- unique specification dialog where you can
tor, or value typed after the /, cannot have a unit enter size, style and other information specific to the
of measurement. selected object. To access it, select the object and
click the Open Object edit button. You can also
Math expressions support a single operation only:
double-click on an object with the Select Objects
more than one operation character (+, -, *, /) at a time
is not allowed. tool active to open its specification dialog. See
“Selecting Objects” on page 79.
Basic math operations can also be used to move
objects using dimensions. See “Moving Objects Most objects also have a defaults dialog that lets you
Using Dimensions” on page 154. specify the initial values in the specification dialog.
Dialog Size and Position Dialog Preview Panes

Dialog boxes can be both moved and resized to suit Many specification dialogs have a preview pane that
your needs. By default, the program will remember shows how changes to settings affect the selected
both the position and size that you specify for a object. This preview updates when you click in a
dialog and use it the next time you open it. The size different field or press the Tab key on your
of dialog preview panes can also be changed, and are keyboard.
remembered as well. You can specify whether the When you click in the preview pane, your mouse
program does this always, per session, or never in the pointer changes to a four-headed arrow and you can
Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on page
rotate around the object as well as zoom in and out
52. using the mouse scroll wheel. Some objects, notably
• To move a dialog, position your mouse pointer walls, doors, and windows, have Interior and
within its title bar and then simply click and drag. Exterior labels to indicate which side is visible in the
• To resize a dialog, position your mouse pointer preview. Click the Fill Window button above the
on any edge or corner and then click and drag preview pane to zoom in or out so that the object fills
outward or inward. If you drag an edge, only that the extents of the pane, maintaining the current
edge will move; if you drag a corner, the two rotation.
adjacent edges will move.
In most dialogs, the Standard and Glass House
• To resize a preview pane, click and drag the verti- Rendering Techniques can be applied to the preview.
cal grab handle to its left. See “Dialog Panel See “Rendering Techniques” on page 323.
Splitters” on page 25.
When a dialog is resized, some elements such as list Click the Color button to turn color in the
boxes and text fields within it may resize in response. preview off or on. Some objects have additional tools
that affect object previews. For example, the Cabinet
All dialogs have a minimum size limitation but no Specification dialogs have a Select Cabinet Face
maximum size. If a dialog opens on a monitor with
resolution too low to display its full extents, it will Item button. Object specific tools like this are
have vertical and/or horizontal scroll bars. discussed in the documentation for that object type.
You can reset the default sizes and positions of all Dialog Panel Splitters
dialogs in the Preferences dialog. See “Reset
Options Panel” on page 55. Many dialog panels are divided into up to three
sections: a list of panels on the left, an object preview
on the right, and a central area where settings are
25
located. The vertical splitters separating these

vertical grab handle: when the splitter cursor can
sections each have a pale grey, vertical grab handle.
be seen, click and drag to the left or right.
To resize the panel list or preview, as well as the area
in the middle, move your mouse pointer over the
The Status Bar

The Status Bar at the bottom of the main program • A brief description of the toolbar button or menu
window displays information about the current state item highlighted by the mouse.
of the program. • The name of the active tool, a brief description of
This information depends on a variety of conditions that tool, and its hotkey, if it has one.
such as the type of object selected, and the current • The length and/or angle of an object as it is being
position of the pointer. The information may include drawn.
the following:
• Basic information about a selected library object,
• The type of object currently selected or the total folder, or catalog.
number of group-selected objects.
• The current floor.
• A description of the edit handle that the pointer is
• The layer that the selected object is on.
over.
• The size of the active window in pixels.
Message Boxes
As you work in Home Designer Suite, the program • Creating an object in a space too small to contain
will occasionally prompt you to examine your it.
settings, alert you if you command it to do something
As with dialog boxes, you can access the options in a
that could potentially cause a problem, or notify you
message box using the mouse or navigate them using
if it encounters a problem that needs your attention.
the keyboard.
A few messages have a Send Report button. Click
this button to send details regarding the issue that
prompted the message to Chief Architect via the
internet.
Some message boxes include a “Remember my
choice” or a “Do not show this again” checkbox.
Situations where such message boxes may display Check this box to prevent messages of this specific
include: type from displaying in the future. When this box is
• Closing a file without saving; checked, some options in the message box may
• Modifying an object that is set to rebuild auto- become inactive.
matically; To allow all message boxes to display again, click
• A file referenced outside the program, such as an the Reset Message Boxes button in the Preferences
image or texture, is missing; dialog. See “Reset Options Panel” on page 55.
Preferences and Default Settings

Preferences and default settings control many aspects For more information about defaults and preferences,
of the user interface and tool behavior in Home see “Preferences and Default Settings” on page 47.
Designer Suite. You can use these settings to
customize the program to suit your personal work Preferences
style.
Preference settings let you change program behavior
to suit your workflow. For example, you can:
26
Drawing a Plan
• Turn certain display elements on or off. Once an object is placed in a plan, its initial
• Choose background and editing feedback colors. properties can be overridden, but setting up your
defaults before you begin drawing can save you
• Set rendering specifications to maximize effi- considerable time as you build a model in the
ciency and quality. program.
Preference settings are global, affecting all plan files. Default settings, unlike Preferences, are file specific.
Defaults Dynamic Defaults

Most objects in Home Designer Suite derive their Most default settings are static: if you change one,
initial properties from their respective default any objects of that type in the current file will not be
dialogs. affected. A few defaults, however, are dynamic: they
are tied to existing objects in the drawing and if you
For example, a newly placed Window gets its
change the default, those objects may be affected.
initial values from the Window Defaults dialog and a
See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 48.
newly placed Hinged Door gets its initial values
from the Door Defaults dialog.
Drawing a Plan
When you draw a plan in Home Designer Suite, you 6. Place perimeter doors and windows. See
are placing 3D objects that represent building “Doors” on page 169 and “Windows” on page
components. Home Designer Suite comes with 183.
predefined default settings so you can start drawing 7. Build additional floors. See “Adding Floors” on
plans immediately. You should review these default page 228.
settings to be sure they match your drawing and
building methods. See “Preferences and Default 8. Specify the default ceiling height for each floor
Settings” on page 47. as soon as it is created. See “Floor Defaults Dia-
log” on page 227.
Set the Defaults 9. Adjust the perimeter shape of additional floors
as needed. See “Editing Walls” on page 119.
1. Specify the defaults for walls.
10. Align edited or moved walls with those above or
2. Set material defaults for roof, walls, and rooms. below where appropriate. See “Aligning Walls”
3. Set style defaults for doors, windows, cabinets on page 121.
and other objects.
Entering Dimensions
Draw the Floors
When using Imperial units, enter distances as inches
1. While the size of the drawing area in Home or feet and inches, in fractional or decimal form. Mil-
Designer Suite is limited only by the resources limeters are the default unit for all metric distances.
on your computer, it is best to begin your draw- See “Dimensions” on page 147.
ing near the origin, 0,0,0. See “3D Drafting” on • To enter feet, include the ( ' ) marker or the
page 19. program assumes inches.
2. Draw the exterior walls on Floor 1. See “Creat- • In most cases, the program allows precision to 1/
ing Walls” on page 114. 16th of an inch. Fractions with denominators 2, 4,
3. Adjust the perimeter shape and size as required. 8 and 16 are allowed.
See “Using the Edit Handles” on page 119. • The program usually converts decimals to
4. Place any first floor bearing walls. fractions.
5. Define types for special rooms such as garages
and decks in the plan. See “Room Types” on Build the Foundation
page 132. 1. Derive the foundation plan from the first floor.
See “Building a Foundation” on page 222.
27
2. Adjust the foundation perimeter shape as 2. Add walls where needed to create features such
needed. as chimney chases, plumbing walls, or Open
3. Place interior foundation walls as needed for the Below areas.
first floor bearing walls. 3. Finish the relevant interior structure including
4. Place any other foundation walls required. interior doors, doorways, cabinets, fixtures, and
fireplaces.
5. Align with Above as needed. See “Aligning
Walls” on page 121. 4. Build the terrain and landscaping. See “Terrain”
on page 349.
Add Structure and Details
1. Build non-structural interior walls. Begin on
floor one and work up in multiple story struc-
tures.
Viewing Your Plan

You can see your model in a variety of different 2D
and 3D views. You can display more than one view
at a time; and in any view, you can pan or zoom in or
out. See “Window and View Tools” on page 61.
Floor plan view is a 2D view of the model most
commonly used for drawing and editing. Each floor
displays separately; however, you have extensive
control over which objects display at any given time,
You can also create Doll House Views that show only
can easily switch between floors, and can also display
the current floor plus any floors beneath it. Ceilings on
items on a second floor for reference. See “Multiple
the current floor are omitted so you can see the
Floors” on page 227.
interior, visualize the relationships between spaces,
and plan traffic flow.
Framing Overviews display framing in 3D. You can

customize 3D views to serve special purposes such as
this.
You can create interior and exterior 3D views of your

model from any perspective. As in floor plan view,
you can select and edit many objects in 3D views and
control which objects are visible. See “3D Views” on
page 303.
All views can be exported as a graphic image. See

“To export a picture” on page 329.
28
Getting Help
Getting Help
There are many forms of help available in Home Designer Suite. Select Help> Launch Help to
Home Designer Suite including: Tool Tips, open the program’s Help and explore the table of
the Status Bar, and the online Help menu. contents, browse the Index, or Search for keywords.
All these forms of help assume you have a basic The Help can also be used to provide instant
working knowledge of your operating system, information about toolbar buttons, menu items, and
including how to use a mouse, open, close and save objects in your plan.
files, copy, paste, and right-click to access contextual • When you move the cursor over a toolbar button
menus. Help also assumes you are familiar with or menu item, a brief summary of that tool dis-
basic computer terminology. plays in the Status Bar. Press the F1 key to open
More information is available in the product online Help to a page with more information
documentation in electronic format and on Home about the tool.
Designer’s official web site, HomeDesignerSoft- • When an object is selected, edit handles display.
ware.com. Place the cursor over an edit handle and press F1
See “Resources and Support” on page 391. to open online Help to a page with information
about that handle.
Tool Tips • Press the Help button in any dialog box to open
online Help to a page describing the options in
When you move the pointer over a toolbar button or that dialog.
menu item, a Tool Tip displays, offering a brief
description of the tool. More information displays in
the Status Bar at the bottom of the window. Chief Architect strives to make our documentation
as helpful as possible for all of our customers.
Contextual Help Please send any suggestions to:
documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
Online Help is a searchable menu that
provides information about all of the tools in
About Home Designer

Select Help> About Home Designer Suite in your software license, the program’s version number,
Windows® or Home Designer> About Home and its release date.
Designer in macOS™ to view information about Contact information for Chief Architect, Inc. is
available on the MORE INFORMATION panel.
Product Upgrade Options

Select Help> Product Upgrade Options to launch upgrading your software license at www.homede-
your default web browser and learn about options for signersoftware.com.
Home Designer Trial Software

Free Trial versions of some Home Designer • Recording of Walkthroughs
programs are available for download at • Printing or Exporting of Materials Lists
HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
• Library Browser restrictions
The Trial software offers the same functionality as a
purchased license with a few limitations: Converting the Trial Version
• File Saving
An installation of the Home Designer Suite Trial
• Printing software can be converted into a full working version
• File Exporting of the program at any time by purchasing a software
29
license. There are several ways to begin this process Once you have purchased a license, you can activate
in the Trial: it while the Trial software is running.
• Click the Purchase Full Version Now button in
any Trial Restriction message box. To activate the full version
• Select Help> Purchase Home Designer 1. Select Help> Activate Full Version.
Suite . 2. In the Product Activation dialog, type or paste
the Product Key associated with your software
• Select File> Startup Options and then click license.
the Purchase Full Version Now button. 3. Click the Activate Full Version button.
30
Chapter 2:
File Management
Home Designer Suite saves the complete 3D model Chapter Contents

of a structure and surrounding terrain as well as any • Compatibility with Other Programs
CAD data associated with the model in .plan files. • Organizing Your Files
All commands related to opening, saving and closing • Home Designer Suite Data
plans are located in the File menu. You can also open • Creating a New Plan
plans from the Startup Options dialog. See “Startup • Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files
Options” on page 17. • Thumbnail Images
• Auto Archive
Just as with files created in other software • Undo Files
applications, you should back up your plan files • Opening and Importing Files
externally on a regular basis to avoid accidental loss • Referenced Files
of work. • Backup Entire Plan
• Exiting Home Designer Suite
Compatibility with Other Programs

Plans produced in the following programs can all be sure to create copies of your files before opening
read by Home Designer Suite 2021. them in Home Designer Suite 2021.
• Chief Architect® X1 through X12 (limited edit- Plans produced in the Windows® version of Home
ability if enabled) Designer Suite 2021 can be read in the Mac® ver-
• Chief Architect® 10.0 through 11.3 (read only) sion, and vice versa.
• All Better Homes and Gardens Home Designer® File Association

products, Interior Designer, and Landscaping and
Deck Designer, Versions 7 and 8. Although multiple versions of Home Designer can be
installed on a computer, the operating system will
• All Chief Architect Home Designer® products, only associate .plan, .calib, and .calibz files with
Interior Designer, and Landscaping and Deck one of them. If they are not associated with Home
Designer, Versions 9 through 2020. Designer Suite 2021, click the Associate Files with
Files that have been opened and saved in Home this Program button in the Preferences dialog. See
Designer Suite 2021 cannot be read by any of the “File Management Panel” on page 53.
program versions listed above. To continue to read
files in the program in which they were created, be
31
Opening Chief Architect Plans in objects in the plan that those tools can create. If an
Home Designer Programs object cannot be created in the Home Designer
program, however, it will not be editable.
Plans created in Chief Architect Versions 10 through
X12 and Home Designer Pro Versions 7 through Please note, too, that if a plan has more floors than
2021 can be opened in the latest Home Designer the Home Designer program supports, the entire plan
programs for viewing and annotating, but not for can be viewed and annotated only.
general editing or drawing of architectural objects. In addition, Chief Architect and Home Designer Pro
Plans created in build 11.4 or later of Chief Architect have the ability to lock layers. Objects cannot be
X1 or Home Designer Pro 8, or in later program drawn on locked layers; objects on locked layers
versions, can be set to allow limited editability in cannot be selected; and locked layers cannot be
other Home Designer programs. When this unlocked in the other Home Designer programs. See
permission is enabled, a Home Designer user can use “Layers” on page 74.
all of their program’s drawing tools and can edit
Organizing Your Files

You should keep your plan files separate from the • Inside this folder, make a new folder for each
support files needed to run Home Designer Suite. To project. Save all the files for that project inside
keep files organized, you may find it helpful to create this folder, including plan files and referenced
a new folder for each project. external files. See “Saving, Exporting, and Back-
ing Up Files” on page 34.
Home Designer Suite files may use imported images,
textures and other custom content saved in their own Bear in mind, though, that path names exceeding 260
external data files. Consider storing copies of all characters cannot be opened by Home Designer
external files in the same folder as the plan files that Suite. As a result, it is a good idea to limit the
use them so that they are easily found. number of embedded folders you use in your file
organization method.
Here is one way to organize your files:
• Create a folder in your Documents directory Once you understand the file management of Home
called “Home Designer Suite Plans” or another Designer Suite, you can decide on a naming
name you prefer. See your operating system’s convention that suits your needs.
Help to learn how to create folders.
Home Designer Suite Data

When Home Designer Suite 2021 is installed, the • Scripts - A folder for custom Ruby scripts associ-
program automatically creates a folder in the user ated with Chief Architect plans.
Documents directory called Home Designer Suite • Templates - A folder of plan template files. See
2021 Data. This folder contains important user- “Creating a New Plan” on page 33.
specific information saved in the following folders
and files and should not be moved, renamed or • Textures - A folder where you can save image
deleted: files used to create custom material textures. See
“Creating Materials” on page 299.
• Archives - A folder of automatically archived
plan files. See “Auto Archive” on page 36. • Toolbars - A folder of toolbar files. See “Toolbar
Arrangement” on page 57.
• Backdrops - A folder of custom backdrop
images. See “3D Backdrops” on page 307. • _MigrateBackup - If you migrated legacy set-
tings into version 2021, additional folders with
• Images - A folder of custom images. See “Using names appended with _MigrateBackup may also
the Contextual Menu” on page 279. be present. See “Migrating Content and Settings”
• Database Libraries - A folder of user library on page 13.
data. See “Library Content” on page 276.
32
Creating a New Plan
When specifying a location for the Data folder, bear

If the Home Designer Suite 2021 Data folder these considerations in mind:
is renamed, moved or deleted, the program
will automatically replace it using default informa- • If you move the Home Designer Suite 2021 Data
tion from the Home Designer Suite installation folder on your computer without specifying its
folder. When this occurs, customized user set- location in Preferences, the program will automat-
tings and custom user library content will not be ically replace the folder in its default location
available. using default information from the Home
Designer Suite installation folder.
Data Folder Name and Location • The same will result if you specify a location on a
The name of the Home Designer Suite 2021 Data network or removable device and that location
folder cannot be changed, but you can specify its becomes inaccessible. For this reason, it is best to
use a location on your local hard drive.
location on your system in the Preferences
dialog. See “Folders Panel” on page 53. • The User Database Libraries in particular may
contain a large amount of data. Whatever location
If you specify a new location for this folder, the you choose to use must be located on a hard drive
program will not migrate any custom user settings with sufficient space to hold these files.
that you might have. Instead, it will automatically
create a new folder at that location containing default Because the Home Designer Suite 2021 Data
information from the Home Designer Suite contains custom user data, it is not deleted when the
installation folder. If you would like to copy custom program is uninstalled. See “Uninstalling Home
settings to the new location, you can do this yourself Designer Suite” on page 15 of the User’s Guide.
in an operating system window.
Creating a New Plan

To open the Create New Plan dialog, select Template Plans
File> New Plan.
When you select File> New Plan in Home
You can also choose New Plan in the Startup Designer Suite, the Create New Plan dialog
Options dialog. See “Startup Options” on page 17. opens, letting you select a template for your new
plan. The resulting new plan uses either metric or
U.S. units of measurement and predefined default
settings for objects like walls, doors, windows, and
cabinets. See “Default Settings” on page 47.
• Select either U.S. Units or Metric Units of mea- Measurement Units cannot be changed.
surement. Once a new plan has been created, its
33
• Select a style template from the list. If you are Select Template dialog will prompt you to specify a
uncertain as to the right style for your plan, template for the new file you are creating.
choose Default, as you cannot change the plan
style template once a plan has been created.
When you click OK, a new floor plan view window
opens, ready for you to begin drawing.
New, blank plans are called Untitled.plan. Unless
these files are named and saved, they will be lost
when closed.
When Home Designer Suite opens a new, blank plan
file, the new file is actually a copy of a template
using either metric or U.S. units of measurement and
predefined default settings. See “Creating a New • Select Load Installed Template (Recom-
Plan” on page 33. mended), then select a template file from the
drop-down list.
Select Template Dialog
• Select Load Custom Template, then click the
When a new, blank plan file is opened in Home Browse button and browse to a plan file saved on
Designer Suite, the new file is actually a copy of a your computer.
template using either metric or U.S. units of • You can also type or paste the full path name of a
measurement and predefined default settings. file in the text field.
Creating a new plan without referencing a template If you encounter this dialog, make sure that the
file is not recommended. If you try to create a new program Data folder is at a location that can be
plan using a template file that is not available, the accessed by the program. See “Home Designer Suite
Data” on page 32.
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files

Saving, exporting, and backing up your files are 2. Specify a location on your computer where you
three separate tasks that accomplish different things: would like to save the file. See “Organizing
• Saving a plan file retains your work so that it can Your Files” on page 32.
be later opened in Home Designer Suite. 3. In the File name text field, type a name for the
• Exporting a file allows you to save certain kinds file.
of data in a format that can be used by a program 4. Home Designer Suite automatically assigns the
other than Home Designer Suite. File of type and file extension .plan.
• Backing up your files involves taking steps to 5. When both the Save in location and File name
make sure that your valuable data is protected and are correct, click Save.
available when needed.
Whether you are saving, exporting, or backing up Although the program warns you if you try to
your data, it is important that you select a location on exit without saving, you should get in the
your computer for the files you create, and also habit of saving plan files before exiting the pro-
gram.
specify a short, meaningful name that you will be
able to identify in the future.
Saving Plan Files
To save an untitled plan file When you first save a new, untitled file,
you must select a location for it on your
1. Select File> Save to open the Save File dia- computer and give it a name. There are two options
log. for saving plan files: File> Save and File> Save As.
34
Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files
Both Save and Save As can be used to save Initially, all Open and Save As operations go
your plan files; however, they accomplish this in two to your Documents directory. After that, the location
different ways. last visited is remembered and subsequent Open
• File> Save saves the current state of your or Save As commands default to the directory
plan file without changing its name and should last used for that operation. This path is saved when
normally be used for saving your work. the program exits. The next time Home Designer
Suite is launched, these defaults are used.
• File> Save As opens the Save File dialog,
allowing you to save the plan file using a different
name or location on your computer.
Save File Dialog

The Save File dialog uses the operating system’s file A similar Select Folder dialog allows you to select a
save dialog format, and is also used when exporting folder to which files can be exported.
files. The dialog name may vary, depending on the
type of file being saved or exported.
1 Choose a location on your local computer for Saving Revision Files

the file you are saving.
Revisions are a common aspect of any design
Any existing folders and/or files in the current project. There are a number of possible strategies for
2
location display here. organizing revision files:
3 In the File Name field, type a name for the file. • Prepending the file name;
If you select an existing file from the space • Appending the file name;
above, its name will display here automatically.
• Saving revisions in separate folders.
4 When saving a file, the program will choose the To avoid confusion and potential mistakes, it is
appropriate file type from the Save as type
drop-down list. When exporting, you may need to recommended that you always give files unique
choose a specific file type. names - including revision files. If you choose to
organize your revisions by saving them in separate
folders, you should also give each file a unique name
35
that makes it impossible to confuse it with another Entire Plan tool. See “Backup Entire Plan” on
file saved in a different folder. page 40.
Exporting Files Backing Up Your Files

Home Designer Suite has a number of options for It is always a good idea to create backup copies of all
exporting and importing information out of and your your important files on your computer.
drawings. See “Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs”
on page 325. It is strongly recommended, however, that you never
save directly onto removable media such as a USB
Often, file export dialogs are simply versions of the thumb drive. Instead, copy your files to such
Save File dialog.
locations only after you have saved them on your
Similarly, file import dialogs are often similar to the computer’s hard drive and exited the program.
Open File dialog. See “Importing Files” on page 38.
Archive folders are used by Home Designer Suite to
manage prior versions of your files. You should not
Backup Entire Plan view these files as a substitute for your own backup
routine, and should never save a file in an archive
File> Save As is a simple way to transfer a plan folder. See “Auto Archive” on page 36.
to a different location on your computer. Bear in
mind, though, that plan files often reference external When backing up your Home Designer Suite files,
data files such as imported textures, images, and consider backing up not only your .plan files, but
backdrops. These external files are not affected when your custom user data, as well - including library
content, toolbar configurations, and textures. This
Save As is used.
custom data is all located in the Home Designer Suite
If you transfer a plan file from one computer to Data folder, so it can be easily backed up. See
another, the program will warn you of missing files if “Home Designer Suite Data” on page 32.
the external data files used by the plan cannot be
You can, if you wish, create a folder inside the Data
found when you open it.
folder for your .plan files, as well. See “Organizing
When transferring plans to another computer that Your Files” on page 32.
does not have these external files, use the Backup
Thumbnail Images
A thumbnail is a miniature image that helps identify 2. Create the 2D or 3D view that you want to use as
a file in the Open Plan File dialog in Windows. Any a thumbnail for the current file.
view of a plan can be saved as the thumbnail. 3. With the desired view active, select File> Save
The program automatically creates a thumbnail Thumbnail Image .
image when you first save a new plan. You can
choose to generate small or large thumbnails. Thumbnail images are saved in the plan file that they
are associated with.
To create a custom thumbnail image
1. You must save the file and give it a name before

you can save a thumbnail.
Auto Archive
The first time a plan is saved, Home Designer Suite created, a file must have been previously saved and
creates an Archive folder in the Home Designer Suite given a name and save location on your computer.
Data folder. The Archive folder contains Auto Save Further, Archive files are only updated when you
and Archive files. save your work.
The program does not create Auto Save and Archive Auto Save and Archive files should not be viewed as
files for untitled plans. In order for these to be a substitute for regularly saving your work by
36
Undo Files
selecting File> Save or pressing Ctrl + S on the changes are made to a file but not saved by selecting
keyboard, nor should they be considered an File> Save .
alternative to your own file backup routine.
These Auto Save files are appended
_auto_save.plan and are saved in the Archive folder.
Archive Files
When you close a file normally, its Auto Save file is
Every time a drawing is saved, Archive files that retained until the next time the file is opened - at
keep a historical archive of your plan are which time the Auto Save file is overwritten.
automatically created or updated.
If you do not save your work regularly, your

Auto Save file after normal shut-down
archive files will not be updated.
Auto save files created as a result of an improper
Plan files from previous versions of the program are program shutdown are appended
automatically moved to the archive folder when the _auto_save_bak.plan.
plan is opened and saved in Home Designer Suite.
Archive files are meant to be for emergency use only.
If you must access an archive file, open it as you Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down
would any other file. See “Creating a New Plan” on
If your computer shuts down accidentally, you can
page 33. As soon as the file is open, use Save As recover some of your work by opening the
to save this file to another location. _auto_save_bak file.
Legacy Archive Files

A file is auto saved only if you have saved it
Plan files saved in the current program version are previously. Auto Save does not work for
not backwards-compatible: that is, they cannot be unnamed files.
opened in older versions of the software.
When you reopen a file after a computer shut down
If you open a Home Designer plan file from a or system crash, the program will notify you if an
previous program version and immediately Save Auto Save file newer than the original file is found
and give you the option to one that file.
it (not Save As ), the Auto Archive utility will
create an additional archive file using the original Even with Auto Save, you should save your work
program version format. This archive file is a copy of manually on a regular basis using any of the
the original and can still be opened in the original following methods:
program version.
• Click the Save button.
Auto Save Files • Select File> Save .
As you work, Home Designer Suite automatically • Press Ctrl + S on the keyboard.
creates Auto Save files at regular intervals when
Undo Files
Home Designer Suite stores a set number of copies Undo files are stored in your operating system’s
of all open plan file changes, known as undo files. Temp directory. When Home Designer Suite is
Undo files are referenced whenever you select Edit> closed normally, any current Undo files are deleted.
Undo or Edit> Redo . See “Undo and Redo”
on page 100.
Opening and Importing Files

Opening and importing files are often similar tasks, but accomplish two very different things:
37
• Opening a file refers to opening it in the program Select File> Open Plan to open an existing
in which it was created. Only plan files can be .plan file located on your computer. Home
opened in Home Designer Suite. See “Compati- Designer Suite automatically browses to the
bility with Other Programs” on page 31. directory last used.
• Importing a file brings data that was created in a
different program into Home Designer Suite. A Before opening a file located on a remov-
number of different file types can be imported able storage device, server, or other com-
into Home Designer Suite. puter on a network, copy it to your local machine’s
hard drive first.
Open File Dialog

The Open File dialog uses the operating system’s file operating system and the type of file being opened or
open dialog format, and is also used when importing imported.
files. The dialog name may vary, depending on your
A similar Select Folder dialog allows you to select
an entire folder of files to import.
1 Choose the location on your local computer for Importing Files

the file you are opening.
Home Designer Suite has a number of options for
Any existing folders and/or files in the current exporting and importing information out of and into
2
location display here. your drawings. Often, file import dialogs are simply
versions of the Open File dialog. See “Pictures,
3 In the File Name field, type the file’s name. If Images, and Walkthroughs” on page 325.
you select the file in the space above, its name
will automatically display here. When importing Similarly, file export dialogs are often similar to the
some types of files, multiple files may be selected. Save File dialog. See “Exporting Files” on page 36.
4 When opening or importing a file, the program Recently Opened Files

will usually choose the appropriate file type
from the Save as type drop-down list. When A list of recently opened and saved plan files can be
importing, you may need to choose a specific file accessed by selecting File> Open Recent Files.
type. Select one of these files to open it without using the
Plan files open to the floor that was active when the Open File dialog.
file was last saved and closed.
38
Referenced Files
The names of recent files also display in the Startup

Options dialog. Click on the name of a file to open
it. See “Startup Options” on page 17.
Referenced Files
Home Designer Suite plan files often reference a Whenever any view in a plan is opened, the program
variety of external files for added detail, including: checks for referenced files used in that view and will
• Material Textures notify you if any of those files cannot be found by
opening the Missing Files dialog.
• Images
You can also open this dialog at any time by
• Plant Images
selecting Tools> Checks> Missing Files. When
• 3D Backdrops accessed this way, all missing files associated with
• Picture Files the current file are listed: not just those used in the
current view.
• PDF Files
Missing Files Dialog
1 The table lists any Missing Files as well as 2 The buttons on the right offer options for
useful information about each: resolving a selected missing file. The names of
• Missing File reports the name and file extension these buttons will vary somewhat, depending on the
of the missing file. type of file(s) selected in the list on the left.
• File Usage indicates how the missing file is used • Click the top Replace Object button to replace
in the program. any instances of an object or material referencing
the selected missing file with a different object or
• Object Name states the name of the object in material from the library. Not available for PDF
Home Designer Suite that references the file. files or picture files.
• Object Location indicates where in the file the • Click the Replace File button to open the Browse
object can be found. for Missing File dialog and select a file saved on
• The next column indicates whether a missing tex- your system to replace the missing one. See
ture is in use in the plan. “Opening and Importing Files” on page 37.
• File Path states the last known location of the • Click the Delete Object button to remove the
missing file on your computer system. object or material referencing the missing file
from the plan. Not available for material textures
Click on a line item in the table to select it and
that are In Use.
resolve it using the options on the right. Multiple line
items can be selected; however, the selections on the • Click the Add Search Directory button to direct
right may be limited. See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on the program to a particular folder to search for
page 81. missing files in. The list of Search folders can be
39
reset in the Preferences dialog. See “Reset files again during this session at the bottom of the
Options Panel” on page 55. dialog. This option is not available when the dialog is
opened manually.
You can prevent this dialog from opening
automatically by checking Do not display missing
Backup Entire Plan

Because Home Designer Suite plans contain nally referenced files such as inserted picture
many references to external files such as files, metafiles, and texture, image, and back-
material textures and images, it is a good idea to drop graphics files.
make copies all the associated files when a plan is • Choose Backup Plan Files Only to copy any
moved to a new location. You can easily do this by externally linked files and inserted picture
selecting File> Backup Entire Plan. files, but no graphics or texture files. This is
Backing up an entire plan is important when: best used only when transferring a file to a
computer that already has the graphics files
• Migrating legacy files created in older program installed.
versions.
• Check Send Backup Files to Zip Archive to
• Transferring files to another computer or sending save the files in a zipped folder instead of a
them to another user. regular folder.
• Archiving or backing up your work. • Click OK.
3. The Select the Plan Backup Folder or Choose
To back up a plan Zip Archive to Backup dialog opens next. This
1. To copy all associated plan files to a new direc- is a typical Save File dialog. See “Saving,
Exporting, and Backing Up Files” on page 34.
tory, select File> Backup Entire Plan .
• Navigate to a folder on your system and select
2. The Backup Entire Plan dialog opens. it.
• With the destination folder for the backup
selected, click OK.
4. If the destination folder already contains files,
the program will confirm whether you want to
overwrite them.
The resulting folder contains a copy of the plan or
• Choose Backup Plan Files and All Refer- layout file and all referenced files, and can be moved
enced Files to copy the plan file and all exter- to a new computer
Exiting Home Designer Suite

Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you have not On a Mac, if you click the program window’s red
saved any open files, you will be reminded to do so. Close button, the window will close but the program
It is better to save your work before exiting than to itself will continue to run. To close it down
save on exit. See “Closing Views and Files” on page completely, right-click on its icon on the Dock and
65. select Quit from the contextual menu.
When you exit from the program using File> Exit,
all Autosave files and Undo files are automatically
deleted.
40
Chapter 3:
Project Planning
The tools described in this chapter allow you to Chapter Contents

conduct preliminary budget and space planning, and • Space Planning
to run checks on plans so you can be more confident • Room Box Specification Dialog
that they are free of common drawing errors. • Plan Check
• Loan Calculator
Space Planning
The Space Planning Tools are a time-saving Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor plan.
way to create a preliminary room-by-room
design of a home without getting caught up in the
Note: Each Bedroom called for in the Space Plan-
details. When the room boxes are laid out, the Build ning Assistant also produces a Closet.
House tool converts them into a working plan that
can be edited and detailed to completion. Placing Room Boxes
Space Planning Assistant In addition to or as an alternative to the room boxes
created for you by the Space Planning Assistant,
In plan view, select Tools> Space Planning> you can create your own room boxes. In plan view,
Space Planning. The Space Planning
Assistant gathers information about the rooms you select Tools> Space Planning , choose the
want to include in your house. When you click desired room type from the submenu, then click to
Finish, the selected room boxes display. place a room box of that type.
Displaying Room Boxes

Room boxes and their labels are located on the
“Space Planning Boxes” layer. Space Planning Box
labels use the Text Style assigned to that layer, as
well. See “Displaying Objects” on page 73.
Editing Room Boxes

Once created, room boxes can be edited in a variety
of ways.
41
• Select room boxes using the Select Objects • Rooms can be copied and pasted using the Copy/
tool just like other objects in Home Designer Paste edit button and deleted using the
Suite. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79. Delete edit button.
• Room boxes can be resized, rotated, and rear-
ranged. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on • Select Tools> Space Planning to access the
page 89. room box tools and place additional room boxes
in your plan. Select a tool and click in the plan to
• Try to line up the rooms so that they are just
place a room box of that type.
touching. Excessive overlaps may cause your
rooms to form incorrectly. Closets are the excep- • Select Tools> Space Planning> Toggle Room
tion. You can overlap a room with a closet, or Boxes to hide or show the room boxes.
place in inside another room box.
Build House
When the room boxes are in place, select walls and railings. Doors are inserted between the
Tools> Space Planning> Build House to rooms, as well.
convert them into a building composed of
When you Build House, the “Space Planning Boxes” 1. Edit and arrange the room boxes on Floor 1 as
layer is automatically turned off. The room boxes desired.
that you created are not deleted, however. 2. Select Tools> Space Planning> Build House
Multiple Floors tool to create the walls on the first floor.
If you specified a two-story house in the Space

Planning Assistant:
42
Room Box Specification Dialog
3. Go Up One Floor and notice that the posi- 5. On the second floor, select Tools> Space Plan-
tions of the walls on Floor 1 display in red as a ning> Build House to complete the second
reference. floor.
4. Arrange the rooms on Floor 2 as desired using
the red polylines as a guide.
Room Box Specification Dialog

Select one or more room boxes and click the
Open Object edit button to open the Room
Box Specification dialog.
General Panel
Most of the settings on the GENERAL panel are used
when the selected room box is converted to a room
using the Build House tool.
1 Specify the selected room box’s Room Type does not affect the shape of the room created
and Name. using Build House .
• Specify a Room Name for the selected room
box. When the default is specified, the Function Line Style Panel
selected below is used as the name.
The LINE STYLE panel is available for a variety of
• Select a Function from the drop-down list. See other objects in the program. For more information,
“Room Types” on page 132. see “Line Style Panel” on page 103.
2 Specify the Size of the selected room box.
•Specify the room box’s Width and Height. Fill Style Panel
• Specify the Fillet Radius, which is the radius of The FILL STYLE panel is available for a variety of
the curve on each of the room box’s corners. other objects in the program. See “Fill Style Panel”
Unlike the other settings on this panel, this value on page 76.
Plan Check
Plan Check examines the current floor of a
plan, checking for anything that appears to Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in
violate common building practices. Plan Check may Home Designer Suite does not claim to
not find all the problems in a plan, but does it point detect all building code and design requirements.
It merely compares your plan with common build-
out areas that may need improvement. ing practices.
43
To run Plan Check, select Tools> Plan Check . • Click Previous to return to the previous error.
• Click Hold to suspend Plan Check so you can fix
Potential plan errors found are usually highlighted in
the current error. Select Tools> Checks> Plan
plan view. To ensure the highlighted item is on-
Check again and the check starts where it left off.
screen, make sure the entire plan is shown in the
• Click Done to terminate Plan Check.
window before you run Plan Check .
If this dialog obscures the plan view, drag its title bar
to move it. It remembers its new position and
Plan Check Dialog
displays there the next time Plan Check is run.
Room Types
Plan Check can do a much better job of
checking for problems if it knows what the rooms in
your plan are to be used for, so you should assign a
Room Type to each room in your plan. See “Room
Types” on page 132.
The current error number, along with the total The first time Plan Check runs in a plan, it
number of errors found, is stated at the top of the automatically assigns a room type to as many
dialog. undesignated rooms as it can. Some rooms are
determined by their size and shape, and others by
A description of the current error displays in the field
their contents. For example, a shelf in a small room
on the left.
indicates a closet; a stove or refrigerator indicates a
Options for navigating Plan Check are found on the kitchen; or a bed, a bedroom. If the program cannot
right side. assign a room type, Plan Check highlights it and
• Click Next to ignore the current error and pro- suggests that you do so manually.
ceed to the next.
Loan Calculator
Select Tools> Loan Calculator to open the
Loan Calculator dialog. This dialog lets you
calculate different aspects of a loan for the current
plan based on a variety of parameters.
1 Specify what aspect of the loan you would like

to calculate from the Calculate drop-down list:
44
Loan Calculator
• Monthly Payment
4 The Optional Fields allow you to include
• Loan Amount additional information in your loan calculation.
• Term • Specify the expected Property Taxes per year.
• Interest Rate • Specify the expected Homeowner’s Insurance

cost per year.
2 The calculation Result, based on the • Specify the expected Private Mortgage Insur-
information you provide, displays here.
ance (PMI) cost per year.
If you make changes to any of the fields in the • Specify the cost of any expected Other Fees.
dialog, click the = button to refresh the Result.
When Monthly Payment is calculated, each Optional
3 The Required Fields are the same as the value is divided by twelve (months) and then added
options in the Calculate drop-down list. The to the total payment.
option selected under Calculate will be inactive
under Required Fields. When a Calculate option other than Monthly
Payment is selected, these values are divided by
• Specify the desired Loan Amount.
twelve (months) and then subtracted from the
• Specify the desired Term, in years. specified Monthly Payment value. The result, which
• Specify the desired Interest Rate. does not display, is then used to determine the Loan
Amount, Term or Interest Rate.
• Specify the desired Monthly Payment.
45
46
Chapter 4:
Preferences and
Default Settings
Preferences are global settings that affect the Chapter Contents

functionality and appearance of the Home Designer • Default Settings vs Preferences
Suite environment, while default settings control • Dynamic Defaults
what objects look like when they are initially created. • Reset to Defaults
You can save time by becoming familiar with these • General Plan Defaults Dialog
settings and customizing them before you begin a • Preferences Dialog
new drawing. • Angle Style Dialog
Default Settings vs Preferences

Default and preference settings have important You can access a complete list of the various default
effects on how the tools in Home Designer Suite settings in the current plan file by selecting Edit>
function. Default settings are file specific, while Default Settings from the menu.
Preferences are global, taking effect regardless of
what file is open.
Defaults and Preferences can be customized to suit
your needs, so it is recommended that you become
familiar with them and learn how you can use them
to your advantage.
Default Settings
Default settings determine the initial
characteristics of objects when they are first
drawn. For example, when you place a base cabinet
in a plan, its size, materials, front items, and
hardware are determined by settings in the Base
Cabinet Defaults dialog.
Defaults are file-specific, which means that any

changes that you make to the default settings in one
plan file will have no effect on other plans.
47
Preferences
Preference settings influence the overall
environment of the program, such as what the
interface looks like and how the tools are accessed.
See “Preferences Dialog” on page 50.
Unlike default settings, Preferences are global, which
means that any changes that you make to them will
take effect in all plan files.
To access the Preferences dialog, select Edit>
Preferences from the menu.
• Click the + beside a category to expand it and

access the defaults for items related to that cate-
gory.
• To open the defaults dialog associated with an
item in the list, double-click on the line item, or
click on the item and then click the Edit button.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be changed Dynamic default text fields have an Active Defaults
globally throughout the current plan file. They are icon in the value field.
available for a variety of objects, including
dimension lines, walls, doors, cabinets and rooms.
• If you change a dynamic default value in a
defaults dialog, all objects of that type that are set
to use the default will update automatically to use
the new value. • Click on the Active Defaults icon to remove
• Any objects of that type that are not using the the red check mark and prevent the value from
default value because of editing will not be being dynamic.
affected if you change the default. • Type a value into the text field. The red check
Dynamic defaults are presented in several different mark is removed from the Active Defaults icon
ways in specification dialogs. Some settings have a and the setting is no longer dynamic.
Use Default radio button, or a “Use Default” option • Click on the Defaults icon to restore the red
in a drop-down list. check mark and make the setting dynamic again.
Dynamic default check boxes have a Default Materials are another example of an attribute that
checkbox. Uncheck this box to make the setting not uses Dynamic Defaults. See “Material Defaults” on
dynamic, or check it again to restore the dynamic page 294.
behavior.
48
Reset to Defaults
Reset to Defaults
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the Reset to
1 The settings can be cleared for the current
Defaults dialog. floor or for All Floors.
This dialog allows you to reset critical structural
2 Specify which settings you want to reset to
settings in the current plan to the default values. Default.
• Check Floor and Ceiling Heights to reset the
default values as specified in the Floor Defaults
dialog. Floor and ceiling heights for any room can
be changed in the Room Specification dialog.
See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 227.
• When Roof Directives are reset, all items on the
ROOF panel of the Wall Specification dialog are
reset to the default. See “Roof Directives in
Walls” on page 256.
General Plan Defaults Dialog

The settings in the General Plan Defaults dialog can be set differently in individual plan files. To open
control basic features of the Home Designer Suite this dialog, select Edit> Default Settings , select
environment in plan files. Just as with other default Plan, and click the Edit button.
settings, they are file specific, which means that they
1 General Settings - Specify the default positioned against an intersecting interior wall.
functionality for a variety of general behaviors Clear this box retain sufficient space for the open-
in the program. ing’s specified interior trim width.
• Casing is the trim that surrounds a door or win- • The Arrow Key Scroll Distance setting deter-
dow. When you resize a door or window, its sides mines how far to scroll in plan view when you
are kept away from intersecting walls by the press an arrow key. The initial default is 12 inches
width of the casing. Check Ignore Casing for (300 mm). See “Using the Arrow Keys” on page
Opening Resize to allow wall openings to be 64.
49
2 The Snap Grid allows you to snap objects to • Check Display as Dots to display the Reference
specific points on-screen as they are moved or Grid using dots rather than lines.
resized. See “Grid Snaps” on page 68.
• Check Use Snap Grid/Units to enable Grid 4 Specify how the Living Area label is
calculated and whether it displays in plan view.
Snaps. See “Living Area” on page 137.
• Specify the Snap Unit you wish to use. The ini- • Select Main Layer to have the Living Area cal-
tial default is 1 inch (10 mm). culation measure from the walls’ Main Layer.
3 Specify the display of the Reference Grid. • Select Surface to have the Living Area calcula-
•Check Show Reference Grid to display the tion measure from the walls’ exterior surface.
Reference Grid, the virtual graph paper used to • Uncheck Show “Living Area” to disable the dis-
create a sense of scale in plan view. play of the Living Area label.
• Specify the Reference Grid Size.
Preferences Dialog
The settings in the Preferences dialog are subcategories. Click the arrow to make the
global: they apply to all plan files and are subcategories visible or to hide them.
preserved between sessions. To access this dialog,
Preferences dialog panels:
select Edit> Preferences in Windows® or Chief • Appearance Panel
Architect> Preferences in macOS™. Unlike most • Colors Panel
dialogs in the program, it is not necessary to have a • Library Browser Panel
plan file open to access the Preferences dialog. • General Panel
• Folders Panel
The Preferences dialog’s list of panels is organized
• Edit Panel
in a tree structure with categories and subcategories.
• Render Panel
A white arrow next to a category indicates that it has
• Video Card Status Panel
• Reset Options Panel
Appearance Panel
1 Check Contextual Menus to activate • Check Click Twice to Display to require two
contextual menus that display when you right- right-clicks on an object before the contextual
click. See “Contextual Menus” on page 23. menu displays. This allows the first right-click to
be used for object selection. See “Selecting
Objects” on page 79.
50
Preferences Dialog
will increase in size when high DPI is used. Not

In 3D views, the two clicks must be on the same available in the Mac version of the software.
object surface in order for the contextual menu to • Specify the desired toolbar Button Size, in pixels.
display: Clicking on two different surfaces of the Increasing this value will proportionally resize the
same object is treated like two single-clicks. text in the drop-down toolbars, as well. See
“Toolbar Button Size” on page 58.
2 Specify how Toolbars present child tools when
a parent button is clicked.
3 Uncheck Side Window Drag Docking to
• Choose Parent-Child to display child tools as prevent undocked side windows from docking
buttons at the end of the toolbar where the parent when moved using the mouse. A side window can
button resides. still be docked to its last docked location by double-
• Choose Drop Down to display child tools when clicking its title bar. See “View and Side Windows”
the drop-down arrow to the right of the parent on page 22.
button is clicked. • Top/Bottom Docking - Check the box beside a
• Uncheck Scale Toolbar Icons for High DPI to side window’s name to allow it to dock on the top
prevent toolbar icons from becoming larger on and bottom edges of the program window. Does
systems running Windows 7 or 8 and using high not affect docking to the left and right sides.
DPI resolution. When checked, toolbar buttons
Colors Panel
Specify the View Colors for a variety of different • Specify the Selection Fill color, which is the fill
elements in the software’s interface by clicking a color for selected objects. Note that depending on
color bar to open the Select Color dialog. See the fill assigned to a selected object, its Selection
“Select Color Dialog” on page 77. Fill color may vary.
• Specify the Background Color for plan view.
The background colors for 3D views can be set in Note: If the Selection Line and Handle Fill Colors
their defaults and specification dialogs. See “3D are similar, it may be difficult to distinguish
Backdrop Panel” on page 317. between active and inactive CAD Points.
• Specify the Selection Line color, which is the

In the Mac version of the software, specify the
color of the lines that represent object(s) and their
Interface Colors that you want to use in Home
edit handles when they are selected.
Designer Suite by selecting an option from the drop-
• Specify the Handle Fill color, which is the fill down list:
color of the edit handles for selected objects.
• Select “System” to use your operating system’s
• Specify the Selected Edge Handle Fill color, color settings.
which is the fill color of the edit handle on a
• Select “Force Light” to use Light Mode in Home
selected object’s Selected Edge. See “Selected
Designer Suite regardless of the system settings,
Edge” on page 80.
or “Force Dark” to use Dark Mode in Home
Designer Suite regardless of the system settings.
51
Library Browser Panel

The LIBRARY BROWSER panel controls the
appearance of the Library Browser window. See
“The Library Browser” on page 271.
1 The View options control the display of the Standard Rendering Technique or in a line-based
main sections of the Library Browser. Vector View. See “Rendering Techniques” on page
• Check Hide Selection Pane to hide the pane that 323.
displays objects in a selected catalog or folder. To restore the original size and position of the
• Check Hide Preview Pane to hide the pane that Library Browser and other side windows, click the
shows a preview of a selected object. Restore Side Windows button on the Reset Options
Panel.
2 Specify whether selected library items in the
Preview Pane are displayed using the
General Panel
1 When Show Options at Startup is checked, When unchecked, dialogs always open to the first
the Startup Options dialog opens when Home panel. See “Dialogs” on page 24.
Designer Suite is launched. See “Startup Options” on
page 17. 3 Troubleshooting in the Mac version only -
•When Mouse Movement Optimizations is
2 Specify when the program should Save Dialog checked, zooming using the mouse scroll wheel is
Size and Position: Always, Per Session, or optimized for Mac systems. This box is checked
Never. See “Dialog Size and Position” on page 25. by default and should only be unchecked when
• Check Open Dialogs to the Last Panel Visited troubleshooting issues with the mouse scroll
to open paneled dialogs to the last panel that you wheel in the Mac version of the software only.
accessed during the current program session.
52
Preferences Dialog
File Management Panel

The settings on the FILE MANAGEMENT panel let you
modify functions related to the program’s plan and
layout file management.
Click the Associate Files With This Program active if plan and library files are already associated
button to direct your computer’s operating system to with this program and version. See “File
associate all .plan, .calib, and .calibz files with Association” on page 31.
Home Designer Suite 2021. This button will not be
Folders Panel
• Important user-specific information is stored in Folder. This folder is created in the directory
the Home Designer Suite 2021 Data folder, intended for shared application data in your oper-
which is located in your Documents directory by ating system (C:\ProgramData in Windows;/
default. See “Home Designer Suite Data” on page Library/Application Support in macOS). If you
32. specify a new location, the program will automat-
If you specify a new location, any custom tool- ically copy your library content to that location.
bars or other settings that you may have will not See “Library Content” on page 276.
be copied to the new location: you can do this
yourself if you wish.
If you choose to use a different folder, you
must specify a directory on a hard drive with
Make sure that the location you specify is sufficient space to hold these files.
accessible and has adequate space for the
files in this folder. See “Data Folder Name and • All Program Paths - Click the Show button to
Location” on page 33. open the Program Paths dialog, where you can
find the location of files that may be needed for
• All library content aside from your User Catalog troubleshooting purposes. See “Program Paths
is stored in the System Library Database Dialog” on page 393.
53
Edit Panel
You can use a cursor with Crosshairs and control its keep up with your mouse movements, try
appearance. See “Crosshairs” on page 21. unchecking this option.
• Check Enable in Plan and Elevation Views to • Click the Color bar to open the Select Color dia-
use a cursor with crosshairs in plan and elevation log and specify the color of the crosshairs.
views. This option is checked by default. • Crosshair Size is specified as a percentage of the
• When Synchronize with Cursor is checked, the view Window Width. Specify the Size as 100%
mouse pointer and crosshairs always move to extend the crosshairs across the entire screen.
together on screen. If you feel that they do not
Render Panel
The settings on the RENDER panel control how 3D
views are generated and navigated.
1 Hardware Edge Smoothing uses the video • Select Navigate about Camera Focal Point to
card to reduce the jagged appearance of angled center mouse movement about the location of the
surface edges, producing cleaner lines. The higher camera’s focal point. See “To create a camera
the smoothing effect, the longer the rendering time. view” on page 305.
See “Edge Smoothing” on page 320.
3 The Troubleshooting settings can be used to
3Dconnexion® troubleshoot performance in 3D views.
2 The 3D Mouse and Gamepad
settings affect how 3D mice and gamepads • Uncheck Use Enhanced Lighting to disable most
function in Perspective 3D views. See lighting effects in Rendering Techniques that sup-
“3Dconnexion® 3D Mice” on page 308. port lighting. This box is checked by default and
• Select Navigate about Camera to center mouse should only be unchecked for troubleshooting
movement about the location of the camera. purposes. It may become unchecked automati-
cally if the program detects a problem with your
54
Angle Style Dialog
video card. See “OpenGL and Hardware” on page ory is required when a 3D view is generated. Tex-
303. ture Compression takes time, however, so view
• When Texture Compression is checked, material generation will typically be slower.
textures are compressed so that less video mem-
Video Card Status Panel

The VIDEO CARD STATUS panel displays information supported. See “OpenGL and Hardware” on page
about your video card, including the vendor and 303.
whether the minimum required OpenGL version is
This information may be important if you are having
problems generating 3D views.
Reset Options Panel

In order for some of the Reset Options to take effect,
you will need to restart Home Designer Suite.
• If message boxes have been suppressed, you can • Home Designer Suite retains a list of locations
make them display again by clicking Reset Mes- where you have located missing files in the past.
sage Boxes. See “Message Boxes” on page 26. If you find that the program takes a long time
• Click the Reset Dialog Sizes button to restore all searching before informing you that files are
dialog boxes to their original sizes and positions. missing, you can click the Reset Search Folders
See “Dialogs” on page 24. button to clear this list. See “Referenced Files” on
page 39.
• Click the Reset Toolbars button to reset all tool-
bars to their original states. If you are encounter- • Click the Reset Migration button to be prompted
ing warning messages regarding toolbars, this to migrate your content and settings from an older
option may resolve the issue. See “Toolbars and program version the next time you launch the
Hotkeys” on page 57. software. See “Migrating Content and Settings”
on page 13.
• Click the Reset Side Windows button to restore
all side windows to their original sizes and posi- • Click the Reset Preferences button to restore all
preferences to those originally installed with the
tions. Tool Palette Settings are also reset, as program.
are the panes in the Library Browser. See “Side
Windows” on page 22.
Angle Style Dialog

At the bottom of the Terrain Specification dialog, Angle Style dialog. See “Terrain Specification
you can click the Angle Style button to open the Dialog” on page 357.
55
The selection in this dialog is global, affecting all Angles can be displayed using one of five methods:
plans during the current program session, and • Degrees/Minutes/Seconds - Measured counter-
controls the format of angles in dialog boxes as well clockwise from a line drawn horizontally to the
as in the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on page right of the angle’s vertex. Useful for most draw-
26. ing tasks. Select the level of accuracy that you
Although this setting controls the format of values require.
used in dialogs, it does not limit how you can enter • Bearings - Measured from a vertical line repre-
these values. For example, if you set your Number senting North/ South, Quadrant Bearings use
Style to use Inches, values will display using directional bearings in their measurements. Use-
fractional inches. You can, however, enter values ful for site drawings.
using decimal inches, inches and feet, or even
• Pitch - Defined as a ratio of vertical rise to hori-
decimal feet. When the dialog you’re typing in
zontal run. In Imperial units, the run is always
updates, the value will be converted to fractional
12”; in metric units it is 1000 mm.
inches.
56
Chapter 5:
Toolbars and Hotkeys
Two of the most efficient ways to access Home Chapter Contents

Designer Suite’s tools and settings are the toolbars • Toolbar Arrangement
and keyboard shortcuts, also referred to as hotkeys. • Hotkeys
• Gamepad Settings Dialog
Toolbar Arrangement
Home Designer Suite’s toolbars provide fast access the arrow to the right of the Window button to
to the program’s most commonly used tools and display a drop-down list of the other Window Tools.
settings, and are organized so that related tools are
grouped together and easy to find.
If a tool or setting is active, a small check

mark will display at the lower right corner of
its button icon.
The toolbars that display in a given view depend on

the view type. For example, the toolbars that are
available in floor plan and 3D views are not available
in Materials Lists.
Some toolbars are available in more than one type of The most recently selected tool displays in the
view. If a tool cannot be used in that view, its icon toolbar.
will appear pale grey in color.
Child Tool Palette
Many of Home Designer Suite’s tools are organized
into families of related tools which can be accessed An alternative to Drop-Down toolbars is the Parent
using either of two styles of toolbar interface: the button and Child Tool Palette interface. Parent
Child Tool Palette or Drop Down tools. You can toolbar buttons have a blue triangle in the lower right
select the interface that you prefer in the corner. When you select a Parent button, its Child
Preferences dialog. See “Appearance Panel” on tools display in the Child Tool Palette. If the Child
page 50. Tool Palette has been closed, it will open.
By default, the Child Tool Palette is docked on the
Drop-Down Tools left side of the program window; but it can be
Click on the arrow to the right of a button to display undocked and moved, as well as resized and closed,
a drop-down list of related tools. For example, click
57
just like other side windows. See “Side Windows” on object. Which buttons display depends on the type of
page 22. object selected, the current view, and how you
selected the object.
As long as it is open, the Child Tool Palette will also
display the members of a selected tool’s family when
the Drop Down interface is active. If you select a tool
that does not belong to a family, the previously Toolbar Button Size
selected tool’s family will continue to display in the
Tool Palette. By default, toolbar buttons are sized at 20 pixels,
which works well on most computer monitors
When you click the Window Tools Parent running default system settings. If you wish, you can
button, for example, its Child buttons display in the increase or decrease this size in the Preferences
Child Tool Palette. dialog. See “Appearance Panel” on page 50.
Toggling Toolbars
There are several ways to toggle individual toolbars
on or off:.
• Right-click in an empty space on any toolbar and
mouse over Toolbars in the contextual menu. In
the submenu, toolbars with a check mark next to
their name are on in the current view. Click on a
toolbar name to turn it off if it is on, or vice versa.
Click the Settings button at the bottom of the
palette to select how the tools within it are presented: • If a toolbar is undocked, click the Close button at
its top right corner.
• Select Fit Palette to resize the palette so that
it is one row wide. You can turn off the display of toolbars entirely or
turn them on again by selecting View> Toolbars .
• Select Grid View to display only the button
icons of the child tools in a grid that may have
Moving Toolbars
multiple rows, depending on the width of the pal-
ette side window. You can move any toolbar to a different location by
clicking and dragging its dotted grab bar. Toolbars
• Select List View to display child tools in a can be docked to any side of the program window, or
vertical list with each tool’s button icon and name they can be undocked and left floating.
in a row.
Undocked toolbars can be moved outside of the
You can open the Tool Palette at any time, even when program window, and they can be closed completely.
Drop Down tools are enabled, by selecting View> They can also be reshaped; however, they cannot be
Tool Palette. See “View Tools” on page 63. resized in such a manner that any buttons become
hidden.
The Edit Toolbar
The location of moved toolbars is not saved between
When you select an object, its edit toolbar opens. By program sessions. The next time you use Home
default, it is located at the bottom of the program Designer Suite, the toolbars will be back in their
window, just above the Status Bar. The buttons on original locations.
the edit toolbar can be used to edit the selected
Hotkeys
Many Home Designer Suite tools have a keyboard hotkey exists, it will display to the right of the tool’s
shortcut, or hotkey, associated with them. If such a name in the menu.
58
Gamepad Settings Dialog
Note: If a key or key combination is in use as a

system hotkey, it cannot be used as a program
hotkey.
Edit menu items with button icons

to the left and hotkeys to the right
Create Hotkey List
A list of the hotkeys available to the current program
To use a hotkey, simply press the appropriate key or
user can be saved in .html or .xhtml format.
combination of keys on your keyboard instead of
selecting the menu item or clicking the toolbar Select Tools> Create Hotkey List to open the Save
button. For example, press the Ctrl and Z keys at the Hotkey List File dialog, a standard Save dialog, and
same time to perform an Undo . create a hotkey list that can then be opened in a web
browser window and printed, if you wish.
Gamepad Settings Dialog

The Gamepad Settings dialog allows you to You can also specify whether navigation is centered
specify thumbstick behavior in Home about the location of the camera or its focal point in
Designer Suite. Select Tools> Customize Gamepad the Preferences dialog. See “Render Panel” on page
to open this dialog. 54.
1 Check Enable Gamepad to allow Home the camera height in 3D. Uncheck this to main-
Designer Suite to recognize a gamepad on your tain a consistent camera height instead.
system and enable the other settings in this dialog. • Use the slider bar or text field to specify the 2D
Sensitivity, which controls how quickly the view
2 Speed - When Linear Acceleration is pans in plan and elevation views.
checked, camera acceleration is always directly
proportional to the amount the thumbstick is pushed. • Use the slider bar or text field to specify the 3D
When unchecked, acceleration is increased on a Sensitivity, which controls how quickly the cam-
curve, allowing more precision on the low end, and era moves in 3D views.
more speed on the high end.
4 Specify the behavior of the Right Thumbstick
3 Specify the behavior of the Left Thumbstick in 2D and 3D views.
in 2D and 3D views.
• When Invert X-Axis in 3D is unchecked, push-
• When Change Camera Height When Moving ing the right thumbstick to the left rotates the
in 3D, the left thumbstick can be used to change camera to the left. When checked, pushing this
59
thumbstick to the left rotates the camera to the • Use the slider bar or text field to specify the 3D
right. Sensitivity, which controls how quickly the cam-
• When Invert Y-Axis in 3D is unchecked, push- era rotates in 3D views.
ing the right thumbstick to the up rotates the cam-
era upward. When checked, pushing the 5 Click the Reset Thumbsticks button to restore
the default Left and Right Thumbsticks settings
thumbstick up rotates the camera downward. on this panel.
• Use the slider bar or text field to specify the 2D
Sensitivity, which controls how quickly the view
zooms in plan and elevation views.
60
Chapter 6:
Window and View Tools
The View and Window Tools let you control how Chapter Contents
views of your drawing are shown on screen, as well • View Windows
as toggle useful drawing aides on and off. • Working in Multiple Views
By default, Home Designer Suite uses a tabbed • View Tools
document interface. The name of the file and the type • Zoom Tools
of view displays at the top of each view window in • Undo Zoom
its title bar. • Fill Window
• Panning the Display
• Closing Views and Files
View Windows
In Home Designer Suite, there are two different types level, view extents, and Color toggle setting that
of views: plan views and 3D views. Each view were in use in the active plan view the last time the
displays in a view window and can show the model plan was saved will all be used.
from a different perspective. While multiple views
You can create additional plan views for use during
can be open and display on screen, only one view
the current program session: select Tools> New Plan
window can be active at any given time. See “3D
Views” on page 303 and “Working in Multiple View . Each plan view that you create can show a
Views” on page 61. different floor and have different view extents and
Color setting.
Plan Views
Closing View Windows
Plan view is where most drawing and editing is done,
and when you open a new plan file, a plan view is There are a number of ways to close view windows.
active. When an existing plan file is opened, the floor See “Closing Views and Files” on page 65.
Working in Multiple Views

There is no limit to the number of plan files that can By default, Home Designer Suite uses a tabbed
be open, nor is there a limit to the number of view document interface, which means that when more
windows that can be open. The name of the file and than one view window is open in the program
the type of view is stated at the top of each view window, each open window will have a tab that
window in its title bar as well as in its tab. displays in a row above the currently active view.
61
• Each tab states the name of the file, the view • Tabs can be reordered by clicking and dragging.
type, and the view’s name.
There is no limit to the number of 3D view windows
• Each tab features an icon indicating its type of that you can have open at a given time; bear in mind,
view. though, that each window demands use of your
• Click on a tab to make it the active view. computer’s resources and that you may see poor
performance if too many views are open. See “3D
• If there is not enough room in the program win-
Views” on page 303.
dow to display all tabs, left and right arrow but-
tons allow you to scroll through the tabs. There are several ways to close a view window. See
“Closing Views and Files” on page 65.
Tiling Views
As an alternative to tabbed views, results of changes in plan view in 3D or vice versa. It
windows can instead be tiled. Tiling can also be useful for copying objects from one plan
allows you to display multiple views in a single to another.
Home Designer Suite window so you can see the
Plan view and a camera view Tiled Vertically
There are several ways to create tiled views: you make in the active window are reflected in
• Click and drag a view window’s title bar or tab other views as well.
into the part of the drawing area that you would • To end window tiling, select Window> Tab
like it to be. When a highlighted space is created, Windows. You can also end tiling by double-
release the mouse button. clicking on the title bar of the program window.
• Select Window> Tile Horizontally to dis- Multiple Program Windows

play views in a horizontal orientation, one above
the other. To create a second program window, click and drag
the title bar or tab of a view window completely out
• Select Window> Tile Vertically or press of the current program window: for example, onto a
Shift + F6 on the keyboard to display views in a second monitor. A second Home Designer Suite
vertical, side by side, orientation. program window will be created with its own menu
Views are tiled left to right or top to bottom in the and toolbars.
order in which they were last active: the most recent
view is on the left or at the top, while least recent is Swapping Views
on the right or on the bottom. There are a number of ways to switch between open
• To activate a view, click on its title bar or any- view windows:
where in the view window. Note that any changes • Click on a view window’s tab.
62
View Tools
• Select Window> Select Next Tab or Win- • A list of all the views currently open is located at
the bottom of the Window menu. Each view is
dow> Select Previous Tab to cycle through identified by its name and what type of view it is.
all open views in the order you prefer. A check mark is beside the view that is currently
• In Windows, press the Ctrl + Tab (Next Window) active. Select one to go directly to that view.
or Ctrl + Shift + Tab (Previous Window) keys to If more than eight view windows are open, More
cycle through all open views. Windows will be the last item in the Window menu.
• On a Mac, press the Ctrl + } (Next Window) or Select this option to open the Select Window dialog:
Ctrl + Shift + { (Previous Window) keys to cycle
Select the name of a view in the list and click OK to
through all open views.
make it the active view.
View Tools
The View Tools allow you to open and close the Tool Palette opens and closes the Tool Palette,
program’s side windows, as well as toggle a variety which will display related tools. See “Child Tool
of references and drawing aides. Select the View Palette” on page 57.
menu to access these tools.
Scrollbars displays and suppresses scrollbars
Refresh Display redraws the current window on view windows. See “View Windows” on
to clean up extra lines, show missing items, page 22.
and correct random on-screen effects caused by
Color toggles the display of color in the
changes to the model. See “Refresh Display” on page
current view. See “Color On/Off” on page 76.
76.
Reference Grid toggles the display of the
Library Browser opens and closes the
Reference Grid in all views in the current plan
Library Browser side window. See “The
file. See “Grid Snaps” on page 68.
Library” on page 271.
Zoom Tools
Zoom is used to magnify any given area on Undo Zoom - Reverse the last zoom opera-
the plan or 3D view. Select Window> Zoom, tion.
then click and drag a marquee around an area on
Fill Window - Fits all visible items on screen.
screen. When you release the mouse, the selected
area expands to fill the screen. Fill Window Building Only - Fits all walls
and railings on the current floor on screen.
Note that in 3D views, using Zoom does not
reposition the camera. This can lead to Zooming With the Mouse Wheel
inconsistencies between a camera’s position and
what is actually shown in the view if other methods Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out in
of zooming are used later. See “Repositioning all view windows. Scrolling the mouse
Cameras” on page 308. wheel one click up or down zooms in or out,
centering on the location of your pointer and
When the zoom is complete, whatever tool was changing the zoom by about 10%.
active prior to selecting the Zoom tool
By default, zooming in 3D views changes the
automatically becomes active again. If another zoom
camera’s position. See “Mouse Scroll Wheel and
is needed, click the Zoom tool again. Trackpad” on page 308.
Zoom In - Click to zoom in towards the
screen center by a factor of two. Note: Depending on the configuration of your
mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the Ctrl
Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from the key while turning the mouse wheel.
screen center by a factor of two.
63
Undo Zoom
Select Window> Undo Zoom to reverse the Zoom and Undo Zoom are also available
last zoom operation. through the contextual menu. See “Contextual
Menus” on page 23.
Note: Undo and Redo do not affect zoom.
Fill Window
In plan view or an Elevation view, select Fill Window Building Only
Window> Fill Window or press the F6 key to
view nearly everything on screen that is visible, Window> Fill Window Building Only is
including the Reference Display. CAD Points are the similar to Fill Window, but zooms in or out to
only objects that are not included when Fill Window so that all walls, railings, and roof planes in the view
is used. fill the current window. These objects are included in
the extents of the view even if their layers are turned
If you are zoomed in so that only a portion of the off. Other objects are ignored.
drawing displays on screen, selecting Fill Window
zooms out so that the entire view fits on the In 3D Views
screen. If you are zoomed out so that the entire
drawing is smaller than the screen, selecting Fill In 3D views, Fill Window and Fill Window
Window zooms in until the drawing fills the Building Only adjust the camera’s Field of View
screen. is adjusted so that all surfaces in the 3D view are
included.
When the drawing sheet is shown, Fill Window
zooms to the sheet borders.
Panning the Display

There are four ways to pan the display without Using the Arrow Keys
changing the zoom factor.
In plan view, the arrow keys on the keyboard work
exactly like clicking the arrow buttons on the scroll
Using the Scroll Bars
bar. They shift the display according to the number
One method is to use the scroll bars on the right and of inches defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
bottom edges of the window.
Using the Mouse
Scroll Bars
If you have a wheel mouse, you can pan the display
by pressing the middle mouse button, or wheel, and
moving the mouse in the direction you would like to
pan. When the middle mouse button is held down,
the pointer changes to a hand icon.
• Drag the square button in the bar itself in order to In the Mac version of Home Designer Suite, you can
pan a larger distance. pan using the left mouse button and Option key.
• Click the end arrow keys on the scroll bars to Mouse drivers sometimes have other functions
shift the display in 12" increments. assigned to the wheel and buttons. These override the
• The 12" increment is defined in the Plan Home Designer Suite setting.
Defaults dialog under Inches Scrolled by Arrow
Key. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page
49.
64
Closing Views and Files
Using a Mac Trackpad Using the Pan Window Tool

In the Mac version of Home Designer Suite, you can The Pan Window tool works much like the
two finger drag to pan the display. See “Trackpads” mouse wheel method.
on page 20.
Select Window> Pan Window . The pointer
changes to a hand icon. Click and drag to pan the
window. The program reverts to the previously
active tool when you release the mouse button.
Closing Views and Files

If a view is still needed, you can swap to a different
view without closing it. If, however, a view is no
longer needed, it can be closed. There are several
ways to close a view window:
• Select File> Close View to close the active win-
dow.
• Press Ctrl + W or Ctrl + F4 on the keyboard to
close the active window.
• Click the Close button in the active view’s title
bar or in any view’s tab.
• A tabbed view can be closed by clicking on its tab
using the middle mouse button.
• Select File> Close All 3D Views to close all

currently open camera view windows instead of
just the active window.
• Select File> Close All Views to close all cur-
rently open view windows instead of just the
active window.
If a plan has only one view window open and you try
to close it, the program will prompt you to save
before closing if there are any unsaved changes. See
“Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up Files” on page
34.
Although the program warns you if you try to

exit without saving, you should get in the
habit of saving plan files before exiting.
Even if all view windows are closed, the program

can still be open. See “Exiting Home Designer Suite”
on page 40.
65
66
Chapter 7:
Creating Objects
There are a wide variety of objects in Home Designer 79.

Suite that you can use to create 3D models and plan
drawings. Although these objects are sometimes very Chapter Contents
different from one another, the methods used to • Architectural vs CAD Objects
create them are similar. • Snap Behaviors
Once an object is created, it can be selected and • Object Snaps
edited to meet the requirements of your project. The • Angle Snaps
editing characteristics common to most objects are • Grid Snaps
described elsewhere. See “Editing Objects” on page • Creating Objects
Architectural vs CAD Objects

There are two broad categories of objects in Home In contrast, architectural objects such as walls,
Designer Suite: architectural objects and CAD cabinets, doors, windows, and stairs display in 2D
objects. and 3D views.
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, text, and Some architectural objects, such as terrain features,
dimensions are 2D objects that can be created and have some behaviors in common with CAD objects
edited in plan view and but do not display in 3D and are referred to as CAD-based.
camera views and overviews. See “The CAD
Drawing Tools” on page 101.
Snap Behaviors
There are three categories of snap behavior in Home You can select Edit> Snap Settings to quickly turn
Designer Suite that affect how objects are created Object, Angle and Grid Snaps on or off.
and how they can be edited:
To temporarily disable Snap Behaviors and other
• Object Snaps , which snap CAD and archi- move restrictions, press the Ctrl key while dragging
tectural objects to other objects. an edit handle. See “Moving Objects” on page 92.
• Angle Snaps , which snap objects at specific

angles.
• Grid Snaps , which snap objects to points on

a grid.
67
Object Snaps
Object Snaps allow you to position objects In addition, On Object snapping occurs anywhere
precisely relative to each other; for example, on an object’s edges and is most noticeable when
to position lines so that their endpoints meet. Angle and Grid Snaps are turned off.
Object Snaps can be turned on or off by selecting When multiple objects are selected, the selection
Edit> Snap Settings> Object Snaps. set’s only snap point is its midpoint.
There are many locations on an object that other
objects can snap to. Extension Snaps
• Object endpoints and corners Extension snaps allow you to snap to a point that is
not actually on an object. Instead, these snaps locate
• The midpoints of object edges
points that are either collinear to the end of a wall or
• Object center points orthogonal (at a 90° angle) to it.
• Intersection points where an object drawn at an Extension snaps function when you are drawing or
allowed angle meets another object. editing walls and create a “sticky point” where the
wall being drawn reaches a point that is either
collinear or orthogonal to another wall’s end point.
See “Creating Walls” on page 114.
Angle Snaps
It is often important that objects be drawn at Angle Snaps can be turned on or off by selecting
exact angles. This can be accomplished using Edit> Snap Settings> Angle Snaps . When
Angle Snaps. Angle Snaps allow you to draw walls,
lines, and other objects at angles in 15° increments. Angle Snaps are disabled, the Angle Snaps icon
Angle Snaps also affect the way objects rotate, the will display near the mouse pointer.
radius of arcs, and a variety of other operations.
Grid Snaps
Grid Snaps allow you to snap objects to and is useful for zooming in and out, or for general
points on an on-screen grid. This grid cannot layout guidelines, but is not used for snapping.
be seen directly, but as you draw, move or resize an
The Reference Grid can be toggled on and off by
object, you can sometimes see it snapping at regular
increments. See “Moving Objects” on page 92 and selecting View> Reference Grid . See “View
“Resizing Objects” on page 94. Tools” on page 63.
It is recommended that you draw and position the The appearance and size of the Snap and Reference
Grids can be controlled in the Plan Defaults dialogs.
exterior walls of your plan with Grid Snaps
See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 49.
enabled. Once these walls are in place, you may
choose to turn Grid Snaps off to finish the rest of the
drawing. Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps
Grid Snaps are turned on and off by selecting Edit> Of the three snap behaviors, Grid Snaps have the
lowest priority and are overridden by Angle Snaps
Snap Settings>Grid Snaps or in the Plan and Object Snaps.
Defaults dialog.
When Grid snaps and Angle Snaps are both enabled,
Reference Grid objects are drawn and edited using Polar
Coordinates. For example, if the grid Snap Unit is
In addition to the Snap Grid, the Reference Grid is set to 12" (1 foot), drawing a new wall at an Allowed
provided to give you a visual sense of scale. The Angle snaps the wall length to 0", 12", 24", and so
Reference Grid is composed of 12” x 12” squares on.
68
Creating Objects
To draw a line or wall at an Allowed Angle

but with unrestricted length, disable Grid
Snaps and leave Angle Snaps on.
Creating Objects
In Home Designer Suite, there are three ways to add Many architectural objects can be created in plan
new objects to your drawing: by clicking to place an view or any 3D view. In order to place a stand-alone,
object, by clicking and dragging to draw an object, or click-to-create object in 3D, it is necessary to click
by importing custom symbols, pictures or metafiles. near a wall or within the Terrain Perimeter as these
objects help orient the new object within the 3D
If you create an object using any of these methods
space.
and the layer it will go on is turned off, the program
will ask you if you want to display the layer. See
“Object Creation and Layers” on page 69. Clicking and Dragging
While the size of the drawing area in Home Designer Other objects, including walls and railings, straight
Suite is limited only by the resources on your com- stairs, and CAD and CAD-based objects are created
puter, it is best to begin your drawing near the origin, by clicking and dragging to define either a path or an
0,0,0. The current position of your mouse pointer enclosed area. Select a tool, then click and drag in the
displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the drawing area to draw an object between your start
program window. See “3D Drafting” on page 19. and end points.
Continue drawing the selected object until another
Click-to-Create tool is selected.
Many objects, including doors and windows, You can temporarily slow the movement of the
cabinets, library symbols, text, pictures, and images mouse as you drag by holding down the Shift key on
are created by clicking. Select a library object or one your keyboard.
of the drawing tools mentioned above, then click in
You can cancel any click-and-drag drawing operation
the drawing area to place the object at that location.
before it is completed by pressing the Esc key on
Continue clicking to place the selected object until your keyboard, or by pressing any two mouse
another tool is selected. buttons at the same time.
If you click at a location where there is not enough
room for the object to be placed, one of two things Importing Objects
may happen: Custom symbols, pictures and metafiles can be
• Some objects, notably cabinets, doors, and win- imported into the program and placed in the drawing
dows, will resize smaller to fit into the space. area with a click. See “Importing and Exporting” on
page 341 and “Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs”
• Most objects cannot resize in this manner, so the
on page 325.
program will present a warning message indicat-
ing that there is not sufficient space at the current
location. Object Creation and Layers
When most drawing tools are active or library When it is created, every object is placed on a layer
symbols selected for placement, a preview outline which controls whether and how it displays. See
follows your mouse pointer, indicating the size and “Layers” on page 74.
shape of the object to be created. If your pointer is If you try to create an object on a layer that is not set
positioned at a location where the object cannot be to display in the current view, the program will ask if
placed, this preview outline will not display. you want to turn that layer on. See “Message Boxes”
As you move the mouse pointer, the center point of on page 26.
the object’s back edge will snap to active snap points • Click Yes to create the object and turn on its layer
when Grid Snaps or Object Snaps are enabled. in the current view.
See “Snap Behaviors” on page 67. • Click No to create the object but leave its layer
turned off in the current view.
69
• Click Cancel to not create the object and leave

the layer turned off.
Copying and Pasting Objects

New objects can also be created by cutting, copying, If the selection being pasted consists of text, it is
and pasting existing objects, either individually or in placed in a Text object.
groups. Objects can be copied from one floor to
If the selection being pasted is an image, the Paste
another, one view window to another, and one file to
Image dialog opens.
another. Because copying uses your system’s
clipboard, some objects can be pasted into other
applications, as well.
Objects created in an Imperial plan should

not be pasted into a metric file, or vice versa.
See “Template Plans” on page 33.
Objects cannot be pasted into any views that they

cannot be created in normally. For example, CAD Specify how you would like to paste the selected
objects cannot be pasted into a 3D camera view or image:
overview.
• Select Backdrop to add the image to a new 3D
A few objects, such as Terrain Perimeters and camera backdrop in the User Catalog in the library,
symbols, cannot be copied. where it will be selected. See “3D Backdrops” on
page 333.
Cut • Select Image to add the image to an Image object
Select Edit> Cut or press Ctrl + X to remove in the User Catalog in the library, where it will be
the selected object(s) from the file and save selected. See “Images” on page 326.
them in the system clipboard. To paste the selection • Select Material to add the image to a new mate-
in Home Designer Suite or another application, rial in the User Catalog in the library, where it
select Edit> Paste or press Ctrl + V while in that will be selected. See “Creating Materials” on
application to enable the Paste function. page 299.
• Select Picture to display the picture in the cur-
Copy rent plan view. See “Pictures” on page 329.
Select Edit> Copy or press Ctrl + C to copy
the selected object(s) to the system clipboard. Copy/Paste
To paste the selection in Home Designer Suite or
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the
another application, select Edit> Paste or press Ctrl
selected object(s) to the system clipboard and
+ V while in that application to enable the Paste
function. immediately enable the Paste function in Home
Designer Suite.
Paste
The Copy/Paste edit button activates Paste mode
Select Edit> Paste or press Ctrl + V to in which each available edit tool and handle makes a
enable Paste mode, then left- or right-click in copy in addition to its primary function and two new
the current view to paste the selected object(s) edit buttons display on the edit toolbar.
previously copied to the system clipboard at that
location. If pasting from another application, click in • Click the Sticky Mode edit button to remain
the destination view in Home Designer Suite first to in the current mode and place multiple copies of
make sure it is active. the selected object(s).
Once pasted, these object(s) are selected. Objects • Click the Paste Hold Position edit button
pasted in 3D views are selected on their top surfaces. create a copy of the selection at the same location
70
Copying and Pasting Objects
as the original. See “Paste Hold Position” on in Paste mode and continue pasting copies of the
page 71. selected object(s).
• Click the Main Edit Mode edit button or To exit Paste mode and return to the main edit
press the Esc key to return to the selected object’s toolbar for the selected object, click the Main Edit
main edit toolbar. Mode edit button or press the Esc key on your
If you paste a selection in a file other than its original keyboard. If you have not pasted a copy of the
source file, when you return to the original, Paste selected object and immediately click Copy/Paste
mode is still enabled. after returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky
The Copy/Paste edit button can be used with the Mode is still enabled.
edit handles in either of two ways: by clicking or by
dragging an edit handle. Paste Hold Position
Click the Paste Hold Position edit button to
To Copy/Paste by clicking create a copy of the selected object(s) at the
1. Select an object or objects to copy. same location as the original. The copy remains
selected so you can perform additional operations.
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button, select
Because multiple walls, railing and fencing cannot
Edit> Copy from the menu or press Ctrl +
share the same space, the Paste Hold Position
C to copy and then Ctrl + V to activate the Paste
edit button is not available for these objects.
functionality. The cursor displays the Copy/
Paste icon. When copying between different floors or view
3. If you wish to paste the copy in a different view windows, you can paste a copy at the same absolute
or program window, open that window. position as the original selection using the Paste
Hold Position command.
4. If your cursor does not display the Copy/Paste
icon, select Edit> Paste from the menu or press To use Paste Hold Position
Ctrl + V.
5. Left- or right-click once to paste a copy of the 1. Select the object(s) to be copied.
object at that location. 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button.
To Copy/Paste by dragging 3. Switch to the desired floor or plan file and select
Edit> Paste> Paste Hold Position .
1. Select an object or objects to copy.
4. A copy is placed at the same X, Y coordinates
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button, select on the new floor or in the new plan as the origi-
Edit> Copy from the menu or press Ctrl + nal’s position.
C. The cursor displays the Copy/Paste icon.
Copy and Paste in Place
3. Drag an edit handle:
• Drag the Move edit handle to position the copy Select Edit> Copy and Paste in Place to create a
at a new location. copy of the selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. The copy remains selected so you can
4. You can position the copy accurately with
perform additional operations.
respect to the original by watching the moved
distance in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Because multiple walls, railings, and fencing cannot
screen. share the same space, the Copy and Paste in Place
command is not available for these objects.
Sticky Mode
Paste Special
Normally, after an action is performed using
the edit tools or handles while in an edit mode The Paste Special tool allows you to choose a
such as Paste mode, you return to the Main Edit representation for the selection to be pasted.
Mode. Click the Sticky Mode edit button to remain
Selections can be pasted as:
71
• Enhanced Windows Metafiles (EMF). See To use Paste Special

“Metafiles” on page 330.
1. Select an object, image, text or file on your com-
• Device Independent Bitmaps (BMP). See puter and copy it.
“Importing Pictures” on page 330.
2. Switch to the desired Home Designer Suite view
• Unformatted non-unicode text (TXT). window and select Edit> Paste> Paste Special
• File Name (a path to a file). Depending on the file .
type, it will be either opened or imported (if sup-
ported). 3. In the Paste Special dialog, select the desired
representation for the selection and click OK.
• Unformatted text (HTML). Pastes as text.
4. Click in the drawing area to place the copy at
• Model Objects - Home Designer Suite format, that location.
not compatible with other programs.
72
Chapter 8:
Displaying Objects
The way that objects display is an important in all Chapter Contents

stages of the design process. There are two primary • Displaying Objects
ways that the display of objects is controlled: • Layers
Drawing Groups and Layers. • Layer Attributes
• Display Options Dialog
• Layer Sets
• Drawing Groups
• Display Toggles
• Fill Styles
• Select Color Dialog
Displaying Objects
There are two broad categories of objects in Home Fill Styles
Designer Suite: architectural objects and CAD
objects. See “Architectural vs CAD Objects” on page Closed CAD objects and can also be assigned a fill
67. style for their interior areas. Fill styles may be a solid
color or a pattern, and can be specified as
CAD objects are two-dimensional and display only transparent. See “Fill Styles” on page 76.
in the view in which they were drawn. Architectural
objects, on the other hand, are 3D and are A few architectural objects such as rooms and stairs
represented in 2D and 3D views in different ways can also be assigned a fill style; however, it is only
used in plan view. In 3D views, architectural objects
are represented using surfaces that have materials
Layer Settings
assigned to them.
By default, CAD and CAD-based objects use the
color assigned to their layer. They can also be Material Textures
assigned custom line attributes in their specification
dialogs. See “Line Style Panel” on page 103. The appearance of architectural objects in 3D views
is determined by the materials applied to the objects’
In plan view, architectural objects are represented surfaces. See “Materials” on page 293.
much like CAD objects, using the color assigned to
their layer. In Standard rendered views, you can turn on or off
the display of textures by selecting 3D> Camera
In addition, layers can be used to turn the display of
View Options> Toggle Textures .
objects on and off in different views.
73
Layers
Layers are used to organize and manage the display You can find out which layer an object is on by
of all objects in all views. A layer can be thought of selecting the object and looking at the Status Bar.
as a transparency sheet with objects placed on it for And, you can customize how each layer displays in a
viewing. Nearly all views use multiple layers, like a particular view in the Display Options dialog.
stack of transparencies put together to show different
Multiple layers are organized into Layer Sets, which
types of objects.
allow you to control which objects display in
different views.
Layer Attributes
The display of objects in different views is controlled place or draw an object on a layer that is hidden, the
by layer sets and layers in the Display Options program asks if you want to turn the layer on.
dialog. See “Display Options Dialog” on page 74.
Primary and Secondary Layers

Every object is placed on a layer which controls
whether it displays in a given view. This layer is
referred to as the object’s primary layer, and you can Some objects are designed to be inserted into another
see its name in the Status Bar when the object is object rather than standing alone. If the display of an
selected. See “The Status Bar” on page 26. object that contains an inserted object is turned off,
In addition, some objects have secondary layers the inserted object’s display will be turned off, as
which may alter the appearance of objects on the well For example, if the display of a wall is turned
primary layer, but do not control whether the objects off, any doors and windows in that wall will not
display or not. display either. See “Inserted Objects” on page 282.
For example, the primary layer for base cabinets is Only displayed objects are included when DXF/
“Cabinets, Base”. In addition, base cabinets have a DWG and EMF files are exported, and only
number of secondary layers that control the display displayed objects print.
of the countertop, face indicators, door opening The Color attribute assigned to a layer determines
indicators, module lines and labels. how the lines representing objects on that layer
appear in floor plan views.
Note: If an object’s primary layer is turned off, Some objects, notably CAD and text, allow you to
information on its secondary layers will not display
override their line color without changing the layer’s
- even if those layers are turned on.
color attribute. A custom line style can also be
assigned to these objects. See “Line Style Panel” on
All layers with a check in the “Disp.” column display
page 103.
when the current layer set is active. Objects that are
not displayed cannot be seen or selected. If you try to
Display Options Dialog

The display of objects in all views is controlled If the display of a particular layer is turned off and an
in the Display Options dialog. To make object assigned to that layer is placed in the plan, the
changes to the display settings for a particular type of program will automatically ask you if the layer
view, open a view of that type and select Tools> should be turned on so that the new object will be
Display Options. visible. After you make your choice, the object will
be created - even if you select “No.”
74
Layer Sets
• Click on a column header to sort all layers by that

column. Click again to sort in reverse order.
• Remove the check from the “Disp.” column to
turn off the display of a category of objects.
• Click a color bar to open the Select Color dialog
and set the display color for objects on that layer
in floor plan and Elevation views. See “Select
Color Dialog” on page 77.
• Click the size grip at the lower right corner and
drag to resize the dialog box.
Note: Not all objects display in all views. For

instance, invisible walls do not appear in camera
The Properties for the layer set that is active in the views or materials lists.
current view are presented in a table of layers and
their attributes. See “Layer Sets” on page 75.
Layer Sets
Layer Sets are used to control the layer settings for • Elevation views. See “Elevation Views” on page
different views in a plan file. 306.
• Framing Overviews. See “Framing Overview” on
A layer set consists of a complete list of the layers in
page 306.
the current plan along with the display settings for
each layer as set for a particular type of view. These • Reference Floor. See “The Reference Floor” on
display settings can be modified, and can be different page 231.
for each type of view. See “Display Options Dialog” While any view is active, select Tools> Display
on page 74.
Options to make changes to the layer set used
Layer sets are file specific, which means that for that view type.
changes made in one plan file have no effect on the
settings in other files. Any changes made to settings in the Display
Options dialog for one particular view will affect all
Home Designer Suite uses a different layer set for views using that same layer set. For example, if you
each type of view of your plan: make changes for a camera view, all camera views
• Plan views. See “Plan Views” on page 61. and overviews in the current plan will be affected.
See “Display Options Dialog” on page 74.
• Camera views and Overviews. See “3D View
Tools” on page 304.
Drawing Groups
Each object in a plan file belongs to a Drawing A selected object’s Drawing Group is reported in the
Group, which influences whether it displays in front Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on page 26.
of or behind other objects. Drawing Groups control
Within a given Drawing Group, drawing order is
the display of objects in plan view but in camera
determined by the order in which objects are placed.
views and overviews.
By default, an object will display in front of any
Most categories of objects have their own Drawing objects that were created before it was. For example,
Group; however, a few objects are instead placed in if you place a chair and then a table, the table will
the Front or Back Group. Imported pictures, which display in front of the chair; if you instead place a
are placed in the Back Group, are a notable example. table and then the chair, the chair will display in
front.
75
Drawing Group Edit Tools

Placed First Once an object has been placed, its position in
the drawing order can be modified. To do this,
select one or more objects and click the View
Drawing Group Edit Tools edit button.
Click the Send Backward edit button to move
the selected object(s) to the back of its current
Drawing Group. If it is already at the back of its
current group, it will be moved to the next group
Placed Last
down in the drawing order.
Placed Second
Click the Bring Forward edit button to move
Drawing order also affects how objects are selected. the selected object(s) to the front of its current
If two objects are positioned so that they overlap one Drawing Group. If it is already at the front of its
another, and you click at a point that they both share, current group, it will be moved to the next group up
the frontmost object will become selected first. See in the drawing order.
“Select Next Object” on page 80.
Display Toggles
There are a number of toggles and tools that can be Color On/Off
used to affect the appearance of the on-screen
display. The display of color on-screen can be toggled
on and off in any view by selecting View>
Color.
Print Preview
Print Preview and its related display toggles • If Color is toggled off in any 3D view, the
allow you to get a sense of what the current view will be displayed in grayscale.
view will look like when it is printed. See “Print
• If Color is toggled off in floor plan view, the
Preview” on page 385.
view will be displayed in black and white.
Refresh Display You can also print in color or gray scale. See “Print
View Dialog” on page 387.
Refresh Display redraws the current window to
clean up extra lines, show missing items, and correct
Delete Surface
random on-screen effects caused by changes to a
model. Select View> Refresh Display or press the In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete Surface,
F5 key to refresh the on-screen display. then click a surface in the view to temporarily
remove the surface from the current view. See
“Delete 3D Surface” on page 307.
Fill Styles
Fill styles are CAD-based patterns that can be used to fill styles can also be applied to a variety of
fill the interiors of closed CAD shapes. In plan view, architectural objects.
Fill Style Panel

The FILL STYLE panel is found in the specification panel is not not available for Electrical Connections
dialogs for a variety of objects in the program. This as this tool cannot be used to form closed shapes.
76
Select Color Dialog
1 Specify the style, size,and other attributes of the 2 Check Background to add a solid background
Pattern color to the fill pattern and enable the settings
• Select a Fill Pattern from the drop-down list and below. When unchecked, the fill pattern has a
specify its characteristics. transparent background. Not available when “Solid”
is the selected Pattern Type.
• When “No Pattern” is selected as the Type, the
settings that follow are disabled. • Specify a custom background Color by clicking
the color bar. The Background Color set in the
• Specify the Width of the selected fill pattern. Not Preferences dialog is used by default. See
available for Solid fill. “Colors Panel” on page 51.
• Specify the Height of the selected fill pattern. • Use the Transparency slider bar or text field to
• Specify the Angle of the selected fill pattern. Not control how transparent the background color is.
available for Solid fill.
• Specify a custom Color for the lines that make up 3 A preview of the selected pattern displays to the
right. As changes are made to the settings on
the fill pattern or Solid fill by clicking the color this panel, the preview will update.
bar. The color assigned to the selected object’s
• Choose a Preview Width from the drop-down
layer is used by default.
list. This value controls how large an area the pre-
• Use the Transparency slider bar or text field to view represents. The selected value indicates the
control how transparent the fill pattern lines are. horizontal width of the preview pane in actual
This setting also affects the transparence of Solid plan inches (mm).
fill colors.
Select Color Dialog

The Select Color dialog can be opened by clicking
on the Color bar that can be found in many dialogs Mouse over a Color bar to display a tool tip
throughout the Windows version of the program. reporting the selected color’s RGB values.
In the Mac version, the standard Colors dialog, or

Color Picker, is used instead.
77
1 The currently selected color displays in the 5 Click in one of the Custom colors boxes to
rectangle at the lower center of the dialog. either select it or to specify it as the box for a
There are a number of ways to select a color in this new custom color to be defined.
dialog: • Click the Add to Custom Colors button to add
Click in any one of the Basic colors boxes to the selected color to the Custom Colors group.
2
select it.
6 Click the Color Chooser Eyedropper, then
click anywhere on your monitor to select the
3 Click anywhere in the color spectrum area to color displaying at that location.
select a color.
• The location of the selected color is identified by
crosshairs. You can select a color from any program win-
dow. Before opening the Color Chooser dia-
• Click anywhere in the vertical bar or drag the log, make sure the desired color can be seen on
arrow to adjust the selected color’s Luminosity screen.
and RGB values.
Click OK to apply the currently selected color to the
4 Define the color by specifying its Hue, object’s line or fill style, or to the material’s pattern
Saturation, and Luminosity (HSL) or its Red,
color.
Green, and Blue (RGB) values.
78
Chapter 9:
Editing Objects
Just as the methods used to create different objects in Chapter Contents

Home Designer Suite are similar, the options for • Selecting Objects
moving, rotating, resizing, and otherwise editing • Selecting Multiple Objects
them are also alike. • Editing Line-Based Objects
Edit handles allow objects to be resized, relocated, or • Editing Arc-Based Objects
rotated using the mouse. Edit toolbar buttons and the • Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects
contextual menus access edit tools relevant to the • Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects
selected object(s). Most objects have a specification • Editing Box-Based Objects
dialog that allows you to edit it in ways that are • Editing Spline-Based Objects
specific to that type of object. • Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
• Moving Objects
The editing characteristics common to most objects • Aligning Objects
are described in this chapter. Unique, object-specific • Resizing Objects
editing behaviors and the specification dialogs are • Reshaping Objects
covered in their respective chapters. • Rotating Objects
• Eyedropper and Painter Tools
• Object Eyedropper
• Deleting Objects
• Delete Objects Dialog
• Undo and Redo
Selecting Objects
“Select” refers to selecting an object for editing. An handles may not display as you zoom away from the
object must be selected before it can be edited. selected object.
In order for an object to be selected, it must be When an object is selected, its edit toolbar also
visible in the current view. See “Layers” on page 74. displays, typically on the upper left side of the Home
Designer Suite program window. See “The Edit
When an object is selected, it displays edit handles
Toolbar” on page 23.
and a grey selection fill color. In 3D views, a selected
object will also display lines representing the Information about the selected object or objects may
selected edge or surface. The size of the edit handles also display in the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar”
does not change as you zoom in or out. To prevent on page 26.
them from stacking on one another, some edit
A selected object remains selected until another
object is selected, a different tool is activated, the Esc
79
key on the keyboard is pressed, or any two mouse Selected Edge

buttons are pressed at the same time.
When you click on a polyline- or box-based object,
the edge that you click nearest becomes the selected
Select Objects
edge and displays an edit handle larger and of a
Any object created using Home Designer different color than those on other edges. The handle
Suite can be selected using the Select Objects on this edge may also display at the point where you
tool. Select Edit> Select Objects, click the toolbar clicked to select it. You can specify the Selected
button or press the Space bar on your keyboard to Edge Handle Fill color in the Preferences dialog.
activate this tool, then click on an object to select it. See “Colors Panel” on page 51.
You can also select objects or open context sensitive
menus using the right mouse button when any tool is
active.
Selecting Similar Objects

If a tool other than Select Objects is active, you
can only select objects of that type using the left
mouse button. For example, if the Straight Exterior
This edge can be edited on the SELECTED LINE or
Wall tool is active, you can only select walls
SELECTED ARC panel of the object’s specification
using the left mouse button.
dialog. See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
This can be useful for selecting an object when many page 154, “Line Panel” on page 103 and “Arc Panel”
objects of a different type occupy the same space in on page 104.
plan view.
Objects can be selected using the right mouse button,
Selected Side
regardless of which tool is active. Most architectural objects can be selected in 3D
views. When selected, the outline of their bounding
Right-Clicking box displays, and edit handles are located on the side
where you clicked to select the object. The edit
Regardless of which tool is active, you can select an
handles can be used to move, resize, or rotate the
eligible object by right-clicking on it once. When
object in different directions, depending on which
you right-click to select an object a contextual menu
side is selected.
also appears, displaying the object’s edit tools. See
“Contextual Menus” on page 23.
Select Next Object
If a drawing tool is active and you right-click to
select an object, you can unselect it by left-clicking If there is more than one object in a particular
in an empty space in the drawing area. Although a space, it may be difficult to select the desired
drawing tool is active, it is not used. If you then left- object. When a nearby object is selected, click the
click a second time, the active tool will be used. Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab key
until the desired object becomes selected. This
function cannot be applied to groups of selected
objects.
Selecting Multiple Objects

Multiple objects can be selected and edited in Marquee Select
groups. The options available for editing them will
vary depending on the type or types of objects Groups of objects can be selected by holding down
selected. either the Shift or Ctrl key when the Select Objects
tool is active and then dragging a marquee
around the objects to be selected. An object does not
need to be completely enclosed by the marquee to be
80
Selecting Multiple Objects
selected: it will be selected if the marquee includes • Click the Restrictive Selection edit button
only a small portion of it. to toggle it on and select only objects with
When using the marquee-select method, both CAD additional attributes like materials in common.
and architectural objects included in the marquee are 3. Click and drag a rectangular selection marquee
selected. To remove an object from the selection set, in the drawing area to select similar objects
hold down the Ctrl key and click on it. within its area.
If an object is selected and a selection marquee is
4. Alternatively, click the Select All Similar
drawn around it using the Ctrl key, that object
edit button to select all similar objects in the cur-
becomes deselected. If the Shift key is used instead,
rent view.
the original object remains selected and the other
objects are added to the selection set.
Shift and Ctrl Select
The Shift key can be used to marquee-select objects
of a similar type when the drawing tool used to create You can select a group of objects by adding them to
those objects is active. the selection set one by one. Select an object, hold
down either the Shift or Ctrl key, and click additional
To marquee-select objects by type objects to select them.
More than one type of object can be selected using
1. Select a drawing tool used to create the type of
this method, but the ability to edit the group-selected
object you wish to select: for example, the
items is limited to attributes that all selected objects
Hinged Door tool. have in common.
2. Hold down the Shift key, then click and drag a To remove an object from a selection set, click on it
rectangular selection marquee in the drawing once more with the Ctrl key pressed.
area.
The Shift and Ctrl keys can be used to select multiple
3. When you release the mouse button, objects of items in a variety of contexts, such as: the Library
the selected drawing tool’s type - here, door and Project Browsers, lists in dialog boxes, and files
objects - located in the marquee will be selected. to be imported. They can also be used to marquee-
select objects in plan view. See Marquee Select,
To make marquee selection easier, you can above.
turn off the display of objects you do not
want to include in your selection set. See “Layers” Edit Area
on page 74.
The Edit Area tool allows you to quickly
Marquee Select Similar define an area of your plan and select the
objects in that area. Once selected, they can then be
The Marquee Select Similar edit tool lets repositioned, rotated, or deleted. Select Edit> Edit
you group-select objects in the current plan Area, then click and drag a rectangular marquee
view that are similar to the selected object(s). around the area that you would like to move.
To use Marquee Select Similar Unlike other selection methods, the Edit Area tool
cuts walls, railings and fencing where the selection
1. In plan view, select one or more objects, then marquee intersects them, allowing you to edit only
click the Marquee Select Similar edit but- the selected portion of these objects.
ton. Some objects, such as cabinets, are included in the
selection only if more than half of the object is
2. The Restrictive Selection toggle controls contained within the marquee.
whether objects are selected by similar type(s)
only, or if additional attributes are taken into
account.
• Restrictive Selection is disabled by
default, so objects of the same type will be
selected.
81
Editing Line-Based Objects

Objects are considered line-based when they can be Move
edited similar to CAD lines using their edit handles. • Movement may be limited or stopped by other
CAD lines, straight walls and railings, straight stairs, objects or Snap Behaviors. Move restrictions can
and straight roads are examples of line-based objects. be overridden by holding down the Ctrl key while
dragging. See “Unrestricted Movement” on page
Most line-based objects can be connected to other 93.
like objects to form polylines or polyline-based
objects. See “Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects” Rotate
on page 85 and “Editing Closed Polyline-Based • The Rotate handle is used to rotate the object
Objects” on page 87. about its center. See “Rotating Objects” on page
96.
Some objects, notably walls, have line-based editing
behavior only when selected on certain surfaces. See Extend/Change Angle
“Editing Walls” on page 119. • Drag a square end handle parallel to the selected
Wall openings such as doors and windows have line- line to change its length.
based editing behavior in plan view only but cannot • Drag a square end handle at an angle to the
be rotated, reversed or converted to an arc. See selected line to change its angle. When Angle
“Editing Doors” on page 172 and “Editing
Snaps are on, the line snaps to Allowed
Windows” on page 187.
Angles. See “Angle Snaps” on page 68.
Adjust Width
Some line-based objects, such as stairs and roads,
have additional handles that allow the width of the
object to be adjusted.
Adjust Width
Other objects, such as stairs and roads, have • Click and drag a small, round Expand handle to
additional edit handles that allow you to increase or decrease the object’s width. By
concentrically adjust the object’s width. default, objects are resized in 1" increments. This
Snap Unit is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Using the Edit Handles See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 49.
When selected, a typical line-based object displays
four edit handles: a Move handle, two Extend/
Using Dimensions
Change Angle handles, and a Rotate handle. Dimensions can be used to position line-based
Any action performed using the edit handles can be objects relative to other objects. See “Moving
cancelled by pressing the Esc key or any two mouse Objects Using Dimensions” on page 154.
buttons at the same time. Dimensions cannot, however, be used to adjust the
length of line-based objects, or the width of line-
Extend/Change Angle based objects such as stairs.
Using the Specification Dialog

Move Rotate Line-based objects can be edited using their
specification dialogs. See “Line Specification
Dialog” on page 102.
82
Editing Arc-Based Objects
Using the Edit Toolbar • Click the Center Object edit button to center
A selected line-based object can be edited in a an object along a wall within a room or relative to
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. a cabinet fixture. See “Using Center Object” on
page 94.
The following toolbar buttons may display on the
edit toolbar for a selected line-based object: • Click the View Drawing Group Edit Tools
edit button to modify the selected object’s place
• Click the Select Next Object edit button to in the drawing order. See “Drawing Group Edit
select nearby objects instead of the selected Tools” on page 76.
object. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79.
• Click the Break edit button to add a new
• Click the Open Object edit button to open corner or pivot point to the selected object. See
the specification dialog for the selected object. “Break” on page 95.
See “Specification Dialogs” on page 25.
• Click the Complete Break edit button to
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the break the selected object into two separate
selected object(s) to the system clipboard so they objects. See “Break” on page 95.
can be pasted elsewhere. See “Copying and Past-
ing Objects” on page 70. • Click the Change Line/Arc edit button to
change a line-based object to an arc, or vice
• Click the Delete edit button to delete the versa. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 96.
selected object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on
page 98.
Editing Arc-Based Objects

Objects are considered arc-based when they can be Other objects, such as curved stairs and roads, have
edited similar to CAD arcs using their edit handles. additional edit handles that allow you to
concentrically adjust the object’s width.
CAD arcs, curved walls and railings, curved stairs,
and curved roads are examples of arc-based objects.
Using the Edit Handles
Most arc-based objects can be connected to other like
objects to form polylines or polyline-based objects. When selected, a typical arc-based object displays
See “Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects” on page seven edit handles.
85 and “Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects” on Any action performed using the edit handles can be
page 87. cancelled by pressing the Esc key or any two mouse
buttons at the same time.
Resize Reshape
(changes radius) (moves center)
Move
Chord
Rotate
Extend Move Arc

(along arc or chord) Center
Some objects, notably curved walls, have arc-based
editing behavior only when selected on certain Move
surfaces. See “Editing Walls” on page 119. • Two Move edit handles allow the arc to be relo-
cated without changing its shape. One is located
83
at the center of the chord and the other, at the arc Reshape
center. • Drag the small triangular Reshape handle to
• Movement may be limited or stopped by other change the length and location of the center
objects or Snap Behaviors. Move restrictions can without moving the endpoints.
be overridden by holding down the Ctrl key while
93.
Reshape edit handle
Adjust Width
Move edit handle

Some arc-based objects, such as stairs, have
additional handles that allow the width of the object
Rotate to be adjusted.
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the arc about
its center. See “Rotating Objects” on page 96.
Extend
• The end edit handles expand or contract the arc
when moved along the arc radius or chord.
• If you follow the path of the arc, the end edit han-
dles allow you to adjust the arc length. Adjust Width
• The angle formed by the center point of the arc
• Click and drag a small, round edit handle to
and its two endpoints is referred to as the
increase or decrease the object’s width. By
Included Angle. If Angle Snaps are on, the default, objects are resized according to the Snap
Included Angle of the arc can be rotated at Unit defined in the Plan Defaults dialog. See
Allowed Angles. See “Angle Snaps” on page 68. “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 49.
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to position arc-based
objects. Dimension lines typically locate
tangent extension lines and any extension lines that
may be parallel to those lines rather than the arc
itself. See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
Extend edit handles
page 154.
Resize
• Drag the small, round Resize edit handle to Using the Specification Dialog
change the radius and included angle of the arc Arc-based objects can be edited using their
while maintaining its center. specification dialogs. See “Arc Specification
Using the Edit Toolbar

A selected arc-based object can be edited in a variety
Resize edit handle of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
edit toolbar for a selected arc-based object:
84
Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects
• Click the Select Next Object edit button to a cabinet fixture. See “Using Center Object” on
select nearby objects instead of the selected page 94.
object. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79. • Click the View Drawing Group Edit Tools
• Click the Open Object edit button to open edit button to modify the selected object’s place
the specification dialog for the selected object. in the drawing order. See “Drawing Group Edit
See “Specification Dialogs” on page 25. Tools” on page 76.
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the • Click the Break edit button to add a new
selected object(s) to the system clipboard so they corner or pivot point to the selected object. See
can be pasted elsewhere. See “Copying and Past- “Break” on page 95.
ing Objects” on page 70. • Click the Complete Break edit button to
• Click the Delete edit button to delete the break the selected object into two separate
selected object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on objects. See “Break” on page 95.
page 98. • Click the Change Line/Arc edit button to
• Click the Center Object edit button to center change an arc-based object to a line, or vice
an object along a wall within a room or relative to versa. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 96.
Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects

Open polyline-based objects are composed of to concentrically adjust the width of all segments of
individual line- and arc-based objects that are the object.
connected at their end points but do not form an
enclosed area. See “Polylines” on page 105. Using the Edit Handles
Objects are considered open polyline-based when A polyline can be composed of many segments. See
they can be edited similar to open CAD polylines “Polylines” on page 105.
using their edit handles.
When selected, an open polyline-based object
Open CAD polylines, connected walls, stairs, and displays a Move handle, a Rotate handle, a Reshape
connected roads are examples of open polyline-based handle at the intersection of each segment, and an
objects. Extend handle at each end.
For information about editing closed polyline-based Each straight, line-based segment also has a Move
objects, see “Editing Closed Polyline-Based edit handle along its length.
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own Move
handle at the center of its chord, a Resize handle and,
if it has an unlocked center, a Reshape handle. See
“Editing Arc-Based Objects” on page 83.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that you click
nearest is called the selected edge, and certain
operations affect only this edge. The Move handle of
the selected edge is larger than that of other edges. It
displays along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See “Selected
Edge” on page 80.
Any action performed using the edit handles can be
cancelled by pressing the Esc key or any two mouse
Other objects, such as connected stair and road

segments, have additional edit handles that allow you
85
Resize Arc
Move
Resize • Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle to
polyline
arc Reshape change the radius, chord length and chord posi-
Reshape
arc tion of the arc segment. Adjacent segments may
polyline
extend, contract, or change angle to maintain
Move line Move arc
their connections.
segment segment
Reshape Arc
• Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit handle to
change the radius of the arc without moving its
Same Line end points.
Extend Type Adjust Width
Rotate polyline
Some open polyline-based objects, such as stairs and
Move roads, have additional handles that allow the width of
• Click and drag the Move handle to move the the object to be adjusted.
object. Adjust
• Movement may be limited or stopped by other Width
objects or Snap Behaviors. Move restrictions can
93.
Rotate
• Click and drag a small, round edit handle to
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the object increase or decrease the object’s width. By
about its center. Its position varies depending on default, objects are resized in 1" increments. This
which edge is currently selected. See “Rotating Snap Unit is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Objects” on page 96. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 49.
Extend
• Click and drag an Extend handle to lengthen or Using Dimensions
shorten the unconnected end of the selected line Dimensions can be used to move or reshape
or arc segment, or to change the radius of the polyline-based objects. See “Moving Objects
selected arc. See “Editing Arc-Based Objects” on Using Dimensions” on page 154.
page 83.
Reshape Using the Specification Dialog
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to change Open polyline-based objects can be edited
the angle and/or length of the segments on either using their specification dialogs. See
side of it, or the size of the object. “Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 106.
Move Line Segment
• The Move Line Segment edit handle is found on
straight segments of open polylines and moves A selected open polyline-based object can be edited
the straight section perpendicular to itself. Adja- in a variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
cent segments may extend or contract in their toolbar.
original directions to maintain their connections.
Move Arc edit toolbar for a selected open polyline-based
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle to object:
change the radius and/or chord length or position.
• Click the Select Next Object edit button to
Adjacent segments may extend, contract, or
select nearby objects instead of the selected
change angle to maintain their connections.
86
Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects
• Click the Open Object edit button to open in the drawing order. See “Drawing Group Edit
the specification dialog for the selected object. Tools” on page 76.
See “Specification Dialogs” on page 25. • Click the Break edit button to add a new
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the corner or pivot point to the selected object. See
selected object(s) to the system clipboard so they “Break” on page 95.
can be pasted elsewhere. See “Copying and Past- • Click the Complete Break edit button to
ing Objects” on page 70. break the selected object into two separate
• Click the Delete edit button to delete the objects. See “Break” on page 95.
selected object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on • Click the Change Line/Arc edit button to
page 98. change a line-based polyline edge to an arc, or
• Click the Center Object edit button to center vice versa. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 96.
an object along a wall within a room or relative to • Click the Record Walkthrough Along Path
a cabinet fixture. See “Using Center Object” on edit button to record a walkthrough video of your
page 94. model along the path defined by the selected
• Click the View Drawing Group Edit Tools polyline. See “Walkthrough Paths” on page 335.
edit button to modify the selected object’s place
Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects

Closed polyline-based objects are composed of Each straight, line-based segment has a Move edit
individual line- and arc-based objects joined end-to- handle along its length.
end and forming an enclosed area. See “Polylines”
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own Move
on page 105.
handle at the center of its chord, a Resize handle and
Objects are considered closed polyline-based when a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc-Based Objects”
they can be edited similar to closed CAD polylines on page 83.
using their edit handles.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that you click
Closed CAD polylines and terrain features are nearest is called the selected edge, and certain
examples of closed polyline-based objects. operations affect only this edge. The Move handle of
the selected edge is larger than that of other edges. It
For information about editing open polyline-based
displays along the length of a line segment, or at the
objects, see “Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects”
center of the chord on an arc segment. See “Selected
on page 85.
Edge” on page 80.
Move arc Rotate

Some objects, such as connected road segments, segment
Move Resize
have additional edit handles that allow you to arc
polyline
concentrically adjust the width of all segments of the
Reshape
object.
arc

Reshape Move line
A polyline can be composed of many segments. See polyline segment
“Polylines” on page 105.
Move
When selected, a closed polyline-based object
• Click and drag the Move handle to move the
displays a Move handle, a Rotate handle, and a
object.
Reshape handle at the intersection of each segment.
87
• Movement may be limited or stopped by other Using the Edit Toolbar

be overridden by holding down the Ctrl key while A selected closed polyline-based object can be edited
dragging. See “Unrestricted Movement” on page in a variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
93. toolbar.
Rotate The following toolbar buttons may display on the

edit toolbar for a selected closed polyline-based
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the object
object:
about its center. Its position varies depending on
which edge is currently selected. See “Rotating • Click the Select Next Object edit button to
Objects” on page 96. select nearby objects instead of the selected
Reshape object. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79.
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to change • Click the Open Object edit button to open
the angle and/or length of the segments on either the specification dialog for the selected object.
side of it, or the size of the object. See “Specification Dialogs” on page 25.
Move Line Segment
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the
• The Move Line Segment edit handle is found on selected object(s) to the system clipboard so they
straight segments of closed polylines and moves can be pasted elsewhere. See “Copying and Past-
the straight section perpendicular to itself. Adja- ing Objects” on page 70.
cent segments may extend or contract in their
original directions to maintain their connections. • Click the Delete edit button to delete the
Move Arc
page 98.
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle to
change the radius and/or chord length or position. • Click the Center Object edit button to center
Adjacent segments may extend, contract, or an object along a wall within a room or relative to
change angle to maintain their connections. a cabinet fixture. See “Using Center Object” on
page 94.
Resize Arc
• Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle to • Click the View Drawing Group Edit Tools
change the radius, chord length and chord posi- edit button to modify the selected object’s place
tion of the arc segment. Adjacent segments may in the drawing order. See “Drawing Group Edit
extend, contract, or change angle to maintain Tools” on page 76.
their connections.
• Click the Break edit button to add a new
Reshape Arc corner or pivot point to the selected object. See
• Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit handle to “Break” on page 95.
change the radius of the arc without moving its
• Click the Complete Break edit button to
end points.
break an edge of the selected object into two
separate objects. See “Break” on page 95.
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to move or reshape • Click the Change Line/Arc edit button to
closed polyline-based objects. See “Moving change a line-based polyline edge to an arc, or
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 154. vice versa. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 96.
• Click the Record Walkthrough Along Path

Using the Specification Dialog edit button to record a walkthrough video of your
Closed polyline-based objects can be edited model along the path defined by the selected
using their specification dialogs. See polyline. See “Walkthrough Paths” on page 335.
“Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 106.
88
Editing Box-Based Objects
Editing Box-Based Objects

Objects are considered box-based when they can be • The four Extend handles display along each
edited similar to CAD boxes using their edit handles. edge. If you select an object on an edge, the
Extend handle displays at the point where you
Box-based objects are similar to closed polyline-
clicked; otherwise, it displays at the center of the
based objects, but must always have four sides with
edge.
right-angled corners.
In addition to the CAD Box tools, Text objects, many
library symbols, pictures and images are examples of
box-based objects.

When selected, a box-based object displays ten edit • The triangular Rotate handle located near the
handles. Unlike polylines, boxes must always have selected edge of the object is used to rotate it
four sides with right-angled corners. about its center. The pointer changes to a circular
arrow when moved over this handle. See
“Rotating Objects” on page 96.
Extend Move
Resize
Using Dimensions
Rotate
Dimensions can be used to move or reshape
• Click and drag the Move handle to move the box-based objects. See “Moving Objects
object. Using Dimensions” on page 154.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by other
be overridden by holding down the Ctrl key while Box-based objects can be edited using their
dragging. See “Unrestricted Movement” on page specification dialogs. See “Box Specification
93. Dialog” on page 107.

A selected box-based object can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
edit toolbar for a selected box-based object:
• The four Resize handles located at each corner
are used to increase or decrease the size of the • Click the Select Next Object edit button to
object. select nearby objects instead of the selected
• Click the Open Object edit button to open

the specification dialog for the selected object.
See “Specification Dialogs” on page 25.
89
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the • Click the Center Object edit button to center
selected object(s) to the system clipboard so they an object along a wall within a room or relative to
can be pasted elsewhere. See “Copying and Past- a cabinet fixture. See “Using Center Object” on
ing Objects” on page 70. page 94.
• Click the Delete edit button to delete the • Click the View Drawing Group Edit Tools
selected object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on edit button to modify the selected object’s place
page 98. in the drawing order. See “Drawing Group Edit
Editing Spline-Based Objects

A Spline is a curve that passes smoothly through a Move
set of points, or vertices. Splines are typically used in • Click and drag the Move handle to move the
situations where an irregular, free-flowing curve is object.
needed.
Objects are considered spline-based when they can objects or Snap Behaviors. Move restrictions can
be edited similar to CAD splines using their edit be overridden by holding down the Ctrl key while
handles. See “Draw Spline” on page 102. dragging. See “Unrestricted Movement” on page
Sprinkler lines, spline terrain curbs, spline terrain 93.
walls and both round and kidney-shaped terrain Rotate
features are spline-based objects. See “Terrain” on
• Click and drag the Rotate edit handle to rotate the
page 349.
entire spline.
Vertex
• The Vertex edit handles display along the spline
at each vertex. Click and drag a Vertex edit han-
dle to change the length, angle and curve of adja-
cent segments without affecting other vertices.

When a spline is selected, several different types of
handles display. Spline-based objects can be edited using their
specification dialogs. See “Polyline
Any action performed using the edit handles can be Specification Dialog” on page 106.
buttons at the same time. Using the Edit Toolbar
Vertex
A selected spline-based object can be edited in a
edit toolbar for a selected spline-based object:

Move select nearby objects instead of the selected
Rotate
90
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
• Click the Open Object edit button to open • Click the View Drawing Group Edit Tools
the specification dialog for the selected object. edit button to modify the selected object’s place
See “Specification Dialogs” on page 25. in the drawing order. See “Drawing Group Edit
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the
selected object(s) to the system clipboard so they • Click the Break edit button to add a new
can be pasted elsewhere. See “Copying and Past- corner or pivot point to the selected object. See
ing Objects” on page 70. “Break” on page 95.
• Click the Delete edit button to delete the • Click the Complete Break edit button to
selected object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on break an edge of the selected object into two
page 98. separate objects. See “Break” on page 95.
• Click the Center Object edit button to center • Click the Record Walkthrough Along Path
an object along a wall within a room or relative to edit button to record a walkthrough video of your
a cabinet fixture. See “Using Center Object” on model along the path defined by the selected
page 94. polyline. See “Walkthrough Paths” on page 335.
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses

Objects created using the Circle, Oval, and Ellipse Rotate
Tools are unusual in that no architectural objects • Click and drag the Rotate handle of an oval or
share their functionalities. ellipse to change its orientation.

When selected, circles, ovals and ellipses display
eleven edit handles.
Unlike Ovals and Ellipses , a Circle

cannot be edited into any other shapes; it can only be
a circle.
Any action performed using the edit handles can be Reshape
cancelled by pressing the Esc key or any two mouse • The eight edit handles beyond the perimeter are
buttons at the same time. Reshape edit handles. Move them in or out to
resize and reshape an oval or ellipse.
Reshape
Move
Concentric
Resize
Rotate
Move
• Unlike ovals and ellipses, circles cannot be
• Click and drag the Move handle to move the reshaped. When a Reshape handle is dragged on
object. . a circle, it is only resized.
93.
91

A selected circle, oval or ellipse can be edited in a
edit toolbar for a selected circle, oval or ellipse:

select nearby objects instead of the selected
Concentric Resize object. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79.
• The Concentric Resize edit handle displays on • Click the Open Object edit button to open
the perimeter of a circle between a corner the specification dialog for the selected object.
Reshape handle and the center. Click and drag See “Specification Dialogs” on page 25.
this handle to resize the circle without moving its
center point. • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to copy the
selected object(s) to the system clipboard so they
can be pasted elsewhere. See “Copying and Past-
ing Objects” on page 70.
• Click the Delete edit button to delete the

page 98.
• Click the Center Object edit button to center

an object along a wall within a room or relative to
a cabinet fixture. See “Using Center Object” on
Using Dimensions page 94.
Dimensions can be used to move or resize • Click the View Drawing Group Edit Tools
circle-based objects. See “Moving Objects edit button to modify the selected object’s place
Using Dimensions” on page 154. in the drawing order. See “Drawing Group Edit
Circles, ovals and ellipses can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See “Circle/Oval/
Ellipse Specification Dialog” on page 105.
Moving Objects
Objects can be moved using the edit handles as well
as a variety of edit tools. Multiple selected objects
can also be moved as a group. See “Selecting

Select an object, then click the Move edit handle and
drag it to a new location. When your pointer is over When moved, the selected object moves orthogonal,
the Move handle, it displays a four-headed arrow. or at a right angle to, any of its edges.
As an object is moved, it jumps at set increments
when Grid Snaps are enabled. See “Grid Snaps”
on page 68.
92
Aligning Objects
If a selected object passes over its original location as You can also press the Ctrl key while dragging an
it is being moved, it will snap to that location. object’s Move handle to override move restrictions.
You can temporarily slow the movement of your
mouse as you drag an edit handle by holding down Nudging
the Shift key on your keyboard. You can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to
move a selected object or objects by single Snap
Bumping/Pushing Grid increments in 2D and 3D views. This is
referred to as nudging. See “Grid Snaps” on page 68.
When an object bumps into another object while it is
being moved, it stops. If you do not release the In Plan View
mouse button and continue to drag, however, the
To nudge an object in plan view, select it and press
selected object resumes movement and continues
any of the four arrow keys: Up, Down, Left, or Right.
past the obstructing object.
In 3D Views
Instead of dragging through and past obstructing
objects, you can instead push them. To do this, bump In 3D views, nudging is relative to the selected
an object into an obstructing object and release the surface. If, for example, you select the front of a
mouse button. Then, click and drag the Move edit cabinet in 3D and nudge it to the left, it will move to
handle a second time in the same direction. the left in plan view. If you instead select the back of
a cabinet in 3D and nudge it to the left, it will move
Walls, wall openings, cabinets, furnishings and to the right in plan view.
fixtures, and CAD and CAD-based objects are
examples of objects that can bump into as well as When multiple objects are selected, the surface that
push other objects. was clicked on last is considered the selected surface.
When nudged, all selected objects will move relative
Bumping/Pushing does not affect objects moved to that surface. See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page
using dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using 81.
Dimensions” on page 154.
If an object is rotated, the directions that it can be
Unrestricted Movement nudged in 2D are not affected; however, in 3D, they
are. If, for example, a cabinet is rotated 45º, it will
Many objects have restrictions placed on their nudge to the left in plan view. When nudged in 3D,
movement by their own properties or specification however, it will move at a 45º angle: or parallel to the
settings. Architectural objects, for example, bump selected surface.
into other 3D objects as they are being moved.
Other move restrictions are activated by the Snap Center Object
Settings. See “Snap Behaviors” on page 67. The Center Object edit button allows you to
These restrictions can be overridden when necessary move walls, cabinets and other objects so that
by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging to they are centered along a wall within a room or
move an object. relative to a window or cabinet.
To move an object freely Using Dimensions

1. Select the object. Objects or the selected edges of some objects
can be moved using dimensions. See “Moving
2. Hold down the Ctrl key.
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 154.
3. Click the Move edit handle and drag it to the
new location.
Aligning Objects
It is often important to align objects such as text Using the Mouse Pointer Crosshairs
boxes or walls, or to align objects on different floors.
There are several methods to choose from. Objects can be aligned by eye using the mouse
pointer crosshairs as a reference. This method can
93
help you draw, place and edit objects quickly, easily, To center an object
and with reasonable accuracy, but is not necessarily
as accurate as some of the other approaches 1. Select an object.
described here. See “Crosshairs” on page 21. 2. Click the Center Object edit button.
The mouse pointer crosshairs can be turned on and 3. Move the mouse pointer over the object you
off in the Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on would like to center the selected object relative
page 54. to.
• As the pointer passes over an eligible object, it
Using Snap Settings becomes highlighted and a dashed centering
With Object Snaps, you can snap the edge of a axis line displays.
selected object to that of another. Select an edge of 4. When the desired centering axis displays, click
an object. Drag it to the edge of another object, then once to center the selected object along that axis
release the mouse. line.
With Grid Snaps on and Angle Snaps off, To center an object in a room
select the left side of the object, and drag from the
center move handle. This snaps the selected side to 1. Select an object such a cabinet.
the grid.
2. Click the Center Object edit button.
When both Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps 3. Move the mouse pointer in the room that you
on, objects snap at increments equal to the Snap unit would like to center the selected object relative
specified in the Plan Defaults dialog rather than onto to.
the grid itself. This does not align objects to the grid • As you move the pointer, a centering axis will
unless they were already snapped to the grid. See display along the wall it is closest to.
“Snap Behaviors” on page 67. • The selected object does not have to be inside a
room in order to be centered relative to that
Using Dimensions room.
Create a temporary or manual dimension 4. When a centering axis displays along the correct
relative to an object such as a wall or line, and wall, click once.
relocate the objects to the same dimension. See 5. The object is moved perpendicular to the center-
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on page 154. ing axis.
If you click outside an exterior wall instead of
Text objects can be aligned using settings in
clicking inside, the selected object is centered along
the Text Specification dialog. See “Aligning
Text” on page 162. the edge of the Exterior Room. See “The Exterior
Room” on page 134.
Using Center Object
Aligning Objects on Different Floors
The Center Object edit button can be used to
center a variety of objects either relative to Objects on different floors can be aligned with one
another object. Center Object can be used in floor another using the Reference Display . See “The
plan, elevation, and 3D views. Reference Floor” on page 231.
Resizing Objects
Objects can be resized using the edit handles and To override any movement restrictions caused by
specification dialogs. snap settings or the presence of other objects, press
the Ctrl key while dragging an edit handle.
Using the Edit Handles As an object is resized, any dimensions indicating its
The end, corner and/or side edit handles can be used size will update to reflect your changes. You can use
to resize a selected object. dimensions as references to help you achieve the
correct size for most objects.
94
Reshaping Objects
You can temporarily slow the movement of your Using Dimensions

mouse as you drag an edit handle by holding down
the Shift key on your keyboard. Many objects can be resized by selecting an
edge and then moving that edge using
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using
Most objects can be accurately resized in their
Walls can also be resized using dimensions;
specification dialogs. See “Specification
however, it is important to understand that the
Dialogs” on page 25.
selected edges of other objects cannot be resized
using dimensions - they can only be moved. To
resize an edge, select an adjacent edge and move that
edge instead.
Reshaping Objects
There is a variety of ways to reshape objects using Break
the edit handles, specification dialogs and edit
toolbar buttons. The Break edit tool can be used to break an
individual line-, arc-, or spline-based object
Some objects, notably circles and box-based objects, into two segments. The edges of a polyline-based
cannot be reshaped - only resized. See “Resizing object can also be broken.
Note: The Break edit button is not available for

box-based objects, objects created with the Circle
Depending on the type of object selected, the end, Tools, or some architectural objects such as
corner and/or side edit handles can be used to stairs.
reshape a selected object.
There are two types of breaks: partial and complete.
To override any movement restrictions caused by Partial breaks create a new corner, or pivot point,
snap settings or the presence of other objects, press while complete breaks actually sever an edge into
the Ctrl key while dragging an edit handle. two segments.
You can temporarily slow the movement of your
mouse as you drag an edit handle by holding down To create a partial break
the Shift key on your keyboard. 1. Click the object, object edge, or object center-
line that you want to break into two segments.
2. Click the Break edit button once or press the
A variety of CAD and CAD-based objects can
3 key.
be reshaped by editing values on either the
SELECTED LINE or SELECTED ARC panel of their 3. If you would like to create more than one break,
specification dialogs. See “Polyline Specification click the Sticky Mode edit button.
4. If you want, you can click the Corner Edit
Using Dimensions Handles edit button to toggle off their dis-
play.
Both temporary and manually drawn
5. Click the edge to create a new corner edit handle
dimensions can be used to increase or
at that location and two separate edges on either
decrease the distance between the edge a line- or
side of that handle.
polyline-based object and another, parallel edge or
line. 6. If you enabled Sticky Mode , continue click-
ing to place additional breaks.
7. Click the Main Edit Mode edit button or object’s main edit toolbar.
press the Esc key to return to the selected
95
If you click and drag one of the edit handles on either independent of the object or edge on the other side of
side of the partial break, the edge moves at a right the break. Click on the other edge to select it instead.
angle to itself and another edge forms, connecting
the moved edge with the one on the other side that To remove a break from an edge
does not move.
1. Make sure that Object Snaps are enabled. See
You can remove an edge from a polyline-based “Object Snaps” on page 68.
object by clicking and dragging a corner handle until
2. Select the object that has a break that you want
it snaps to an adjacent corner handle.
to remove.
To create a complete break 3. Click on the corner edit handle associated with
the break that you want to remove and drag it to
1. Click the object, object edge, or object center- an adjacent corner handle.
line that you want to break into two segments.
4. Release the mouse button and the handle that
2. Click the Break edit button. you selected will be removed.
3. Click the Complete Break edit button. Change Line/Arc

4. If you would like to create more than one com- Select an individual line-based or arc-based
plete break, click the Sticky Mode edit object or a segment of a polyline-based object
button. and click the Change Line/Arc edit button to
5. If you want, you can click the Corner Edit convert the selected segment from a line to an arc or
vice versa.
Handles edit button to toggle off their dis-
play.
6. Click on an edge to create a complete break at
that location.
7. If you enabled Sticky Mode , continue click-

ing to place additional breaks.
8. Click the Main Edit Mode edit button or

press the Esc key to return to the selected
Simplify Polyline
object’s main edit toolbar.
The Simplify Polyline edit button is available
The edge that you clicked on will be divided into two
for an open or closed polyline or polyline-
separate sections, one of which will be selected. You
based object with a segment that is unusually short
can now move or edit the selected edge completely
and can cause problems when editing the polyline’s
shape. Click this edit button to remove the segment.
Rotating Objects
Objects can be rotated using the edit handles as well The angles of line-based objects can also be changed
as a variety of edit tools. Multiple selected objects by dragging an end handle in a direction other than
can also be rotated as a group. See “Selecting parallel to the object. The object rotates about the
Objects” on page 79. opposite end point. See “Editing Line-Based
By default, an object or group of objects rotate about
the center point of the selection set. Objects snap to Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
See “Angle Snaps” on page 68.
Using the Edit Handles To override any movement restrictions caused by
Select an object, then click the triangular Rotate edit snap settings or the presence of other objects, press
handle and drag it in any direction. When your the Ctrl key while dragging an edit handle.
pointer is over the Rotate handle, it displays a curved
arrow.
96
Eyedropper and Painter Tools
You can temporarily slow the movement of your Reverse Plan

mouse as you drag an edit handle by holding down
the Shift key on your keyboard. The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way to
mirror a plan so that everything on all floors
of the entire plan is swapped left to right.
The exact angle of some objects such as lines, Select Tools> Reverse Plan to reflect an entire
arcs, walls and the selected edges of polylines plan right to left, as though it were reflected about a
can be specified on either the GENERAL panel, vertical line.
SELECTED LINE panel, or SELECTED ARC panel of
that object’s specification dialog. See “Polyline
Specification Dialog” on page 106.
Eyedropper and Painter Tools

There are a number of tools in Home Designer Suite 4. Notice that your mouse pointer now displays a
that allow you to apply attributes to objects by
clicking on them. spray can icon. This means that the Painter
tool associated with the selected Eyedropper is
• The Eyedropper tools allow you to load attributes now active.
from one object and apply them to other objects.
5. Depending on the tool in use, additional buttons
• The Painter tools allow you to apply attributes to may now display on the edit toolbar. Select the
one or more objects. Depending on the tool, attri- option or options that you need:
butes may be loaded from another object using an
• The Painter Mode buttons. See “Painter
Eyedropper tool or selected from a dialog.
Modes” on page 98, below.
• Some object attributes can also be replaced • Blend Colors with Materials. See “Material
directly from the library. See “To replace an Painter Tools” on page 295.
inserted object” on page 283.
6. Move your mouse pointer over an object that is
similar to the one selected in step 2. If it is
Eyedropper Tools
eligible to receive the loaded attribute(s):
The Eyedropper tools allow you to select attributes • It will become highlighted in the view.
from one object and apply them to other objects. • The left side of the Status bar will report infor-
There are two Eyedropper tools in the program: mation about the attribute to be painted or
loaded.
• Material Eyedropper .
7. Click on an eligible object to apply attributes to
• Object Eyedropper . it as well as to any other identical objects,
depending on which Painter Mode is active.
To use an eyedropper tool
8. Continue clicking to apply attributes until the
1. Select the Eyedropper tool that you want to use Esc key is pressed or another tool is activated.
and notice that the mouse pointer displays an
eyedropper icon.
Painter Tools
2. Move the mouse pointer over an object in the The Painter Tools let you apply attributes to a wide
current view. If the object is eligible for use with variety of objects by clicking on them. When a
the selected Eyedropper: Painter tool is active, the mouse pointer will display
• It will become highlighted in the view. a spray can icon. There are a number of ways to
• The left side of the Status bar will report infor- load attributes into a Painter tool.
mation about that object or the attribute that the • Click on an object using any Eyedropper tool to
Eyedropper can load from it. load its attribute(s). The associated Painter tool
3. Click once to load the object’s attributes so they will become active, ready to paint the loaded
can be applied to other, similar objects. attributes.
97
• Select a material in the Library Browser and target object are replaced by the one being
move the mouse pointer into the current view painted.
window. If that item can be applied in the current
view type, the associated Painter will be active • Marquee Mode is available in plan view for
and you can apply the selection to eligible objects the Fill Style Painter and Object Painter tools. To
in that view. use this mode, click and drag a marquee around
the objects you would like to paint instead of
• When you select the Material Painter tool, clicking on them.
the Select Material dialog will open, allowing
you to choose a material from the library. See • Room Mode applies attributes to a target
“Select Material Dialog” on page 297. object as well to as all instances of that object
type in the same room with a single click. All
Once a Painter tool is loaded, simply click on an instances of the original material throughout the
object to apply the selected attributes. See “To use room are replaced by the one being painted.
the Material Painter tool” on page 295.
• Floor Mode applies attributes to a target
Painter Modes object as well as all instances of that object type
on the same floor with a single click. All
There are five Painter Modes that control how instances of the original material on the current
broadly or narrowly a selected Painter tool will apply floor are replaced by the one being painted.
an attribute or attributes to objects in the current
plan. These modes are listed in the same submenu as • Plan Mode applies attributes to a target
the associated Eyedropper and/or Painter tool. When object as well as all instances of that object type
a Painter tool is active, they are also found on the edit in the entire plan with a single click. All instances
toolbar. In both locations, a small check mark will of the original material throughout the plan are
display at the lower left of the active Mode’s button replaced by the one being painted.
icon. • An additional mode, the Material Painter Com-
ponent Mode , is available for the Material
Painter only. See “Material Painter Modes” on
Rather than modify instances of an object type, the page 295.
Material Painter Modes replace instances of a mate- Home Designer Suite will remember your Painter
rial based on the selected scope. Mode selection until you quit the program. The next
time you launch the program, Object Mode will be
• Object Mode applies attributes to or replaces
active.
a material on individual target objects, one at a
time. All instances of the original material on a
Object Eyedropper
Select Tools> Object Painter> Object Eye- functions like other Eyedropper tools. See “To use an
dropper to apply the attributes of one object eyedropper tool” on page 97.
to other, similar objects. The Object Eyedropper
Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted in a variety of ways: • Objects are deleted if the floor they are placed on
• Select an object or group of objects, then click is deleted. See “Deleting Floors” on page 229.
the Delete edit button, select Edit> Delete If an object has a line with arrow attached to it, the
line with arrow is deleted if the object is deleted. To
from the menu, or press the either the Delete prevent the arrow from being deleted, drag the
or Backspace key on your keyboard. attached end away from the object before deleting it.
• Entire categories of objects can be deleted using
Objects such as roofs and Auto Exterior Dimensions
the Delete Objects dialog.
that are set to automatically rebuild or refresh cannot
98
Delete Objects Dialog
be deleted while that behavior is enabled. a single handle. See “Reshaping Objects” on page
Automatically generated objects cannot be deleted 95.
unless the automatic creation option is disabled.
Delete Surface
Deleting Polyline Edges
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete Surface,
To remove an edge from a polyline, drag a corner then click a surface in the view to temporarily
handle until it overlaps an adjacent corner handle to remove the surface from the current view without
remove the edge between them and merge them into permanently affecting the object. See “Delete 3D
Surface” on page 307.
Delete Objects Dialog

Select Edit> Delete Objects to use the Delete more specified types in one room, on the current
Objects dialog to delete all objects of one or floor, or on all floors in the plan.
1 Select a Delete Scope: 5 Specify which kinds of Walls you want to

delete. See “Walls, Railings, and Fencing” on
• Choose All Rooms on This Floor to delete page 109.
objects in all rooms on the current floor.
To use the Delete Objects dialog
• Choose Single Room to delete objects only in
rooms on the current floor that you specify. 1. Specify the Delete Scope as Single Room or All
Rooms On This Floor.
2 Specify which types of architectural Objects 2. Click Select All to check all the boxes or Clear
you want to delete.
All to uncheck all boxes.
3 Specify which types of CAD objects you want • Check the box for each category of objects you
to delete. See “CAD Objects” on page 101.
want to delete. Check the box beside any heading
4 Specify whether or not to delete Deck to select all of the categories within it; clear the
Framing. See “Deck Framing and Planking” box beside a heading to deselect all of its catego-
on page 138. ries.
99
3. Check the box for each subcategory of objects • Continue clicking on rooms or choose a differ-
that you want to delete. ent Delete Scope.
4. When the scope is set to Single Room: • Click Done when all selections have been
• Move your cursor into the drawing area and deleted.
click in a room of the plan to delete objects of 5. If you select All Rooms On This Floor, you do
the selected type within that room without clos- not need to click in plan view. The Delete button
ing the dialog. becomes available, and clicking it closes the dia-
• Only objects with their center point located in log and deletes the specified objects.
the room are deleted.
Undo and Redo

The Undo and Redo commands allow It is important to note that Undo and Redo
you to both undo the last action do not affect all actions in the program, including:
performed, as well as redo actions that were recently
Undone. • Save and Save As. See “Saving, Exporting, and
Backing Up Files” on page 34.
The 50 most recent actions can be Undone or
• Changes made in the Library Browser. See “The
Redone. Actions that can be Undone and Redone
Library Browser” on page 271.
include creating, editing, and deleting objects.
• Changes made in a dialog while the dialog box is
To Undo an action, select Edit> Undo , click the open. See “Dialogs” on page 24.
Undo button, or press Ctrl + Z on your keyboard. • Changes made to the display by panning the dis-
play or zooming in or out. See “Undo Zoom” on
The Redo command is only available after Undo has
page 64.
been used. To Redo an Undone action, select Edit>
• Changes made to the position of a camera, or its
Redo , click the Redo button or press Ctrl + Rendering Technique. See “Editing 3D Views”
Y on your keyboard. on page 311.
100
Chapter 10:
CAD Objects
The CAD Tools are used to add information to 2D Chapter Contents

views of your model. CAD objects do not affect 3D • The CAD Drawing Tools
objects or display in camera views or overviews, but • Line Specification Dialog
they can be used to add details to plan views. • Arc Specification Dialog
CAD objects are edited much like other objects in • Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
Home Designer Suite. See “Editing Objects” on page • Polylines
79. • Polyline Specification Dialog
• Box Specification Dialog
• Splines
• Displaying CAD Objects
The CAD Drawing Tools

The CAD drawing tools can be accessed by “Editing Line-Based Objects” on page 82 and “Line
selecting the CAD menu or by clicking the Specification Dialog” on page 102.
CAD Tools button.
If either end of a Line with Arrow is snapped
Draw Lines to an object, it maintains its connection if
that object is moved. See “Text Arrows” on page
Select CAD> Draw Line or CAD> 164.
Draw Line With Arrow to draw lines
with or without arrows.
Draw Arc
To draw a line or line with arrow Select CAD > Draw Arc to draw an arc.
1. Select CAD> Draw Line or Draw Line To draw an arc

With Arrow .
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , then click
2. Click and drag in the drawing area to draw a at the arc’s start point.
line.
2. Move the pointer along the desired curve while
3. Continue drawing lines as needed, then select dragging to curve the arc.
another tool when you are finished.
3. Release the mouse button at the end point to
Once a line is created, it can be edited. You can snap complete the arc.
the ends of lines together to form polylines. See
101
Once an arc is created, it can be edited. See “Editing Draw an oval, by clicking and dragging at an angle to
Arc-Based Objects” on page 83 and “Arc define its maximum height and width.
Once an oval is created, it can be edited. See “Editing
You can snap the ends of arcs together with other Circles, Ovals and Ellipses” on page 91 and “Circle/
arcs or with lines to form polylines. See “Polylines” Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog” on page 105.
on page 105.
Draw Ellipse
Draw Polyline
An Ellipse is a set of points with a constant
Select CAD > Draw Polyline to draw a combined distance from two points called
rectangular polyline in either of two ways: foci. An ellipse looks like a stretched circle, or a
• Click in the drawing area to place a 24” x 24” circular surface viewed at an angle.
square polyline at that location.
To draw an ellipse, select CAD> Draw Ellipse
• Click and drag to draw a rectangle of any size. and drag at an angle to define its maximum height
Once drawn, a rectangular polyline can be edited into and width.
any shape. See “Editing Closed Polyline-Based Once an ellipse is created, it can be edited. See
Objects” on page 87 and “Polyline Specification “Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses” on page 91 and
Dialog” on page 106. “Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog” on page
105.
Draw Box
Select CAD > Draw Box to draw a box. Draw Spline
CAD boxes are drawn from corner to corner, A Spline is a curve that passes smoothly
forming a rectangle that can then be edited. Unlike a through a set of points. Select CAD> Draw
polyline, a box always has four 90° corners. See Spline to draw connected line segments that form a
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 89 and “Box spline. See “Splines” on page 107.
Specification Dialog” on page 107. Once created, a spline can be selected and edited. See
“Editing Spline-Based Objects” on page 90 and
Draw Circle “Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 106.
Select CAD > Draw Circle to draw a circle.
Dimension Tools
Draw a Circle by dragging across the Select CAD> Dimensions to access the
diameter, in any direction. Dimension Tools. The Dimension Tools can
If a small circle is needed, draw a larger circle and be used with CAD and architectural objects and are
then resize it. See “Editing Circles, Ovals and discussed in their own chapter. See “Dimensions” on
Ellipses” on page 91 and “Circle/Oval/Ellipse page 147.
Text Tools
Draw Oval Select CAD> Text to access the Text Tools.
Select CAD > Draw Oval to draw an oval, The Text Tools are discussed in their own
which is a four-arc approximation of an chapter. See “Text” on page 157.
ellipse.
Line Specification Dialog

Select a CAD Line, Line With Arrow, or Text The settings on the panels in this dialog are found in
Line With Arrow and click the Open Object the specification and defaults dialogs for a variety of
edit button to open the Line Specification dialog. different objects in the program.
102
Line Specification Dialog
Line Panel
The information on the LINE panel of the Line SELECTED LINE panels of various specification
Specification dialog is similar to that found on the dialogs in the program.
1 Specify the Length and Angle of the selected changed using the line’s edit handles, however. See
line. “Editing Line-Based Objects” on page 82.
2 The X and Y Position coordinates of the 3 Specify the X and Y Position of the selected
selected line’s Start Point display for reference line’s End Point.
but cannot be changed here. The Start Point can be
Line Style Panel

The LINE STYLE panel is found in the specification make up an object. Depending on the type of object
dialogs for many different objects. The settings here selected, some settings may not be available.
control the appearance of the lines and/or arcs that
• Click the Line Color box to specify a new line An additional Display Options setting is available In
color. See “Select Color Dialog” on page 77. the Picture File, Metafile, and PDF File Box
Specification dialogs. See “Pictures, Images, and
Mouse over the Color bar to display a Walkthroughs” on page 325.
tool tip reporting the selected color’s • Check Show Outline to display the selected
RGB values.
object’s border polyline.
• Click the Line Style drop-down list to select from
a variety of available line styles.
Arrow Panel
The ARROW panel is available for any line, arc, open A line, polyline, or spline with an arrow can be
polyline, or spline that can have an arrow: including attached to other objects. It attaches to a closed
dimension lines. The defaults for arrows are set in polyline-based object along its edges, but can attach
the Arrow Defaults dialog. See “Dimension Defaults to an architectural object anywhere within its 2D
Dialog” on page 147. symbol in plan view. If an arrow is attached to
103
another object, deleting that object will also delete objects, including closed polylines and Electrical
the arrow. connections are examples of objects that cannot have
arrows at all.
Some objects, notably Joist Direction Lines, do not
have the Attach or Auto Position settings. Other
• Check Include Arrow to create an arrowhead at • Specify the arrowhead’s Size.

the end of the selected line, arc, or open polyline. • Check the box beside Arrow On Both Ends to
• Select an arrowhead Style from the drop-down create a two-headed arrow.
list. • Place a check in any of the Default boxes to
• Click the Fill Color box to select a color for the restore that setting to the default.
arrowhead to be used if a solid Style is selected.
See “Select Color Dialog” on page 77.
Arc Specification Dialog

Select an arc and click the Open Object edit The settings on the ARC panel are also found on the
button to open the Arc Specification dialog. SELECTED ARC panels for many objects.
Arc Panel
104
Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog
1 These settings define the Arc. Some values are • Start Direction - Specify the angle of a tangent
listed for reference only and cannot be directly line at the start of the arc.
changed here. They can, however, be changed using
the edit handles and edit tools. See “Editing Arc- 3 End Point - Specify information about the end
point of the selected arc.
Based Objects” on page 83.
• End X - Specify the X coordinate for the end of
• The Center X and Center Y Points are the Y
the arc.
and Y coordinates of the center of the arc and dis-
play for reference. They may update as changes • End Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the end of
are made to other settings in this dialog. the arc.
• Radius - Specify the distance between the center • End Direction - The the angle of a tangent line at
of the arc and the arc surface. the end of the arc displays for reference. This dis-
plays for reference only but may update as
• Start Angle - The angle of a line drawn from the
changes are made to other settings in this dialog.
arc center to the arc start points. This displays for
reference only but may update as changes are
4 Define the selected arc’s Chord, which is the
made to other settings in this dialog. straight line between its start and end points.
• End Angle - Specify the angle of a line drawn • Chord Length - The straight line distance
from the arc center to the arc end. between the two ends of the arc.
• Arc Angle - Specify the angle between the center • Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the chord.
of the arc and each end.
• Arc Length - Specify the length of the arc along Line Style Panel
its curve. For information about the LINE STYLE panel, see
“Line Style Panel” on page 103.
2 Start Point - Specify information about the
starting point of the selected arc.
• The Start X and Start Y Position coordinates Arrow Panel
display for reference. They may update as For information about the ARROW panel, see “Arrow
changes are made to other settings in this dialog. Panel” on page 103.
Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog

Select a circle, oval or ellipse and click the Fill Style Panel
Open Object edit button to open the CAD
Circle, Oval or Ellipse Specification dialog. For information about settings on this panel, see “Fill
Style Panel” on page 76.
Line Style Panel
For information about the LINE STYLE panel, see
Polylines
A polyline consists of two or more line and/or You can also create a polyline by drawing lines and/
arc segments that are attached at their or arcs end-to-end, allowing the end of each new
endpoints. Select CAD>CAD> Rectangular object to snap to the end of the previous one.
Polyline, then click and drag from corner to corner to
Line- and arc-based objects will only snap together
create a rectangular-shaped, closed polyline. A
to form a polyline if they are on the same layer and
closed polyline measuring 2’x 2’ (600 mm x 600
share identical attributes such as color, line style, and
mm) can also be created by clicking once while the
arrow specifications. If one end of the polyline is
Rectangular Polyline tool is active.
connected to the other, it becomes a closed polyline.
105
Closed Polylines Open Polylines
Polylines can be copied, moved, reshaped, or resized Once created, polylines can be edited in a variety of
as a single unit. ways. See “Editing Open Polyline-Based Objects”
on page 85 and “Editing Closed Polyline-Based
Polyline Specification Dialog

Select an open polyline, closed polyline, spline. See “Editing Line-Based Objects” on page
spline or Electrical connection and click the 82.
Open Object edit button to open the Polyline
Moving the End of a line segment moves the start of
Specification dialog.
the next connected line, if there is one.
Polyline Panel This panel is similar to the LINE panel of the Line
Specification dialog. See “Line Panel” on page 103.
The POLYLINE panel is found in the specification
dialogs for a variety of objects throughout the
Selected Arc Panel
program. It states:
• The Length of an open polyline; The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the
selected segment of the polyline is an arc as opposed
• The Perimeter of a closed polyline; to a line. It is not available if the selected object is a
• The Area of a closed polyline; spline.
• The Volume of a closed polyline; This panel is similar to the ARC panel of the Arc
• The Number of Lines that form an open polyline Specification dialog. See “Arc Panel” on page 104.
or the perimeter of a closed polyline or polyline
hole; Line Style Panel
• The Number of Holes located inside of a closed This panel is similar to the LINE STYLE panel in the
polyline; Line Specification dialog. See “Line Style Panel” on
• The Hole Perimeter is the total length of the page 103.
perimeter(s) of any holes inside of a closed poly-
line; Fill Style Panel
• The Hole Area is the total area of the holes inside The FILL STYLE panel is found in the specification
of a closed polyline. dialogs for a variety of objects in the program. See
If the polyline is not closed, the Area and Volume are “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
described as “Not closed”. The Volume of a 2D
polyline will always be 0, even if it is closed. Arrow Panel
The ARROW panel is available for most open
Selected Line Panel polylines and splines and is similar to the ARROW
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the panel of the Line Specification dialog. See “Arrow
selected edge of the polyline is a line as opposed to Panel” on page 103.
an arc and is not available if the selected object is a
106
Box Specification Dialog
The ARROW panel is not available for closed

polylines or Electrical Connections.
Box Specification Dialog

Select a CAD box and click the Open Object Fill Style Panel
edit button to open the Box Specification
dialog. See “Draw Box” on page 102. For information about the FILL STYLE panel, see
“Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
Line Style Panel
For information about the LINE STYLE panel, see
“Line Panel” on page 103.
Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes smoothly 4. As soon as two straight spline segments connect
through a set of points. Splines are typically end-to-end, the straight segments become a
used in situations where there is an irregular curve. A curve that passes through the endpoints defined
contour line is a typical example. Splines are useful by the original segments. Each point is called a
wherever a free-flowing curve is needed. vertex.
Once created, splines can be selected and edited. See 5. Draw a few more segments, connecting each to
“Editing Spline-Based Objects” on page 90 and the free end of a previously drawn segment.
“Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 106.
Result
To use the Spline tool
1. Select CAD> Draw Spline .

2. Click and drag to draw the first spline segment As drawn
just as you would a line. A single spline segment
looks identical to a line, in fact. You may need to 6. Notice as additional segments are drawn that the
spline changes the curvature of the previous seg-
turn off Angle Snaps to draw freely. ment to create a continuous curve between the
last three points.
As drawn
Result
3. Draw the second segment from the end of the
7. Form a closed spline by drawing a segment
first at a different angle. Object Snaps
between its two free ends.
should be on to assure that new segments attach
correctly to the ends of previous segments.
Draw segment to close
As drawn
8. The result is an irregular curve that flows

Result smoothly through each vertex.
107
Spline-based objects will only snap together to form

a single spline if they share identical attributes such
Result as color, line style, and arrow specifications.
Displaying CAD Objects

As with architectural objects, the display of CAD display in front of any objects that were created
objects is controlled in the Display Options dialog. before it was.
Once created, however, the drawing order of CAD
CAD objects can be drawn in plan views. They are objects can be customized. See “Drawing Groups”
2D objects only, though, so they cannot be seen in on page 75.
any view other than the one they are drawn in and are
never visible in camera views or overviews. See Line Styles
“Architectural vs CAD Objects” on page 67.
A selection of line styles is available for you to apply
to CAD and terrain objects. See “Line Style Panel”
Drawing Groups on page 103.
Each object in a plan file is included in a Drawing
Group, which influences whether it displays in front Fill Styles
of or behind other objects. By default, all CAD
A selection of fill styles can be applied to closed
objects are placed in the same Drawing Group. Their
CAD and CAD-based architectural objects.
drawing order relative to one another is based on the
order in which they were placed: an object will
108
Chapter 11:
Walls, Railings,
and Fencing
To draw a wall, select one of the Wall Tools, then Chapter Contents
click and drag in a line to the approximate length that • Wall Defaults
you want. When you enclose an area with walls, a • Wall Tools
room is created, complete with floor and ceiling. The • Railing and Deck Tools
Door Tools and Window Tools can be used to add • Fencing Tools
openings, while Dimensions are used to position • Exterior and Interior Walls
walls and openings with accuracy. • Foundation Walls
Walls are the single most important structural • Railing and Deck Tools
component in Home Designer Suite. They define • Room Dividers and Invisible Walls
Rooms, are used to create Foundations, and even • Polygon Shaped Decks
influence how Roofs are built. It is helpful to • Hatch Wall
understand how Wall Type Definitions, wall • Creating Walls
connections, and wall alignment all affect your • Connecting Walls
design. • Displaying Walls
• Measuring Walls
• Editing Walls
• Aligning Walls
• Roof Directives in Walls
• Attic Walls
• Wall Type Definitions
• Wall Specification Dialog
• Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs
• Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
Wall Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by selecting tools are used. It is a good idea to be familiar with
Edit> Default Settings. Click on “Walls” and these settings and how they relate to your style of
click the Edit button to open the Wall Defaults building.
dialog.
The settings in the wall defaults dialog determines
what wall types are drawn when the different wall
109
Exterior and Interior Wall Defaults Dialogs

Specify the initial attributes of walls drawn using the
1 Select the wall type drawn using the Exterior
Exterior and Interior Wall tools in the Wall tool.
Exterior and Interior Wall Defaults dialogs. See
“Wall Tools” on page 110. 2 Select the wall type drawn using the Interior
Wall tool.
3 Uncheck Auto Rebuild Attic Walls to prevent

Attic walls from automatically generating when
the model changes. When checked, Attic Walls are
automatically generated. See “Attic Walls” on page
123.
Wall Tools
Select Build> Wall to access the Wall Tools. The
type of wall drawn by each wall tool is specified in Note: Whether a wall is recognized as an exterior
its corresponding defaults dialog. or interior wall by the program is determined by its
position in the model, not by the tool used to draw
The Curved Wall tools are similar to their it. See “Exterior and Interior Walls” on page 112.
corresponding Straight Wall Tools. Select Build>
Wall to access these tools as well. Glass Walls and Half-Walls
Exterior Walls The Straight Glass Wall tool creates single-
layer glass walls that do not cut the surfaces of
The Exterior Wall and Curved Exterior the floor, ceiling, or adjacent walls.
Wall tools draw walls using the default
The Half-Wall and Curved Half-Wall
wall type specified for exterior walls in the Exterior/
tools create solid railings: walls that are
Interior Wall Defaults dialog. See “Exterior and
36” (900 mm) high topped with a handrail.
Interior Walls” on page 112.
Interior Walls Room Dividers

Room Dividers are Invisible walls with a
The Interior Wall and Curved Interior
thickness of 0” (mm) that are used to define
Wall tools draw walls using the wall type
separate room areas in a plan. They can display in
specified for interior walls. The interior wall type is
plan view but not in 3D views. See “Room Dividers
defined in the Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults dialog.
and Invisible Walls” on page 113.
110
Railing and Deck Tools
Hatch Wall to. You can then select the hatch and resize it if you
want to only hatch a portion of a wall. See “Hatch
The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch pattern Wall” on page 114.
to a wall that displays in plan views. You must
click the wall that you want to apply the hatch pattern
Railing and Deck Tools

Railings are a special type of wall that have a
specified height rather than building all the way to a
room’s ceiling height.
Select Build> Railing and Deck to access the
Railing and Deck Tools. Railings are typically
used to define interior spaces, while the various Deck
tools are used to define exterior Deck rooms.
With the exception of the Polygon Shaped Deck tool,
each of the tools in this family have both Straight and
Curved versions, and are created and edited just like
walls. See “Creating Walls” on page 114.
Deck Railing
To create a break in a railing for a stairway or other
The Straight Deck Railing and Curved
access, use a Doorway . This keeps the railing Deck Railing tools draw decks, complete
continuous and maintains room definition. See with framing and bounded by a railing. If a
“Room Definition” on page 131. foundation level exists, supports for the deck are also
When first drawn, railings are specified as No created. See “Decks” on page 138.
Locate, which prevents Auto Exterior Dimensions When a room is defined using deck railing, its Room
from locating them. This attribute may also be Type is automatically set to “Deck”. See “Decks” on
helpful if you do not want a railing to divide an area page 138.
into two separate rooms. See “General Panel” on
page 125. Deck Edges
The Straight Deck Edge and Curved
Railings Deck Edge draw decks complete with
The Railing and Curved Railing tools framing, but without a railing. No deck supports are
create railings that are primarily used to created.
define interior spaces.
Deck Railings
Railings are ideal for a number of tasks:
• Creating changes in floor and/or ceiling height.
See “Floor and Ceiling Heights” on page 138.
• Creating stairwells. See “Creating a Stairwell” on
page 243.
Deck Edges
Polygon Shaped Deck

The Polygon Shaped Deck tool opens the
New Polygon Shaped Deck dialog, where
you can specify the exact size and number of sides of
a new polygonal deck room and then click in plan
111
view to create that deck room. See “Polygon Shaped • Baluster creates railings composed of newel
Decks” on page 114. posts, balusters, a railing, and an optional bottom
rail.
Railing Types • Solid produces a framed railing wall, or Half
A variety of railing types can be specified in the Wall. See “Glass Walls and Half-Walls” on page
Railing and Deck Railing Specification dialogs. See 110.
“Rail Style Panel” on page 127. Available types • If Panels is selected, you can choose a panel style
include: such as glass or ironwork from the library. See
“Newels/Balusters Panel” on page 129.
Newels and balusters do not display in plan view.
Fencing Tools
Fencing is a special type of wall that is designed to and follows the shape of the terrain. See “Terrain”
follow the terrain rather than define a room with a on page 349.
flat floor platform.
Select Build> Fencing or click the Fencing
Tools to access the fencing tools. Fencing
automatically follows the shape of the terrain.
The Fencing and Curved Fencing tools
are used to draw fences, which are
similar to railings but by default do not define room You can specify a fence panel style in the Fencing
areas. Fencing is created and edited much like walls Specification dialog. See “Railing and Fencing
and railings, and normally used outside of a building Specification Dialogs” on page 127.
Exterior and Interior Walls

Most walls are drawn using either the To draw a wall using a different wall type, you can
Straight Exterior Wall and Straight change the default wall type for either tool in the
Interior Wall tools. Exterior and Interior Wall Defaults dialogs. You can
also draw a wall using the default type and then
Exterior and interior walls can also be
change the wall type in the Wall Specification
drawn using the Curved Exterior Wall
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 125.
and Curved Interior Wall tools.
Whether a wall is recognized by the program as an
The only difference between the Exterior and Interior
actual exterior or interior wall is based on its position
Wall Tools is the wall type used: Exterior Walls use a
in the model, not by which tool you used to draw the
wall type set up to model a wall with siding, while
wall.
Interior Walls model interior walls with sheetrock.
See “Wall Type Definitions” on page 124. • Any wall or wall segment that is entirely sur-
rounded by interior room areas is considered to be
You can specify the default wall type for each tool in an interior wall.
the Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults dialog. See
“Exterior and Interior Wall Defaults Dialogs” on • Any wall or wall segment that defines an exterior
page 110. room or is exposed to the outside of the building
is considered to be an exterior wall. See “Room
Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the interior and floor is created. See “Building a Foundation” on
exterior walls but also have a footing. Foundation page 222.
walls are created automatically when a foundation
112
Room Dividers and Invisible Walls
Brick ledges are represented in plan view:

• In stem wall foundations, brick ledge lines are on
the “Slabs” layer.
• In monolithic slab foundations, they are on the
“Walls, Foundation” layer.
See “In Plan View” on page 117.
In order for a brick ledge to be produced, the
foundation wall material directly under the brick
ledge must be a concrete material and the wall
Brick Ledges material that drops into the brick ledge must be a
masonry material such as brick.
Brick ledges can be produced in monolithic slab and
stem wall foundations. They do not extend under
door openings in monolithic slab foundations.
Room Dividers and Invisible Walls

The Room Divider tool is used to define Wall(s) Invisible or Make Wall(s) Visible
separate room areas in a plan; typically, by edit button. See “General Panel” on page 125.
dividing a large room area into two or more smaller
areas. See “Room Definition” on page 131. Room Dividers are placed on the “Walls, Invisible”
layer by default, as are walls that are specified as
Common uses for Room Dividers include Invisible.
dividing areas of an open floor plan into areas with
Walls specified as Invisible can display in plan view
different purposes.
but not in 3D views or the Materials List. See
“Displaying Walls” on page 117.
It is not possible to place doors or windows into an
Invisible wall; however, if a wall with openings in it
is specified as Invisible, any openings in it will
remain.
Important Notes on Invisible Walls

Room Dividers separate this dining area
• Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calculated sepa-
from adjacent rooms
rately for rooms divided by Invisible walls.
Room Dividers can also be used to define areas with • Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto Place
different floor or ceiling materials or heights.
Outlets tool; it functions as though they were
Room Dividers are simply walls that are not present.
specified as Invisible and have a single layer of an • Cabinets, fixtures and furniture can be moved
“Air Gap” material with a thickness of 0” (mm). freely through Invisible walls.
If a zero-thickness Room Divider separates two • Invisible walls can be drawn through a cabinet to
rooms with different floor and/or ceiling heights, its attach to the wall behind.
wall type will be changed to the current plan’s • Room Dividers are automatically generated to
default Interior Wall so that the platform step created connect “island” rooms to the larger structure
by the height difference can be enclosed. around them. See “Room Definition” on page
131.
Invisible Walls
Any wall, regardless of its wall type or thickness, can
also be specified as Invisible - or vie versa - in the
Wall Specification dialog or by clicking the Make
113
Polygon Shaped Decks

Select Build> Railing and Deck> Polygon To create a polygon shaped deck
Shaped Deck to open the New Polygon
Shaped Deck dialog and create a polygon shaped 1. Click the radio button beside an option to spec-
deck with regular sides. ify whether you want to Define Polygon by
Side Length, Radius to Corner or Radius to
Side.
2. Specify the desired Number of Sides.
3. Specify the desired Side Length or,
4. Specify the desired Radius.
5. Uncheck Include Railing to produce a deck
platform defined by Deck Edges. This option is
not available in the New Polygon Shaped
Room dialog.
6. Click OK, then click once in plan view to create
the specified polygon shaped deck.
The settings in this dialog are saved between
program sessions.
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool can be used to fill wall If you use the Hatch Wall tool to apply a hatch
segments with a single hatch pattern in plan pattern to a wall that has been divided into multiple
view.
segments using the Break edit tool, the pattern is
To apply wall hatching, select Build> Wall> Hatch only applied to the segment that you clicked on. See
Wall , then click on a wall. The hatch pattern “Break” on page 95.
covers the entire length and width of the wall Like doors and windows, wall hatching cannot
segment. extend across multiple wall segments. Unlike these
objects, hatching cannot be located by dimension
Note: The Hatch Wall tool cannot be used to lines.
apply a hatch pattern to Invisible Walls. See
“Room Dividers and Invisible Walls” on page 113. The wall hatch pattern can be specified in the Wall
Hatch Specification dialog. See “Wall Hatch
Hatch Wall places a hatch pattern across all
layers of the selected wall layers, covering any fill When editing or deleting wall hatching, make sure
styles specified for that wall type. that it is selected rather than the wall by noting that
“Wall Hatching” displays in the Status Bar. See “The
Once created, wall hatching can be selected, edited Status Bar” on page 26.
and deleted much like other line-based objects. See
“Editing Line-Based Objects” on page 82.
Creating Walls
Walls, railings, and fencing are drawn similar to the • Exterior walls can be generated automatically
way CAD lines are drawn: select a Wall Tool and when a new floor is built by using another floor as
then click and drag from end to end in the drawing a model. See “Adding Floors” on page 228.
area. Walls can be drawn in plan view, camera views, • Foundation walls are created when a foundation is
and overviews. See “Draw Lines” on page 101. automatically generated on Floor 0. See “Founda-
There are several other ways that walls can be tions” on page 221.
created in Home Designer Suite:
114
Creating Walls
• Attic walls are generated automatically when the

To correct the wall’s angle, click on the Caution
program perceives a gap between a wall that
symbol that displays over the wall and select Fix Off
defines a room and the roof above. See “Attic
Angle Wall from the contextual menu. In the Fix Off
Angle Wall dialog:
• The Space Planning Assistant creates room
boxes which can be arranged and then converted
into walls. See “Space Planning” on page 41.
Drawing Walls
Drawing walls to create a floor plan is simple if you
keep a few things in mind:
• The Old Angle is stated for reference.
• Draw exterior walls first to define the building’s
footprint, then draw the interior walls after the • Enter a New Angle in the text field.
perimeter is in place. • Specify whether to Lock the Start, Center, or
• It is easiest to draw walls at the approximate loca- End point of the wall when its angle is changed.
tion and length needed and then move or resize There are several other ways to fix a selected wall if
them precisely using dimensions later. See it has been drawn at an off angle:
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on page
154. • Click the Open Object edit button and spec-
• When drawing and positioning exterior walls, ify the correct angle. See “General Panel” on page
125.
make sure Grid Snaps are enabled. Once
these walls are in place, you may prefer to turn • Click and drag an end edit handle until the wall
Grid Snaps off to draw and position interior walls snaps to an Allowed Angle. See “Angle Snaps”
and other objects. See “Grid Snaps” on page 68. on page 68.
• As walls are drawn, “sticky” points identify • If the wall in question should be aligned with a
points that are either collinear or orthogonal to the wall directly above or below it, click the Align
end points of other walls, making alignment eas- with Wall Above or Align with Wall Below
ier. See “Extension Snaps” on page 68.
edit button. See “Aligning Walls” on page
• When walls enclose an area to form a room, the 121.
program will orient all exterior walls so that the
siding material faces outward. You can also suppress the Caution symbol by
specifying the needed angle in the wall’s
• To flip the layers of a wall after it is drawn, select specification dialog.
it and click the Reverse Layers edit button. Although not recommended unless the walls in
See “Editing Walls” on page 119. question are Fencing, Terrain Walls, and/or
• Initial wall heights are determined by the default Retaining Walls, you can choose to Ignore Off
floor and ceiling heights of the current floor. Angle Wall or Ignore All Off Angle Walls by
clicking on the Caution symbol that displays
Wall Angles over an off angle wall. See “Fencing Tools” on page
With very few exceptions, walls should be drawn and 112 and “Terrain Wall and Curb Tools” on page 355.
edited with Angle Snaps enabled. Walls that are
drawn at irregular angles can result in wall
Wall Positioning
connection, alignment, and room definition The recommended method of drawing walls is to
problems. draw them at their approximate location and length,
If a wall is drawn at an off angle, the Off Angle Wall then move them into position with accuracy using
dimensions. To make this task quick and efficient:
icon will follow the mouse pointer and a Caution
• Notice the temporary wall that displays as you
symbol will display over the problem wall in draw. Its length and angle display in the Status
plan view. Bar at the bottom of the window and adjust as you
115
move the mouse. Release the mouse button to are drawing, you do not need to position walls
draw the wall at the displayed length and angle. precisely when you first draw them: they can be
See “The Status Bar” on page 26. easily moved into place at any time. See “Editing
• Use Snaps to help ensure proper wall alignment Walls” on page 119.
and orientation. See “Snap Behaviors” on page
67. Drawing Curved Walls
Once walls are drawn, they can be accurately Drawing a curved wall, curved railing, or curved
dimensioned and moved as needed. See “Measuring fence is similar to drawing a CAD arc. See “Draw
Walls” on page 118. Arc” on page 101.
A straight wall can also be converted into a curved
Wall Openings
wall and vice versa using the Change Line/Arc
To create a door or doorway, do not draw wall edit button. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 96.
sections with a gap between them. Walls should be
drawn to completely enclose rooms, and then door
To create a room in the shape of a circle,
and window objects should be placed in the walls to you must draw two curved walls.
create openings later. See “Doors” on page 169 and
“Windows” on page 183.
Space Planning Assistant
Temporary Dimensions The Space Planning Assistant Tools allow
you to place and arrange room boxes that can
Temporary dimensions will display along the length then be converted into a fully editable house plan,
of a wall as it is drawn, helping you draw walls to the including walls. See “Space Planning” on page 41.
desired length. Although dimensions display as you
Connecting Walls
When walls are drawn sufficiently close to one Fix Wall Connections
another, they will snap together to form an
intersection. This snapping occurs when the walls’ Occasionally, intersecting walls may not properly
center lines are within a distance defined by the connect. When this is the case and the connection in
larger of the two walls’ widths and will occur even question is on the current floor, a Caution
when Object Snaps are turned off. See “Object symbol will display at the problem location in plan
Snaps” on page 68. view and the Connect Walls icon will follow your
If the two walls in question have identical mouse pointer.
specifications and are collinear, they will merge to
become a single wall. See “Aligning Collinear Click on the Caution symbol that displays over
Walls” on page 121. the wall to open a contextual menu:
When three or more walls connect to form a • Select Delete to delete the wall.
completely enclosed area, that area defines a room. • Select Ignore Unconnected Wall to leave the
See “Rooms” on page 131. wall unchanged and suppress the Caution symbol.
When walls snap together to form an intersection and
Object Snaps are enabled, the program joins them at
Removing Wall Breaks
their Main Layers. See “Aligning Walls” on page
The Break edit tool allows you to break a wall
121.
into two or more separate wall segments. See
• The wall that is being drawn or edited will move, “Break” on page 95.
lengthen, or shorten slightly to meet the other
wall. To merge two collinear walls separated by a break,
select one of the segments, then click on the end edit
• The other wall will not move; however, its length handle located at the break and drag it a few plan
may be affected. inches (mm) away from the break.
116
Displaying Walls
If the two walls do not merge, either one or both Specification dialog for each wall and determine
walls have been moved and they are no longer how they differ. See “Wall Hatch Specification
collinear, or one or both has been edited in some way Dialog” on page 130.
and they are no longer identical. Open the Wall
Displaying Walls
The display of walls in all views is controlled
pointer and a Caution symbol will display at
in the Display Options dialog. See “Layer
the problem location.
Attributes” on page 74.
The recommended response to either situation is to
If a “Walls” layer is turned off in plan view, any
fix the problem, although you can choose to ignore it
doors and windows placed in walls on that layer will
if you prefer. See “Wall Angles” on page 115 and
not display, either. See “Displaying Doors” on page
“Fix Wall Connections” on page 116.
171 and “Displaying Windows” on page 186.
If an issue has been ignored, notification icons for it
In Plan View will not display. Select Tools> Checks> Reset
Notification Icons to display any suppressed
There are several options for controlling how walls notifications so that any wall angle or connection
are displayed in plan view. In the Display Options problems can be corrected.
dialog, you can specify whether or not various types
of walls display. Walls are placed on layers with In 3D Views
“Walls” at the beginning of the layer name, such as
“Walls, Normal”. As in plan view, the display of walls can be
controlled by layer in the Display Options dialog.
Note: In plan view, railings not specified as Solid When a camera is located on the exterior of a
display their Main Layer regardless of whether structure, you can select 3D> Camera View
“Walls, Layers” or “Walls, Main Layer Only” is Options> Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls
turned on.
, allowing the interior to be seen as you rotate
Foundation Walls have footings that display in plan around the model. Interior walls set as Attic walls are
view as long as the “Footings” layer is turned on. also hidden when this setting is active.
Brick ledge lines can also display. See “Displaying While most architectural objects in the program can
Foundations” on page 222. display in both floor plan and 3D views, a few
It is sometimes helpful to display the walls from a cannot. Invisible walls and Wall Hatching are
floor other than the current floor. To do this, select examples of objects that do not display in 3D.
and display a reference floor. See “The Reference Unlike in plan view, doors and windows placed in a
Floor” on page 231. wall can display in 3D views even if the wall’s layer
is turned off..
Notification Icons
Occasionally, the program may detect a problem
Wall Materials
with one or more walls in a plan. When this is the There are several ways that materials can be assigned
case, notification icons will display on the floor to walls. See “Rooms” on page 131.
where the problem has occurred:
When you draw a wall, it uses the materials specified
• If a wall is drawn at an off angle, the Off Angle in its wall type definition. See “Wall Type
Wall icon will follow the mouse pointer and a Definitions” on page 124.
Caution symbol will display over the prob- You can change the surface material of an individual
lem wall in plan view. wall in the Wall Specification dialog. If you select
• If there is a problem with a wall connection, the “Use Default” as the material and the wall is used to
define a room, the program refers to the material
Connect Walls icon will follow the mouse
specified in the Room Specification dialog. See
“Wall Specification Dialog” on page 124.
117
You can also change a room’s wall material in the here when those walls are not specified as Foun-
Room Specification dialog. See “Materials Panel” dation.
on page 296. To restore the default Wall Type • Insulation - Insulation is calculated for all exte-
material, select Use Default in the Select Material rior walls that are not defined as Railings, and
dialog. See “Select Material Dialog” on page 297. have one Framing layers. Insulation thickness is
Wall materials can also be changed using the Mate- equal to that of the framing layer. See “Exterior
and Interior Walls” on page 112.
rial Painter tool, but bear in mind that
depending on which Material Painter Mode is in use, • Wallboard - Lists all materials located inside of
only a portion of the wall may be painted and that the each wall’s Main Layer, such as drywall. Includes
entire room may be affected rather than the all materials aside from framing, concrete, and
individual wall. See “Material Painter and Walls” on rebar in walls that do not define rooms.
page 296.
Does not include materials specified in either the
Room or Wall Specification dialog. See “Materi-
Note: Wall materials that are specified on the als Panel” on page 127.
Materials panel of either the Wall or Room Specifi-
cation dialog are not calculated in the Materials • Interior Trim - Lists base, crown and chair rail
List. moldings
• Foundation - Lists the concrete for all walls
In the Materials List specified as Foundation as well as their footings.
See “Foundation Walls” on page 112.
The materials that make up wall assemblies are listed
under different Categories in the Materials List: With the exception of wallboard, windows and doors
• Siding - Lists all materials located outside of each are taken into account in the calculation of these
wall’s Main Layer, such as siding, sheathing, and totals.
housewrap. Additional wall-related information is listed in the
• Framing - Lists the Main Layer material for all General category, including the total linear feet of
walls as well as railings specified as Solid. Non- each wall type per floor and the thermal envelope
framed walls’ Main Layer materials are also listed wall area per floor. See “Conditioned Area” on page
382.
Measuring Walls
Accurate wall measurements are an essential aspect that your Dimension Defaults are set up to meet your
of any drawing, and can be achieved by following needs. See “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page
two basic rules: 147.
• Be aware of what part of a wall assembly dimen- If a wall is specified as Invisible, dimensions will
sions are locating; locate it at its centerline regardless of your
• Position walls using dimensions rather than edit Dimension Defaults settings. If the Invisible wall
handles or edit tools. divides rooms with different floor heights,
dimensions will locate the edge of the wall facing the
These rules can easily be met when you keep the room where the floor is lower.
following recommendations in mind.
For information about changing the value reported in Edit Dimension Lines
a dimension line label, see “Using Dimensions” on
Once a dimension line has been drawn, its extension
page 120.
lines can be edited to locate a number of locations on
a wall assembly:
Use Dimension Defaults
• The exterior surface
Dimensions can be set to locate walls at their
• The Main Layer’s exterior
Dimension Layers or at their surfaces. Before
drawing dimensions - and particularly, before using • The center line of the wall assembly
them to move your walls into position - make sure • The Main Layer’s center line
118
Editing Walls
• The Main Layer’s interior important if you forego positioning walls using
• The interior surface dimensions in favor of using edit handles to move
them.
See “Editing Extension Lines” on page 152.
Using Grid Snaps is recommended when
Moving Walls Using Dimensions you are laying out exterior shell walls, but
By far, the most precise method of positioning walls may be inconvenient when positioning interior
walls or other objects.
is using dimension lines. To produce accurate
measurements, remember to:
Angle Snaps make it easy to accurately draw walls
• Be aware of what part of your walls is being at regular angles, ensuring walls that are truly
located by dimensions. parallel or perpendicular to one another and
• Avoid specifying dimension values with greater separated by consistent distances.
accuracy than your dimensions are set to display.
See “Format Panel” on page 148. No Locate
See “Using Dimensions” on page 120. If a wall is specified as No Locate in the Wall
Specification dialog, it will be ignored by Auto
Use Object, Angle and Grid Snaps Exterior Dimensions in plan view, as will any
Object Snaps, Angle Snaps, and Grid Snaps make it doors or windows placed in it. See “Dimensions” on
easier to align walls when they are being drawn as page 147.
well as when they are edited. See “Snap Behaviors” By default, Railings, Deck Railings, and Room
on page 67. Dividers are specified as No Locate. See “General
Object Snaps help to ensure consistent wall Panel” on page 125.
connections and are particularly helpful when Once a dimension line has been created, it can be
aligning collinear walls. edited so that it locates a No Locate wall or railing
When Grid Snaps are enabled, walls are drawn on a that is perpendicular to it. See Editing Dimension
regularly spaced grid, which helps avoid inaccurate Lines.
wall placement. This can become particularly
Editing Walls
Walls can be selected in all views. When a wall is Using the Edit Handles
selected, it displays edit handles and an edit toolbar
that can be used to modify it in various ways. When a A selected wall can be modified in a variety of ways
wall is selected, temporary dimensions will also using its edit handles in any view. The handles that
display. are available will depend on the current view type.
• In plan view, straight and curved walls can be
The ways in which a wall can be edited depend on
edited like other line- and arc-based objects. See
the current view and which edge is selected. See
“Editing Line-Based Objects” on page 82 and
“Selecting Objects” on page 79.
“Editing Arc-Based Objects” on page 83.
Selecting Walls • In a camera view or overview, click on the top
surface of a wall to display the same edit handles
Like other objects, walls can be selected in a variety as in plan view, allowing you to rotate, move, and
of ways. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79. extend or shorten the length of the wall.
In plan view, if wall hatching has been applied to a • Moving a wall in any view will move any cabi-
wall using the Hatch Wall tool, the hatching nets attached to that wall, as well.
• In an Elevation view, the side edges of straight
may be selected first. Click Select Next Object
walls can be moved to shorten or lengthen the
to select the wall itself. See “Hatch Wall” on page
segment. Curved walls can be shortened in this
114.
manner, but not lengthened.
119
• In a camera view or overview, click on an interior available: Move Along Rails . When this option
or exterior surface to display an edit handle at the is used, the selected wall both resizes and changes
center of each side edge, allowing you to shorten position so that it remains connected to the other
or lengthen the wall. Curved walls can be short- walls when you press the Enter key.
ened in this manner, but not lengthened.
• When a wall is connected to other walls, it can
only be moved perpendicular to itself or, in the
case of curved walls, perpendicular to its chord,
using the Move edit handle.
In the Specification Dialog

The appearance and structure of walls can be Move Along Rails resizes
customized in the Wall Specification dialog. and moves a selected wall.
See “Wall Specification Dialog” on page 124.
Depending on your Dimension Defaults settings,
The characteristics of the roof directly above a dimension lines may locate wall surfaces or Main
selected wall can also be specified in the Wall Layers. See “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page
Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page 126. 147.
Using the Edit Tools Wall Thickness

A selected wall or walls can be edited in a variety of The initial thickness of a wall is determined by its
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The wall type.
Edit Toolbar” on page 23.
You can specify a selected wall’s thickness in its Wall
Using Dimensions Specification dialog. See “General Panel” on page
125.
Automatic, manually-drawn, and temporary
dimension lines can be used to both resize and If a selected wall’s thickness is changed:
move walls with accuracy. Select a wall, then click • A copy of the wall’s wall type is created with the
on a dimension line that locates it and type in the same name but appended with a number equal to
value that you need. See “Moving Objects Using the thickness of the structural layer, and that new
Dimensions” on page 154. type is assigned to the wall.
When a wall is resized using dimensions, the inline • The change in thickness will be applied to new
text field used to edit the dimension will have three wall type’s structural layer.
unique buttons: • The structural layer must be at least 1/16” thick,
and the wall’s thickness cannot be less than the
• Horizontal walls have Move Left End , Move
original wall type’s total thickness minus the
Both Ends , and Move Right End . thickness of its structural layer.
• Vertical walls have Move Top End , Move If a wall type’s thickness is modified, the wall will
resize about the outside edge of its structural Layer.
Both Ends , and Move Bottom End . In some instances, the wall may appear to move as a
Choose the option that you want to use before result of changes made to the thicknesses of its
pressing the Enter key. layers.
Move Left End Move Right End Wall Heights

The height of a wall is controlled by the ceiling
height of the room(s) it defines. If the ceiling or floor
Move Both Ends height of a room is changed, the height of the walls
that define it also change.
If both ends of the selected wall intersect walls that • The initial ceiling height for all rooms on a floor
are not parallel to one another, a fourth option will be is set in the Floor Defaults dialog for that floor.
120
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations
See “Floor Level Defaults” on page 132. When- • By dragging the end edit handles. See “Editing
ever possible, it is best to set all ceiling heights Line-Based Objects” on page 82 and “Editing
using the default. Arc-Based Objects” on page 83.
• The ceiling height of a single room can be set in Bear in mind that if you try to resize a wall by a
its Room Specification dialog. See “General small amount using one of its edit handles and that
Panel” on page 142. wall is connected to another wall at that end, its
length will not change because its end will snap back
Wall Length to the existing intersection. See “Connecting Walls”
on page 116.
Wall length can be modified in several different
ways: The most accurate way to specify wall length is using
• Using dimensions. See “Measuring Walls” on dimensions. By default, wall length is measured at
page 118. the outside edge of the Main Layer. You can instead
specify that dimension lines locate surfaces in the
• In the Wall Specification dialog. See “General Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Dimension
Panel” on page 125. Defaults Dialog” on page 147.
• Using the Break edit tool to divide a selected
wall into two segments. See “Break” on page 95.
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a curved
wall with a locked center, the curved wall extends
along its curve and the straight wall will either
lengthen or shorten as needed to stay connected to
the curved wall.
If the connection between the straight and curved
wall cannot be maintained because of the curved
wall’s radius, it will be broken.
Aligning Walls
Wall alignment refers to the way wall segments line Aligning Collinear Walls
up with one another, either on the same floor or on
the floor above or below. Walls may need to be Collinear walls are parallel walls connected end to
aligned in a variety of situations. end and drawn on the same floor. When collinear
walls join end-to-end, the walls snap together. If
To make alignment easier when drawing or resizing these walls have the same wall type and identical
walls, “sticky” points identify points that are either specifications, and if Object Snaps are enabled, they
collinear or orthogonal to the end points of other will merge to become a single wall segment.
walls. See “Extension Snaps” on page 68.
121
Creating a Nook Aligning Walls Between Floors

Walls can be aligned across an opening such as a Walls can be aligned between floors by clicking the
nook, so that they are collinear, using the Break Align With Wall Above and Align With Wall
edit tool. Below edit buttons.
To align walls across a gap
In order for these edit tools to be available,
1. Select a wall to build a nook into and click the the areas of the walls in question must be
partially aligned, or overlapping.
Break edit button.
2. Click at a point on the wall close to one side of To align walls between floors
the nook area. Do not worry about exact place-
ment right now. 1. Select a wall that you want to align with another
3. Click again near the other side of the nook. Two wall either above or below it.
short lines at each location where you clicked 2. If the wall is above or below the other wall along
indicate Breaks in the walls. only part of its length, you must click on it along
that part. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Dis-
play> Reference Display On to help make
sure you click on the correct part of the wall.
3. When you have selected the wall at the desired
location, click either the Align With Wall
Above or Align With Wall Below edit
button.
Place Wall Position these Aligning Curved Walls Between

Breaks here walls as needed Floors
4. Right-click the middle section of the wall to Curved walls are aligned between floors using the
select the wall section. same technique to align straight walls. If the centers
5. Click the middle Move handle and drag the wall and radii of the walls are within a few inches of each
outward. other, the Align With Wall Above and Align
6. Draw side walls to connect the wall back to the With Wall Below edit buttons are enabled for
rest of the house. the selected wall. The selected curved wall will take
7. Move these short walls using dimensions to on the radius and center of the referenced wall when
accurately size the nook. the walls are aligned.
Roof Directives in Walls

To automatically generate a roof plane using values instead specify a gable or shed roof above the
other than the defaults or to not generate a roof plane selected wall.
bearing on a particular wall (as for a gable or the • Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable with a
sides of a shed roof), you can change the settings in ridge centered above the selected wall(s).
the Wall Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel” on
page 126. • Check High Shed/Gable Wall for the side walls
or the wall under the high side of a shed roof.
Hip, Gable, and Shed Roofs • You can also select a wall and click the Change
By default, the program will produce a roof plane to Gable Wall(s) edit button, or change it
over each exterior wall to create a hip roof. You can back by clicking the Change to Hip Wall(s)
edit button.
122
Attic Walls
Pitch generate on Full Gable Walls. See “Roof Returns” on

page 263.
The default pitch for roof planes is set in the Build
Roof dialog. However, any exterior wall can define
Extend Slope Downward
the pitch of the roof plane built above it.
Check Extend Slope Downward to extend the roof
You can also specify a second, upper pitch above a
plane downward over a bump out, instead of creating
given wall. Mansard, gambrel, gull wing and half-hip
additional roof planes. The two connecting walls that
are examples of roof styles that use two pitches. See
create the bump out must be Full Gable walls.
“Roof Tutorial” on page 43 of the User’s Guide.
In the following image, the bearing wall of the bump
Roof Returns out has Extend Slope Downward checked. The two
short side walls are Full Gable Walls.
Check Auto Roof Return to generate roof returns on
the selected wall. In most cases, roof returns only
Full Gable
Wall
Before After
Extend Slope
Downward
Attic Walls
In Home Designer Suite, walls are built between the • Some interior Attic Walls can be suppressed by
floor and ceiling platforms of the current floor. See specifying space they enclose as a Shelf Ceiling.
“Floor and Ceiling Heights” on page 138. When the See “Shelf Ceilings” on page 139.
program detects an open space between a wall and
the roof plane above it, it automatically creates an • Select the Attic Wall and Delete it. The pro-
Attic Wall on the floor above that wall to fill in the gram will specify the wall as Invisible automati-
gap. cally. If you delete this Invisible wall, a new Attic
Wall will be created.
Attic Walls are typically found above Full Gable
Walls, forming a gable or closing the top portion of a Knee Walls
side wall of a shed roof. Attic Walls are often found
on the Attic floor, but can be generated on other Knee Walls are a bit like Attic Walls in that they are
floors, as well. See “The Attic Floor” on page 231. not meant to generate to full ceiling height. Instead,
they build upward until they encounter a roof plane.
Unlike Attic Walls, however, Knee Walls are used in
If you do not want to keep a particular Attic the interior of a structure, typically to separate
Wall in your plan, specify it as Invisible. See
unused areas from rooms on the upper floor of a
“Room Dividers and Invisible Walls” on page 113.
story-and-a-half structure. See “Room Types” on
page 132.
Removing Attic Walls
Home Designer Suite does not specify walls as Knee
Occasionally, the program will generate an Attic Walls automatically. If an interior wall is drawn in a
Wall where one is not wanted. There are several location where the roof is lower than the ceiling
ways to address this: height, you should specify it as a Knee Wall in the
• Turn off the display of the “Walls, Attic” layer. Wall Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page
• Specify the Attic Wall as Invisible. See “Room 126.
Dividers and Invisible Walls” on page 113.
123
For best results, Knee Walls should be drawn

perpendicular to the pitch of the roof and should
intersect with Full Gable Walls on each end.
Wall Type Definitions

Every wall drawn in a plan is assigned a wall type, • Object Snaps locate the interior and exterior
and its Wall Type Definition determines its structure, edges of a wall’s Main Layer. See “Object Snaps”
its appearance in plan view, and its default materials. on page 68.
You can specify the default wall type that is drawn • By default, dimension lines locate walls at their
by the Exterior and Interior Wall tools and can Main Layer. See “Dimension Defaults Dialog” on
specify the wall type of any wall after it is drawn in page 147.
the Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall Defaults”
on page 109 and “General Panel” on page 125. Interior and Exterior Surfaces
The structural layer of a wall type is its Main Layer, Every wall has an interior and exterior surface -
which controls a number of things: including walls in a plan that are recognized by the
• At intersections, walls join at the interior surfaces program as being interior walls. See “Exterior and
of their Main Layers. See “Connecting Walls” on Interior Walls” on page 112.
page 116. Having separate designations for a wall’s two sides
• Windows are placed relative to the outer surface serves a couple of purposes:
of the Main Layer. • It allows the program to orient each wall’s exte-
• Exterior walls on different floors are aligned by rior side toward the outside of a structure. See
the exterior edges of their Main Layer. “Creating Walls” on page 114.
• Roof baselines are placed at the outer edge of the • It allows you to specify different materials for
Main Layer. each side’s surface in the Wall Specification dia-
log. See “Materials Panel” on page 127.
• Walls resize about the exterior surface of their
Main Layer when their thickness or wall type is In plan view, you can identify a selected wall’s
changed. exterior surface by the location of its edit handles,
which display on the exterior of the Main Layer.
Wall Specification Dialog

To open the Wall Specification dialog, select The panels of the Wall Specification dialog are also
a wall or group of walls and click the Open found in the Railing, Deck Railing, and Fencing
Object edit button. Specification dialogs. See “Railing and Fencing
Specification Dialogs” on page 127.
124
Wall Specification Dialog
General Panel
1 Specify General properties of the selected wall • Check No Room Definition to display the wall in
or railing. floor plan and/or 3D views but not create room
• The Thickness of the selected wall displays and definition. See “Room Definition” on page 131.
can be changed here. If the wall is a Post to Over- • Check No Locate to prevent Auto Exterior
head Beam railing, this setting also affects the Dimensions from locating the wall in plan
width of the beam. See “Wall Thickness” on page view. See “No Locate” on page 119.
120.
• Check No Room Moldings Exterior to prevent
• Wall Angle - The current absolute angle of the any room moldings from generating along the
wall in plan view is shown. If you type in a new Exterior side of the selected wall. See “Room
angle, any walls attached to it will not move. If Moldings” on page 141.
the selected wall is curved, this value describes
the angle of the chord and cannot be modified. • Check No Room Moldings Interior to prevent
any room moldings from generating along the
• Wall Length - The current length is shown. If Interior side of the selected wall.
you type a new length, any walls attached to the
selected wall will not move. If the selected wall is 3 Select the Wall Type assigned to the selected
curved, this value cannot be modified. wall from the drop-down list. A preview
diagram of the selected wall type’s layers, as seen in
2 Check any of the Options to modify the plan view, displays below.
selected wall accordingly. In most cases,
multiple options can be selected. Not available for 4 A preview of the selected wall, including any
fencing. doors or windows inserted into it, displays on
the right. If the selected wall is specified as Invisible,
• Check Invisible to specify the wall as invisible.
its plan view will display here by default. See
Invisible walls can display in plan view but not in
“Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
3D views or the Materials List. Room Dividers
are invisible by default. See “Room Dividers
and Invisible Walls” on page 113.
125
Roof Panel
Any automatically generated roof style other than a The ROOF panel is not available for Foundation
hip requires roof information to be defined in the Walls or Fencing. See “Foundation Walls” on page
exterior walls. On the ROOF panel, you can specify 112 and “Fencing Tools” on page 112.
how the selected wall interacts with the roof plan,
defining the portion of the roof plan that bears on it..
1 Roof Options - Specify the shape of the wall • Enter a value to define the Pitch of the roof plane
relative to the roof. bearing on the selected wall.
• Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable end over • Check Upper Pitch to create a roof with two
the selected wall. pitches or, if the selected wall is a Full Gable
• Check Dutch Gable Wall to create a small gable Wall, a half hip condition.
part way up a hip roof. Use the Pitch Options • Enter the Pitch of the second, upper roof.
below to specify the location of the gable. • Specify the Height that the Upper Pitch Starts at,
• Check High Shed/Gable Wall to specify the or define the distance In from Baseline that the
selected wall as the high end of a shed roof. second pitch begins. The two values are dynamic.
• Check Knee Wall to define the selected interior Press the Tab key to update the relative numbers.
wall as a knee wall. Only an interior wall can be These settings are also used to position a Dutch
defined as a knee wall. A knee wall’s height is Gable Wall.
defined by the roof above, not the ceiling height.
See “Knee Walls” on page 123. 3 Specify the Overhang Length, which is the
horizontal distance from the outside of the
• Check Extend Slope Downward to continue a wall’s Main Layer to the eave. See “Wall Type
roof down over a bump out in an exterior wall. Definitions” on page 124.
See “Extend Slope Downward” on page 123.
4 Check Auto Roof Return to generate roof
Pitch Options - Specify the pitch or pitches of returns on the selected wall. In most cases, roof
2 returns only work for Full Gable Walls. See “Roof
the roof plane(s) above the selected wall.
Returns” on page 263.
126
Railing and Fencing Specification Dialogs
• Specify the horizontal Length of the roof return Rails Panel

in inches (mm).
The settings on the RAILS panel are used to specify
• Enter a value in inches (mm) to Extend the roof the style and size of the horizontal components of a
returns past the overhang. selected Railing, Deck Railing, or Fence. See
• Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return. “Railing and Deck Tools” on page 111.
• Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. A similar panel is also found in the Staircase and
Ramp Specification dialogs and has additional
5 A preview of the selected wall, including any settings for handrails at walls. See “Rails Panel” on
doors or windows inserted into it, displays on
the right. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25. page 250.
The settings on this panel are like those on the
Additional information about using the set- MOLDINGS panel found in a variety of dialogs in the
tings on this panel can be found in the “Roof program. See “Moldings Panel” on page 268.
Tutorial” on page 43 of the Reference Man-
ual.
Materials Panel
All walls - including interior walls, railings and
Rail Style Panel
fencing - have an “Exterior Wall Surface” and an
The RAIL STYLE panel is only available for Railings, “Interior Wall Surface”. See “Interior and Exterior
Half Walls, Deck Railings, and Fencing. See “Rail Surfaces” on page 124.
Style Panel” on page 127.
The materials specified on the MATERIALS panel
affect the appearance of walls and Solid Railings in
Newels/Balusters Panel 3D views but are not calculated in the Materials List.
The NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel is only available for See “Materials Lists” on page 377.
Railings, Half Walls, Deck Railings, and Fencing. For most railing types, the “Exterior Wall Surface”
See “Newels/Balusters Panel” on page 129. component only affects the appearance of the floor
platform under the railing. and “Interior Wall
Surface” component is not used. For fencing, neither
material component is used.

To open the Railing or Fencing Specification Deck Railings, and Fencing. See “Wall Specification
dialog, select a railing or fencing, or a group Dialog” on page 124.
of railings or fencing, and click the Open Object
The RAILS panel is similar to the HANDRAIL panel
edit button.
found in the Staircase and Ramp Specification
The Railing and Fencing Specification dialogs areis dialogs. See “Stairs, Ramps, and Landings” on page
the same as the Wall Specification dialog, but have 233.
three panels that apply only to Railings, Half Walls,
Rail Style Panel

The RAIL STYLE panel is only available for Railings, Tools” on page 111, “Fencing Tools” on page 112,
Deck Railings, and Fencing. See “Railing and Deck and “Fencing Tools” on page 112.
127
1 Railing Type - Select the radio button for the • Select Post to Ceiling to extend the newel posts
desired railing type: to the ceiling.
• Select Balusters to create regularly spaced balus- • Select Rail to Post to produce newel posts of the
ters between larger newel posts. Height specified on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS
• Select Solid to create a solid railing or Half Wall. panel, with rails that build to the sides of the new-
els.
• Select Open to create a railing with only newel
posts and top and bottom rails. 3 The Top/Bottom Rail options control the
placement of the top and bottom rail, or shoe.
• Select Open with Middle Rail to create a railing
with newel posts and top, bottom, and middle • Uncheck Include Top Rail to eliminate the top
rails. rail.
• Select Panels to create a railing composed of pan- • Uncheck Include Bottom Rail to eliminate the
els. bottom rail and extend the balusters to the floor.
Not available for Solid railings.
2 Check Newels/Posts to assign these to the • Check Raise Bottom, then specify the Floor to
selected railing, then specify their properties.
Bottom distance, measured up from the floor
• Select Post to Rail to create newel posts from the platform to the bottom rail or panel.
floor to the top rail. This option is selected by
default. 4 A preview of the selected railing or fence,
including any doorways or gates inserted into
• Select Post to Beam to create newel posts from
it, displays on the right. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
floor to a beam placed just under the ceiling
on page 25.
height. The beam’s width is based on the Thick-
ness of the selected railing wall.
128
Newels/Balusters Panel
1 Specify the height of the Railing. • Specify the on-center Spacing of the
newel posts.
• Specify the Railing Height. For interior • Type - Select Square, Round, or Library
railings, this is measured from the height newels.
of the floor finish.
2 Specify the characteristics of the

Note: Selecting Library from the drop-down list is
selected railing’s Newels/Posts. the same as clicking the Library button to the
immediate right and allows you to select a symbol
• When Use Wall Width is checked, the from the library. See “Select Library Object Dia-
newels will be the same width as the wall log” on page 283.
type assigned to the selected railing.
Uncheck this box to specify the Width of
each newel at its widest point.
3 Specify the characteristics of the
selected railing’s Balusters. These set-
• Specify the Height, which is the height tings are only available when the railing type
from the floor or ground to the top of the is “Balusters”.
newel. Not available if Post to Rail, Post • Specify the Width or diameter of each
to Overhead Beam or Post to Ceiling is baluster at its widest point.
selected on the RAIL STYLE panel.
• Specify the on-center Spacing of the bal-
usters.
129
• Type - Select Square, Round, or Library balus-

5 A preview of the selected railing or fence,
ters. including any doorways or gates inserted into
it, displays on the right. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
4 Specify the characteristics of the selected on page 25.
railing’s Panels. These settings are only avail-
able when the railing type is specified as Panels on
the RAIL STYLE panel. Rails Panel
• Specify the panel’s Thickness. The settings on the RAILS panel are used to specify
the style and size of the horizontal components of a
• Select “Solid” or “Library” from the Panel Type
selected Railing, Deck Railing, or Fence. See
drop-down list.
“Railing and Deck Tools” on page 111.
A similar panel is also found in the Staircase and
You can also apply newels, balusters, and
panels onto a railing directly from the Library Ramp Specification dialogs and has additional
Browser. See “Inserted Objects” on page 282. settings for handrails at walls. See “Rails Panel” on
page 250.
The settings on this panel are like those on the
MOLDINGS panel found in a variety of dialogs in the
program. See “Moldings Panel” on page 268.
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

To open the Wall Hatch Specification dialog, specification dialogs for many different objects. See
select a Wall Hatch and click the Open “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
Object edit button. See “Hatch Wall” on page 114.
The settings in the Wall Hatch Specification dialog
are found on the FILL STYLE panel of the
130
Chapter 12:
Rooms
Rooms are created when walls are drawn to enclose Chapter Contents
an area. When a room is defined in this way, it • Room Definition
automatically receives both a floor and ceiling as • Floor and Room Defaults
well as features like moldings and finish materials • Room Types
that can be seen in 3D Views. • Displaying Rooms
Rooms can be selected and edited. Each room can be • Selecting Rooms
assigned a Room Type with predefined • Editing Rooms
characteristics. For example, a room defined as a • Room Types
Deck is assigned certain attributes that are different • Room Labels
than a Kitchen. • Room Label Specification Dialog
• Decks
• Floor and Ceiling Heights
• Stepped Floor and Ceiling Platforms
• Special Ceilings
• Room Moldings
• Room Specification Dialog
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by any an Invisible Wall. See “Room Dividers and Invisible
combination of joined walls or railings, visible or Walls” on page 113.
invisible. To be recognized as a room by Home
Room definition disappears if part or all of a
Designer Suite, a room must have an unbroken
surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea to
perimeter.
finalize the position of walls before specifying Room
Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate floor and Types or defining room attributes such as floor or
ceiling platforms automatically. Most rooms are also ceiling height.
automatically covered by the roof when one is built.
There are exceptions to this, such as rooms defined Subdividing Rooms
as Decks. See “Room Types” on page 132.
When a room area is first defined, it inherits its
If a room is drawn within a larger structure and none characteristics from the Floor Defaults dialog for
of its walls connect to the exterior walls, either that floor. If the room is then specified as a particular
directly or indirectly by connecting to walls that do, type, it may inherit properties from the Room
it is referred to as an “island” room. The program Defaults dialog associated with its type.
will connect such a room to the larger structure with
131
If a new room is created by subdividing a larger Copying and Pasting Rooms

room, it inherits its characteristics from that larger
room - including any non-default settings. A room can be copied into the same or a different
plan by copying and pasting the walls that define it.
If two rooms are separated by an Invisible wall, their Rooms copied in this manner retain their size and
interior areas will be measured from the wall’s shape, as well as any finish materials assigned to the
centerline and characteristics like the floor finish walls. See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on page
materials and moldings will break along that line. 70.
• If the two rooms have different floor heights, the If you want to retain the room’s Type and other
break will occur at the wall edge that faces the specifications, copy and paste it and the walls that
room where the floor is lower.
define it using the Edit Area tools. See “Edit
• If the two rooms have different ceiling heights, Area” on page 81.
the break will occur at the wall edge that faces the
room where the ceiling is higher.
Floor and Room Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings to open the in the program like walls, floors, and ceilings are
Default Settings dialog, then click the arrow measured. The heights of architectural objects can be
to the left of “Floors and Rooms” to expand the measured relative to this absolute height, as well. As
category. Here, you can access several defaults such, this default cannot be changed.
dialogs which directly affect rooms. Select a line
item and click the Edit button to open the defaults Room Type Defaults
dialog associated with it.
Floor Level Defaults

Many important default values that affect rooms are
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor
in a plan. This dialog controls important information
that the program uses to create a 3D model -
particularly floor and ceiling heights and materials.
Moldings can also be specified in the Floor Defaults
dialog.
Only the defaults for Floor 1 can be set ahead of
time. The program uses the settings from Floor 1 to
create subsequent floors. Once a new floor is created,
its floor defaults can be changed. See “Floor Defaults Select an Available Room Type from the list, then:
Dialog” on page 227. • Click the Edit button to modify the selected
Room Type in the Room Type Defaults dialog.
Floor 1 Default Height • Click the Rename button to specify a new Name
Home Designer Suite always defines the default for the selected Room Type.
height of Floor 1 at 0’-0”. This height value is The settings in the Room Type Defaults dialogs
measured from the top of the subfloor and is the allow you to specify the floor and ceiling finish
constant by which the heights of structural elements materials for each Room Type.
Room Types
Room Types are used to quickly apply useful is built, while a “Kitchen” will get GFCI Outlets
structural, functional, and appearance properties to when the Auto Place Outlet tool is used.
different kinds of rooms. For example, a room
When a room is first created by enclosing an area
assigned the “Garage” Room Type will receive
with walls, it is assigned a generic room type of
concrete curbs under its walls when the Foundation
132
Room Types
“Unspecified.” Once a room is created, though, it can • Garages have a foundation under them with a
be assigned a Room Type in the Room concrete slab at the top of stem wall or grade
Specification dialog. See “General Panel” on page beam.
142. • The floor in Garage and Slab rooms display in 3D
on Floor 0, not the first floor. See “Garages” on
Available Room Types page 224.
There are three broad categories of room Types: • Deck rooms do not generate foundations. See
Interior, Exterior and Hybrid. “Decks” on page 138.
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen, Nook, Doors and Windows

Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm, Bedroom, Study, • A window placed in a wall between an exterior
Office, Entry, Hall, Closet, Dressing, Storage, room and an interior room always faces out
Laundry, Utility and Unspecified. toward the exterior.
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony. • Doors placed between interior and exterior type
rooms inherit their settings from the Exterior
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch, Attic. Defaults for the door tool, if available; they dis-
play threshold lines and are considered Exterior.
Effects of Room Types See “Interior vs Exterior Doors” on page 169.
Home Designer Suite applies specific properties to • Doors placed between interior type rooms do not
rooms depending on the assigned Room Type. display thresholds and are considered Interior.
Living and Conditioned Areas • Open Below rooms are treated as interior rooms
• All interior type rooms are included in Living for window and door placement.
Area calculations by default; exterior and hybrid Electrical
type rooms are not. • An electrical object placed on the wall of an exte-
• With the exception of Unspecified rooms, all inte-
rior room using the Light , Switch , 110V
rior type rooms are included in Conditioned Area
calculations. Open Below rooms are also Outlet or 220V Outlet tool will automat-
included; however, exterior and other hybrid type ically be a waterproof or outdoor type fixture.
rooms are not. See “Conditioned Area Totals” on
page 382. • The Auto Place Outlets tool adds outlets
automatically to all interior rooms. In Bath rooms,
Ceilings and Roofs only one outlet over each sink is added. See
• Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof above “Auto Place Outlets” on page 215.
them.
• Auto Place Outlets places GFCI outlets in
• Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to the out- Kitchens and Baths.
side and do not generate a roof above them.
• Attic rooms do not receive a ceiling and are • Auto Place Outlets places fewer outlets in
ignored by the program’s automatic roof genera- hybrid type rooms.
tor.
• Auto Place Outlets does not place outlets in
• Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated like exte- exterior type rooms, Porches or Open Below
rior rooms in all cases except that they generate a rooms.
ceiling and a roof above them by default.
Plan Check
Floors and Foundations
• Plan Check uses Room Types and their char-
• A room’s default floor structure and finish defini-
acteristics for basic plan checking. For example, a
tions are determined by its Room Type. See
closet does not need a smoke detector but a bed-
“Room Type Defaults” on page 132.
room does. See “Plan Check” on page 43.
• Open Below is a unique type of interior room that
has no floor platform. Open Below rooms can be
used for defining stairwell openings.
133
Displaying Rooms
Unlike most things in Home Designer Suite, a room Room labels that include the room’s name as well as
is not an individual object. Rather, a room is a space its size and other information can be set to display in
defined by the walls that enclose it. plan view. See “Room Labels” on page 136.
In Plan Views In 3D Views

Rooms typically display a transparent fill in plan Rooms can be viewed in views created by any of the
view. You can, however, specify a solid color or fill 3D view tools. The Dollhouse View tool can be used
pattern for individual rooms in the Room to see all rooms on the current floor without their
Specification dialog. See “Fill Style Panel” on page ceilings. See “Creating Overviews” on page 305.
144.
In order for room fill styles to display, the “Rooms” In the Materials List
layer must be turned on. See “Layer Attributes” on The contents of a room, including furnishings
page 74. and floor and ceiling materials can be
calculated using the Calculate in Room tool. See
“Calculate Materials in Room” on page 378.
Selecting Rooms
Room definition is established when a room is To select the Exterior Room in plan view, click just
completely enclosed by walls. You can confirm that a outside an exterior wall using the Select Objects
room has room definition by using the Select tool. If a wall or other object becomes selected
Objects tool to select it. When a fully-enclosed instead, click the Select Next Object edit button
room is selected, its interior space becomes or press the Tab key until the Exterior Room
highlighted. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79. becomes selected. The Status Bar indicates which
Rooms can be group-selected using the Shift or Ctrl object is currently selected. See “The Status Bar” on
key. They can also be marquee-selected using the page 26.
Marquee Select Similar edit tool. To select
rooms of a particular type, us the Restrictive
Selection option. See “Selecting Multiple
The Exterior Room is selected
When it is selected, a highlighted band around the

plan’s exterior displays.
The room at left is selected
The Exterior Room In 3D Views

Each floor level of a plan has an Exterior Room, A room can be selected in a 3D view by clicking on
which allows you to control its exterior wall an empty space on its floor or a wall surface while
coverings and materials in the Exterior Room the Select Objects tool is active.
Specification dialog. See “Room Specification
134
Editing Rooms
If you select a wall or other object instead of the the exterior surface of an exterior wall using the
room, click Select Next Object edit button or Select Objects tool and then clicking the Select
press the Tab key until the room becomes selected. Next Object edit button.
In exterior camera views and overviews, the Exterior
Room for each floor can be selected by clicking on
Editing Rooms
A room’s structure and appearance can be modified
using its edit tools and specification dialog. Rooms Note: Any rooms that do not update when the
can be selected in all views, and the ways in which default floor or ceiling height is changed are not
they can be edited depend somewhat on the current using the default values. To use the default values
for a specific room, check Default for any of the
view. See “Selecting Rooms” on page 134. room height values in its specification dialog. See
“General Panel” on page 142.
In 3D Views
The floor and ceiling heights of individual rooms and To adjust room heights in 3D
entire floor levels can be edited using edit handles in 1. Create a 3D view of your plan.
3D views. Lowered ceilings cannot be edited in 3D.
See “3D Views” on page 303. 2. Click on the surface of a wall that faces a room
to select it, then click the Select Next Object
The default floor and ceiling heights for an entire
edit button.
floor level can be edited by selecting the Exterior
Room. See “Floor and Room Defaults” on page 132. 3. When a room is selected in 3D:
• The wall that you clicked on remains high-
To change default ceiling heights in 3D lighted and an edit handle displays along its top
and bottom edges.
1. Create a 3D view of the exterior of your plan.
• The Status Bar says “Room”.
2. Click on the exterior surface of a wall, then click • A temporary dimension will display in eleva-
the Select Next Object edit button. tion views, and measure from the room’s rough
3. When the Exterior Room is selected in 3D: floor to rough ceiling.
• The wall that you clicked on remains high- 4. Click and drag the edit handle on the top wall
lighted and an edit handle displays along its top edge to adjust the room ceiling height, or the
edge. handle on the bottom edge to adjust its floor
• When the wall is on any floor other than Floor height. Temporary dimensions display.
1, an edit handle also displays along its bottom 5. As you drag a handle, notice that all walls defin-
edge. ing that room are affected.
• A bounding box displays around each wall of Room materials such as floor, ceiling, and wall
the selected floor level. materials can be changed in 3D views using the
• The Status Bar says “Exterior Room”. See
Material Painter . See “Material Painter Tools”
“The Status Bar” on page 26.
on page 295.
• A temporary dimension will display, measuring
from the floor’s default rough floor to default Room moldings can be replaced directly from the
rough ceiling. See “Temporary Dimensions” library in 3D views, as well. See “Replace From
on page 150. Library” on page 283.
4. Click and drag the edit handle on the top wall
edge to adjust the default ceiling height, or the In the Specification Dialog
edit handle on the bottom edge to adjust the Floor and ceiling heights, moldings, and
default floor height. materials can all be specified in the Room
5. As you drag a handle, notice that the entire floor Specification dialog. See “Room Specification
level is affected. Dialog” on page 141.
135
• Click the Calculate Materials for Room edit • Click the Auto Interior Dimensions edit but-
button to create a materials list of the contents of ton to generate interior dimensions that measure
the selected room, not including walls. See “Cal- each wall defining the selected room(s). See
culate Materials in Room” on page 378. “Auto Interior Dimensions” on page 150.
Room Labels
A label can display in plan view for any area defined Living Area to setting in the General Plan
as a room. There are two parts to each room label: Defaults dialog. It is rounded to the nearest
square foot or mm and does not include the area
• The Room Name, which is similar to a Text within bay, box and bow windows. See “Exterior
object and can be selected and edited. See “The and Interior Walls” on page 112 and “General
Text Tools” on page 158. Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 49.
• The room area, which is not a standard text entry • Rooms, Interior Area is measured from the inner
and cannot be directly edited. surfaces of all the room's walls.
• Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also measured
Room labels can move or even disappear from the inner surfaces of the room walls.
when room entries are revalidated.
The display of room labels can also be controlled on
Custom Room Names a room by room basis in the Room Specification
The Room Names that display in room labels are
based on the Room Types assigned in the Room Editing Room Labels
Specification dialog. See “Room Types” on page
132. Room labels are similar to simple Text objects
You can, however create a custom name for a and can be moved and resized much like any other
selected room, also in the Room Specification text object. You can also modify a room label’s Text
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 142. Style and other attributes in the Room Label
Specification dialog. See “Room Label
Before creating a custom Room Name, assign the Specification Dialog” on page 137.
Room Type most similar to the room’s actual use.
For example, if you wish to name a room “Guest The text of a room label cannot be modified in its
Room”, begin by specifying it as a “Bedroom” since specification dialog, however. The Room Name can
these rooms have similar uses. only be specified in the Room Specification dialog.
You can assign a custom Room Name, move a room If you delete a room label, the Room Type and Room
label or even delete it without affecting the Room Name remain unchanged in the Room Specification
Type. dialog. To restore the label, check the Show Room
Label checkbox on the GENERAL panel of that
dialog.
Displaying Room Labels
If you wish to further customize a room’s label by
The display of room labels is controlled in the adding text, uncheck Show Room Label in the
Display Options dialog. Room labels are placed on Room Specification dialog and create your own
the “Rooms, Labels” layer and use the Text Style label using a Text object.
assigned to that layer. See “Display Options Dialog”
on page 74.
Room Area
You can specify how the area of rooms is reported by
Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area and
the program by turning on the display of one or more
dimensions are not standard text entries and cannot
of these layers:
be edited or changed. The room area moves, resizes
• Rooms, Standard Area is measured from the and rotates with the rest of the room label, but you
center of interior walls that define the room and can turn the area and dimensions on or off separately
from either the outside surface or outside of the in the Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Main Layer of exterior walls, depending on the Rooms” on page 134.
136
Room Label Specification Dialog
The Interior Area room area calculation includes To turn off the display of all Living Area labels in a
the areas within bay, box or bow windows, while the plan, uncheck Show Living Area Label in the
Standard Area and Interior Dimensions calculations General Plan Defaults dialog or turn off the “Room
do not. Labels” layer in the Display Options dialog. See
“General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 49.
Living Area The Living Area label can be moved or deleted. To
The Living Area label is an automatically generated restore a deleted Living Area label, select Tools>
Text object that reports the area of the current floor Plan Check . You can click the Done button
specified as living space. By default, Interior Rooms immediately, without actually completing Plan
are defined as part of the Living Area, while Exterior Check. See “Plan Check” on page 43.
and Hybrid Rooms are not. See “Available Room
Types” on page 133. Living Area vs. Footprint
Regardless of its Room Type, you can specify The Living Area should not be mistaken for the
whether any room is included in the Living Area footprint of a house. Only true livable areas are
Calculation in the Room Specification dialog. See included in the Living Area calculation. By default,
“General Panel” on page 142. exterior and hybrid room types such as Garage,
A Living Area label is created as soon as a room area Deck, and Porch are not included. Neither is any
is defined by walls and/or railings and is recalculated room labeled Open Below or Attic. See “Available
every time you add, remove, resize, or redefine a Room Types” on page 133.
room. If multiple buildings are created, each will Regardless of its room type, you can specify whether
have its own Living Area label. If none of a a room is included in the Living Area calculation in
structure’s rooms are included in the Living Area the RoomSpecification dialog. See “General Panel”
Calculation, however, no Living Area label will on page 142.
display for it.
Living Area is measured from either the outside
Each Living Area label can be edited in its surface or the outer surface of the structural layer of
specification dialog. If a new floor is added, exterior walls.
however, any existing Living Area labels will be
deleted and replaced. See “Room Label Specification
Room Label Specification Dialog

The Room Label Specification dialog opens A similar Text Specification dialog is available for
if you select a Room Label or Living Area simple Text objects in legacy plan files created in
Label and click the Open Object edit button. See Version 8 or prior. See “Compatibility with Other
“Room Labels” on page 136. Programs” on page 31.
Text Panel
The settings on the TEXT panel allow you to add selected Room Label cannot be edited, however. See
information to the Living Area Label. The text of a “Room Labels” on page 136.
1 In the text field, type any information that you text of a selected Room Label displays here but
would like added to the Living Area Label. The cannot be edited.
137
2 Select an Alignment option from the drop-

down list to apply to the text.
The TEXT STYLE panel is available for a variety of
For legacy Text objects only, a preview of the text objects in the program and control the appearance of
displays in a panel on the right. the selected object’s text. See “Text Style Panel” on
page 165.
Decks
A Deck room is an exterior-type room that uses deck To give the roof a visible means of support, you can
planking and framing to create a floor platform rather select the Post to Beam option in the Wall
than using a single floor surface that spans the entire Specification dialog. See “Rail Style Panel” on page
room area. 127.
To draw a deck, select Build> Railing and Deck> Openings in deck railings can be created using
Straight Deck Railing , then click and drag to Doorways . See “Openings in Railings” on page
draw a railing. 175.
• To create a deck without a railing, use one of the
Deck Edge tools. See “Fencing Tools” on page Deck Framing and Planking
112. When a Deck room is created, the floor platform is
• You can also create a regular, polygon-shaped modeled using joists, beams, posts, and planking.
deck using the Polygon Shaped Deck tool. Deck framing, planking, posts, and beams are placed
See “Polygon Shaped Deck” on page 111. on their own layers with names that begin with
A room does not have to be defined by Deck Railing “Framing, Deck”: for example, “Framing, Deck
to be specified as a “Deck.” See “Room Types” on Posts”. These layers cannot be turned on in plan view
page 132. You can also define a room as a “Deck” in but are shown in 3D views.
the Room Specification dialog. See “General Panel” The structural materials for a selected deck can be
on page 142. calculated in a Materials List by clicking the
By default, decks do not have roofs. If you want a Calculate Structural Materials for Deck edit
roof over a deck, check Roof Over This Room in button. See “Materials Lists” on page 377.
the Room Specification dialog. See “Structure
Panel” on page 143.
Floor and Ceiling Heights

Default floor and ceiling heights are defined in the
Floor Defaults dialog for each floor, including the
foundation. Use the Floor Defaults dialog to change
these values on a floor-by-floor basis. See “Floor and
Room Defaults” on page 132.
Use the Room Specification dialog to set floor
heights on a room-by-room basis. See “Room Speci-
fication Dialog” on page 141.
Different rooms on the same floor can have unique
floor and ceiling heights, allowing you to create:
In 3D views, you can adjust the default floor and
• Split levels and bi-levels ceiling height for the entire floor or the floor and
• Sunken living rooms and garages ceiling height for an individual room. See “In 3D
• Cathedral and coffered ceilings.
In order to raise or lower an area’s floor or ceiling
height, you must give it a room definition. To create
138
Stepped Floor and Ceiling Platforms
room definition without enclosing an area with solid lower ceiling. By default, the area above the flat
walls, use Railings . ceiling will be enclosed by automatically-generated
Attic walls. See “Attic Walls” on page 123.
Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated. Changing
the floor height in one room can affect ceiling If you prefer, you can specify that these Attic walls
heights of the rooms below. be suppressed and an open space be created instead.
This condition is referred to as a Shelf Ceiling, or
• If a room’s floor is lowered, its ceiling height is plant shelf, and can be specified in the Room
increased while the ceiling below that room Specification dialog of the room with the lower flat
drops. ceiling. See “Structure Panel” on page 143.
• If the floor is raised, the ceiling height decreases
while the ceiling below that room is raised. Split Levels
If the rooms above a particular room have more than A split level can be created by raising or lowering the
one floor height, the room’s ceiling is stepped. floor and ceiling heights of various areas of the plan.
In the following example, the lowest floor height is
0, the next is 24, and the next is 48 inches. The
ceiling height in each room is set at 109 inches. See
“Split Levels” on page 229.
In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can be

used to cover “steps” made by different floor heights
on the floor above. See “General Panel” on page 142.
To ensure that steps in floor and ceiling platforms
have solid sides, define their room areas using
Invisible Railings.
Shelf Ceilings
In rooms with high or vaulted ceilings, it is possible
to have a smaller room such as a closet that has a flat,
Stepped Floor and Ceiling Platforms

Each floor has default floor and ceiling heights. You If you require a single floor platform with a uniform
can, however, use the Room Specification dialog to height and thickness but different ceiling heights for
specify floor and ceiling heights on a room by room the rooms below, specify a lowered ceiling using the
basis to create stepped floors and ceilings. See Ceiling Finish Specification dialog. See “Lowered
“Structure Panel” on page 143. Ceilings” on page 139.
Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling platform complex ceilings are made using settings in the
on top the wall plates of a room. More varied and Room Specification dialog.
Lowered Ceilings
You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling in a In the following illustration, the default ceiling
room without affecting the top height of the walls by height for the entire first floor is 120", and the room
increasing the thickness of the Ceiling Finish. on the right has a ceiling finish lowered to 96".
139
2. Click the Open Object edit button to open

the Room Specification dialog.
3. On the STRUCTURE panel, increase the Ceiling
Finish value by the amount that you would like
to lower the ceiling.
4. Notice that the preview diagram represents the
Finished Ceiling height (F).
Normal ceiling Lowered ceiling
To create a lowered ceiling
1. Select the room in which you would like to spec-

ify a lowered ceiling.
Cathedral Ceilings
A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the roof and 2. Select the room and open the Room
is created using the underside of the roof above the Specification dialog. See “Room Specification
room. Dialog” on page 141.
3. On the STRUCTURE panel, uncheck Flat Ceiling
To create a cathedral ceiling Over This Room.
1. Build a roof for your plan. See “Roofs” on page
255.
Trey Ceilings
A trey ceiling is an area within a ceiling that is raised 3. Change the Ceiling Height of the room to the
and has either vertical or sloping sides. A standard desired height of the flat ceiling surface in its
trey ceiling can be easily created by placing Soffits center.
around the perimeter of the room. An angled trey
In plan view, dashed lines indicate where the ceiling
ceiling can be created using the underside of roof
changes from sloped to flat. These lines are located
planes above.
on the “Ceiling Break Lines” layer in the Display
Options dialog. See “Display Options Dialog” on
To create an automatic angled trey ceiling
page 74.
1. In the Room Specification dialog, make sure If the roof is rebuilt after the ceiling height is
that Flat Ceiling Over this Room is checked, adjusted upward, the new roof will be raised to
then specify the desired height of the walls as match the new ceiling height and a trey ceiling will
the Ceiling Height. See “Structure Panel” on not be created.
page 143.
In the following example, a hip roof is built on 8’
2. Make sure that Auto Rebuild Roofs is
(2400 mm) ceilings. After the roof is built, the
unchecked, then build the roof. See “Build Roof
Ceiling Height is raised to 10’ (3000 mm). The
resulting ceiling follows the roof pitch for 2’ (600
mm), then becomes a flat ceiling.
140
Room Moldings
Hip roof with Hip roof, ceiling over, Ceiling Break lines
cathedral ceiling over. ceiling height raised. in plan view.
Cantilever Undersides
Occasionally, a room will cantilever out past an panel of the Room Specification dialog. See “Room
exterior wall. You can specify the surface material of Specification Dialog” on page 141.
the underside of a cantilever on the MATERIALS
Room Moldings
Base molding, chair rail, and crown moldings can be hybrid room types. Baseboards and chair rails are not
applied to rooms on a floor by floor basis in the automatically added to Open Below rooms, either;
Floor Defaults dialogs, to different room types in the however, crown molding is if it is specified in the
Room Type Defaults dialogs, and to individual defaults for the room’s floor. See “Room Types” on
rooms in the Room Specification dialog. See “Floor page 132.
and Room Defaults” on page 132 and “Room
Base molding and chair rail heights are both offset
from the floor, while crown molding is offset from
By default, Home Designer Suite does not the ceiling. For additional information, see
automatically add room moldings to exterior or “Applying Moldings” on page 268.
Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog controls the Some values in this dialog are dynamic. A value with
structural characteristics and appearance of a Default specified references the Floor Defaults
selected room. To open the Room Specification dialog. To return a value to the default, replace the
dialog, select a room and click the Open Object edit check mark. See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 48.
button. See “Selecting Rooms” on page 134.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the
Some of the panels in this dialog are also found in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only the selected
Exterior Room Specification dialog as well as in the room See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 227.
Floor and Room Type Defaults dialogs. See “Floor
and Room Defaults” on page 132.
141
General Panel
1 The settings here control the Room Type and 2 Specify whether the selected room is included
the appearance of the Room Label in the Living Area calculation. See “Living
• Select the Room Type from the drop-down list. Area” on page 137.
Changing the Room Type can affect settings • Select Include in Total Living Area Calculation
throughout the dialog. See “Room Types” on page to include the room in the Living Area regardless
132. of its Room Type.
• Click the Define button to open the Room Types • Select Exclude from Total Living Area Calcu-
dialog where you can customize the settings of lation exclude the room from the Living Area
the selected Room Type. regardless of its Room Type.
• In the Room Type Defaults dialog only, the • Select Use Default for Room Type (Included/
Function of the selected room type displays for Excluded) to base the selected room’s inclusion
reference. See “Available Room Types” on page in the Living Area on its Room Type. The default
133. for the selected Room Type is stated in parenthe-
• If you wish to use a custom name in the room’s ses.
label, type the desired Room Name in the text
field. 3 The preview on the right side of this dialog
features a cross section diagram showing the
• Check Show Room Label to display the room relationships between the room’s heights and
label in plan view. See “Room Labels” on page platform thicknesses.
136. If present, the floors above and below the selected
This option is unchecked automatically if you room are also shown. The left side of the floor above
select “Unspecified” as the Room Type, and is offset for clarity.
checked automatically if you select any other
Room Type The height and thickness values shown in this
diagram are set on the Structure Panel.
142
Structure Panel
Some settings on the STRUCTURE panel are also
found in the Floor and Room Type Defaults dialogs.
Active Defaults icons in the Elevation and Height log on Floor 0, or if multiple floor heights are
fields, as well as Default check boxes next to the specified above the selected room.
Finish fields indicate that these settings are Dynamic • Specify the Floor height, as measured from zero
Defaults. to the top of the subfloor.
Note: Many of the settings on this panel are inter- Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0. It
dependent. For example, if the Ceiling Finish can be modified in the Room Specification dialog,
thickness is modified, the Finished Ceiling height but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog. See “Floor
will change in response. and Room Defaults” on page 132.
1 Absolute Elevations - These height values are If a room is defined directly beneath the selected
measured from zero, which is the default top room on the floor below, additional settings may be
height of the subflooring on Floor 1. See “Floor and available.
Ceiling Heights” on page 138.
• Specify the Floor Below height, which is the sub-
• The Floor Above height displays here for refer- floor height of the room directly below where you
ence. If multiple rooms with differing floor clicked to select the currently selected room. If
heights exist directly above, “No Change” will there are multiple rooms with differing floor
display. heights located below, this value may change
• Specify the Ceiling height of the selected room, depending on where you click.
as measured from zero to the bottom of the ceiling • If the selected room is directly above a Garage
framing. Not available in the Floor Defaults dia- and there is a foundation present, you can specify
the SWT Below height, which is the top height of
143
the concrete stem walls around the perimeter of • The thickness of the Ceiling Structure displays
the garage. here for reference but cannot be changed.
• Specify the thickness of the Ceiling Finish layer.
2 Relative Heights - These height values are
measured from surfaces within the selected
room or the room below. 4 Specify the thickness of the Floor Finish layer.
•The thickness of the Floor Structure displays
• Specify the Rough Ceiling height, as measured here for reference but cannot be changed.
from the subfloor surface to the bottom of the
ceiling framing. Not available if multiple floor 5 The preview on the right side of this dialog
heights are specified directly above the selected features a cross section diagram showing the
room. relationships between the room’s heights and
platform thicknesses.
• Specify the Finished Ceiling height, as measured
from the finished floor surface to the finished • If present, the floors above and below the selected
ceiling surface. Not available if multiple floor room are also shown. The left side of the floor
heights are specified directly above the selected above is offset for clarity.
room. • The callout or dimension line associated with
• Specify the distance from the Stem Wall Top to selected height or thickness value will be high-
Ceiling. Only available when Floor for this lighted in the preview, as will any height or thick-
Room is Supplied by the Foundation ‘Room’ ness value that you move your mouse point over.
from the Floor Below has been checked. What appears in both the diagram and in the settings
• Specify the Ceiling Below height, which is the on the STRUCTURE panel may be affected by the
height of the ceiling of the room below, as mea- location where you clicked to select the room. For
sured from that room’s subfloor to rough ceiling example:
surfaces. Not available when Auto Rebuild Foun- • If the selected room is located above two rooms
dation is enabled or if there is no room below the with different structural settings, the position of
selected room. See “Rebuilding Foundations” on the pointer relative to these two lower rooms
page 223. determines which of them displays as the floor
• Specify the Stem Wall height, which is measured below.
from the top of the foundation wall footing to the • If the selected room is located below two rooms
top of the treated sill plate, if one is specified. with different floor heights, its absolute and rela-
Only available if the selected room or the room tive ceiling height settings will be disabled.
below it is defined by foundation walls.
Moldings Panel
3 Specify the characteristics of the room’s
Ceiling.
Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be assigned
• If Roof Over This Room is checked, a roof auto- to one or more selected rooms on the MOLDINGS
matically generates over the room. If unchecked, panel. Moldings are placed on a room’s wall surfaces
no roof generates. and continue around the surface of any soffit that is
• If Flat Ceiling Over This Room is checked, the attached to the wall at the molding height.
room has a flat ceiling. If unchecked, the ceiling The settings on this panel are also similar to those
follows the underside of the roof. found in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only
• Check Shelf Ceiling to prevent Attic Walls from the selected room instead of all rooms on the current
generating over the interior walls that define the floor.
selected room. When unchecked, interior Attic
The settings on this panel are similar to those found
Walls will generate if surrounding rooms have
in other specification dialogs throughout the
higher ceilings than the selected room. See “Shelf
program. See “Moldings Panel” on page 268.
Ceilings” on page 139.
• Check Use Soffit Surface for Ceiling to improve Fill Style Panel
the 3D appearance of the transition between ceil-
ing and eaves of exterior rooms with Flat Ceiling The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the
Over This Room unchecked. appearance of the room in plan view. This panel is
144
also found in the Floor Defaults dialog. For more Default molding and ceiling and floor covering
information, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 76. materials can be set on this panel in the Floor
Defaults and Room Defaults dialogs.
Materials Panel
The settings on this panel affect the appearance of a
selected room’s walls, floor, ceiling, and moldings in
3D views. See “Materials Panel” on page 296.
145
146
Chapter 13:
Dimensions
Home Designer Suite provides a variety of Chapter Contents

dimensioning tools for measuring walls, doors, • Dimension Unit Defaults
windows, and many other objects. • Dimension Defaults Dialog
Dimensions can be used to accurately position • The Dimension Tools
objects relative to other objects. In addition, • Displaying Dimension Lines
dimension lines and extensions can be selected and • Editing Dimension Lines
customized. • Editing Extension Lines
• Moving Objects Using Dimensions
• Dimension Line Specification Dialog
Dimension Unit Defaults

All plan files save measurements in either Imperial when the file is first created and cannot be changed
or metric units. The type of unit used is determined later. See “Creating a New Plan” on page 33.
Dimension Defaults Dialog

Select Edit> Default Settings, select The settings in this dialog are dynamic defaults,
“Dimension”, and click the Edit button to which means that any changes made here may affect
open the Dimension Defaults dialog. existing dimension lines in the drawing that are using
default values. See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 48.
Setup Panel
147
1 Uncheck Auto Refresh Exterior Dimensions 3 Specify how Manual and Auto Exterior Dimen-
to prevent Auto Exterior Dimensions from sion lines locate interior walls.
being regenerated as changes are made to the plan. • Select Centers to have exterior dimensions
When checked, Auto Exterior Dimensions will be locate the centers of interior walls.
created when walls enclose a room area and will
refresh whenever walls, doors, or windows are added
or moved. See “Auto Exterior Dimensions” on page
150.
2 Specify how Manual and Auto Exterior Dimen-

sion lines locate both interior and exterior
walls.
• Select Surfaces to have dimensions locate the
outer surfaces of walls. Dimensions locating an intersecting wall’s center
• Select Both Wall Sides to have dimensions

locate both sides of interior walls. Either the wall
Surfaces or both sides of the Main Wall Layers
will be located, depending on your selection
above.
Dimensions locating wall Surfaces
• Select Main Wall Layer to have dimensions

locate the structural layer of exterior walls.
Dimensions locating an interior wall’s

Main Wall Layer
You can always change the object or surface that a

dimension locates after it has been created. See
“Editing Extension Lines” on page 152.
Dimensions locating walls’ Main Wall Layers
Format Panel
The settings on the FORMAT panel allow you to control the format of object length numbers in the
specify the units, position, and degree of accuracy of Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on page 26.
dimension numbers. The settings on this panel also
148
The Dimension Tools
1 Specify the numbering Format for dimension 3 Specify the Dimension Text Position, which is
numbers. the location of dimension numbers relative to
• Select the Units of measurement to be used by the dimension line.
dimensions from the drop-down list. • Center primary dimension numbers on the
• Check Unit Indicators to display the unit of dimension line. If two formats are used, the pri-
measurement along with the dimension number. mary format is placed above the line and the sec-
ondary format, beneath it.
• Check Leading Zeros to include the zero before
a decimal less than 1 or to display 0’ or 0” when • Position dimension numbers Above Line.
the ft-in or ’-” unit formats is used. • Position dimension numbers Below Line.
• Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing zeros at
the end of decimal values. When the ft-in or ’-” Arrow Panel
unit format is used and fractional inches are spec- For information about the ARROW panel, see “Arrow
ified, 0” will be included. Panel” on page 103.
2 Specify the degree of Accuracy used by
dimension numbers. Text Style Panel
• Select the Decimal Places radio button for The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control the
dimension numbers in decimal format. In the text size, font and other attributes of automatic, manually
field, specify the number of decimal places to drawn, and temporary dimension line labels. See
use, from 0 to 20. If 0 is used, no decimal places “Dimension Labels” on page 151.
are used.
For information about the settings on this panel, see
• Select the Smallest Fraction radio button for “Text Style Panel” on page 165.
dimension numbers using whole numbers and
fractions. In the text field, specify the largest Temporary dimension labels always use the color
denominator to use, from 1 to 16. If 1 is entered, assigned to their layer - not the color specified in the
whole numbers are used. Dimension Defaults dialog.
The Dimension Tools

Select CAD> Dimensions to access the The zoom factor of the current view affects whether
Dimension Tools. Manually drawn objects drawn close together are dimensioned or not.
dimensions are created by clicking and dragging like If you try to dimension an array of objects but the
other line-based objects and can be drawn in plan dimension line locates only the first and last objects
view. along its path, Zoom in on the objects and try
149
again. Similarly, if you want to dimension between If you edit an Auto Exterior Dimension line, it
two objects but the dimension locates unwanted will be converted to a manual dimension, so if Auto
objects between them, Zoom out. See “Zoom Exterior Dimensions are later regenerated, your
Tools” on page 63. changes will not be lost.
Once created, both manually drawn and Up to three rows of automatically generated
automatically generated dimension lines can be dimensions may be created per exterior wall. The
selected and edited. See “Editing Dimension Lines” innermost dimension line locates exterior walls,
on page 151. interior walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The
second dimension line locates exterior and interior
Manual Dimensions walls. The outermost dimension line is the overall
exterior dimension.
To display the distance between two objects,
select CAD> Dimensions> Manual Dimen-
Auto Interior Dimensions
sion and drag a dimension line near or through the
objects. Select one or more rooms and click the Auto
Interior Dimensions edit button to generate
Manual Dimensions locate walls as specified in the
interior dimensions that measure each wall defining
Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Dimension
the selected room(s).
Defaults Dialog” on page 147.
Auto Interior Dimensions lines are generated
End-to-End Dimensions inside of the rooms they measure and do not
Use the End-to-End Dimension tool to recognize the No Locate setting for walls. If a wall is
dimension between any two defined objects in specified as No Locate, Auto Interior Dimensions
plan view. will locate it anyway. See “No Locate” on page 119.
Select CAD> Dimensions> End-to-End Dimension Temporary Dimensions

, then click and drag the dimension from the first
Temporary Dimensions display when an
object to the second object. The dimension line snaps
object is selected and show the distance
to each object, ignoring any other objects located
between the object’s selected edge and other objects.
between either end.
Select View> Temporary Dimensions to turn on or
off the display of temporary dimensions. This toggle
Interior Dimensions affects all views and is saved between launches of
Draw Interior Dimension lines parallel to Home Designer Suite.
walls in plan view to create interior As with other dimension lines, Temporary
dimensions. Dimensions only locate objects that are parallel or
nearly parallel to one another. They will also locate
The Interior Dimension tool locates interior
the endpoints of CAD lines and the corners of objects
wall surfaces only. It does not dimension between
located past the end of the selected edge, within 4
layer surfaces in the same wall, and it does not locate
feet (1200 mm) of the point where you click to select
walls unless it actually intersects them.
the object.
Auto Exterior Dimensions A temporary dimension will not display when an

object is selected if a dimension line is already
The Auto Exterior Dimension tool generates present that shows the same information.
dimensions around a plan’s exterior in plan
view. These dimension lines locate walls as specified Tape Measure
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Dimension
Defaults Dialog” on page 147. Use the Tape Measure tool to draw a
temporary dimension line between any two
points in the drawing area. The tool will place
Auto Exterior Dimensions do not generate
properly if there is a gap in the exterior walls
temporary markers at the start and end points of the
or if they do not connect properly. dimension line. These points and the line both
disappear when you release the mouse button. If an
150
Displaying Dimension Lines
object is located by the temporary line, you can snap The Tape Measure tool can be used in Elevation
to it. views as well as in plan view. See “Elevation Views”
on page 306.
Displaying Dimension Lines

The display of dimension lines is controlled in the dimension line, it will display for reference using the
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects” Selection Line color specified in the Preferences
on page 73. dialog. See “Colors Panel” on page 51. This will
Dimension lines created by any of the dimension happen only if Temporary Dimensions are
tools share the same components. turned on. See “Temporary Dimensions” on page
150.
• Dimension Lines run parallel with the distance
being measured.
Dimension Labels
• Extension Lines are perpendicular to dimension
lines, indicating what they locate. If a dimension Manually drawn, automatic, and temporary
line locates more than two objects, extension dimension labels use the Text Style specified in the
lines divide the dimension line into segments. Dimension Defaults dialog. Unlike many objects
that use Text Styles, by default dimensions use a Text
• Arrowheads display at the intersections of
Style specified in the defaults dialog rather than the
dimension and extension lines.
Text Style assigned to their layer. See “Text Style
• Dimension Labels display at the midpoint of Panel” on page 149.
dimension line segments and indicate the dis-
tance that each segment measures. Dimension Arrowheads
Dimension Extension Lines You can specify the style, color and size of
Labels dimension arrows in the Dimension Defaults and
Dimension Line Specification dialogs. See “Arrow
The arrow at the end of a dimension line will not
display if it is close enough to another dimension
Arrowheads arrow that the two will overlap. A typical example of
this is where two sections of an Interior Dimension
If a manual dimension line is on a layer that is turned locate two sides of an interior wall.
off and you select an object located by that
Editing Dimension Lines

For information about changing the value reported in Using the Mouse
a dimension line label, see “Moving Objects Using
Dimensions” on page 154. When a dimension line is selected, its edit handles
can be seen. There are four types of dimension line
With the exception of Temporary Dimensions, edit handles. The total number of edit handles a
dimension lines can be selected and edited using the dimension line has depends on how many extension
mouse and the edit toolbar buttons. lines it has.
If an Auto Exterior Dimension line is edited, it will
no longer be considered an automatic dimension line
and will not be deleted and replaced the next time the
Auto Exterior Dimensions tool is used.
151
Dimension Number Size

The initial size of dimension numbers is specified in
Extension Line the Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Dimension
Add Extension Line Defaults Dialog” on page 147.
You can specify number height for individual
Move dimension lines in the Dimension Line
Specification dialog. See “Dimension Panel” on
page 155.
As with text and other objects, dimension number
Extension Line size is subject to scaling when or printed.
Copying and Pasting Dimension

Rotate
Lines
Dimension lines can be copied and pasted into any
• The Extension Line handles are positioned at the view type that supports dimensions. If a dimension
point that each extension line locates and are used line is copied independent of the objects it originally
to move or delete extension lines. See “Moving locates, the pasted dimension line will locate Point
an Extension Line” on page 153. Markers.
• The Add Extension Line handle displays to the
side of the Move handle and is used to add exten- Deleting Dimension Lines
sion lines to the dimension line. Extension lines
There are several ways to delete dimension lines.
added in this manner are able to locate marks that
the dimension line might not locate as it was You can select any manual or automatic dimension
being drawn. See “Adding an Extension Line” on line or group of dimension lines, then press the
page 152. Delete key or click the Delete edit button. See
• The Move handle is located where you clicked to “Deleting Objects” on page 98.
select the dimension line and is used to move the
The Delete Objects dialog allows you to delete all
entire dimension line, including any subsections,
manually drawn and/or automatic dimension lines at
perpendicular to itself. Extension lines are
once. See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 99.
resized as appropriate. The pointer changes to a
two-headed arrow when moved over this han- Individual dimension line segments located between
dle. extension lines can also be deleted. If a segment is
located between two other segments along the same
• The Rotate handle is located past the end of the
dimension line, that dimension will be broken in two.
dimension line and can be used to rotate the
dimension line.
To delete a portion of a dimension line
Using the Edit Tools 1. Select any Dimension Tool aside from Auto
Dimension lines can be repositioned, copied, and Exterior Dimensions.
deleted using the edit toolbar buttons just like other 2. Manually draw a dimension line over the seg-
objects in the program can. See “The Edit Toolbar” ment that you wish to remove, dragging from
on page 23. extension line to extension line.
Editing Extension Lines

Extension lines can be added, edited, and deleted Adding an Extension Line
using the edit handles when their dimension line is
selected. The Add Extension Line edit handle allows you to
locate marks that the dimension line might not have
been able to locate as it was being drawn. Interior
Dimensions, for example, do not locate cabinets as
152
Editing Extension Lines
they are drawn; however, you can add an extension

line that locates a cabinet.
To add an extension line
1. Select the dimension line anywhere along its

length.
2. Click the diamond-shaped Add Extension Line
edit handle which displays near the Move edit
handle. The pointer changes to a two-headed 3. Drag the handle to a new location. The extension
line snaps to possible marks as the handle is
arrow . moved.
3. Drag the handle to the object that you want to 4. Release the mouse button at the new location.
locate with a new extension handle. This exam-
ple adds an extension line to the window edge.
Not all library symbols can be located by a

4. Release the mouse button to add an extension dimension line as it is drawn. Once a dimen-
line. sion is drawn, however, you can move or add an
extension line to locate the library object.
Deleting an Extension Line

When an extension line is deleted, the remaining
dimensions update. If a dimension line has only two
extension lines, they cannot be deleted.
To remove an extension line

Moving an Extension Line
Extension lines can be moved to locate the centers, length: do not click on the extension line itself.
sides, or surfaces of most objects. Here, an extension 2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
line is moved from the windows edge to the center.
To move an extension line

length: do not click on the extension line itself.
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle. The
pointer changes to a two-headed arrow .
3. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of the

arrows, away from any dimensionable object,
and release the button when the extension line
disappears.
153
Moving Objects Using Dimensions

Most objects can be moved by changing an auto- 3. Enter a new value in text field.
matic, manual, or temporary dimension value that • To use a unit other than inches (or mm),
locates it. This technique can be applied in nearly include its indicator after the value.
any situation where dimensions are present. See • To move the selected object past a second
“Moving Objects” on page 92. object, to its opposite side, enter a negative
In addition, some objects can be resized using value.
dimensions. See “Resizing Objects” on page 94. • Basic math operations can also be performed in
the inline text box, just as they can in dialogs.
Your pointer indicates which dimensions can be used
See “Math Operations in Dialogs” on page 24.
to relocate the selected object by changing to a
pointing hand icon. 4. The selected object moves or resizes when you
press the Enter key or click outside of the text
Another way to tell is to select an object and drag it field.
in the desired direction. As you drag, note which
dimensions update. These dimensions are the A variety of polyline- and box-based objects can also
dimensions that can be used to move that object. be resized using dimensions.
To move an object using dimensions To resize an object using dimensions
1. Select the object and click on a dimension line 1. Select the object along the edge that you would
that locates it. An inline text field opens at the like to move. See “Selected Edge” on page 80.
location where you clicked. 2. Click on a dimension line that indicates its dis-
• The actual distance displays in the text field. tance from the object’s opposite side.
• If the dimension is locating two different 3. In the inline text field, enter a value.
objects and the selected object is polyline-
4. Click Move edge to move the selected edge
based, the Move Edge and Move Entire
only.
Object buttons display to the right of the text
field. 5. The selected edge moves, resizing the object,
when you press the Enter key.
Move Edge (selected)
You can cancel a move or resize opera-
tion using dimensions at any time by
pressing the Esc key.
Move Entire Object
Resizing Walls Using Exterior
• If the dimension describes a selected wall’s
length, additional buttons display to the right.
Dimensions
See “Using Dimensions” on page 120. When resizing a structure using dimensions, it is
important to work your way around it in one
Move Start Move End direction. Relocate one wall at a time in succession
so that you do not redefine the same dimension more
than once.
Move Both Ends For more information, see “Measuring Walls” on

page 118.
2. Click the Move button of your choice.
Dimension Line Specification Dialog

To open the Dimension Line Specification tool, or select a dimension line and click the Open
dialog, double-click a dimension line using Object edit button.
the Select Objects or Manual Dimension
154
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
The settings in this dialog are dynamic defaults. See Specify the Number Height for the selected dimen-
“Dimension Defaults Dialog” on page 147. sion. See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 48.
Dimension Panel Arrow Panel

“Arrow Panel” on page 103.
155
156
Chapter 14:
Text
The Text Tools help you draw attention to special Chapter Contents
details of your drawings in plan view. • Text Defaults
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text objects, • Fonts and Alphabets
allowing you to direct attention to specific plan • The Text Tools
details. • Creating Text
• Displaying Text
• Rich Text Specification Dialog
• Editing Text
• Copying and Pasting Text
• Find/Replace Text
• Text Arrows
• Text Styles
• Object Labels
Text Defaults
Text Defaults can be accessed by selecting Rich Text Defaults
Edit> Default Settings in any view in which
text can be created. See “Default Settings vs The Rich Text Defaults dialog is similar to the Rich
Preferences” on page 47. Text Specification dialog. See “Rich Text
The default settings for Rich Text determine what
these objects look like when they are first created. Text Lines with Arrows use the same default
Text Style Defaults determine the appearance of text layer as Rich Text, so by default they have the same
associated with things like dimensions and object color, line weight and line style. See “Layers” on
labels. page 74.
Text Style Defaults Arrow Defaults

Select “Text Style” from the list in the Default The settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog determine
Settings dialog and click the Edit button to open the the initial settings for arrows drawn using the Text
Saved Text Style Defaults dialog.
Line with Arrow and Line With Arrow
The Text Style Defaults dialog allows you to specify tools. These settings also determine the initial
the attributes of the various Text Styles in use in the appearance of arrows when they are added to CAD
current file. See “Text Styles” on page 165. lines, arcs, and polylines.
157
The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost the same as

the ARROW panel of the Line Specification dialog. Avoid typing any text in the Rich Text
See “Arrow Panel” on page 103. Defaults dialog unless you want it to be
present in all text objects you create.
Fonts and Alphabets

Home Designer Suite allows you to use any font Missing Fonts
found in your computer’s Fonts directory.
If you open a plan file that uses a font that is not
Chief Blueprint Font installed on the current computer, the program will
give you an opportunity to replace it in the Replace
The Chief Blueprint font is installed in the Windows Fonts dialog.
Fonts directory when Home Designer Suite is
installed.
On Mac systems, this font is embedded with the
Home Designer Suite installation but not installed on
the system. As such, it is available for use in Home
Designer Suite but not in other programs.
International Alphabets
The Rich Text tool supports unicode alphabets
and characters. In order to use a unicode alphabet or
characters, the appropriate language support must be
installed on your computer.
The table lists all missing fonts and how they will be
Special characters can be added to any Rich Text replaced.
object by:
• Click on a font name in the list to select it. Use
• Copying and pasting the character from another the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple fonts. See
application; “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page 81.
• Copying and pasting the character from the Win- • Select a replacement font from the Replace With
dows Character Map; drop-down list, or leave “No Change” as the
• Using the Mac Character Viewer; selection to maintain the file’s association with
the missing fonts.
• Typing the keystroke associated with the charac-
ter. • A preview of the selected font displays below the
Replace Width list.
See “Copying and Pasting Text” on page 162.
If you do not plan to return the file to the computer
where it was created, you may want to replace
missing fonts with the fonts you normally use. On
the other hand, if you do intend to return the file, you
may prefer to not replace any missing fonts.
The Text Tools

Select CAD> Text to access the Text Tools. The Text Line with Arrow tool is used to
These tools are available in plan view only. connect text and another object with an arrow.
See “Text Arrows” on page 164.
The Rich Text tool is used to create text
objects. The Text with Arrow tool places a Rich Text
object with an arrow attached.
158
Creating Text
Creating Text
Text can be created in plan view only. See “View 3. Type or paste the desired text into the Text Field.
Windows” on page 61. 4. Use the options to change the font, style and size
Once created, text can be selected and edited in a of any portion of the text.
variety of ways. See “Editing Text” on page 161.
Note: If you do not type anything in the Text Field,
To create Text
a text object will not be created when you click
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text . outside of it.
2. Click in the drawing area, and the Rich Text You can also create lines with arrows connecting the
Specification dialog will open. See “Rich Text text that you create to items in the drawing. See
Specification Dialog” on page 159. “Text Arrows” on page 164.
Displaying Text
As with other types of objects, the display of Text Text objects can only be displayed in plan view.
objects is controlled in the Display Options dialog.
The display attributes of each individual text object
All Text objects, including Text Lines with Arrows,
can be controlled independent of the layer it is placed
are located on the “Text” layer. See “Display Options
on. See “Rich Text Specification Dialog” on page
159.
Rich Text Specification Dialog

The Rich Text Specification dialog opens if When Text objects are group-selected, the text
you select one or more Text objects, then click content, zoom factor, and Paragraph Options cannot
the Open Object edit button. be changed, but everything else can be.
This dialog also opens when you select the Rich The Rich Text Specification dialog is similar to the
Rich Text Defaults dialog but affects the selected
Text tool and then click once in the drawing area.
text rather than all subsequently created text objects.
See “Text Defaults” on page 157.
Text Panel
The settings on the TEXT panel allow you to type the
selected Text object’s content and control many
aspects of its appearance, including its font, size,
color and style.
You can specify the appearance of the text before
typing, and can also select and change the attributes
of all or portions of the text content after it is typed.
To change text that already exists, simply highlight it
using the mouse and/or the Shift + arrow keys and
then make any needed changes to its attributes.
Note: If you do not type anything in the text field

on this panel when creating a new object, no
object will be created when you click OK. On the
other hand, if you remove the text from an exist-
ing object and click OK, an empty text box will
result.
159
1 Use the options on the Edit Bar, which displays • Click the Align Left , Align Center , or
above the Text Entry field, to change the font,
size, and style of the text. Align Right button to specify how the
selected text is aligned.
Select the desired options before typing to affect the
text as it is typed, or select some or all of the text and • Click the Paragraph Options button to spec-
then specify which options to apply to it. ify the selected paragraph’s alignment, spacing
• Select a Font from the drop-down list. and bullets or numbering in the Paragraph
Options dialog.
• Specify the Text Size in drawing units.
• Specify the Zoom factor of the selected text by
• Click the Color button to specify the color of typing a percentage value in the text field or
the selected or subsequently typed text. See clicking the up/down arrows. This setting only
“Select Color Dialog” on page 77. affects the text as it appears in this dialog.
• Click the Bold button to specify the selected

text as bold. The Ctrl+B hotkey can also be used. Note: Some fonts cannot be drawn at certain
zoom factors. When this is the case, the appear-
• Click the Italic button to specify the selected ance of the text will not change.
text as italic. The Ctrl+I hotkey can also be used.
2 Type or paste text in the Text Entry field. See
• Click the Underline button to specify the “Copy, Cut and Paste” on page 162.
selected text as underlined. The Ctrl + U hotkey • Right-click in the Text Entry field to access a
can also be used. contextual menu from which you can select
Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste and Select All. See
• Click the Strikethrough button to specify the
“Contextual Menus” on page 23.
selected text as stricken-through.
• To edit text in the entry field, click and drag to
• Click the Uppercase button to display the highlight any portion of it and then use the tools
selected text in all capital letters. on the Edit Bar as needed.
160
Editing Text
Paragraph Options Dialog

• Click the radio button beside Single, 1.5 Lines,
Double or User Specified.
• If you select User Specified Line Height, type
the desired height in the text field. For best
results, this value should be at least as much as
the largest text size used in the selection.
3 Specify the appearance of the selection’s side

Margins, as measured in from edges of the text
box. Only positive Margin values can be used.
• Specify the Indent, which is measured from the
left side margin. A negative value can be used if a
left Margin has been specified.
4 Specify the appearance of Bullets and

numbering in the selection.
• Select the desired bullet, numbered, or lettered
Type from the drop-down list.
• Specify the Number Prefix, which are any char-
acters that you would like to display before the
number or letter. Does not affect paragraphs
using circle or square bullets.
• Specify the Number Suffix, which are any char-
1 Specify the Alignment of the selected acters that you would like to display after the
paragraph(s). See “Aligning Text” on page 162. number or letter and before its actual text. Does
not affect paragraphs using circle or square bul-
2 Specify the Line Spacing of the selected lets.
paragraph(s).
Editing Text
Once created, Rich Text objects can be selected 2. On the TEXT panel of the Rich Text
Specification dialog, click and drag to select
individually or as a group and edited using the edit
handles and the edit toolbar buttons Individual text some or all of the text typed into the Text field.
objects can also be edited in the Rich Text
Specification dialog. See “Rich Text Specification
Editing Text Attributes

Most text attributes, including the font, size, style, 3. With some or all of the text selected, change any
and the content itself, are edited in the Rich Text of the attributes available along the top of the
Specification dialog. panel, including the font, size, color, and style.
In order to edit the attributes of an existing Rich Text
object, you must select some or all of the text
before making changes. See “Text Panel” on page
159.
To edit Text attributes 4. As changes are made, the selected text updates.
Only the selected text is modified.
1. Select a Rich Text object and click the
Open Object edit button.
161
Scaling Text
As with the size of other objects, text size is subject
to the current drawing scale specified in the Page
Setup dialog. See “Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog” on
page 384.
Using the Mouse Aligning Text

A selected Rich Text object has the same edit Text can be aligned in a couple of ways.
handles as other box-based objects. See “Editing • The text content of a text object can be aligned to
Box-Based Objects” on page 89. the left, right, center or justified in the Rich Text
Specification dialog. See “Text Panel” on page
Move 159.
Extend/
Contract • The text content of a text object can be also be
Resize aligned by clicking the Align Left , Align
Right , Center , or Justify edit button.
Rotate
Copy, Cut and Paste
As a text box’s width is made narrower or wider Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of the Rich
using an edit handle, its height may increase or Text Specification dialog can be accomplished using
decrease so that none of the text becomes hidden. keyboard hotkeys:
The opposite is not true, however: a text box’s height
• Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text and save it
cannot be resized smaller than the height of the rows
to the system clipboard.
of text it currently contains.
• Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text and copy
Using the Edit Tools it to the system clipboard.
• Press Ctrl + V to paste your last cut or copied
A selected Rich Text object can be edited in a selection in a new text object.
For more, see “Copying and Pasting Objects” on
See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 23.
page 70.
Resizing Text Copy, Cut and Paste use the system clipboard,
making it possible to transfer text between text
The default character height of Rich Text objects objects, between Home Designer Suite files, from a
can be specified as can the character height for plan into another application, or vice versa.
individual objects, in their specification dialogs. See
“Text Defaults” on page 157.
Copying and Pasting Text

The Copy, Cut and Paste commands use the system Cut, Copy, and Paste can also be accessed from the
clipboard, making it possible to transfer text between Edit menu of many applications, including Home
text objects, between Home Designer Suite files, Designer Suite. These menu commands are not
from a plan into another application such as a text available when the text specification dialogs are
editor or spreadsheet program, or vice versa. See open, but you can use the associated hotkeys.
“Copying and Pasting Objects” on page 70.
To Copy, Cut and Paste text
All or selected portions of the Materials List can also
1. On the TEXT panel of either text specification
be copied and pasted into a text object, as well as into
a word processing or spreadsheet program. See dialog or in another program altogether, high-
“Materials Lists” on page 377. light the text you wish to cut, copy or paste.
162
Find/Replace Text
2. Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text out of its Pasting into Rich Text
original location and save it to the system clip-
board. Text pasted into a Rich Text object from
another source will retain most - but not
3. Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text to the necessarily all - of its custom formatting. If a line of
system clipboard without removing it from its text is sufficiently long, however, it may be wrapped
original location. automatically when pasted into Rich Text.
4. Open the text object or a file in another applica-
tion and click to place your cursor in the Text Text pasted into a RichText object from a
field, writing area, or spreadsheet cell. spreadsheet program retains basic column and row
information. Column width cannot be adjusted;
5. Press Ctrl + V to Paste the copied text at the
however, as you add or remove text from a cell, row
location of your cursor.
height will increase or decrease to accommodate
Bear in mind that when text is copied and pasted, its your changes.
formatting is not always retained. The results depend
on the program or type of text object in which the Pasting into a View
content was created as well as the type of text object
into which it is pasted. Text can also be pasted directly into a plan or
elevation view. When you use the Paste command, a
new Rich Text object is created, the text is pasted
into that object, and it is selected. In order to see the
new object, you may need to Fill Window.
Find/Replace Text
The Find/Replace Text tools help you make sure
that the text in your files is current and correct.
Find/Replace Text locates text in Rich Text
schedule titles and headings, and custom labels for
objects and rooms. It does not locate text in
automatic object labels, default room labels,
suppressed labels or the Materials List, however.
Find/Replace Text
Select Edit> Find/Replace Text to find a
particular word or string of text in your plan
file and replace it if you wish.
1 Find and Replace -

• Type the string of text that you want to Find in
the text field.
• Type the string of text that you want the text you
find to be Replaced With.
• Select the scope of your search from the Search-
ing In drop-down list. Choose “Current View”,
163
“Current File”, “All Open Files” or “Selected the current search Result. See “Select Color Dia-
Objects”. log” on page 77.
2 The Search Options allow you to refine your 3 The current search Results are shown for
search. reference in the field on the left. The location of
• Check Case Sensitive to distinguish between the associated object, including file name, view
capitalized and lowercase letters when searching. name, and its object type is stated above the Results
When unchecked, capitalization is ignored while field as well. Click a button to perform the associated
searching. The Replace function is always case action:
sensitive. • Click Find Previous to find the previous search
• When Expand Percent Signs is checked, the Results.
program will ignore strings of one or two % signs • Click Find Next to search for additional Results.
in a row, which may be used to mark up imported • Click to Replace the current search Results with
text with style commands. Uncheck this to find the replacement specified above.
individual % signs in the search results.
• Click to Replace All instances of the current
• Check Show in File to open a new view window search Results found throughout the Searching In
or go to a new layout page and highlight the scope, selected above.
object associated with the current search Result.
When unchecked, the current search Result will
only be highlighted if it is located in the current Although the Find options do not locate text
in suppressed labels, Replace All will
view window. See “Working in Multiple Views”
replace that text. See “Displaying Labels” on page
on page 61. 166.
• Click the Highlight Color button to specify the
color used to highlight the object associated with
Text Arrows
Text arrows, which are simply CAD lines with Text with Arrow
arrows drawn on the “Text” layer, can be used to
connect text objects to details of interest in your The Text with Arrow tool places a text object
drawing. See “Draw Lines” on page 101. with an arrow already attached. This arrow
can be selected and edited like any other arrow.
When a selected Text Line with Arrow is snapped to
an object on either end, its end edit handle will Text Line with Arrow
display the Selected Edge Handle Fill color. See
“Colors Panel” on page 51. Text Lines with Arrow can be attached to
text, CAD and architectural objects by
Text arrows can be snapped together to form open or selecting CAD> Text> Text Line with Arrow and
closed polylines. If two lines with arrows meet then clicking and dragging to draw a line. There is no
within the bounding box of a text object, however, limit to the number of text lines with arrows that can
they will not join. This allows you to attach multiple, be attached to an object.
separate text arrows to a single text object. See
“Editing Line-Based Objects” on page 82. The endpoints of Text Lines with Arrows can
Lines with arrows can be independent or attached to be joined to form polylines with corners that can be
other objects. If an attached object is moved, the end adjusted using the edit handles. See “Polylines” on
of the Line with Arrow will move, as well. Arrows page 105.
attach to closed polyline-based objects along their
edges, but can attach to Text or an architectural A Text Line with Arrow behaves like a Line
object anywhere within its bounding box in plan With Arrow with one exception: Text Lines
view. with Arrow are initially placed on the “Text” layer,
not the “CAD, Default”. See “Layers” on page 74.
If an arrow is attached to text or another object,
deleting either the text or the object will also delete
the arrow.
164
Text Styles
Auto Position Arrows moved, the tail of the arrow snaps to different Auto
Position locations on the text object, maintaining its
Auto Positioning helps prevent a Text Line with connection.
Arrow from crossing over the text object it is
attached to by snapping the end of the line to the
midpoint of the text box’s nearest edge. If the text
object or the line’s arrowhead is moved, the location
of the tail end will update as needed so that it snaps
to the nearest edge’s midpoint. This behavior only
occurs when the end of a line with arrow is snapped
an Auto Position location: if it is snapped to a
different point on the text, the tail end will not move.
The following image illustrates the behavior of Auto
Positioning. When the head of the line with arrow is
Text Styles
In Home Designer Suite, a Text Style is a set of log will open, allowing you to select which Saved
attributes assigned to any object that displays text, Text Style Defaults you would like to edit.
such as Dimensions and object labels.
Saved Text Style Dialog
Note: Because of its ability to use multiple attri-
butes in the same object, Rich Text does not use
Text Styles. See “Rich Text Specification Dialog”
on page 159.
There are three Text Styles in Home Designer Suite.

You can edit these Text Styles to suit your needs in
the Text Style Defaults dialog
• The Default Label Style affects the appearance of
labels for objects such as doors and windows;
• The Default Text Style controls the appearance of
legacy Text objects, and dimension line labels, • Select the Name of a Text Style from the list.
unless specified otherwise. • Click the Edit button to open the defaults dialog
• The Default Room Style controls the appearance for the selected Text Style so that you can edit it.
of room labels. • Click OK to close the Saved Text Style Defaults
dialog and save any changes you made in the
Text Style Defaults defaults dialog(s). Any changes made to a given
Text Style will be applied to all objects in the cur-
Select Edit> Default Settings, click on “Text rent plan that are set to use that Text Style.
Styles” and click Edit to open the Text Style
Defaults dialog. The Saved Text Style Defaults dia- • Click Cancel to close the Saved Text Style
Defaults dialog without saving any changes that
you may have made in the defaults dialog.
Text Style Panel

The TEXT STYLE panel is found in various The settings on this panel are also found in the Text
specification and defaults dialogs in the program. Style Defaults dialog. where they affect all objects
using that style rather than a single selected object.
165
2 Specify the attributes of the selected Text

Style’s Font.
• Select a font from the drop-down list.
• The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic, Strike-
out, and Uppercase are available. Check any of
the boxes to apply that style.
3 Specify the Character Height of text using the

selected Text Style.
• Enter the Character Height in drawing units.
This height is subject to the current drawing
scale.
4 Specify the selected Text Style’s Text Color.

When Use Custom Text Style is not selected
above, a Text Color does not display here for
reference.
• When By Layer is checked, text uses the line
color assigned to the layer that the object it is
assigned to is located on. See “Layer Attributes”
1 Check Use Default Text Style to use the on page 74.
default style for the selected object type, or
uncheck this box to enable the settings below and • Uncheck By Layer, then click the Color bar to
define a custom style. select a different color. See “Select Color Dialog”
The settings that follow are only editable when Use on page 77.
Default Text Style is unchecked. When it is checked,
information about the Text Style that is assigned to
5 A preview of the Text Style currently assigned
to the selected object displays here.
the selected object displays for reference.
Object Labels
Object labels can display in plan view for a variety of • Fixtures and appliances inserted into cabinets do
different object types. not have labels of their own.
• Automatic Labels provide basic information
about the object, such as its type, size, or name. Displaying Labels
• You can create a custom label for an object in its The display of object labels can be controlled
specification dialog using text. See “Label Panel” by layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
on page 166. Label layer names begin with the object type,
followed by the word Label: for example, cabinet
Automatic Labels labels are located on the “Cabinets, Labels” layer.
Most objects that can display labels have an
Automatic Label created by the program that states You can choose to suppress the label for an
basic information about it. When Automatic Labels individual object on the LABEL panel of its
is selected in the object’s specification dialog, this is specification dialog.
usually the label that will be used; however: Object labels use the “Default Label Style” Text
• If a user-defined label is specified in the object’s Style. See “Text Styles” on page 165.
defaults dialog, that label will be used instead of
the Automatic Label.
Label Panel
The LABEL panel is found in the specification and defaults dialogs for a variety of different objects.
166
Object Labels
1 Most objects have a Suppress Label option. the Materials List. See “Window Labels” on page
Check this box to prevent the selected object’s 187 and “Displaying Mulled Units” on page 186.
label from displaying in plan view.
2 The Label Options control what information is
Bay, Box and Bow Windows and Mulled Window contained in the label. See “Displaying 3D
units have several settings for controlling Multiple Views” on page 307.
Component labels. See “Window Labels” on page • Select Automatic Labels to use the default label
187. for the selected object. See “Automatic Labels”
• Select Suppress All Labels to display no label in on page 166.
plan view. Individual components are counted in • Select Specify Label to replace the selected
the Materials List. object’s Automatic Label with whatever you type
• Select Show Component Labels to produce in the text field below. When Specify Label is
labels for each component in plan view. Individ- chosen, the selected object’s Automatic Label
ual components are counted in the Materials List. initially populates the text field.
• Select Show Single Label for Entire Unit to
produce one label for the unit and suppress com- 3 In most specification dialogs, a preview of the
selected object displays here. Labels can be
ponent labels. When this option is selected, the seen in Plan View only. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
settings that follow become enabled. on page 25.
These settings also affect how Bay, Box and Bow
Windows and Mulled Window units are counted in
167
168
Chapter 15:
Doors
Home Designer Suite comes with tools for creating a Chapter Contents
wide variety of interior and exterior doors. In • Door Defaults
addition, the library offers a large selection of • Door Tools
specialty doors and doorways including hinged, • Displaying Doors
sliding, pocket, bifold, and garage doors. Additional • Editing Doors
name-brand door catalogs are also available for • Changing Door Swings
download from our web site, HomeDesignerSoft- • Special Doors
ware.com. • Door Specification Dialog
Door Defaults
There are several defaults dialogs for doors. Because Hinged and Sliding Doors are often used in
Default Settings are accessed by selecting both interior and exterior applications, they have
Edit> Default Settings. Click the arrow next to both Interior and Exterior Door Defaults.
“Doors” to expand the category. Select a subheading
and click the Edit button to open the defaults dialog Interior vs Exterior Doors
associated with your selection.
Regardless of its Door Type or the tool used to
The Door Defaults dialogs look nearly the same as create it, a door will be:
the Door Specification dialog. See “Door
• An Interior Door if it is placed into a wall that
Specification Dialog” on page 176. There are only a
separates two interior rooms;
couple of differences:
• An Exterior Door if it is placed into a wall that
• Since default settings are specified here, “Use
separates an interior room from either an exterior
Default” is not an option for some settings as it is
room or the building’s exterior. See “Room
in the Door Specification dialog.
• The Door Type cannot be changed in the Defaults
dialogs. This rule applies to doors copied and pasted from one
location to another just as it does to those created
using the Door Tools.
Door Tools
To place a door, select the type you want from pointer over a wall section. When a preview outline
the Build> Door submenu. Move your mouse can be seen, click to place a door at that location.
169
The minimum initial size for doors varies by Door Sliding Doors
Type. For example, If there is room enough along the
wall to fit a 12” (300 mm) wide Hinged Door, a Select Build> Door> Sliding Door and click
preview outline will display and a door can be on a wall to place a sliding door. Sliding doors
placed. Garage doors, in contrast, must initially be at have separate defaults for interior and exterior doors:
least 6’ (1800 mm) wide. interior sliding doors are typically solid while
exterior sliding doors are Glass Panel doors.
Doors can be placed in both straight and curved
walls, as well as span across straight, collinear wall The initial opening side of a sliding door can be
segments. specified by moving the mouse pointer along the
wall while the mouse button is still pressed.
A newly created door inherits the settings in the
Door Defaults dialog for its door type. Once created, Pocket Doors
doors can be edited in a variety of ways. See “Door
Defaults” on page 169. Select Build> Door> Pocket Door and click
on a wall where you want to place a pocket
Doors cannot be placed in a wall specified as door.
Invisible. See “Room Dividers and Invisible Walls”
on page 113. As with sliding doors, the initial opening side of a
pocket door can be specified by moving the mouse
Once placed, any door may be changed into any pointer along the wall while the mouse button is still
other type of door in the Door Specification dialog. pressed.
See “General Panel” on page 177.
By default, a pocket door becomes a double pocket
Hinged Doors door if its width is four feet (1200 mm) or greater.
Select Build> Door> Hinged Door and click Bifold Doors

on a wall to place a hinged door at that
location. Hinged doors have separate defaults for Select Build> Door> Bifold Door and click
interior and exterior doors. By default, a hinged door on a wall where you want to place a bifold
becomes a double door when its width is four feet door.
(1200 mm) or greater. Like a hinged door, the initial opening side of a
The initial swing direction of a hinged door depends bifold door depends on the location of the mouse
on the location of the mouse pointer relative to the pointer relative to the wall when you click. The door
wall when you click. The door will swing towards will open towards the side of the wall that you click
the side of the wall that you click nearest. nearest.
The initial hinge side of a hinged door can be set by Similarly, the initial hinge side of a bifold door can
clicking to place the door and then holding the mouse be specified by moving the mouse pointer along the
button down rather than releasing it. Move the mouse wall while the mouse button is still pressed.
toward the end of the door that you would like the By default, a bifold door becomes a double bifold if
hinges to be on: as the mouse pointer nears either its width is greater than three feet (900 mm).
end, the door preview’s hinge side will move to that
end. You can also adjust the door’s swing direction in
Garage Doors
this manner. When the swing direction and hinge
side are correct, release the mouse button. Select Build> Door> Garage Door and click
on a wall to place a garage door.
Doorways In plan view, dashed lines show the size and location
Select Build> Door> Doorway and click on of the garage door when open.
a wall to place a doorway. Doorways are Garage doors will build into a garage stem wall
simply openings without a door and can be placed in provided the room is designated as a garage before
interior and exterior walls, railings, and fences. You the door is inserted. See “Room Types” on page 132.
can assign a door from the library to a doorway if
you wish.
170
Displaying Doors
Fixed Door Entryways and wrapped openings are examples of

Doorways, which are wall openings that do not have
Select Build> Door> Fixed Door and click doors within them.
on a wall to place a fixed door.
Barn Door
Select Build> Door> Barn Door and click on
a wall to place a surface mounted sliding door,
sometimes referred to as a barn style door.
Shower Door
To add a door to the Doorway, select a Door Type
Select Build> Door> Shower Door and click other than “Doorway” from the drop-down list in the
on a wall to place a hinged glass slab shower Door Specification dialog. See “General Panel” on
door. page 177.
You can also select a door from the library and place
Place a Shower Door in a Straight Glass it into a doorway in plan view or any 3D view.
Wall. See “Wall Tools” on page 110.
To place a library door in a doorway
The Doors & Doorways Library 1. Go to plan view or any 3D view.
Catalog 2. Open the Library Browser.
The Doors & Doorways library catalog can be 3. Browse or search to find a door style that suits
accessed by selecting View> Library your needs.
Browser and browsing to Home Designer Core 4. Select the door in the Library Browser, then
Catalogs> Architectural> Doors and Doorways. This click on the doorway to place the selected door
catalog contains a variety of interior and exterior within it. If a door already exists, it is replaced.
doors, as well as special entryways and wrapped
openings. 5. Continue clicking other doorways as needed.
Displaying Doors
The display of doors and door labels is • Opens to an exterior room such as a Garage or
controlled in the Display Options dialog. See Deck. See “Room Types” on page 132.
“Display Options Dialog” on page 74. • Is located between rooms with different floor
Doors can only be placed in walls, so if a wall’s layer heights. See “Stepped Floor and Ceiling Plat-
is turned off in plan view, any doors placed in that forms” on page 139.
wall will not display, either. Doors can display
independent of their containing walls in 3D views,
however. See “Displaying Walls” on page 117.
If the “Doors” layer is turned off, doors and their
casing do not display but openings in the walls where
they are located are visible.
In Plan Views
A door’s jamb, and swing are all represented in plan
Threshold
view. A threshold line will display across a door Line
opening in plan view when the door:
• Is located in an exterior wall. See “Exterior and If an exterior door to a Garage room on Floor 1
Interior Walls” on page 112. extends into a Garage stem wall or curb on Floor 0,
171
its location will be indicated on Floor 0. See You can specify whether an exterior door has a
“Garages” on page 224. threshold in the Door Specification dialog. See
“Casing Panel” on page 179.
In 3D Views
Door Labels
You can specify whether a selected door is shown
open or closed in 3D views by clicking the Show Door labels display in floor plan view, centered on
Door Open in 3D and Show Door Closed in 3D the doors they represent, when the “Doors, Labels”
layer is turned on and use the “Default Label Style”
edit buttons as well as in the Door Specification Text Style. See “Object Labels” on page 166.
Door labels indicate Width and Height. For example:
If a door is set to display open in 3D, the angle of the
• In Imperial plans, the label for a 3’-0” wide, 6’-8”
open door can be changed using the edit handles in
high double hung window will read 3068.
plan view. See “Using the Mouse” on page 172.
• In metric plans, the label for a 900 mm wide,
2100 mm high double hung window will read
900x2100.
Editing Doors
Before a door can be edited, it must be selected. To the door along the wall it is placed in. Use the
select a door, click it when the Select Objects triangular Rotate handle to adjust the door’s swing.
tool or any of the Door Tools are active. Doors In 3D views, a selected door has five edit handles:
and/or windows can also be group selected and the Move handle at the center and a Resize handle on
edited. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79 each edge. Click and drag an edge handle to resize
the door.
Blocked units are made up of individual doors and
windows that have been grouped together to act as A door or window moved against an intersecting
one object. You can create what is essentially a wall temporarily stops when the casing meets the
blocked door unit by assigning a library door to a intersecting wall. You can continue to drag and it
doorway from the library. resumes movement past the intersecting wall.
Select a blocked unit by clicking on it in any view. Using Dimensions

To select a door that is a component of a blocked
unit, click at the location of the component in Like various other objects, doors can be
moved using dimensions. See “Moving
question, then click the Select Next Object edit
button. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79.
By default, dimensions locate the sides of doors.
In the Specification Dialog Once a dimension line has been drawn, you can
move or add its extension lines to locate the center of
The most precise method of editing a door or a door. See “Editing Extension Lines” on page 152.
group of doors is to use the Door
Specification dialog. Door type, size, casing,
Using the Edit Tools
materials, and more can all be specified in this
dialog. See “Door Specification Dialog” on page A selected door or doors can be edited in a variety of
176. ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The
Using the Mouse
• Click the Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
In plan view, click either of the two end handles and button to change the side of the door that its
drag along the wall to change the width. The label hinges are on. See “Changing Door Swings” on
showing the size updates as the handles are dragged. page 173.
Click and drag the Move handle at the center to move
• Click the Change Swing Side edit button to
change which direction the selected door swings.
172
Changing Door Swings
• Click the Show Door Open in 3D or Show Door Sides

Door Closed in 3D edit button to control the Like walls, all doors have two sides: an interior side
selected door’s appearance in 3D views. See “In and an exterior side. This is the case even for doors
3D Views” on page 172. placed in interior walls. See “Exterior and Interior
• Click the Gable Over Door/Window to cre-
ate a gable over the selected door(s) the next time By default, the interior side of the door will face the
the roof is rebuilt. See “Gable Over Door/Win- direction that the door swings to open. If you prefer,
dow” on page 258. you can specify that the interior side face the
opposite direction in the Door Specification dialog.
See “General Panel” on page 177.
Centering Doors
You can specify the materials for the two sides
The Center Object edit button allows you to
separately in the Door Specification dialog. See
center a selected door along a wall within a
“Materials Panel” on page 181.
room or relative to a cabinet or window. See “Using
Center Object” on page 94. You can also specify different casing for the interior
and exterior sides of exterior doors - that is, doors
To center a door along a wall placed in exterior walls or walls defining a Garage or
other exterior room type. See “Room Types” on page
1. Select a door or combination of windows and
132.
doors in plan view.
2. Click the Center Object edit button then Door Casing

choose from one of the following options: Doors typically feature casing, or trim, on both sides
• Click near a wall inside a room to center the of the wall opening. See “Applying Moldings” on
door along that wall in that room. page 268.
• Click outside the house (on the exterior room) • By default, interior doors use the same casing
near an exterior wall to center the door along profile on both sides. You can specify that both
an exterior wall. sides be edited separately in the Door
Specification dialog. See “General Panel” on
Door Style and Panels page 177.
There are a number of Door Styles available for use, • Exterior doors can have different casing profiles
including Slab, basic Panel, and Louvered. In on their interior and exterior sides.
addition, a selection of door panel symbols is
The default casing for interior and exterior doors is a
available in the Library. See “Placing Library
basic rectangular stock profile. You can specify a
door’s casing profiles in the Door Specification
You can specify whether a selected door is a Single dialog, or you can choose to suppress casing
or Double Door, or whether its panel number is altogether. See “Casing Panel” on page 179.
determined automatically by its width in the Door
Specification dialog. See “Options Panel” on page Door Hardware
178.
Handles, locks, and hinges can be assigned to a door
in the Door Specification dialog. See “Hardware
Changing Door Swings

Door swing direction and hinge side can The Change Opening/Hinge Side edit button is
be changed using the edit handles and the available for all doors except double doors and
Change Opening/Hinge Side and Change Swing garage doors.
Side edit buttons.
The Change Swing Side edit button is available
for all doors except pocket doors.
173
Hinged Doors
In addition to using the edit buttons, Hinged Doors
and Shower Doors’ hinge side and swing direction
can be changed using the triangular Rotate edit
handle.
To adjust the angle of swing:

1. In plan view, select the door and grab the trian-
gular handle.
2. Drag to change the amount of swing.
3. To change the swing direction, click the Change
Swing Side edit button.
3. Release the mouse.

If you drag near the closed position, the door snaps to
a closed position.
To change the swing using edit handles:

Sliding Type Doors
1. In plan view, select the door and grab the trian-
gular edit handle. Sliding, Pocket, Bifold, and Barn Doors are types of
sliding door.
Similar to hinged doors, the Opening/Hinge and
Swing sides of a Sliding, Pocket, Bifold, or Barn
Door can be changed by clicking and dragging its
diamond-shaped edit handle.
To change the side of a Sliding, Pocket, Bifold or
Barn door that opens, select the door and click the
2. Drag the pointer along the path of the new arc to
change the hinge side and/or swing direction. Change Opening/Hinge Side edit button.
3. Release the mouse.

Note: For a Pocket Door to change Opening Side,
To change the swing using edit buttons: there must be enough room for the entire door to
fit in the wall on that side.
1. In plan view, select the door.
2. To change the hinge side, click the Change To flip the fixed and moving sides of the door, click
Opening/Hinge Side edit button. the Change Swing Side edit button.
174
Special Doors
Garage Doors
To change the side of a garage door that it faces,
Unlike other door types, the Swing side of a garage
select it and click the Change Swing Side edit door cannot be modified using the edit handles.
button.
Special Doors
A variety of special doors and doorways can be
created in Home Designer Suite.
Doorway
Transoms Above Doors

Transom windows above doors are created the same
as other stacked windows. See “Grouped Windows”
on page 186.
Wrapped Openings
Wrapped openings of various shapes are available in
the Doors & Doorways Library. To open a railing across an entire section, resize the
doorway’s Width so that it is greater than the length
You can also create a wrapped opening by
of the railing in the Door Specification dialog. The
unchecking Use Interior Casing and/or Use
opening resizes to the maximum width possible for
Exterior Casing in a Doorway’s Door Specification
that space. See “General Panel” on page 177.
dialog. See “Casing Panel” on page 179. If base
molding is present, it will wrap around the opening. To add a gate, specify the doorway’s Door Type as a
Door, then choose an appropriate gate as the Door
Style. A selection of gates is available in the Fences
& Railings library folder. See “Placing Library
Creating a Doorway with a

Railing
Openings in Railings When a railing is specified as No Room Def, it can
be positioned within a Doorway .
Use the Doorway tool to open a railing for a
stairway or other access.
175
5. On the GENERAL panel of the Railing

Specification dialog, check No Room Def and
click OK. See “General Panel” on page 125.
6. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag it into
position within the doorway. See “To move an
object freely” on page 93.
To create a doorway with railing
1. Place a Doorway at the desired location in Positioning a railing in a doorway

your plan.
2. Select Build> Railing and Deck> Straight Placing a Gable Over a Door
Railing , then click and drag to draw a rail- Click the Gable Over Door/Window edit
ing parallel to the wall with the doorway. button to produce a gable roof over the
selected door(s) the next time automatic roofs are
3. Select the railing, then use the Resize edit han-
built. See “Gable Over Door/Window” on page 258.
dles to adjust the length of the railing as needed.
See “Using the Edit Handles” on page 82. You can manually edit or delete this gable line at any
4. With the railing selected, click the Open Object time. Your changes take effect when the automatic
roofs are rebuilt. This can also be used with group
edit button. selected doors.
Door Specification Dialog

To open the Interior or Exterior Door Whether a selected door is Interior or Exterior
Specification dialog, select a door or group of depends on where it is placed. See “Interior vs
doors and click the Open Object edit button or Exterior Doors” on page 169.
double-click on a door using the Select Objects
or any Door tool.
176
General Panel
1 General - The Swing Angle also affects the door’s appear-

ance in 3D views if Draw Closed is unchecked
• Door Style - Select Slab, Glass Slab, Panel, Glass on the OPTIONS panel.
Panel, Louvered, or Glass Louver from the drop-
down list; select a style from the Library; or 2 Specify the Size and Position of the selected
door.
choose “Use Default” to use the default door style
• Specify the Width, Height, and Thickness of the
set in the Door Defaults dialog. See “Door
door.
Defaults” on page 169.
• Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-
• Select “Library” from the drop-down list or click
down list. This determines where the next two
the Library button to choose a door symbol from
settings are measured from and also affects their
the library. Once a library door is selected, its
labels.
name is added to the Door Style list. See “Select
Library Object Dialog” on page 283. • Specify the height to Top, measured from the
selected Elevation Reference to the top of the
• Specify the Door Type as Doorway, Hinged, Slid-
door frame.
ing, Pocket, Bifold, Garage, Fixed, Barn, or
Shower. In the Door Defaults dialogs, the Door • Specify the height to Bottom, measured from the
Type cannot be changed. selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the
door frame.
• Specify the Swing Angle of the selected door in
plan view, between 0° and 180°. An angle of 0°
3 The Sliding Doors settings are available for
displays the door as closed and an angle of 180° Slider, Pocket, and Barn Doors.
displays it as wide open. The Swing Angle for • Specify the Side and Top Overhang values,
Bifold doors and double doors that swing from which control how much the selected door
the center can be no more than 90°. extends past its wall opening. Only available for
Barn Doors.
177
• Specify the Offset from Wall, which is how far opposite direction. Only available when a door
the selected door is offset from its default loca- symbol from the Library is specified as the Door
tion. Slider and Pocket Doors are centered in the Style. See “Door Sides” on page 173.
wall’s Main Layer by default, while Barn Doors • Check Separate Trim and Materials for Each
are positioned against the wall surface. Side to specify the casing, lintels, and all materi-
als for each side of the selected interior door inde-
4 Panel Frame Widths - Specify the dimensions pendently. When unchecked, the two sides of the
of the selected door’s rails and stiles. Only
available for Glass, Panel, and Louvered doors. door use the same trim and materials. Only
available when the selected door is placed in an
• Specify the Width of the stiles and top rail.
interior wall. See “Exterior and Interior Walls” on
• Specify the height of the Bottom rail. page 112.
5 Options - 6 A preview of the door displays on the right side

of the dialog box. A label indicates which side
• Check Reverse Interior/Exterior to reverse the of the door is its Interior and which is its Exterior.
two sides of the selected door so that they face the See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
Options Panel
1 Specify the number of Door Panels or sections (900 mm) wide. If the width is greater than this,
that the selected door has. See “Door Style and Double Door is the default.
Panels” on page 173.
• Select Single Door Only to force the selected Note: The Calculate From Width defaults are not
hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a single door, editable.
regardless of its width.
• Select Double Door Only to force the selected 2 3D Display - Specify whether the selected door
hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a double door, is shown open or closed in 3D and Elevation
regardless of its width. views.
• Select Calculate From Width to use the program If Show Open is selected, the Swing Angle set on
defaults. Hinged and pocket doors default to Sin- the General Panel is used.
gle Door when less than four feet (1200 mm)
wide; bifold doors do so when less than three feet 3 A preview of the door displays on the right side
of the dialog box. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
on page 25.
178
Casing Panel
1 Check Use Interior Casing, then specify the is not included in the door’s size, which is set on the
Width of the casing. General Panel.
2 Check Use Exterior Casing, then specify the 4 Uncheck Use Sill/Threshold to prevent a sill
Width of the casing. Not available for doors in from being generated under the door. See
interior walls unless Use Exterior Trim and “Displaying Doors” on page 171.
Materials is checked on the GENERAL panel. See
“General Panel” on page 177. 5 A preview of the door displays on the right side
of the dialog box. If casing is not specified for a
Uncheck Has Jamb to prevent a jamb from Doorway, the Show Wall option will be toggled on
3
generating around the selected door. The jamb automatically. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
25.
Lites Panel
The settings on the LITES panel of the Door General Panel. These settings are also found on the
Specification dialogs are only available when the LITES panel of the Window Specification dialog.
selected door is specified as a Glass door on the See “Lites Panel” on page 191.
Arch Panel
The settings on the ARCH panel are also found in the
Window Specification dialog.
The settings on this panel are not available if the
selected door is a Sliding, Bifold or Garage door.
The ARCH panel is not available for window symbols
from the library, and its settings are not available if a
selected window has been modified using the SHAPE
panel. See “Shape Panel” on page 192.
179
1 Define the style and size of the Arch. • Specify the Height of the arch, as measured from
the base of the arch to the top of the door. Not
• Select a Type of arch from the drop-down list. available for Round Top Arches.
2 A preview of the door displays on the right side

of the dialog box. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
on page 25.
Hardware Panel
Many of the settings on the HARDWARE panel are door’s Type is used. See “Dynamic Defaults” on
Dynamic Defaults: if “Use Default” is selected, the page 48.
setting in the Door Defaults dialog for the selected
180
1 Specify the Handles to be used on the selected 4 Specify the Sliding Tracks to be used on the
door. selected Barn Door.
• Select an Interior Handle and/or Exterior Han- • Select a Sliding Track from the drop-down list.
dle from the drop-down lists. • Specify the track’s Height Above Door.
• Specify the location of the door handles In From • Select a style of Hangers from the drop-down
Door Edge. list.
• Specify the location of the door handles Up From • Specify the distance In From Sides of the door to
Bottom. the center of the outermost hangers.
2 Specify the door’s interior and exterior Locks. • Specify the number of Hangers to be evenly
•Select an Interior Lock and/or Exterior Lock spaced along the door.
from the drop-down lists.
5 A preview of the door displays on the right side
• Specify the location of the door locks Up From of the dialog box. See “Dialog Preview Panes”
Bottom. The locks use the same In From Door on page 25.
Edge value as the handles.
Materials Panel
To use the same handle and lock on both The MATERIALS panel is available for a variety of
sides of a door, select “Match Interior” as the
objects throughout the program. For more
Exterior option.
information, see “Materials Panel” on page 296.
3 Specify the Hinges to be used on the selected Label Panel

door.
• Select a style of Hinges from the drop-down list. Door labels display in plan view when the “Doors,
Labels” is turned on and use the Text Style assigned
• Specify the distance In From Top/Bottom of the
to that layer. See “Door Labels” on page 172.
door to the center of the top and bottom hinges.
Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to have at “Label Panel” on page 166.
least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the interior, or hinge
side, door casing. Manufacturer Panel
• Specify the Number of Hinges on the selected The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact
door. Interior hinged doors and bifold doors information for the selected door’s manufacturer.
typically have two hinges while exterior hinged Only available for doors from Manufacturer library
doors have three. catalogs. See “Manufacturer Catalogs” on page 276.
181
182
Chapter 16:
Windows
Home Designer Suite can model a wide variety of Chapter Contents

windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement, sliding, • Window Defaults
awning, hopper, and louver window styles can all be • Window Tools
created with the standard Window tool. Home • Special Windows
Designer Suite can create bay, box, and bow • Grouped Windows
windows with a single click. In addition, the library • Displaying Windows
contains many mulled window combinations. • Editing Windows
• Window Specification Dialog
• Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
• Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs
• Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs
Window Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by selecting dialog. For more information, see “Window
Edit> Default Settings. Select Window from Specification Dialog” on page 188.
the Default Settings dialog.
The settings in the Window Defaults dialog control Dynamic Window Defaults
the attributes of a window when it is initially placed A variety of window default values are dynamic,
in a plan, so you should define the type of window including the Window Type, Casing Specifications,
that will be placed most often in your model. See and Sash sizes. All Materials are also dynamic.
“Default Settings vs Preferences” on page 47. When a dynamic default is changed, existing
The panels in the Window Defaults dialog are windows using the default value are affected. See
similar to those found in the Window Specification “Dynamic Defaults” on page 48.
Window Tools
To place a window, select Build> Window the window will display and a window can be
and choose the desired Window Tool. Move placed.
your mouse pointer over a wall section, then click to • The Bay, Box, and Bow Window tools do not
place a window in the wall at that location. have preview outlines. If a minimum width of
• If there is room enough along the wall to fit a 6” 30” (725 mm) cannot be accommodated at the
(150 mm) wide Standard Window, a preview of location where you click, a warning message will
display and a window unit will not be created.
183
Standard Windows can be placed in both straight and Box windows initially measure 4’-2” wide with a
curved walls, as well as span across straight, depth of 1’-6”. The component windows are
collinear wall segments. In contrast, a Bay, Box, or specified in the Window Defaults dialog and their
Bow Window can only be placed in a single, straight sizes adjust to fit the available space.
wall.
Windows cannot be placed in a wall specified as
Invisible. See “Room Dividers and Invisible Walls”
on page 113.
Standard Windows Bow Windows

Select Build> Window> Window, then click A Bow Window is a group of identical wall
on a straight or curved wall to place a segments that form a segmented curve. Select
Standard Window at that location. Build> Window> Bow Window and click on a
straight wall to produce a 5-section bow window.
A Standard Window is a single window that is not a
bay, box, or bow window. These special types are The component windows are specified in the
made up of multiple Standard Windows. Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes adjust to fit the
available space.
A Standard Window that is part of a special window
is called a Component Window. The 5-section bow below has a 4’-10” radius
centered 3’-9” inside the wall, giving an opening 5’-
Standard Windows can be specified as any of a 10” across and a depth of 11½”.
variety of window types, such as double hung,
casement and awning. See “Window Specification
Bay Windows
The roof is affected by Bay, Box and Bow

Windows. These windows should therefore
be placed before the roof is built. Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are not
included in the living area or in room standard
A Bay Window is composed of three wall area calculations. They are included in room inte-
rior area calculations.
sections, each with a single component
window. The two side walls are at an angle to the
main wall. Select Build> Window> Bay Window Pass-Throughs
and click on a straight wall to produce a bay window. Select Build> Window> Pass-Through, then
When initially placed, bay windows measure 2’-2” click on a straight or curved wall to place a
across at the front, 4’-2” across at the back, and are Pass Through at that location.
1’-0” deep. The component windows are specified in A Pass-Through is simply a wall opening without a
the Window Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to window unit placed inside. Like a window, it can
fit the available space. have casing and a sill. It does not, however, have a
sash, frame, or glass. It is one of the window Types
available in the Window Specification dialog. See
“General Panel” on page 188.
Wall Niches
Box Windows
Select Build> Window> Wall Niche, then
A Box Window is a bay window with side click on a straight or curved wall to place a
angles set at 90°. Select Build> Window> Wall Niche at that location.
Box Window and click on a straight wall to produce
a box window. A Wall Niche is a wall opening that does not extend
through the entire depth of the wall. You can specify
184
Special Windows
the niche’s depth in the Window Specification Architectural> Windows to access a selection of
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 188. special window units. Select the desired window,
then click on a wall to place the window at that
Windows Library location.
Select View> Library Browser, then browse

to Home Designer Core Catalogs>
Special Windows
A variety of special windows can be created using • To move a window all the way into a corner,
multiple standard windows, the edit tools or custom check Ignore Casing for Opening Resize. See
symbols. “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 49.
• To produce a minimal corner post and no siding
Creating Manual Bay, Box and or casing between the windows, use their Move
Bow Windows edit handles. Click and drag each window past
the exterior corner until its preview outline
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and bow
moves into the middle of the wall corner.
windows manually than to use the automatic tools.
Bays created using walls can have more than one
window per section, which is not possible using a Special Window Shapes
bay window unit. A selection of special shaped windows is available in
Bear in mind that moving a manually created bay, the Windows Library, including arched windows and
box or bow window is generally more difficult than mulled units.
moving a unit created with one of the Window Tools In addition, you can create a variety of window
since it is composed of individual walls. shapes in the Window Specification dialog,
including:
Corner Windows • Arched windows. See “Arch Panel” on page 192.
To create a corner window, first create the desired • Trapezoidal windows. See “Shape Panel” on
window on each side of the corner. For best results, page 192.
the heights, casing, and sills of both windows should
be the same. Placing a Gable Over a
There are a number of ways to control the size of the
Window
corner post. Click the Gable Over Door/Window edit
button to produce a gable roof over the
selected window(s) the next time automatic roofs are
built. See “Gable Over Door/Window” on page 258.
You can manually edit or delete this gable line at any
time. Your changes take effect when the automatic
roofs are rebuilt. This tool can also be used with
group selected windows.
Vents
• Use dimensions to position the windows relative A selection of attic, foundation and gable vents are
to the corner. By default, windows will stop when available in the Library Browser. See “The Library”
their interior casing bumps into the adjacent wall. on page 271.
See “Editing Windows” on page 187. Vents are placed in the same manner as regular
windows and can be edited in much the same way, as
well.
185
Grouped Windows
Windows can be grouped together to create a wide Mulled Units in the Library
variety of custom configurations. Stacked windows
are easy to create in 3D views, particularly Elevation A selection of mulled window units is available in
views, using their edit handles. See “Editing the Windows library. To place one in your plan,
Windows” on page 187. select it and click on a wall in any view. See “Placing
Library Objects” on page 281.
Selecting Components of Mulled

Units
To select a component of a mulled unit from the
library, click at the location of the component in
question, then click the Select Next Object edit
button or press the Tab key until that individual com-
ponent is selected. Only the component clicked on is
selectable using this method. If you need to select a
Notice how the windows and door in this example different component, click on it and repeat the pro-
are separate, with spaces between them. Doors and/ cess.
or windows can also be positioned so that there are If there are multiple levels, it is easiest to select the
no spaces between the windows and door units, and components in a 3D view. When you have selected
the casing between them appears to be shared. an individual component, you can change its
parameters in the Window Specification dialog. See
Automatically Mulled Openings “Window Specification Dialog” on page 188.
To form a mulled group of windows and/or doors, If the selected component is not itself a mulled unit
move them close enough together so that their and has no components above it, its Height and
casings touch. Once the casings touch, the windows Arch parameters can be changed. Changing the
are mulled together with one casing between the two Height causes the component top to move. The
of them. bottom remains stationary.
The sill of each window in the group must be at the
same level for them to share the middle casing. The
Displaying Mulled Units
casing tops do not have to be at the same level. The As with other windows, the display of mulled
casings are modeled as if they are one unit but the window units is controlled in the Display
windows remain separate objects for dimensioning Options dialog. See “Layer Attributes” on page 74.
and the Materials List.
Mulled units are placed on the “Windows” layer by
Windows can be automatically mulled to doors if the default and have a single label, which is on the
bottom of the window is at the elevation of the floor, “Windows, Labels” layer. Mulled units from the
equal to the bottom of the door. library are also included in the windows category of
the Materials List. If the component objects of a
mulled unit have unique moldings or materials, they
will not be noted in the Materials List.
Displaying Windows
The display of windows in floor plan and 3D in that wall will not display, either. Windows can
views can be controlled in the Display display independent of their containing walls in 3D
Options dialog. See “Display Options Dialog” on views, however. See “Displaying Walls” on page
page 74. 117.
Windows can only be placed in walls, so if a wall’s If the “Windows” layer is not set to display, window
layer is turned off in plan view, any windows placed casing and other components are not visible, but the
186
Editing Windows
openings in the walls where they are located can still Labels” layer is turned on and use the “Default Label
be seen. Style” Text Style See “Object Labels” on page 166.
Window labels indicate Width and Height, followed
In Plan View by Type. For example:
A window’s frame, glass, and sill are all represented • In Imperial plans, the automatic label for a 3’-0”
in plan view. This makes some window types, wide, 4’-0” high double hung window will read
notably Sliding and Double and Triple Casement 3040 DH.
windows, distinguishable.
• In metric plans, the automatic label for a 900 mm
wide, 1200 mm high double hung window will
read 900x1200 DH.
You can specify whether a Bay, Box or Bow Window
Double Hung
displays a single label or displays the labels of its
component windows.
• When Suppress All Labels is selected, individ-
Left Sliding ual components of Bay, Box and Bow Windows
are counted in the Materials List.
• When Show Component Labels is selected,
components of Bay, Box and Bow Windows are
Triple Casement counted in the Materials List.
Window types in plan view • When Show Single Label for Entire Unit is
selected, the Bay, Box or Bow Windows has one
Bay, box, and bow windows have dimensions lines label in plan view but each component is counted
associated with them. separately in the materials list.
• You can suppress their display by turning off the
These options are also available for mulled units but
“Manual Dimensions” layer or on a unit by unit
affect their display the materials list somewhat
basis in the unit’s specification dialog. See “Bay/
differently. See “Displaying Mulled Units” on page
Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs” on
186.
page 196.
• The arrow style and fill are set in the Dimension Customized labels can also be specified in the
Defaults dialog. See “Dimension Defaults Dia- Window Specification dialog.
log” on page 147.
Wall Niches can also display labels when the
“Wall Niches, Labels” layer is on. Unlike other
Window Labels windows, these objects’ Automatic Labels are blank;
Window labels display in floor plan view, centered however, you can specify a custom label in their
on the windows they represent, when the “Windows, specification dialog.
Editing Windows
Before a window can be edited, it must be selected. Windows can be edited using their edit handles, the
Click on a window when the Select Objects tool edit toolbar buttons, and the Window Specification
dialog. See “Window Specification Dialog” on page
or any of the Window Tools are active. Doors 188.
and/or windows can also be group-selected and
edited. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79. When you select a window in plan view, the window
size label displays the width followed by the height.
To select a window that is part of a blocked unit, For example, a 3036 window is 3’-0” wide by 3’-6”
click the component window, then click the Select high.
Next Object edit button. See “Selecting
Components of Mulled Units” on page 186.
187
In the Specification Dialog To create a corner window, drag the Move handle
straight out past the wall corner, parallel to the
The most precise method of editing a window selected window’s wall. See “Corner Windows” on
is to use the Window Specification dialog. page 185.
The window type, size, casing, materials, and more
can all be specified in this dialog. See “Window
Using Dimensions
Like various other objects, windows can be
Using the Mouse moved using dimensions. See “Moving
In plan view, click either of the two end handles and
drag along the wall to change the width. The label By default, dimensions locate the sides of windows.
showing the size updates as the window is resized. Once a dimension line has been drawn, you can
move or add its extension lines to locate the center of
In 3D views, a selected window has five edit a window. See “Editing Extension Lines” on page
handles: the Move handle at the center and a Resize 152.
handle on each edge. Click and drag an edge handle
to resize the window.
A single window or a group of windows can be
A selected window or windows can be edited in a
moved with the center edit handle.
A door or window moved against an intersecting See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 23.
wall temporarily stops when it is the casing distance
from the intersecting wall. Enable Ignore Casing for • Click the Gable Over Door/Window edit
Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults dialog to turn button to create a gable over the selected win-
off this behavior. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” dow(s) the next time the roof is rebuilt. See
on page 49. “Gable Over Door/Window” on page 258.
You can continue to drag the selected window and it • Click the Change Wall Side edit button to
will resume movement past or onto the intersecting move the selected Wall Niche to the opposite side
wall. of the wall. See “Wall Niches” on page 184.
Window Specification Dialog

To open the Window Specification dialog, The settings in this dialog are also similar to those in
select a window and click the Open Object the Wall Niche, Mulled Unit and Window Symbol
edit button; or double-click the window using the Specification dialogs. Although similar, a number of
Select Objects or a Window tool. the options cannot be edited when either a window
symbol or a mulled unit from the library is selected,
The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the and some panels are not available. See “Grouped
Window Defaults dialog. See “Window Defaults” on Windows” on page 186.
page 183.
General Panel
In the Wall Niche Specification dialog, only the Size
and Position settings on this panel are available. See
“Wall Niches” on page 184.
188
1 Window Type - Select the type of window • Specify the Bottom Component Size for Single
from the list. The first entry in the list is the Hung, Double Hung, Double Awning, Double
“Use Default”, which is set in the Window Defaults Hopper, and Triple Hopper windows; specify the
dialog. Top/Bottom Component Size for Triple Awning
windows; or,
2 Specify the Size and Position of the selected • Specify the Side Component Size for Triple
window.
Casement and Triple Sliding windows, the Right
• Specify the window’s Width and Height.
Component Size for Left Sliding windows, or
• Select the Elevation Reference from the drop- the Left Component Size for Right Sliding and
down list. This determines where the next two Double Casement windows.
setting labels. A Component Size value of 0 creates a window
with identically sized components.
• Specify the height to Top, measured from the
selected Elevation Reference to the top of the 3 The Interior Windows settings are only
window frame. present when the selected window is a Pass-
Through placed in an interior wall. See “Exterior and
• Specify the height to Bottom, measured from the
Interior Walls” on page 112.
selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the
window frame. • Check Separate Trim and Materials for Each
Side to specify the casing and all materials for
• Specify the Depth of the selected Wall Niche,
each side of the selected Pass-Through indepen-
measured from the wall surface to the back of the
dently. When unchecked, the two sides use the
niche. Only available for Wall Niches.
same trim and materials.
Note: When either the Floor to Top or Floor to Bot- 4 A preview of the selected window displays
tom setting is modified, the other will adjust in here. A label indicates which side of the
response to prevent the window’s Height from window is its Interior and which is its Exterior. See
changing. “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
Casing Panel
The CASING panel is not available in the Window
Symbol Specification dialog.
189
1 Check Use Interior Casing, then specify the 3 Uncheck Has Frame to prevent a frame from
Width of the casing. generating around the selected door. The frame
is not included in the window’s size, set on the
2 Check Use Exterior Casing, then specify the General Panel.
Width of the casing. If the selected window is a
Pass-Through placed in an interior wall, these
4 A preview of the selected window displays
settings will be unavailable unless Separate Trim here. You may need to rotate the preview to see
and Materials on Each Side is checked on the GEN- the casing on the side of the door you are editing. If
ERAL panel. See “General Panel” on page 188. casing is not specified for a Pass-Through, the Show
Wall option will be toggled on automatically. See
Sash Panel
The settings on the SASH panel control the size and The SASH panel is not available in the Wall Niche
position of the selected window’s sash. Note that Specification dialog, and the settings on this panel
increasing the Side, Middle, Top or Bottom Width are not available for Pass-Throughs.
decreases the area of the glass and vice versa.
1 Specify the width and depth of the selected tral members of Casement and Sliding windows.
window’s Sash, which are the pieces of the This is also the width of the top portion of the
window that hold the glass; or, uncheck this box to window when an arch is specified.
prevent it from having a sash. • Specify the Middle width of horizontal compo-
• Specify the Side Width of all vertical sash mem- nents between the top and bottom sash in Double
bers: those at the window sides as well as the cen- Hung, Double and Triple Awning, and Double
190
and Triple Hopper windows. It does not affect • Specify the Depth, or thickness, of the sash stock
Casement and Sliding windows. measured from the exterior to the interior.
• Specify the Top and Bottom Widths. The Top
value is not used if the window has an arch. 2 A preview of the selected window displays
here. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
Lites Panel
The LITES panel allows you to add muntins to The LITES panel is not available in the Wall Niche
windows, and is also available for Glass doors. See Specification dialog, and the settings on this panel
“Doors” on page 169. are not available for Pass-Throughs.
There are four possible styles of muntin bars.
1 Specify the number, position and style of Lites • Craftsman style is based on the normal style, but
for the selected window. only the topmost horizontal muntin bar is kept
• Select a Type, or style, of window lite from the with all the portions of the vertical muntin bars
drop-down list. above it. Typically, both Lites Across and Lites
Vertical should be set between 4 and 8.
• Enter the number of horizontal Lites Across in
each sash.
• Enter the number of vertical Lites Vertical in
each sash.
• Check or uncheck Lites in Top and/or Lites in
Bottom - or Lites in Left and/or Lights in Right
- to specify either one or both of the sashes to
• Normal style is the most common, with muntins
have divided lites.
going horizontally and vertically. Colonial win-
dows are an example of the normal style. • Check Auto Adjust Lites for Component Size
to have the program produce lites that are consis-
• Diamond style uses angled muntin bars to divide
tent in size across all components. When this is
up the lites. French windows are an example of
checked, the window’s lites and its specification
the diamond style.
settings may not agree; when unchecked, lites in
• Prairie style is based on the normal style, but the components may not be consistent in size.
with all the central muntin bars removed, leaving
only the two outside muntin bars both horizon-
Note: Because the fixed window in a Triple Sliding
tally and vertically. Typically, both Lites Across
window is twice the size of the movable windows,
and Lites Vertical should be set between 6 and 8. the fixed section has a vertical muntin bar. To
Federal or Federation windows are an example of eliminate this, uncheck Auto Adjust Lites for Com-
the Prairie style. ponent Size.
191

here. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
Shape Panel
The settings on the SHAPE panel control the position the selected window has an arch specified on the
of the selected window’s corners, allowing you to ARCH panel, it will be removed.
create angled edges and mitered top corners.
The SHAPE panel is not available for mulled units or
If any of these settings are used to create a custom window symbols from the library.
shape, the selected window will be automatically
specified as “Fixed Glass” on the GENERAL panel. If
Note: The Left and Right settings on this panel
refer to the window’s exterior.
1 Window Width displays for reference. It can • Click Revert All to restore the window to its
be changed on the General Panel. original shape, type and arch settings.
• Click Match Roof to match the angle of the top
of the window to the pitch of the roof above by 2 Specify the height of the window’s Left and
Right Sides, as measured from the bottom of
changing its Sides heights, below. If either Top the window. By default, these settings match the
Inside Corner box is checked, it will become window’s Height.
unchecked.
Match Roof does not work for curved roofs, has here. You may want to rotate the view so the
no effect if the window is not in a gable end wall, window’s exterior can be seen. See “Dialog Preview
and is not available in the Window Defaults dia- Panes” on page 25.
log.
Note: The Left and Right settings on this panel
refer to the window’s exterior.
Arch Panel
The settings on the ARCH panel of the Window and The ARCH panel is not available for window symbols
Mulled Unit Specification dialogs are also found on from the library, and its settings are not available if
the panel of the same name in the Door the selected window has been modified using the
Specification dialog. See “Arch Panel” on page 179. SHAPE panel.
192
Shutters Panel
The settings on the SHUTTERS panel allow you to The SHUTTERS panel is not available in the Wall
specify exterior shutters for the selected window or Niche and Window Symbol Specification dialogs.
mulled unit from the library.
1 Select a Type of Shutters from the drop-down rior sides face the wall. For functional shutters,
list. this should remain unchecked.
2 Specify the Size of the selected shutters. 5 A preview of the selected window displays on
•When Match Opening Width is checked, the right. In order to see the shutters, you may
each shutter’s width is exactly half that of the need to rotate the preview to show the Exterior. See
window, excluding casing. “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
• Uncheck Match Opening Width to specify a

Materials Panel
Width in the text field. If the window is later
resized, the shutters will not adjust in response. The settings on the MATERIALS panel are the same as
• When Match Opening Height is checked, each those found on the same panel in dialogs throughout
shutter’s height equals that of the window, the program. See “Materials Panel” on page 296.
excluding casing.
Label Panel
• Uncheck Match Opening Height to specify a
Height in the text field. If the window is later Window labels display in plan view when the
resized, the shutters will not adjust in response. “Windows, Labels” layer is turned on and use the
Text Style assigned to that layer. See “Window
3 Specify the Position of the shutters relative to Labels” on page 187.
the window.
• Select On Casing to position the shutters just Similarly, Wall Niche labels display in plan view
outside the window frame, like functional shut- when the “Wall Niches, Labels” layer is turned on
ters. and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See
“Window Labels” on page 187.
• Select Outside Casing to position shutters out-
side the window casing, as decorative shutters For more information about the settings on this
often are. panel. See “Label Panel” on page 166.
4 Additional shutter Options can be specified Manufacturer Panel

here.
• Check Reverse Direction to orient the shutters The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact
so their exterior sides face outward and their inte- information for the selected window’s manufacturer.
Only available for windows from Manufacturer
193
library catalogs. See “Manufacturer Catalogs” on

page 276.
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows

Bay, Box and Bow Windows are specified to do so in the window’s specification
created much the way regular dialog, are placed on the “Dimensions, Manual”
windows are: select a tool, then click a wall to place layer. See “Options Panel” on page 197.
that window type.
Home Designer Suite automatically builds a Component Windows
foundation under bay/box/bow windows placed on A component window within a bay, box or bow
floor 1 unless they are raised from their original window can be resized like any other standard
position. That section of the foundation wall is also a window. To select a component window, click at the
bay/box/bow, but without windows. If the foundation location of the component in question, then click the
was generated before the window is placed, the
Select Next Object edit button or press the Tab
foundation must be rebuilt or edited manually.
key.
Editing Bay, Box and Bow • Only the bay or box window component that was
Windows clicked on is selected using this method. If you
need to select a different component, click on it
Bay, box, and bow windows are edited similar to and repeat the process.
regular windows with one exception: in plan view, a • In a bow window, all components are identical,
diamond-shaped Depth edit handle displays on the so only one component can be selected. Chang-
section. Drag this Depth handle outward to increase ing this component changes them all.
the depth, or inward to decrease the depth of the unit.
See “Editing Windows” on page 187.
Resizing Components
An individual component window can be resized
using the edit handles, by changing settings in the
component’s Window Specification dialog.
When a bay/box/bow window is first created, there is
Depth edit handle on a bay window room for one standard trimmer on each side of each
component window. When the bay as a whole is
Bay, box and bow windows can also be edited in moved and resized, its components automatically
their respective specification dialogs. See “Bay/Box resize so that a standard trimmer is still
and Bow Window Specification Dialogs” on page accommodated.
196. If a component window is resized, it retains its size if
at all possible when the containing bay/box/bow
Displaying Bay, Box and Bow window is moved or resized. If the bay is resized in
Windows such a way that the component is too large to fit even
with a thinner trimmer, the component resumes its
The display of bay, box and bow windows is
default behavior, resizing as the containing bay
controlled in the Display Options dialog. See
window is resized.
“Display Options Dialog” on page 74.
Like other windows, bay, box and bow windows can Floors and Ceilings
display labels: either a single label for the unit, or
one for each component. See “Window Labels” on When originally created, the floor and ceiling within
page 187. a bay, box, or bow window are the same heights as
the floor and ceiling of the room in which it is
Bay, box and bow window width and radius placed.
dimensions, which display in plan view when
194
Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs
Both the top and bottom heights of these window When the ceiling is lowered, the top heights of the
units can be adjusted in its specification dialog or a walls that define the window unit are also lowered.
3D view using its edit handles to create a lowered When a roof is built over the unit, its height will be
ceiling and/or a bench seat or garden window. affected, as well.
When the bottom of the window is raised to create a
bench seat, the unit’s walls will not reach the ground.
As a result, window units with bench seats will have
no foundation beneath them when the foundation is
built.
Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs

Several different roof styles can be specified for bay,
box and bow window units in the Bay/Box/Bow
Specification dialog. See “Bay/Box and Bow
Window Specification Dialogs” on page 196.
If you change a bay, box, or bow window’s roof
specification, you will need to rebuild the roofs to
see the changes. See “Rebuilding Roofs” on page
256.
With this option the bay, box, or bow windows is
Hip Roofs tucked under the roof eave. You may find it helpful
to increase the width of the eaves. See “Roof Panel”
By default, a hip roof is built above the unit when
on page 257.
roofs are automatically generated. No roof directives
need to be selected in the specification dialog to
produce this roof. Extend the Existing Roof
To have the main roof extend down over the window
unit and follow the shape of the unit, select Extend
Existing Roof.
Use the Existing Roof

To generate a standard roof that ignores a bay, box,
or bow window, check Use Existing Roof.
195
For this roof style, the ceiling heights of the window Extend Existing Roof - Rectan-
unit and the adjacent room must be the same. If you gular
lower the ceiling of the window unit and then build
the roof, a lower hip roof over the window is created. To extend the main roof down over a window unit to
See “Floors and Ceilings” on page 194. create a rectangular roof over it rather than one that
follows its shape, select both Extend Existing Roof
If a header is desired over the window unit, first over and Rectangular Roof Over.
build the roof, then lower the ceiling of the window
unit. Do not rebuild roof planes.
Rectangular Hip Roofs

To create a rectangular-shaped hip roof above a bay,
box, or bow window, select Rectangular Roof
Over.
Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic options for
the roof above a bay, box or bow window.
To create a gable roof over a normal

window, use the Gable Over Door/
Window edit button. See “Gable Over Door/
Window” on page 258.
Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs

To open the Bay/Box Window Specification The options in this dialog can only be set for objects
or the Bow Window Specification dialog, placed in a plan: Bay, Box, and Bow Windows do not
select a Bay, Box or Bow Window and click the have defaults dialogs.
General Panel
1 Size - Specify the Width and Depth of the • Check Has Lowered Ceiling to enable the set-
selected Bay, Box, or Bow Window. tings that follow. When this is unchecked, the
ceiling height and finish material within the win-
2 Specify the height and structure of the Ceiling dow is the same as that for the adjacent room.
within the selected window.
• Specify the Height Lowered, which is measured
from the ceiling height of the adjacent room.
196
Bay/Box and Bow Window Specification Dialogs
height and material within the window is the

Note: If the Height Lowered is 0”, Has Lowered same as that for the adjacent room.
Ceiling will become unchecked when you click
OK. • Specify the Height Raised, which is the mea-
sured from the floor height of the adjacent room.
3 Specify the height and structure of the Floor

within the selected window. Note: If the Height Raised is 0”, Has Raised Floor
will become unchecked when you click OK.
• Check Has Raised Floor to enable the settings
that follow. When this is unchecked, the floor
Options Panel
1 Specify the structure of the Roof over the • Check Display Dimensions to Center to display
selected window unit. See “Bay, Box, Bow a Bow Window’s radial dimension.
Windows and Roofs” on page 195.
• Check Use Existing Roof if the existing roof Materials Panel
needs no changes to accommodate the bay win- The settings on the MATERIALS panel are the same as
dow. those found on the same panel in dialogs throughout
• Check Extend Existing Roof Over to extend the the program. See “Materials Panel” on page 296.
existing roof plane to cover the bay window
below. Label Panel
• Check Rectangular Roof Over to create a roof Bay, Box, and Bow Window labels display in plan
over the bay window that is square across the end view when the “Windows, Labels” layer is turned on
instead of following the profile of the roof. and use the Text Style assigned to that layer. See
“Window Labels” on page 187.
2 Specify the appearance of the selected window
unit’s Dimensions in plan view. For more information about the settings on this
• Check Display Standard Dimension to display panel. See “Label Panel” on page 166.
the automatically-produced dimensions that show
the window’s width and depth.
197
198
Chapter 17:
Cabinets
With Home Designer Suite’s cabinet tools you can Chapter Contents
create base, wall, and full height cabinets as well as • Cabinet Defaults
soffits, shelves and partitions. These objects are very • The Cabinet Tools
versatile, allowing for a wide range of customization. • Cabinet Fillers
A selection of cabinet door and drawer styles are • Placing Cabinets
available in the Library Browser. • Displaying Cabinets
• Editing Cabinets
Home Designer Suite also has many customized • Editing Cabinet Styles
cabinets and cabinet groups available in the library. • Special Cabinets
• Cabinet Specification Dialog
• Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
Cabinet Defaults
There are several defaults dialogs for corresponding specification dialog. For descriptions
cabinets. Access Default Settings by selecting of these settings, see “Cabinet Specification Dialog”
Edit> Default Settings, then clicking the arrow on page 206, “Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog”
beside “Cabinets”. Select a subheading and click the on page 210 and “Soffit Specification Dialog” on
Edit button to open the defaults dialog associated page 291.
with your selection.
In many of the new plan Style Templates, Wall and
Each type of cabinet object has default definitions for Full Height cabinets have crown molding. These
size, style, materials and more. In fact, the default cabinets can be placed from the library into any plan.
dialog for each cabinet type is similar to its See “Template Plans” on page 33.
General Cabinet Defaults

The General Cabinet Defaults dialog can be
accessed only from the Default Settings dialog.
199
1 Specify the Minimum Cabinet Width. The • Select Use Grid Snaps to resize cabinets using
smallest allowable value is 1/16 of an inch (10 Snap Grid increments. See “Grid Snaps” on page
mm). 68.
• Select Use Resize Increment to resize cabinets
2 Specify how Cabinet Resizing takes place using the increment specified here.
when the edit handles are used.
• Set the Resize Increment at which cabinets
resize. The minimum allowable increment is 1/16
of an inch (10 mm).
The Cabinet Tools

Select Build> Cabinet to access the Cabinet By default, soffits use the material assigned to
Tools. interior walls in the Material Defaults dialog. Like
cabinets, soffits can have molding profiles applied to
Cabinets are easily created with a single click in plan
them.
view or any camera view. See “Click-to-Create” on
page 69. For more information about using soffits for a variety
of purposes, see “Other Objects” on page 289.
Typically, groups of cabinet objects are positioned
closely together and arranged to form work spaces,
and there are some special behaviors and techniques Shelves
to be aware of. See “Placing Cabinets” on page 201. Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and click in
Once created, cabinets, soffits, shelves, partitions any view to create a shelf.
and fillers can be selected and edited much like other Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on each
box-based objects. See “Editing Cabinets” on page wall, then moving or stretching them until they
203. touch.
Once created, shelves can be selected and edited. See
Base Cabinets
“Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog” on page 210.
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet and
click in any view. Base cabinets can be placed Partitions
directly under wall cabinets and generate a
countertop and toe kick by default. Select Build> Cabinet> Partition button and
click in any view to create a vertical partition.
Wall Cabinets Like shelves, partitions can be selected and edited
after they are placed.
To place a wall cabinet, select Build>
Cabinet> Wall Cabinet and click in any Partitions can be used with shelves to create complex
view. Wall cabinets can be placed directly over base storage systems.
cabinets.
Cabinet Library Catalog
Full Height Cabinets
In the Library Browser, browse to Home
To place a full height cabinet, select Build> Designer Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Cabinet> Full Height and click in any view. Cabinets to access a selection of specialty cabinets.
Full height cabinets generate a toe kick by default Select the library object you want, then click in any
and cannot be placed on top of other cabinets. view to place it in the plan. Once placed, library
cabinets can be edited. See “The Library” on page
Soffits 271.
Soffits typically fill the space between cabinet

Cabinet Doors, Drawers, and
tops and the ceiling, but can also be used to
create any object that can be modeled as a 3D box. Panels Catalog
To place a soffit, select Build> Cabinet> Soffit and A selection of cabinet door, drawer, and panel
click in any view. styles is available in Home Designer Core
200
Cabinet Fillers
Catalogs> Architectural. Select an item, then click on automatically change to a False Drawer or False
a cabinet in your plan to place the door or drawer Double Drawer.
onto that cabinet. Doors, drawers, and panels can be
Once placed, an inserted fixture can be selected and
assigned to a cabinet in its specification dialog, as
edited:
well. Cabinet doors, drawers, and panels can also be
placed as stand-alone fixtures. • To select a fixture in a cabinet top, click on it and
then click the Select Next Object edit button.
Built-In Sinks and Appliances See “Select Next Object” on page 80.
A variety of fixtures and appliances such as sinks, • Front fixtures can only be modified or deleted in
cooktops, and dishwashers can be placed into the Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Front
cabinets. See “Inserted Objects” on page 282. Panel” on page 207.
Place fixtures and appliances into cabinets Fixtures can be added to both the top and
early, so that any resizing can be done while front of the same cabinet. It is up to you to
there is adequate free space. determine which can be effectively and safely
combined in the real world.
To insert a fixture into a cabinet, select the fixture in
the Library Browser, then click on a cabinet. There Electrical Switches and Outlets
must be enough space in the cabinet or adjoining
cabinets to contain the selected fixture. Electrical switches and outlets placed within the
backsplash area of a base cabinet will display in front
If a sink or cooktop is inserted into a cabinet with a of the backsplash in 3D views when the “Electrical”
top Drawer or Double Drawer, its Item Type will layer is turned. See “The Electrical Tools” on page
213.
Cabinet Fillers
Home Designer Suite models a continuous
countertop and generates fillers automatically when
cabinets of the same height are either touching or
placed with 3” (75 mm) of one another.
If two cabinets meeting at a corner are separated
from each other by 3” (75 mm) or less, the program
will automatically generate a filler in the angle
between them. A filler is used to separate the front of Two base cabinets and the filler between them
one of these cabinets from the one it meets so that
drawers and doors have room to operate.
Placing Cabinets
Cabinets are easily created with a single click in any If the ceiling height of the room does not
view. See “Click-to-Create” on page 69. accommodate the height of a cabinet, its Floor to
Bottom value will be retained and its Height will be
When used near a wall corner, the Cabinet Tools will
reduced so that it fits under the ceiling. When this
produce corner cabinets and soffits. See “Corner
happens, some front items may be removed from the
Cabinets” on page 204.
cabinet if there is not enough room for them. See
When created, cabinets are positioned relative to the “Front Panel” on page 207.
floor of the room in which they are placed. Base and
Because cabinets are typically organized into groups
full height cabinets typically rest on the floor while
with shared attributes, they have some special
wall cabinets are placed a set distance above the
behaviors.
floor. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 199.
201
Cabinet Snapping and Aligning backsplash, and moldings continuous. Any gap
between merged cabinets will be automatically filled.
Cabinets have several special snapping and aligning
behaviors which help you create precisely aligned The exposed ends of merged cabinets have side
cabinets quickly and easily. counter overhangs.
• When Base and/or Full Height cabinets are Cabinets placed at different angles will also merge if
within 3” of one another’s sides, they will snap they face toward one another and meet at a front
together. Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner, corner. Cabinets that meet at a back corner will also
but only with other Wall cabinets. merge provided that they face away from one another
• When Base and/or Full Height cabinets are at an angle no greater than 87°. In either case, a filler
within 3” of one another’s sides and their front or is created in the angle between the two.
back surfaces are within 3” of aligning, they will If the side of a cabinet is placed within 3” (30 mm) of
become aligned. Wall cabinets snap in a similar a wall, the countertop will extend to the wall and a
manner with other Wall cabinets as well as Full filler will be created.
Height cabinets.
• When a Base and/or Full Height cabinet is placed Base and Wall Cabinets
against the back of another Base or Full Height
Base and wall cabinets have different default heights,
cabinet, its back surface will automatically face
so they can be placed directly above or below one
the other cabinet’s back. Wall cabinets snap in a
another without interference. You can use Object
similar manner with other Wall as well as Full
Snaps to center a wall cabinet’s back center point
Height cabinets.
above that of a base cabinet, or vice versa. See
• When a cabinet is placed against a wall, its back “Click-to-Create” on page 69.
and/or side will snap to the wall and, if the wall is
moved, the cabinet will move with it. Minimum Cabinet Size
When cabinets are snapped to a wall or to other If you try to place a cabinet into a space that is too
cabinets, only exposed end cabinets have side narrow for its default size, the program will place a
counter overhangs. smaller cabinet with a width that is a multiple of the
Cabinet snapping and aligning occurs even when default Resize Increment. For example, if you try to
Object Snaps are turned off; however, you can place a 24” wide cabinet in a 20” wide space and
override this behavior by moving a cabinet into the your Resize Increment is 3”, the program places an
desired position using dimensions. See “Moving 18” cabinet. See “General Cabinet Defaults” on page
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 154. 199.
If you try to place a cabinet into a space narrower
Cabinet Merging than the default Minimum Cabinet Width, a cabinet
When cabinets of the same height and type are will not be placed. If, for example, you have a space
placed side-by-side within 3” (30 mm) of one that is 8” and your Minimum Cabinet Width is 9”, no
another they will automatically merge, making any cabinet is placed.
shared components such as the toe kick, countertop,
Displaying Cabinets
The display of the various cabinet object order by clicking the View Drawing Group Edit
types, labels, module lines, door opening Tools edit button. See “Drawing Group Edit
indicators and more is controlled in the Display Tools” on page 76.
Options dialog. See “Layer Attributes” on page 74.
Objects assigned to cabinets, including hardware and
Like other objects, cabinets are placed in Drawing moldings, are located on the same layer as their
Groups that affect whether they display in front of or parent object. They display in 3D views, but are not
behind other objects in plan view. By default, wall shown in plan view. There are two notable
cabinets, soffits and shelves are drawn in front of exceptions: countertops and doors/drawers.
base and full height cabinets and partitions. You can
modify a selected cabinet’s place in the drawing
202
Editing Cabinets
• Countertops are drawn on the “Cabinets, Coun- You can also display cabinet front indicator arrows in
tertops” layer in all views. plan view by turning on the “Cabinets, Front
• Cabinet doors and drawers are drawn on the Indicators” layer.
“Cabinets, Doors & Drawers” layer in all views, Cabinet labels display in plan view when the
but only display in 3D views. “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and use the
By default, cabinet module lines display in plan view “Default Label Style” Text Style. See “Object
when cabinet objects of the same type are placed side Labels” on page 166.
by side. If you prefer that these lines not display, turn In 3D views, cabinet doors and drawers are drawn on
off the “Cabinets, Module Lines” layer. You can also the “Cabinets, Doors & Drawers” layer, and their
specify whether module lines are full or partial. display can be turned on and off.
Editing Cabinets
Cabinets can be selected in 2D and 3D views and Using the Edit Tools
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar and
their specification dialog. A cabinet or cabinets can be edited in a variety of
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The
You can marquee-select cabinets of multi-
ple types when the Full Height Cabinet tool
is active. See “Marquee Select” on page 80. Add to Library
Cabinets can be saved in the Library Browser. Select
Using the Mouse a base, wall or full height cabinet or cabinet filler and
Cabinets can be edited like other box-based objects. click the Add to Library edit button. See “Add to
See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 89. The Library” on page 279.
edit handles that a cabinet displays when selected
will vary depending on the view. Using Dimensions
When a cabinet is selected in plan view or on its top Like various other objects, cabinets can be
surface in a 3D view, ten edit handles display: the moved and resized using dimensions. See
Move handle at the center, the Rotate handle, and a “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on page 154.
Resize handle on each edge and at each corner. Dimensions locate the sides and/or corners of cabinet
In 3D views, cabinets can be selected on any surface: boxes. If you wish, you can move a dimension’s
front, side, back or top. When the side of a cabinet is extension lines to locate the centers or countertop
selected, five edit handles are available: the Move edges in plan view after the dimension line is drawn.
handle and a Resize handle on each edge. See “Editing Extension Lines” on page 152.
Moving Walls with Cabi-

nets Attached
When a cabinet is placed or moved against a wall, it
will snap to the wall and become attached to it. When
a wall is moved, all attached cabinets move with it.
Moving a wall to an unattached cabinet will not
attach the cabinet to it: the cabinet must be moved to
the wall. A cabinet can also be attached to a wall
In the Specification Dialog when Plan Check is used. See “Plan Check” on
A selected cabinet can be customized in a page 43.
variety of ways in its specification dialog. See
“Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page 206.
203
Editing Cabinet Styles

A variety of settings allow you customize the Doors, Drawers and Panels
appearance of your cabinets to create styles ranging
from traditional to contemporary. Cabinet doors, drawers, and panels can be applied in
either of two ways:
If the desired style is known before cabinets are
• In the Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Door/
placed, you can save time by specifying that style in
Drawer Panel” on page 209.
the Cabinet Defaults dialogs before you start
drawing. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 199. • Directly from the Library Browser.
Select a style in the Library, then click on a cabinet to
Cabinet Face Items apply the selected style to that cabinet. See “Replace
A variety of different face items can be added to the From Library” on page 283.
front of any cabinet, including doors, drawers,
cutting boards, and horizontal separations. Face Cabinet Hardware and Moldings
items can be moved, resized, as well as removed and Cabinet handles, pulls, and hinges can be assigned in
can also be split vertically or horizontally to produce the Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Door/Drawer
a variety of custom configurations. See “Front Panel” on page 209.
Multiple molding profiles can also be applied around
When adding, removing, or resizing face items, it is the perimeter of a cabinet at any height. For example,
helpful to keep a few rules in mind: you may want a wood edge around base cabinet
• When the overall height of a cabinet or the height countertops and a crown molding that ties together
of a face item is changed, the height of the lowest the tops of the wall cabinets and full height cabinets.
face item that is not a Separation is adjusted to See “Applying Moldings” on page 268.
accommodate the change.
• If you increase the height of the lowest face item, Countertops and Backsplashes
the non-Separation item directly above is The countertop thickness, overhang, and material for
adjusted; if you decrease its height, a Blank Area a selected base cabinet can be specified in the
and Separation are created below it. Cabinet Specification dialog. See “General Panel”
on page 206.
Note: To ensure that Face Item heights always
equal the total cabinet front height, the program Backsplashes can be applied to base cabinets as well
automatically adjusts the bottom Face Item as as down from wall cabinets on the GENERAL panel of
changes are made elsewhere. This means you their specification dialogs.
should start editing Face Items at the top and
work down.
Special Cabinets
There are a number of special cabinet shapes that can
be specified. Certain requirements must be met
before some special cabinet shapes can be specified.
If the requirements are not met, a warning message
will explain what is needed. See “Cabinet
Standard Cabinets Standard (default) cabinet
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet and click Corner Cabinets

in plan view to place a standard, rectangular base
cabinet. To create a corner cabinet, click as close to an inside
wall corner as possible in using either the Base
Cabinet , Wall Cabinet , or Full Height
204
Special Cabinets
cabinet tool. A corner cabinet remains a corner

cabinet when it is moved, edited or copied.
You can turn an existing cabinet into a corner cabinet
by selecting “Corner” from the Special drop-down
list in its specification dialog. See “General Panel”
on page 206.
• Before a corner cabinet can be specified in the Radius End cabinets have a 90° arch
Cabinet Specification dialog, the cabinet’s
Width must be greater than its Depth. As you face the cabinet, a right radius end curves to
• The Left and the Right Side Widths can be set the right, and a left radius end curves to the left.
independently for corner cabinets.
Peninsula Radius Cabinets
To turn a cabinet into an end cabinet, specify its Type
as “Peninsula Radius”.
Corner cabinet with sides of equal width
• You can specify a Diagonal Door on corner cabi-

nets to create an angled corner cabinet. See
“Front Panel” on page 207. Peninsula Radius Cabinet
Kitchen Islands
To create a kitchen island, simply place several
cabinets back-to-back and/or side-to-side. Match the
widths so that each cabinet back or side meets the
back or side of only one other cabinet. If this is not
done, the lines separating the cabinets cannot be
Corner cabinet with diagonal door suppressed.
End Cabinets A given side of a single cabinet cannot merge with
the edges of two different cabinets. The example
To turn a cabinet into an end cabinet, specify its Type
below shows two instances of cabinets placed back-
as “Left End” or “Right End”.
to-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces are
shown.
Left End Cabinet

• End Cabinets have an angled front and side. Correct - Incorrect -
Widths of front and Solid line here is not
• The cabinet width must be no greater than its back cabinets match suppressed.
depth for an end cabinet to be specified.
Blind Cabinets
Radius End Cabinets
Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner, one is
To turn a cabinet into a radius end cabinet, specify its partially hidden by the other. This partially hidden
Type as “Left Radius End” or “Right Radius End”. cabinet is called a “blind” cabinet. Home Designer
205
Suite will resize and offset the front items of the

partially hidden cabinet so that they are not located in
the hidden portion of the cabinet face.
Cabinet Specification Dialog

Select a cabinet and click the Open Object The options in the Cabinet Specification dialogs are
edit button to open the Cabinet Specification similar to the corresponding Cabinet Defaults
dialog. dialog. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 199.
General Panel
1 A number of Cabinet Types are available in • Specify the Height (Including Counter) of the
the drop-down list. Certain requirements must cabinet box, as measured from bottom to top. For
be met before some types can be specified. See base cabinets, this value includes the countertop
“Special Cabinets” on page 204. thickness, but not the height of the backsplash.
2 Size/Position - The selected cabinet’s Note: Height refers to the height of the entire cab-
dimensions and position relative to the floor
inet, including countertop and toe kick. If you
can be specified here. Fractional values are
change the Countertop Thickness or Toe Kick
supported to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm). Height, the cabinet’s total height is not altered.
• Specify the Width of the cabinet box, as mea- Instead, the cabinet face height and the heights of
sured across the front of the cabinet box from left face items change in response.
to right. This does not include the countertop
overhang.
206
• Specify the Depth of the cabinet box, as mea-

4 Check the box beside Backsplash, then specify
sured from front to back. It does not include the its dimensions and when it should generate, or
thickness of overlay doors or the countertop over- leave this box unchecked to prevent the selected base
hang. or wall cabinet from having a backsplash.
• For Corner cabinets, the Width and Depth fields • Specify the backsplash Height and Thickness.
are instead named Right Side Width and Left • Check Side to add the backsplash to the side of
Side Width. the cabinet if it is against a wall or a taller cabi-
• Select the Elevation Reference from the drop- net. Not available for Corner cabinets.
down list. This determines where the next two • Check Always Present to display the backsplash
settings are measured from and also affects their at all times. If unchecked, a backsplash is present
setting labels. only when the cabinet is against a wall.
• Specify the to Top distance, measured from the • Check Backsplash to Base Below to extend a
Elevation Reference to the top of the cabinet’s backsplash from the selected wall cabinet down
countertop. to the backsplash or countertop of the base cabi-
• Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from net below. Only available for wall cabinets.
the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the cab-
Note that while a base cabinet’s backsplash is
inet, including the toe kick.
measured from the countertop up, a wall cabinet’s
3 Specify the dimensions and style of the selected backsplash extends downward.
cabinet’s Countertop, or uncheck this box to
prevent it from having a countertop. Only available 5 Options -
for base cabinets.
• Uncheck Diagonal Door to create double doors
• Specify the countertop Thickness. Changing this
at right angles instead of a single diagonal door.
value does not alter the cabinet height, but it does
This option is checked by default in the Cabinet
affect the height of face items. See “Front Panel”
Defaults dialog and is only available for Corner
on page 207.
Cabinets. See “Corner Cabinets” on page 204.
• Specify the countertop Overhang. Uncheck Uni-
• Check Lazy Susan to indicate a lazy Susan in the
form to specify separate values for each side in
cabinet’s label and its appearance in plan view.
the fields below, or leave it checked to use the
This option does not display in 3D views.
same value for all sides. Overhangs do not gener-
ate on sides that are against a wall or another cab-
6 A preview of the selected cabinet displays on
inet. See “Cabinet Snapping and Aligning” on the right side of the panel. See “Dialog Preview
page 202. Panes” on page 25.
Front Panel
If you click on a cabinet face item in the preview on
the right side of the dialog, the FRONT panel will
become active and that face item will be selected and
can be edited.
If the selected cabinet was originally created in Chief
Architect Premier or Chief Architect Interiors, some
settings on this panel may display for reference only.
See “Opening Chief Architect Plans in Home
Designer Programs” on page 32.
207
1 Most of the Face Items settings are only active

when a door, drawer, or other face item is The program tries to maintain a single sep-
selected. To select a face item, click on it in the aration between all face items. When you
preview on the right. add or delete a face item, separations are usually
added or deleted with them.
When a face item is selected, Use Default will be
unchecked and its attributes can be edited. The • Click Move Up to move the currently selected
vertical frame pieces on the sides of the cabinet front item up one position, switching places with the
are referred to as stiles and cannot be selected in the item directly above.
preview. See “Cabinet Face Items” on page 204. • Click Move Down to move the currently selected
• Click Add New to add a new face item directly item down one position, switching places with
below the currently selected item. When a face the item directly below.
item is added, the height of the lowest item on the • Choose the selected face item’s Item Type from
cabinet front is reduced to make room for the new the drop-down list:
item. If you click Add New with no face item
selected, the new item is added to the bottom of • Specify the selected face item’s Item Height.
the cabinet face. Fractional values are supported to 1/16th of an
inch (1 mm). For doors and drawers, this is the
• In the New Cabinet Face Item dialog, define the height of the opening rather than the item front
Item Type, Item Height, and click OK. If the height. For best results, edit face item heights
Item Type is “Separation”, you can check starting at the top of the cabinet and work down.
Default to use the default Separation Height. See “Cabinet Face Items” on page 204.
• The selected item’s Item Width displays here for
reference only. For doors and drawers, this is the
width of the opening rather than the item front
width.
• Check Lock from Auto Resize to prevent the
selected face item from resizing when the cabinet
• Click Delete to remove the selected face item. is resized.
When an Auto Left, Auto Right, Left, Right, or
Double Door is deleted, it is replaced by an • Check Include Shelves to include shelves in the
Opening; when other face item types are deleted, selected “Door” or “Opening” face item.
the height of the lowest item is increased to make
up the difference. You can also press the Delete 2 Check Reverse Appliance(s) to reverse any
appliances inserted into the selected cabinet
key on the keyboard. from left to right: for example, to move a
dishwasher’s controls from the left side to the right.
208
3 A preview of the selected cabinet displays on • Mouse-Orbit Camera mode allows you to
the right side of the panel. See “Dialog Preview orbit around the preview of the cabinet. When
Panes” on page 25. this is active, you can right-click on a front item
• Select Cabinet Face Item mode is active by to select it.
default and allows you to click on a face item like • The cabinet Label displays below the preview
a door, drawer, or separation in the preview to pane.
select it for editing. The selected face item is
highlighted in grey.
Door/Drawer Panel
The settings on the DOOR/DRAWER panel allow you
to control the appearance of the selected cabinet’s
doors, drawers and hardware.
1 Specify the appearance of the Doors applied to • Select “Library” or click the Library button to
selected cabinet. select a cabinet door from the library. If a library
door has been previously selected, its name will
Select a door Style from the drop-down list. See
display in the list. See “Select Library Object
“Doors, Drawers and Panels” on page 204.
• Select “Use Default” to apply the door style
• Check Glass Doors to use a glass material for the
specified in the defaults dialog for the selected
panel of Framed doors or for the entire door for
cabinet’s type. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page
Slab doors. Not available when “Library” is the
199.
selected door Style.
• Select “Slab Doors” to apply a flat door front or
“Framed Doors” to apply a door with a frame and 2 Specify the characteristics of the selected
flat panel front. cabinet’s Door Handles.
209
• Select a door handle Style from the drop-down • Specify the Vertical Position of the drawer han-
list. dle(s): Choose Use Default to use the default
• Specify the position of the handle In From Edge, position, Centered for handle(s) centered on the
as measured from the edge of the door opposite drawer face, or specify the handle’s Distance
the hinges. From Top.
• Specify the height of the handle Down From 6 A preview of the selected cabinet displays on
Top, as measured from the top edge of the door. the right side of the panel. See “Dialog Preview
For wall cabinets, this value is measured Up Panes” on page 25.
From Bottom. • The cabinet Label displays below the preview
pane.
3 Specify the characteristics of the cabinet Door
Hinges.
Moldings Panel
• Select a door hinge Style from the drop-down
list. The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow you to
• Specify the location of the hinges Up/Down assign one or more horizontal moldings around the
From Edge, as measured from the door edge. If selected cabinet. See “Editing Cabinet Styles” on
the cabinet door is more than 35 1/4” (880 mm) page 204.
high, three hinges will be created instead of two. For information about the settings here, see
“Moldings Panel” on page 268.
4 Select a Drawer Style from the drop-down list
or choose one from the Library. For best
results, “Framed” drawers should be at least 6” (150 Materials Panel
mm) high. The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
appearance of the selected cabinet in 3D views. For
5 Specify the characteristics of the selected information about these settings, see “Materials
cabinet’s Drawer Handles.
• Select a drawer Handle Style from the drop-
down list.
Label Panel
• Specify the Horizontal Position of the drawer
handle(s): Choose Use Default to use the default Cabinet labels display in plan view when the
position; One Handle Centered for a single han- “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and use the
dle centered on the drawer face; or Two Handles Text Style assigned to that layer.
In From Edge for two handles set in from the For more information about the settings on this
drawer sides by the value specified in the text panel, see “Label Panel” on page 166.
field.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the Open The options in these specification dialogs are similar
Object edit button to open the Shelf to the corresponding defaults dialogs. See “Cabinet
Specification or Partition Specification dialog. Defaults” on page 199.
210
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
General Panel
1 Size/Position - Specify the Height, Width, and

Depth of the shelf or partition.
• Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-
setting labels.
• Specify the to Top distance, measured from the
Elevation Reference to the top of the shelf or par-
tition.
• Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from
the Elevation Reference to the bottom of the shelf
or partition.
2 A preview of the selected object displays on the

right side of the panel. See “Dialog Preview
Panes” on page 25.
Materials Panel
The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
appearance of the selected object in 3D views. For
information about these settings, see “Materials
Label Panel
Shelf and Partition labels display in plan view when
the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and use the
Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic
Labels for Shelves and Partitions re blank, but you
can specify custom labels
For more information about the settings on this
panel, see “Label Panel” on page 166.
211
212
Chapter 18:
Electrical
The electrical plan shows the location of all electrical

objects such as lights, switches, outlets, smoke Building requirements vary throughout the
detectors and vent fans. Basic wiring diagrams show country and around the world. It is your
which objects share circuits and the locations of the responsibility to comply with local codes.
controlling switches.
Chapter Contents
Electrical objects can be displayed in 2D and 3D • The Electrical Tools
views. Some electrical light fixtures also add light • Placing Electrical Objects
sources to 3D views. See “Lighting” on page 320. • Auto Place Outlets
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last additions • Creating Wiring Schematics
to a plan since the position of most electrical objects • Electrical Library Content
is determined by the location of walls, cabinets and • Displaying Electrical Objects
other objects. • Editing Electrical Objects
The Electrical Tools

Select Build> Electrical to access the Once created, outlets, switches, and lights can be
Electrical Tools. selected and edited. See “Editing Electrical Objects”
on page 217.
Most electrical objects are easily created with a
single click in plan and camera views. See “Click-to- Outlets
Create” on page 69.
Select Build> Electrical> 110V Outlet
Some electrical objects are designed to be inserted to place 110 volt duplex outlets on walls,
into walls, floors, ceilings or cabinets, although some the on floor, and on the sides of cabinets and soffits.
can also be free-standing. See “Placing Electrical Select Build> Electrical> 220V Outlet to place 220
Objects” on page 214. volt outlets.
Different outlet, switch, and light fixture symbols The type and height of an outlet will vary depending
can be placed in different room types. To take on where it is placed. For example:
advantage of the program’s capabilities, define room
types properly before placing electrical objects. See • In rooms defined as Bath or Master Bath, Ground
“Room Types” on page 132. Fault Circuit Interrupt (GFCI) outlets are placed.
213
cabinets or soffits. Like outlets, the height of

If standard outlets are placed in a room switches is measured from the floor to the center of
prior to defining it as a Bath, you should the object.
replace them with GFCI outlets.
• A switch placed on the side of a cabinet or soffit
• An outlet placed at the back of a base cabinet in will be positioned 32” (800 mm) up from that
plan view is positioned above the counter. object’s bottom.
• An outlet placed at the back of a base cabinet • Switches placed outside the building or in an
containing a kitchen sink is placed at the standard exterior area such as a deck or porch will be
11 1/2" (300 mm) above the floor. weatherproof.
• An outlet placed on the side of a cabinet or soffit

will be positioned 32” (800 mm) up from that If you connect two or more switches in a cir-
cuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way switches
object’s bottom.
automatically.
• An outlet placed outside the building or in an
exterior area such as a deck or porch will be Auto Place Outlets
weatherproof.
Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place
Light Fixtures Outlets and click in a room tool to place
outlets at regular intervals around the entire room.
Select Build> Electrical> Light to place light See “Auto Place Outlets” on page 215.
fixtures on walls, the ceiling, or on soffits. All
light fixtures placed in a plan can also serve as light Connect Electrical
sources in 3D views. To place a light fixture using
the Light tool: Select Build> Electrical> Connect
Electrical, then click and drag to draw splines
• Click near a wall or the side of a soffit to place a
that snap to electrical switches, outlets, and lights to
wall-mounted fixture at that location.
illustrate wiring circuits. See “Creating Wiring
• Click away from a wall to place a ceiling Schematics” on page 215.
mounted light.
• Click on the center of a soffit to place a ceiling Lighting and Electrical Library
mounted light on the soffit’s bottom surface. Catalogs
• Click outside of a room and away from a wall to A selection of free-standing and ceiling-, wall-
place a path light. and cabinet-mounted light fixtures is available
• Some light symbols from the library can be in the Library Browser at Home Designer Core
mounted under wall cabinets, as well. Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting.
Special use outlets, switches, jacks and numerous
Switches other electrical items can be found at Home Designer
Select Build> Electrical> Switch to place Core Catalogs> Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing>
electrical switches on walls or on the sides of Electrical. See “The Library” on page 271.
Placing Electrical Objects

Electrical switches, outlets, lights, and other symbols preview will display near the pointer whenever it is
can be created with a single click in any view. They over a location where an object can be placed.
can also be placed from the Library. See “Click-to- Specific details for each tool are noted in “The
Create” on page 69. Electrical Tools” on page 213
When the Outlet, Switch, and Light tools are used, The electrical objects in the Library are typically
the type and height of the object that is created will designed for a specific use and can only be placed on
vary depending on where it is placed. As you move a wall, on the floor, or on the ceiling. Some are
your mouse pointer around the view, an object instead free-standing and are designed to be placed
214
Auto Place Outlets
on a table or the floor. See “Placing Library Objects” Electrical Object Heights
on page 281.
When a wall-mounted electrical object is placed in
Wall mounted outlets, switches, and Library symbols plan view, its initial height off the floor is based on
can also be placed on the sides of cabinets and commonly used standards.
soffits. They will snap to the outside of the cabinet
box but will ignore doors and drawers. In 3D views, an electrical object placed on a wall in a
3D view will snap to the standard height for its type
When a light fixture is created using any method, provided that the mouse pointer is near that height
including copying and pasting, it will always be when you click. If you move the mouse pointer away
turned On. This is the case even if the default symbol from the standard height, the object will be
is turned Off. positioned wherever you click on the wall, regardless
of the height at that point.
Auto Place Outlets

Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place Auto Place Outlets does not work in rooms
Outlets and click in a room to place 110 volt assigned an exterior room type such as Deck. To
outlets on the walls around the entire room, spaced place outlets in an exterior room, place them from
so that no wall position is farther than six feet
(1800mm) from the nearest outlet. 110 or 220 volt the Electrical Library or use the 110V Outlet
outlets are also placed behind large appliances. In tool.
addition, a light is placed above each sink. Railings and invisible walls are ignored by Auto
It is important that a room’s Type be defined before Place Outlets . If it is used in a room defined by
Auto Place Outlets is used so that outlets are railings or invisible walls, outlets are automatically
placed appropriately. For example, GFCI (Ground placed in any adjacent rooms on the other side of
Fault Circuit Interrupter) outlets are placed over these wall types. See “Room Definition” on page
cabinets in Kitchen, Bath and Master Bath rooms. 131.
See “Room Types” on page 132. Once placed, any outlet can be moved, edited, or
deleted. See “Editing Electrical Objects” on page
217.
Creating Wiring Schematics

Electrical schematics can be created in two ways. and release. When a Connect Electrical spline is
Using the Connect Electrical tool is quick and first drawn, it looks like an arc but actually consists
easy, but if you need detailed schematics, you can of two segments that are defined by vertex points.
create your own wiring diagrams using the CAD When selected, its edit handles display at each of
tools. See “CAD Objects” on page 101. these vertices. If you click and drag one of these edit
handles, the length, angle, and curvature of the spline
Connect Electrical will change but the other vertices will not move.
Select Build> Electrical> Connect Vertex points

Electrical, then click and drag to draw splines
that snap to electrical switches, outlets, and lights to
illustrate wiring circuits.
To create a new circuit or add to an existing circuit,
click on a switch, outlet, or light while the Connect
Electrical tool is active, drag to the next object Spline segments
215
Connect Electrical splines cannot be snapped to from a circuit, any Connect Electrical splines
one another: they can only snap to electrical objects. snapped to it will also be deleted. See “Deleting
Once drawn, though, additional vertices can be Objects” on page 98.
added and used to form complex curves. See
“Editing Spline-Based Objects” on page 90. Three- and Four-Way Switches
Multiple switches can control an object or group of
Vertex points
objects.
• Two switches controlling the same objects are
referred to as three-way switches.
• Three switches controlling the same objects are
called four-way switches.
Spline segments In plan view, a three- or four-way switch’s “way”
To remove a connection from a circuit, simply select number will automatically display in its 2D symbol.
and Delete it. If you remove an electrical object
Electrical Library Content

Select View> Library Browser to accesses a symbol, then click in your plan to place it on a wall,
variety of electrical symbols. See “The floor, or ceiling.
Browse for electrical objects such as bath vent fans, Adding Electrical Content
an electrical panel, fluorescent lights, chandeliers, a Any electrical symbol placed into a plan can be
smoke detector, thermostat, and more. Select a customized and added to the User Catalog in the
Library Browser. See “Add to Library” on page 279.
Displaying Electrical Objects

The display of electrical objects and Electrical symbols are placed on the “Electrical”
connections is controlled in the Display layer, while Connect Electrical splines are drawn on
Options dialog. See “Layer Attributes” on page 74. the “Electrical, Connections” layer.
When displayed in 3D views, light fixtures act as
sources of light that help illuminate the 3D model. Electrical Labels
See “Lighting” on page 320. Electrical labels display in plan view when the
“Electrical, Labels” layer is turned on and use the
In plan view, electrical objects are represented by
“Default Label Style” Text Style. See “Object
commonly used CAD symbols that represent the type
Labels” on page 166.
of object rather than its appearance in 3D.
Customized labels can be specified in the Electrical
Like other objects, electrical objects are placed in
Service Specification dialog.
Drawing Groups that affect whether they display in
front of or behind other objects in plan view. You can
modify a selected object’s place in the drawing order Note: Some electrical objects are represented in
by clicking the View Drawing Group Edit plan view by a symbol that includes text. This text
is not part of the object’s label and does not use
Tools edit button. See “Drawing Group Edit the Default Label Text Style.
216
Editing Electrical Objects
In the Materials List Electrical splines are 2D objects only, however, and
are not calculated. See “Materials Lists” on page
Electrical objects, including outlets, switches, lights, 377.
and symbols from the library, are listed under the
Electrical Category in the Materials List. Connect
Editing Electrical Objects

Electrical objects can be selected as a group and In the Specification Dialog
individually in 2D and 3D and edited using the edit
handles and the edit toolbar Electrical objects can be edited in the Electrical
Service Specification dialog. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 217.
Moving Electrical Objects Using
Dimensions Adjusting Electrical Object Heights
Electrical objects can be moved precisely using
When a wall- or cabinet-mounted electrical object is
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using
placed, its initial height is based on commonly used
standards. See “Placing Electrical Objects” on page
Electrical objects are not located by dimension lines 214.
as the lines are drawn. Once created, though, you can
Once placed, a wall-mounted electrical object’s
edit a dimension line’s extensions to locate the center
height can be edited in either of two ways:
of any electrical object. See “Editing Extension
Lines” on page 152. • Specify the height in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See “General Panel” on
Using the Edit Handles page 218.
• In 3D views, the position of an electrical object
The edit handles for electrical objects vary
can be adjusted using its edit handles.
depending on the location of the object.
• Wall mounted electrical objects cannot be Deleting Electrical Objects
rotated, so only the Move edit handle displays.
An electrical object can be deleted by selecting it and
• Electrical objects placed on floors and ceilings
can be rotated. clicking the Delete edit button or by pressing the
Delete key.
• In 3D views, some ceiling mounted and free-
standing light fixtures can be resized. All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or in the
entire plan can also be deleted as a group using the
• Electrical connections are edited like splines. Delete Objects dialog. See “Deleting Objects” on
See “Editing Spline-Based Objects” on page 90. page 98.

A selected electrical symbol can be edited in a
Electrical Service Specification Dialog

Select an electrical object and click the Open dialog vary, depending on the type of object you
Object edit button to open the Electrical select.
Service Specification dialog. The settings in this
217
General Panel
The items on this panel vary, depending on the type
of electrical object selected.
1 The Name of the selected object as used in the shape to become distorted. This check box does
Library Browser and Materials List displays not affect editing performed outside of this dialog
here. and is an action rather than a state: the next time
you open this dialog, it will be checked.
2 Specify the Position of the selected electrical • Click the Reset button to restore the electrical
object. The options available depend on the
type of object selected. symbol’s original size.
• Specify the Offset From Ceiling of a ceiling out-
4 Options -
let or ceiling mounted light. If the light is
mounted to a cabinet, this value is the offset from • Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the object’s
the cabinet. appearance so that features on its left are located
• Specify the Height to Center of a switch, wall on its right and vice versa. Does not affect sym-
outlet or wall light. metrical symbols.
• Specify the Offset From Floor of a floor outlet • Check Automatically Change Switch Type
or floor lamp. When Wiring for a selected switch to become a
• Specify the Distance From Wall of a wall three- or four-way switch if your wiring plan uses
mounted symbol. A negative value will recess the it as such. See “Connect Electrical” on page 215.
symbol into the wall and may prevent it from
being seen in 3D. Switches placed from the toolbar use this option
by default; switches placed from the library do
3 Specify the Size of the selected electrical not.
symbol.
• Specify the Height, Width and Depth of the 5 Any Copyright information associated with the
selected symbol will be stated here.
selected symbol.
• Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio if you would like 6 A preview of the selected object displays here.
See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
to modify one of the above values without affect-
ing the others. Doing so may cause the symbol’s
218
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Materials Panel use the “Default Label Style” Text Style. See
“Electrical Labels” on page 216.
The MATERIALS panel is found in the specification
dialogs for a variety of objects. For more For information about the settings on this panel, see
information, see “Materials Panel” on page 296. “Label Panel” on page 166.
Label Panel
Labels for electrical fixtures display in plan view
when the “Electrical, Labels” layer is turned on and
219
220
Chapter 19:
Foundations
There are two foundation types in Home Designer Chapter Contents

Suite: stem walls with footings and monolithic slab. • Foundation Defaults
The foundation type can be specified in the • Building a Foundation
Foundation Defaults dialog when the foundation is • Displaying Foundations
built on Floor 0. • Editing Foundations
• Deleting Foundations
• Foundations and Rooms
Always consult registered geotechnical and
civil engineers for information regarding the • Foundations and the Terrain
proper foundation for your site. • Library Fireplaces.
• Chimneys
Foundation Defaults
Foundation Defaults can be accessed by
selecting Edit> Default Settings.
Select “Foundation” and click the Edit button to
open the Foundation Defaults dialog.
The settings in the Foundation Defaults dialog are
similar to those in the Build Foundation dialog,
which opens when Build> Floor> Build
Foundation is selected. The primary difference
is that when you click OK in the Foundation
Defaults dialog, no changes are made to the model.
See “Building a Foundation” on page 222.
1 Check Auto Rebuild Foundation to
automatically rebuild the foundation whenever
changes are made to Floor 1 that affect the structure
of the foundation. See “Rebuilding Foundations” on
page 223.
2 Click the radio button beside either Monolithic

Slab or Walls with Footings to specify which
foundation type the program should build.
221
3 Wall Options - Specify characteristics of the If the wall height is at least 6 feet (1800 mm), a slab
foundation walls. floor is generated above the footings and inside the
• Wall Thickness - Specify the desired thickness foundation walls. The Wall Height includes the
of the foundation walls. See “Wall Thickness” on thickness of this slab.
page 120. If you do not want this slab, specify the “rooms” on
• Wall Height - Specify the desired height of the Floor 0 as Open Below in the Room Specification
foundation walls. dialog. See “Available Room Types” on page 133.
Building a Foundation
Two foundation types are available: stem the Foundation Defaults dialog. See “Founda-
walls with footings and monolithic slabs. The tion Defaults” on page 221.
first option is created using walls; the second creates 3. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive new
concrete slabs with footings. Foundation plan from the 1st floor plan and
Automatically built foundations are placed on Floor click OK to build a foundation based on Floor 1.
0 and are based on wall positions and floor heights If you prefer, you can instead select Make new
on Floor 1. Foundation walls or slab footings are (blank) plan for the Foundation to create an empty
generated under: foundation level where you can manually draw
• All exterior walls on Floor 1 that define a room foundation walls or slabs.
other than a Deck type room. See “Room Defini-
In most cases, it is preferable to base Floor 0 off the
tion” on page 131.
first floor plan and then manually edit the foundation
• Any interior walls on Floor 1 defining rooms as needed. See “Editing Foundations” on page 223.
with different floor heights. See “Floor and Ceil-
ing Heights” on page 138. Mixing Foundation Types
At least one room must be defined on Floor 1 for a You can also create a foundation that combines stem
foundation to be automatically generated. If no walls and/or monolithic slabs.
rooms are defined on Floor 1, a blank Floor 0 is
created. To create a foundation of multiple types
To build an automatic foundation 1. Begin by specifying any rooms on Floor 1 that

require a slab floor as either a Garage or Slab
1. Select Build> Floor> Build Foundation . Room Type. See “Foundations and Rooms” on
2. Specify the desired foundation type and other page 224.
information in the Build Foundation dialog. 2. Build Foundation , as described above.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those in
Displaying Foundations
The display of foundation walls, slabs, curbs • Deck post footings are placed on the “Footings,
and footings is controlled in the Display Deck Post” layer.
Options dialog. See “Display Options Dialog” on • In stem wall foundations, brick ledge lines in plan
page 74. view are on the “Slabs” layer; in monolithic slab
• Foundation Walls, including slab footings and foundations, they are on the “Walls, Foundation”
Garage curbs, are placed on the “Walls, Founda- layer. See “Brick Ledges” on page 113.
tion” layer. • The “Foundations” layer controls the display of
• Footings under slab footings and Foundation all objects on Floor 0 in 3D views but does not
Walls are placed on the “Footings” layer. affect plan view.
222
Editing Foundations
If a door on Floor 1 extends into a stem wall or curb as well - even if the “Footings” layer is turned off.
defining a Garage room, its location will be indicated The reverse is also true - if a foundation wall’s
on Floor 0. display is turned off, so will its footing’s.
In 3D views, all objects on Floor 0 will only display The display of monolithic slab foundations in 3D
when the “Foundation” layer is turned on. views is controlled by the “Foundation” layer. Slab
footings are located on the “Walls, Foundation”
While the display of foundation walls and their layer; but if this layer is turned off, any slab footings
footings can be controlled independent of one that define a foundation room will continue to
another in plan view, in 3D views this is not the case. display as long as the “Foundation” layer is on.
If a foundation wall is set to display, its footing will
Editing Foundations
Stem wall with footings and monolithic slab Floor Structure on Floor 1 will also be changed to a
foundations are both created using walls which slab rather than a framed platform. See “Floor
enclose room areas. Defaults Dialog” on page 227.
• Foundation walls can be selected and edited If you rebuild the foundation using a different
much like other walls. See “Editing Walls” on Foundation Type, it is advisable to check the floor
page 119. heights of all rooms on Floor 1 - particularly Garage
• Foundation rooms can also be selected and edited and Slab rooms, as well as any rooms that do not use
like other rooms. See Foundations and Rooms. the default floor height of 0”.
Rebuilding Foundations To avoid unexpected results, it is recom-

mended that you not change the Foundation
By default, foundations update automatically when Type once the foundation is built.
changes are made to the structure on Floor 1. For
example, if exterior walls are moved or floor
Stem Wall Height
platforms are raised or lowered, the foundation will
be rebuilt. When a foundation is created, all of Floor 0 uses the
stem wall height specified in the Foundation
If you prefer that the foundation not rebuild
Defaults dialog,
automatically, you can uncheck Auto Rebuild
Foundation in the Foundation Defaults dialog. See This height is measured from the bottom of floor
“Foundation Defaults” on page 221. platform of Floor 1 to top of the stem walls’ footings.
If Floor 1 has multiple floor platform heights, the
You can also rebuild an automatically generated
foundation stem walls will be stepped.
foundation by selecting Build> Floor> Build
Foundation from the menu. Once a foundation is created, stem wall heights can
be adjusted either on a room-by-room basis or for
When Auto Rebuild Foundation is enabled, walls individual walls.
cannot be edited, manually drawn or deleted on Floor
0. When the foundation is rebuilt, any manually To change a room’s stem wall height
drawn or edited walls are deleted. Similarly, rooms
on Floor 0 cannot be edited while this option is 1. Select a room on Floor 0 and click the Open
enabled. If you try to draw a wall or edit a room or a
Object edit button.
wall while Auto Rebuild Foundation is turned on, a
warning message will display. 2. Specify the desired Stem Wall Height in the
Room Specification dialog. See “General
Changing Foundation Types Panel” on page 142.
3. If you wish to reduce the Stem Wall Height,
When a foundation is generated, the program creates
you will first need to reduce the Ceiling Height
Floor Defaults settings for Floor 0 based on the
value by the same amount.
information in the Build Foundation dialog. If you
specify a Monolithic Slab foundation, the default
223
If adjacent rooms have stem wall heights that differ

by at least 1/16 of an inch, the stem wall separating
them uses the larger of these two values.
Deleting Foundations
Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation to or pressing the Delete key. See “Deleting Objects”
delete the entire foundation floor. on page 98.
You can also select and delete individual foundation Deleting and rebuilding the foundation is often the
walls and slabs by clicking the Delete edit button quickest way to update the model when substantial
changes are made to Floor 1 after the foundation is
built.
Foundations and Rooms

When a foundation plan is created, rooms included in • The floor height will drop 3 1/2” (88 mm) in a
the Living Area calculation generate a stem wall or Monolithic Slab foundation.
slab foundation below them. Garage rooms generate
slab foundations, but exterior rooms such as Decks, To build a Garage slab with stem walls
Courts and Balconies do not generate any
foundation. See “Room Types” on page 132. 1. Before the foundation is generated, specify the
room as a Garage or Slab.
Interior foundation walls are not generated unless:
2. Build a Wall with Footings foundation.
• They separate the area under a Slab or Garage
room from the rest of the plan;
To build a Garage slab with curbs
• They define areas under rooms with different
floor heights. 1. Before the foundation is generated, specify the
room as a Garage or Slab.
Note: To remove all or part of the concrete slab in 2. Build a Monolithic Slab foundation, specifying
the basement area, select a basement room and the required Lower Garage Floor value.
define it as Open Below in the Room Specification
dialog.
Basement Rooms
Garages When a foundation’s type is Walls with Footings and
it is assigned a Minimum Wall Height of 76” (1900
When a foundation is generated based on the floor mm) or greater, the resulting basement is
plan of Floor 1, a room on the first floor specified as automatically created with a 4” (100 mm) concrete
either a Garage or Slab type will receive a foundation slab floor and a default Floor Finish like that on
with a slab floor and stem walls. If a monolithic slab Floor 1.
foundation is generated, the room will receive a slab
floor with curbs. Similarly, if a foundation is set up to have a
Basement Ceiling Height of 72” (1800 mm) or
By default, a room on Floor 1 specified as a Garage greater when built, it is automatically given a painted
or a Slab will be assigned a lower floor height when drywall Ceiling Finish.
the foundation is built. The amount that it is lowered
depends on the foundation type: Regardless of its ceiling height, however, you can
specify a ceiling finish for any room in the Room
• The floor height will drop the default thickness of
Specification dialog. See “Structure Panel” on page
the floor platform for Floor 1 plus 12” (300 mm)
143.
- a total of 24 5/8” (618 mm) - in a Walls with
Footings foundation.
224
Foundations and the Terrain
The resulting basement can be divided into separate

rooms using Interior Walls or any wall type you
wish.
Foundations and the Terrain

Home Designer Suite automatically raises the • Increase the Building Pad Elevation, which is
structure in a plan a set distance above the terrain. the distance between the default floor height of
See “Terrain Height vs Floor Height” on page 350. Floor 1 and the terrain.
In a plan with a foundation present, the terrain will
be: Walkout Basements
• 6” (187 mm) below the top of the stem walls in a Walkout basements are a type of daylight basement
Walls with Footings foundation. typically located on sloped terrain. They feature
walls that are above ground at the lower end of the
• 8” (200 mm) below the top of the slab in a Mono-
slope so that a door can be positioned above the
lithic Slab foundation.
terrain at that end.
To create a walkout basement, build a stem wall
Floor platform
foundation and modify these settings in the Terrain
Specification dialog:
• Uncheck Flatten Pad.
• Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.
You will also need to create sloped terrain and adjust
the Building Pad Elevation and/or terrain data so
Stem Wall Top that the terrain is at the appropriate height relative to
Terrain the structure at both the high and low ends of the
slope.
By default, the program will also create a flattened Stepped Foundations

pad under the building footprint.
Stepped foundations are usually built on sloping
Not all foundations have these requirements, of terrain. A stepped foundation will be produced
course, so you can customize your foundation and automatically if more than one floor height is present
terrain to suit your needs. on Floor 1 when the foundation is built.
Daylight Basements As with a walkout basement, you will need to build a

stem wall foundation and modify these settings in the
Daylight basements, also referred to as look-out Terrain Specification dialog:
basements, have walls that are tall enough for • Uncheck Flatten Pad.
basement windows to be positioned above the
terrain. They are often found in split level or split • Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.
entry structures. You will also need to create sloped terrain and adjust
To create a daylight basement condition, build a the Building Pad Elevation and/or terrain data so
stem wall foundation and modify these settings in the that the terrain is at the appropriate height relative to
Terrain Specification dialog: the structure at both the high and low ends of the
slope.
• Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.
You can also create a stepped foundation by editing
foundation rooms. See “Stem Wall Height” on page
223.
225
Library Fireplaces
A variety of fireplace symbols are available in the
library. Flush fireplaces are designed to snap to wall Always check the manufacturer’s product
surfaces. Some fireplace symbols can be enclosed by information for the framing and clearance
walls or positioned to project through a wall. See requirements of the fireplace unit you plan to use,
and design your plan accordingly
“Placing Library Objects” on page 281.
Open Front fireplace projecting through a wall
Chimneys
Chimneys can be created using a variety of methods. • Place a closed box Geometric Shape or Soffit
over the chimney chase, resize it to match, then
Masonry Fireplace Chimneys increase its height either in its specification dia-
log or in a 3D view using the same method as
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace extending a masonry fireplace.
• Use walls to define the chimney chase as a room
1. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. area, making sure these walls are aligned
2. Ctrl + drag the top edge of the chimney upward between floors. The chimney chase “room” on
through all the floors and the roof until it is to the uppermost floor should have a much higher
the desired height. See “Unrestricted Move- ceiling than the other rooms on that floor and
ment” on page 93. should also have no ceiling or roof. See “Room
3. When the chimney is approximately the correct
height, select the fireplace, click the Open A selection of chimney tops is available in the
Object edit button, and type in the exact library. In addition, custom chimney caps can be
height. made using Geometric Shapes and/or Soffits. See
“Other Objects” on page 289.
Chimney Chases and Caps
There are two ways to draw a chimney chase:
226
Chapter 20:
Multiple Floors
When a new plan file is opened in Home Designer Chapter Contents

Suite, two floor levels are present: Floor 1 and the • Floor Defaults Dialog
Attic Floor. You can add more floors whenever you • Floor Tools
like: up to 3 total. Once created, floors can also be • Adding Floors
copied and deleted. • Displaying Floors
Home Designer Suite also supports special floors for • Exchanging Floors
foundations and attics. Only one foundation level • Deleting Floors
and one attic can exist in a plan. Foundations are • Split Levels
discussed in their own chapter. See “Foundations” on • The Current Floor
page 221. • The Attic Floor
• The Reference Floor
Floor Defaults Dialog

There is a Floor Defaults dialog for each floor here also control the height of individual walls as
in a plan file aside from the Attic floor, which they are drawn on that floor. See “Room
can be accessed by selecting Edit> Default Settings. Specification Dialog” on page 141.
Click the arrow to the left of “Floors and Rooms” to
expand the category, then expand the “Floor Levels”
Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0. It
subcategory. Select a floor level and click the Edit can be modified in the Room Specification dialog,
button to open the Floor Defaults dialog for that but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog. See “Floor
floor. See “Default Settings vs Preferences” on page and Room Defaults” on page 132.
47.
The Floor Defaults dialog also opens whenever you Structure Panel
add a new floor to the plan. See “Adding Floors” on The settings on the STRUCTURE panel are similar to
page 228. those in the Room Specification dialog. See
The Floor Defaults dialog does not open when you “Structure Panel” on page 143.
build a foundation; however, the Floor 0 Default
settings are created based on the current Foundation Moldings Panel
Defaults. See “Building a Foundation” on page 222. The settings on the MOLDINGS panel are similar to
The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the Room those in the Room Specification dialog. See
Specification dialog, but controls the default settings “Moldings Panel” on page 144.
for all rooms on the floor in question. The settings
227
Fill Style Panel Materials Panel

The settings on the FILL STYLE panel are similar to The settings on the MATERIALS panel are similar to
those in the specification dialogs for many objects those in the specification dialogs for many objects
throughout the program. See “Fill Style Panel” on throughout the program. See “Materials Panel” on
page 76. page 296.
Floor Tools
Select Build> Floor to access the floor tools. more information, see “Deleting Floors” on page
229.
Select Build> Floor> Build New Floor to
build a new floor. A new floor can be Choose Build> Floor> Build Foundation to
generated based upon the perimeter of the floor open the Foundation Defaults dialog and
below or a blank floor can be created and drawn from build a foundation floor. See “Building a
scratch. See “Adding Floors” on page 228. Foundation” on page 222.
Choose Build> Floor> Delete Current Floor Select Build> Floor> Delete Foundation to
to remove the Current Floor from the plan. For remove the foundation from the plan. See
“Deleting Foundations” on page 224.
Adding Floors
When a new plan file is opened in Home Designer cated; however, interior walls are not. See “Roof
Suite, two floor levels are present: Floor 1 and the Panel” on page 126.
Attic Floor. You can add up to 3 total living floors, as • Check Move Highest Floor’s Roof Up to move
well as create a foundation below Floor 1. any roof planes displaying on the highest floor in
Floors can be added whenever you like; and once the plan up one floor when the new floor is cre-
created, they can also be copied and deleted. ated. Roof planes displaying on floors other than
the top floor are unaffected. This option is only
available if there are roof planes built on the top
Note: Home Designer Suite allows only one floor,
floor and is not available when Auto Rebuild
the foundation/basement, below Floor 1. See
“Foundations” on page 221. Roofs is enabled. See “Build Roof Dialog” on
page 256.
Build New Floor • Check Step floor/ceiling elevations to match
existing floor to maintain all ceiling heights on
New floors can be created in plan view as well the existing floor by stepping floor heights on the
as in 3D views, and are always added above new floor to match. Ceiling heights on the new
the top living floor. To create a new floor, select floor also become stepped accordingly. See
Build> Floor> Build New Floor. “Stepped Floor and Ceiling Platforms” on page
139.
• Make new (blank) plan for the # floor creates a
new top floor that is blank. This option is typi-
cally useful only if none of the exterior walls on
the new floor will be directly above the exterior
walls on the floor below. If you choose this
method, it may be helpful to turn on the Refer-
ence Floor when drawing walls on the new floor.
• Derive new 2nd floor plan from the 1st floor See “The Reference Floor” on page 231.
plan creates a new top floor with exterior walls
generated directly over the exterior walls of the When you click OK, the Floor Defaults dialog for
floor below. Wall types and roof directives associ- the newly created floor opens. Make any necessary
ated with the walls on the floor below are dupli- changes to the floor structure, moldings, or materials
228
Displaying Floors
and click OK. See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page Adding a Foundation
227.
To add a foundation, select Build> Floor> Build
The new floor becomes the Current Floor in plan
Foundation . See “Building a Foundation” on
view. If, however, the new floor is created in a 3D
page 222.
view, the camera remains on its original floor and
does not move.
Displaying Floors
Home Designer Suite allows you to view the floors In 3D Views
in your plan in a variety of ways.
In most 3D views, all floors in a plan are visible,
from the foundation up to the attic. There are three
In Plan View
exceptions:
In plan view, only one floor can be active for editing
at a time. This is referred to as the Current Floor. See • Doll House Views , which show the Current
“The Current Floor” on page 230. Floor, not including its ceiling, plus any floors
beneath it.
In addition to the Current Floor, one other floor can
be displayed for reference purposes: the Reference • Interior Elevation views show a wall on a sin-
Floor. Objects on the Current Floor can snap to those gle floor, in a single room.
on the Reference Floor, helping you align objects.
See “3D View Tools” on page 304.
See “The Reference Floor” on page 231.
Exchanging Floors
Select Build> Floor> Exchange With The floor that was moved becomes the Current Floor
Floor Above or Exchange With Floor at its new location. You can easily move a floor up or
Below to swap the Current Floor with the floor above down several floors by using either one of these
or below. buttons repeatedly.
Deleting Floors
Select Build> Floor> Delete Current Floor foundation without actually being on Floor 0. Floor 0
to remove the Current Floor from the plan. If cannot be deleted while Auto Rebuild Foundation
there is a floor above, it becomes the Current Floor; is turned on. See “Deleting Foundations” on page
if there is no floor below, the floor beneath becomes 224.
the Current Floor.
To delete Floor 0, select Build> Floor> When a floor is deleted, all objects on that
Delete Foundation. You can delete the floor are deleted with it.
Split Levels
Both split level floor plans and split level entries can Split Level Floor Plans
be created by controlling the floor and ceiling heights
of individual rooms in a multiple story structure. A split level, or tri-level, structure is a building
where the floor level in one part of the plan is located
For more detailed information about both types of approximately half way between the floor and ceiling
structure, visit HomeDesignerSoftware.com. levels of another part of the plan.
229
Split Level Entries

A split level entry, or divided entry, is characterized
by an entry door that opens onto a landing positioned
half way between the basement floor and first floor
levels.
Split Level Home
To create a simple split level plan
1. Draw a simple rectangular structure divided into

two separate halves by an interior wall.
2. Select one of the rooms and click the Open
Split Level Entry
Object edit button. See “Room Specifica-
tion Dialog” on page 141. To create a simple split level entry
3. Raise the Floor Height then press the Tab key.
1. Create a plan file with a full basement at the
4. Restore the Relative Rough Ceiling to the location of the entry door. See “Basement
default value, then click OK. Rooms” on page 224.
5. Build a stem wall foundation. See “Founda-
2. Go to Floor 0 and draw a stair Landing at
tions” on page 221.
the location of the entry. See “Landings” on
• The foundation under the room with the lower page 240.
floor height will have the specified Min Stem
Wall Height. 3. Draw stairs upward from the basement floor to
the landing.
• The foundation under the room with the raised
floor will have taller stem walls. • The number of treads and risers in the stair sec-
tion will determine the landing height.
• Both can be edited in the Room Specification
dialog. 4. Draw a second stair section from the landing
upward.
6. If you add a Floor 2, note that the Ceiling
Height in the room on Floor 1 will be reset to 5. Select the stairs and click the Auto Stairwell
the default value. edit button. See “Creating a Stairwell” on page
• To maintain a stepped condition on multiple 243.
floors, return to this room and set the Relative
Rough Ceiling back to using the default. Split level entries are often associated with daylight
basements. See “Daylight Basements” on page 225.
The Current Floor

In a given plan view window, only one floor level Floor Up / Floor Down
can be active at any given time. The active floor is
referred to as the Current Floor, and it is the only If you are working with more than
floor on which objects can be edited. one floor, you can select Tools>
Floor/Reference Display> Up One Floor or Down
If you would like to view two different floor levels One Floor to switch from one floor to another.
side by side, open a second plan view, navigate to the
desired floor, and then tile the two views. Although You can change the Current Floor in floor plan and
both are visible, only one of these view windows is 3D views. The Current Floor displays on the Change
active. See “Working in Multiple Views” on page 61. Floor/Reference button, which can be found
between the Down One Floor and the Up One Floor
buttons.
230
The Attic Floor
Floors become available once they have been built. Change Floor / Reference
The Attic and foundation levels are also accessible
If there are multiple floors, select Tools>
using these tools.
Floor/Reference Display> Change Floor/
Reference to open the Change Floor/Reference
dialog, where you can select both the Current Floor
and which floor is used in the Reference Floor.
The Attic Floor

Home Designer Suite automatically creates a if you enclose an area with walls, rooms cannot be
floor above the top numbered floor level of created on this floor level. If you wish to create an
each plan. This floor is called the Attic floor and has attic loft or bonus room in your plan, you must do so
only one purpose: to provide a space for on a numbered floor level.
automatically generated Attic walls. See “Attic
Because the Attic floor is not meant to be a living
area, a warning message will display if you try to
In some situations, you may find it necessary to draw draw walls or other objects on this floor level.
one or more walls on the Attic floor; however, even
The Reference Floor

When a model has more than one floor level, click the toolbar button that reports the current floor
it is often helpful to see how they relate to level.
each other in plan view. Select Tools> Floor/
When this dialog is accessed from a camera view,
Reference Display> Reference Display to turn on
only the Current Floor options will be active.
the display of an additional reference floor along
with the Current Floor.
Objects on the Reference Floor cannot be selected or
edited.
If the Reference Floor Display is turned on when a
view is printed, it will be included in the printed
output. See “Displaying Objects” on page 384.
When the Reference Floor Display is turned on, the
floor level below the Current Floor is used as the
Reference Floor. If there is no floor level below, the
floor above is used. By default, the Reference Floor
displays in red.
Note: When objects on the Current Floor and the

1 The Current Floor is highlighted here. Select
Reference Floor align and lines of two different another floor from the list to make it the Current
colors are superimposed upon each other, discol- Floor instead.
oration may result.
2 The Reference Display settings are only
Change Floor / Reference Dialog available in plan view.
By default, the floor below the Current Floor Check Show Reference Floor to turn on the display
is the Reference Floor, but any floor can be of the Reference Floor.
referenced using the Change Floor/Reference Choose the current Reference Floor from the drop-
dialog. To open the dialog, select Tools> Floor/ down list. When “Automatic” is selected, the floor
Reference Display> Change Floor/Reference or level below the Current Floor is always used; if there
is no floor below, the floor above is used instead.
231
3 Click the Define button to open the Layer Swap Floor/Reference

Display Options dialog and change the settings
for the Reference Floor Layer Set. See “Layer Sets” Click the Swap Floor/Reference button to
on page 75. move to the floor level shown in the
Reference Floor Display, making it the new Current
Floor. At the same time, the original Current Floor
becomes the Reference Floor.
232
Chapter 21:
Stairs, Ramps,
and Landings
Staircases can be composed of one or more straight Chapter Contents

or curved stair sections, ramps, and landings. Stairs • Stair Defaults
and ramps can be drawn, selected and edited in 2D • The Stair Tools
and 3D views. • Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairwells can be created automatically or manually • Drawing Stairs and Ramps
and can be seen in 3D views. • L- and U-Shaped Stairs
• Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings
• Editing Stairs and Ramps
Local building and fire authorities must be • Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections
consulted for specific stair construction
• Landings
codes and access requirements.
• Maintaining Tread Depth
• Starter Treads
• Wrapped Stairs
• Other Special Railings and Stairs
• Creating a Stairwell
• Rooms Below Staircases
• Staircase Specification Dialog
• Ramp Specification Dialog
• Stair Landing Specification Dialog
Stair Defaults
The purpose of interior stairs is to provide passage considering a staircase’s structure, bear in mind that
from one floor platform to another, so the attributes riser height is directly dependent on the distance
that influence floor heights - including ceiling from one floor platform to another.
heights - also influence the structure of stairs. When
The Stair Tools

Select Build> Stairs to access the Stair Tools.
233
Draw Stairs U-Shaped Stairs

To draw a straight staircase select Build> Select Build> Stairs> U-Shaped Stairs, then
Stairs> Draw Stairs, then click and drag in click to create two stair sections that form a
floor plan or a 3D view. You can also click once to 180° turn and are connected by a landing.
place a staircase that extends from the current floor
up to the next floor. See “Drawing Stairs and Ramps” Landing
on page 235.
Select Build> Stairs> Landing to draw a
landing, which is a platform connecting two or
Straight Stairs
more stair sections. See “Landings” on page 240.
Select Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then
There are two ways to create a landing using this
click to create stairs between the current floor
tool:
and the floor above. To create stairs between two
floor platforms on the current floor, click on the low • Click once to place a landing measuring 39” (975
side, within a few feet of where the floor changes mm) on each side.
height. • Click and drag to draw a rectangular landing
• If you click on the low side of a floor platform sized as needed. See “Polylines” on page 105.
defined by a railing, a doorway will be created in
the railing, adjacent to the stairs. Ramp
• If you click on the low side of a floor platform Select Build> Stairs> Ramp to draw a sloped
defined by a wall, stairs will be created but a ramp. By default, ramps are drawn at a 1:12
doorway will not. slope to a maximum height of 30” (760 mm). See
• If you click at a location that is not near the edge “Drawing Stairs and Ramps” on page 235.
of a floor platform, a full height staircase will be
created. Spiral Stairs
Curved Stairs Designer Core Catalogs> Architectural>
Select Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or Spiral Stairs to access a selection of spiral staircase
Curve to Right and click once in plan fixtures. Select the object that you want, then click in
view to place a curved staircase. See “Curved Stairs any view to place it in the plan. See “The Library” on
and Ramps” on page 236. page 271.
Because spiral staircase symbols are fixture symbols,
L-Shaped Stairs they do not have an Auto Stairwell edit tool. An
Select Build> Stairs> L-Shaped Stairs, then opening in the floor above a spiral staircase must be
click to create two equal stair sections that created manually. See “Creating a Stairwell” on page
form a 90° corner and are connected by a landing. 243.
See “L- and U-Shaped Stairs” on page 236.
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs as well as ramps are often described in terms building codes. When this is not desired, however,
of rise and run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8", stairs and ramps can be divided into multiple sections
and the run between 10" and 12". In metric plans, subsections. See “Stair and Ramp Sections and
rise is 177 to 190 mm, and the run is about 250 mm. Subsections” on page 238.
Whenever possible, Home Designer Suite will
automatically apply reasonable rise and run values Staircase Terminology
that meet most building codes to stairs and ramps as
they are drawn. Balusters - The vertical members that run between
the handrail and the treads or bottom rail.
In Home Designer Suite, staircases automatically
have a consistent rise and run along their length Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on the
because this is also a typical requirement of most exposed side of stairs below each tread.
234
Drawing Stairs and Ramps
Landing - A platform connecting two or more stair Stringer - The inclined support member of a
sections. staircase that supports the treads and risers.
Newels - The end post of a stair railing located at Tread - The horizontal member of a stair that the
landings and the beginnings and endings of new stair foot is placed on.
sections.
Tread Overhang - The portion of a tread extending
Rise - The height of a riser, measured from tread past the front surface of the riser and over the tread
surface to tread surface, Also referred to as Unit below. Also referred to as Nosing or Nosing
Rise. Extension, it is not included in the Run or Tread
Depth measurements.
Rise Angle - The angle of the staircase or stair
section, defined by a line drawn through the back Tread Thickness - The vertical depth of the tread
surfaces of its treads. material.
Riser - The vertical stair member located between
the treads. Risers may be solid or open. When open, Stair Structure and the Model
the front surfaces of the stringers are considered the Stairs locate the height of the floor platform that they
risers. are drawn on and seek the next level, which may be
Run - The depth of a tread, measured from riser the floor platform of the floor above or a landing.
surface to riser surface. Run does not include the The stringers locate the subfloor of the floor
Tread Overhang. Also referred to as Unit Run. platforms and maintain consistent riser height. If the
stairs are long enough to reach the next level at a
Runner - The carpet that runs down the center of the reasonable rise angle, their tread depth and number
staircase. of treads are automatically calculated to create a
Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the landing staircase with consistent tread and riser dimensions
floor, that anchors the balusters at landings. along its entire length.
Drawing Stairs and Ramps

Stairs and ramps can be drawn in floor plan and 3D • When drawing stairs or a ramp up from the ter-
views but not in elevation views. There are a few rain, it is a good idea to make sure the terrain is
things to keep in mind when drawing stairs: up to date. See “Building the Terrain” on page
• Before stairs are created, make sure that the 356.
heights for both the lower and upper floors are
correctly defined. Straight Stairs and Ramps
• Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should be The Draw Stairs tool can be used in two
drawn from the lower of the two floors they con- different ways:
nect.
• Click and drag in a straight line to draw stairs that
• By default, stairs adjust their riser and tread are the length that you drag.
dimensions to connect two floor heights if possi-
ble. The rise and run are calculated so that the • Click once to place stairs that go from the current
steps are consistent in size. floor up to the height of the next floor level.
• Stairs drawn within 1” (25 mm) of a wall will You can also click once using the Straight Stairs
snap to the outer surface of the wall. tool to create stairs between rooms on the same floor
with different floor heights or between exterior
• Stairs will snap to the Reference Display , if
rooms and the terrain. When the Straight Stairs tool
you have it turned on.
is active, a preview outline of the stairs will follow
• Hold down the Ctrl key to suppress these snap- the mouse pointer. Hold down the Alt key to reverse
ping behaviors. the direction of the Up arrow in the preview.
• If a stairwell room has been defined on the floor
above, the top of the stairs can be dragged until it Similarly, Ramps can be created by either
stops at the railing or wall defining the stairwell. clicking and dragging or by clicking. A ramp created
235
with a single click will be 30” (760 mm) high, have a continue clicking to place additional curved
slope of 1:12, and be 360” (9120 mm) long. staircases until another tool is selected.
An individual stair or ramp section must be between
6” (150 mm) and 100’ (30 m) in length. If a greater Drawing Stairs and Ramps
length is needed, connect two sections using a Downward
landing. Stairs and ramps can be drawn from the current floor
level downward; however, drawing stairs or ramps
Curved Stairs and Ramps between floors in this manner is not recommended.
You can make a straight stair or ramp section curved, Drawing downward should only be used to create a
or vice versa: staircase or ramp between a porch or deck and the
terrain when you require the direction arrow to say
by selecting the stairs or ramp and clicking the “DN” instead of “UP”. See “Displaying Stairs,
Change Line/Arc edit button. See “Change Ramps, and Landings” on page 237.
Line/Arc” on page 96.
To draw stairs going downward
You can also curve straight stairs and ramps by
drawing them against a curved wall. 1. Select Build> Stairs> Draw Stairs .
2. Hold down the Alt key or the right mouse but-
ton.
3. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
When drawing stairs or ramps from a floor platform
to the terrain, or vice versa, they will locate the
height of the terrain as long as it is lower than the
floor height. You can also create a landing or “room”
Straight stairs drawn along a curved wall
outside the structure and use it to establish the
Curved Stairs can also be created in plan bottom height of the stairs or ramp. Then, draw in an
view by selecting Build> Stairs> Curve upward direction from the lower platform to the
to Left or Curve to Right. Click to place a 90º upper platform.
curved stair section that can then be edited. You can
L- and U-Shaped Stairs

The L-Shaped Stairs and U-Shaped
Stairs tools allow you to place staircases
composed of two stair sections connected by one or
more landings with a single click.
The staircases created with these tools build from the
current floor to the floor above. If you need a
staircase that builds between platforms on the same
floor level, or in a downward direction, you will need
to draw it manually. See “Landings” on page 240.
When you select either tool, the New Shaped
1 Specify the Default Direction of the stairs as
Staircase dialog opens. they build upward: Clockwise, or Counter-
clockwise.
New Shaped Staircase Dialog • Check Make Winders to create multiple land-
The settings in this dialog retained between sessions ings with angled edges between the two stair sec-
in the software and are global, affecting all plans. tions When unchecked, a single rectangular
landing is produced.
2 U Shaped Stairs -
236
Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings
• Specify the width of the Gap between the two • If you continue to move the mouse closer, the
stair sections. lower stair section will snap to the wall instead.
• Check Split Landing to create two rectangular • If you move the mouse pointer into a wall corner,
landings instead of one. When Make Winders is the preview will rotate so that the bottom stair
also checked, each of these two landings is fur- section snaps to the wall that is nearest to the
ther divided into triangular shaped winders. mouse pointer.
When you click OK, a preview outline will follow • When a U-Shaped staircase preview is in a
the mouse pointer. wall corner, move the mouse pointer within the
You can control the staircase’s orientation and landing area to control which wall the back of the
direction by moving the mouse pointer towards a landing snaps to. With the landing in place, move
wall. the mouse pointer over the two stair sections to
control which is the bottom section.
• In the case of a U-Shaped staircase, the land- • Press the Alt key to reverse these snapping
ing will snap to the wall first. behaviors and the stairs’ direction.
• As you move the mouse pointer closer to the • Hold down the Ctrl key to prevent the stairs from
wall, the preview will rotate so that the upper rotating or snapping to walls.
stair section snaps to the wall.
Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and Landings

The display of stairs, ramps, and landings in parts: a section number and subsection number
all views is controlled in the Display Options separated by a hyphen.
dialog. Stairs, ramps, and landings are placed on the
“Stairs & Ramps” layer. See “Layer Attributes” on
page 74.
In Plan View
In plan view, stairs, ramps and landings display on
the floor they were drawn on and are only visible
from the floor above if there is a stairwell. See Stair section Stair subsection
“Creating a Stairwell” on page 243. number numbers
Stairs and ramps have an arrow indicating the In 3D Views

direction they run. Interior stairs and ramps have an
UP arrow on the floor they were created on and a DN Although stairs span between two floors, they can
arrow when viewed from the floor above. See only belong to one floor. As a result, only multi-floor
“Drawing Stairs and Ramps” on page 235. views show the upper floor with the platform
opening and the lower floor with the staircase
When a staircase is selected in plan view, the simultaneously. In Doll House Views, stairwells may
numbers associated with each of its sections and appear as an empty spaces. See “3D View Tools” on
subsections display. Stair sections are assigned a page 304.
single number, while subsection numbers have two
Editing Stairs and Ramps

Staircases and ramps can be selected and edited in the object in many ways. See “Editing Objects” on
plan view and 3D views. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79.
page 79. • Straight stair sections and ramps are edited like
lines. They have additional edit handles for resiz-
Using the Mouse ing the width of the section. See “Editing Line-
When a staircase or ramp is selected, its edit handles Based Objects” on page 82.
display. These edit handles can be used to customize
237
• Curved stair sections and ramps are edited like In the Specification Dialog
arcs and also include edit handles for resizing the
stair’s width. See “Editing Arc-Based Objects” Stairs and ramps can be customized in the
on page 83. Staircase and Ramp Specification dialogs.
See “Staircase Specification Dialog” on page 245,
• When stair sections are merged, the edit handles “Ramp Specification Dialog” on page 251, and “Stair
display differently depending on what subsection Landing Specification Dialog” on page 252.
is currently selected. See “Merging Stair and
Ramp Sections” on page 238. Stair, ramp, and landing railings can also be
customized. See “Railing Panel” on page 249, and
• When moving merged stair sections, all merged
sections and landings move as one unless Stair
Sections Move Independently is checked in the
Preferences dialog. To temporarily enable this
behavior, hold down the Alt key on the keyboard. A selected staircase can be edited in a variety of
• Additional edit handles display on the first two ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The
treads of a staircase if the Starter Tread edit
button is clicked. See “Starter Treads” on page
241.
Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections

In Home Designer Suite, staircases and ramps can be Creating Stair and Ramp
composed of multiple sections. In addition, each Subsections
section can be broken into multiple subsections.
There are several ways to create a stair section with
• Both sections and subsections can be curved
multiple subsections:
while their neighbors are straight and can have
different tread depths. • Draw one section, then draw a second section
that begins at the first one’s endpoint.
• Stair sections can also have different tread
widths, can be disconnected from adjacent sec- • Draw two separate segments, then snap the start
tions using the edit handles, and are usually sepa- point of one segment to the endpoint of the other
rated from other sections by landings. using the edit handles.
• Subsections both move and rotate as a single • Draw one segment and use the Break edit
object, while sections move with other sections tool to divide it into two subsections. See
but rotate separately. “Break” on page 95.
You can identify sections and subsections by clicking
on a stair or ramp to select it: sections are identified Creating Stair and Ramp Sections
with labels using whole numbers (1, 2, etc), while There are also three ways to create multiple stair
subsections are identified using hyphens (1-1, 1-2, sections:
etc). In addition, when a a stair or ramp is selected,
only the selected section will have edit handles. • Draw two separate stair sections and join them
using a landing.
• Use the Complete Break edit tool to divide a

section into two sections. See “To create a com-
plete break” on page 96.
• Use the Disconnected Selected Section edit tool
to change a subsection into a section.
1-2 is the selected subsection.

Merging Stair and Ramp Sections
The selected section or subsection can be identified Any combination of straight and curved stair sections
by the Move edit handle, which is red by default. See or straight and curved ramps using Automatic
“Selected Edge” on page 80.
238
Stair and Ramp Sections and Subsections
Heights can be merged. The resulting staircase or (or DN) arrows join, becoming a single direction
ramp section is made up of subsections and, if there arrow.
are no landings, functions as a single unit.
When a subsection is selected, the entire staircase is
Stair and ramp subsections must be drawn in the selected. Additional edit handles, indicating the
same direction if they are to be merged: presence of multiple subsections and allowing you to
• The top edge of a stair section or ramp cannot reposition the line along which they join. See “Using
merge with the bottom edge of another section or the Mouse” on page 237.
ramp.
Curved Subsections
• Combinations of stairs drawn in the UP and
DOWN directions cannot be merged. Stair subsections attached at both ends by other
sections do not have a free end that can be dragged
Stair subsections merge at the center points of their
into a curve. In this situation, change the middle sub-
upper and lower edges.
section to a curve using the Change Line/Arc
Stair sections and ramps cannot be merged directly. edit button. See “Change Line/Arc” on page 96.
If a combination of stairs and a ramp is required,
connect them with a landing. See “Landings” on To curve an enclosed stair subsection
page 240.
1. Draw three straight stair sections and connect
To merge stair or ramp sections them end to end.
1. Confirm that the stairs or ramps that you wish to 2. Select the middle subsection.
merge are using Automatic Heights. See “Gen-
eral Panel” on page 245.
2. Position the sections so they are in the desired
relationship to each other.
• In order to merge stair sections correctly, they
must be parallel to one another.
• To create merged subsections that change
direction, make one of the merged sections
curved.
3. Select either stair section so that its edit handles
display.
The middle stair subsection is selected
4. Click the Extend handle on the end to be merged
and drag it to the point where the two stairs are
to meet. 3. Click the Change Line/Arc edit button. The
center section turns into a curved stair section.
Merging parallel stair sections

After using Change Line/Arc
A staircase consisting of merged subsections
resembles a single stair section in plan view. The UP
239
4. Use the triangular Change Curve edit handle to Stairs joined in this manner can be turned into
adjust the curvature of the middle section as winders, which are steps located where a staircase
needed. turns and are narrower on the inside of the turn than
they are on the outside.
Landings
Stair landings are platforms between stair sections A landing formed between two stair sections having
and/or ramps, and can be created in either of four less than a 90º angle between them are created with a
ways: short edge not less than 6” (150 mm). This is because
most building codes require the shortest tread to be at
• Click and drag using the Landing tool. least 6” wide. This edge can be manually edited to
less than 6” if needed.
• Single-click using the Landing tool to create
a 3’-3” (975 mm) square landing.
Adjacent Landings
• Click between two stair sections using the Draw
Some staircases have more than one landing adjacent
Stairs tool.
to one another. When Auto Adjust Height is used,
• One or more landings are also created when the landings in Home Designer Suite recognize other
L-Shaped Stairs or U-Shaped Stairs nearby landings and will automatically adjust their
tool is used. heights and railings when their edges are sufficiently
close to one another.
To create a landing between stair sections To create adjacent landings, draw two landings and
then position them so that their edges are within 1”
1. Draw two stair sections going UP. They can be
(25 mm) of one another. The landing that was drawn
at any angle.
first will maintain its position while the height of the
2. Click between the two sections using the Draw one drawn later will be the equivalent of one riser
Stairs tool to create a landing. Notice that higher than the first. The railings on adjacent edges
only one direction arrow displays after the sec- are suppressed, as well.
tions are joined by a landing.
Editing Landings
Once created, landings can be selected in 2D and 3D
views and edited like other closed-polyline based
objects. See “Editing Closed Polyline-Based
Landings derive their initial materials, height,
thickness, and railings from the stairs and/or ramps
Creating a stair landing attached to them. You can assign a unique railing or
Similarly, a landing can be created between two material to a landing in the Stair Landing
Specification dialog. See “Stair Landing
ramps by clicking between them with the Ramp Specification Dialog” on page 252.
tool active.
When moving a landing, all stair or ramp sections
Multiple stair sections and/or ramps can be connected to it move as one unless Stair Sections
connected to one landing. For example, two or three Move Independently is checked in the Preferences
stair sections might meet at a landing with a single dialog. To temporarily enable this behavior, hold
stair section continuing to the next level. down the Alt key on the keyboard.
To be linked by a landing, all sections must be drawn
in the same UP direction and the top of one section Landing Height and Thickness
should be near the bottom of the next.
A landing’s height and thickness can either be
Stair sections connected with a landing will move dynamically controlled by the program or user-
together as a single unit. defined and static.
240
Maintaining Tread Depth
By default, landing top height and thickness are both automatic behavior is used, the railing is suppressed,
set to Auto Adjust. This means that if the structure or the railing is always applied in the Stair Landing
of the attached stairs is edited so that their length or Specification dialog. See “General Panel” on page
riser height is affected, the landing’s height and 253.
thickness will adjust automatically to maintain
You can also suppress the railing on a selected edge
consistent riser height in all connected stair sections.
by clicking the Remove Railing from Selected
If you uncheck either Auto Adjust box in the Stair Edge edit button. To always generate the railing
Landing Specification dialog, the landing will
on a selected edge, click the Add Railing to
maintain the specified height and/or thickness no
matter how the attached stairs or ramps are modified. Selected Edge edit button. See “Selected Edge”
This can result in stairs that have inconsistent risers. on page 80.
See “General Panel” on page 253. Landings can be edited into a wide variety of shapes.
So that the railings of stair sections connect properly
Landing Railings to the landing railings, you may find it helpful to use
By default, landings have railings on all edges, but the Break edit tool to create a break in a landing
will automatically suppress the railing along any edge if it is longer than the connecting stairs are
portion of an edge that connects to a stair section or wide. See “Break” on page 95.
has an adjacent landing. You can specify whether this
Maintaining Tread Depth

Most building codes require staircases to maintain a When a curved stair section has Automatic Treads
consistent tread depth. specified in the Staircase Specification dialog and
the Walk Line is used, the number and/or width of
Home Designer Suite measures a stair section’s treads in a section or subsection changes when the
length and tread depth along a Walk Line located 12" inner edge is moved. For this reason, it is best to
(30 cm) from the right edge of the stair section. On finalize stair section width as early as possible.
curved stairs, it is located 12” (30 cm) from the
inside edge of the curve.
Starter Treads
The first and second treads of a staircase can
be turned into starter treads by clicking the
Starter Tread edit button. Starter treads extend to
the side of the staircase, have rounded edges and are
common on traditional staircases.
A starter tread can be added only to open sides of a
stair section. If one side of a stair section is against a
wall or wrapped (see “Wrapped Stairs” on page 242),
only the exposed tread end can become a starter
tread.
To create starter treads
1. Click on a staircase to select it.
241
2. Click the Starter Tread edit button. An edit 6. Drag either of the two square handles upward to
handle displays on each end of both the first and increase the width of the rounded ends of the
second treads. tread.
3. Drag either of the handles on the first tread out-

ward from the stair section. If the stair section is 7. Drag the edit handle on the second tread out-
against a wall, only one handle displays on the ward from the stair section to create a second
side opposite the wall. starter tread.
4. As you drag, the ends of the tread become
rounded.
8. To make changes to existing starter treads, select

the stairs, click the Starter Tread edit
5. Two additional edit handles display on each side button and repeat the above steps as needed.
of the tread, along the back edge. 9. When you are finished editing the starter treads,
click the Main Edit Mode to restore the
stairs’ regular edit handles and toolbar buttons.
Wrapped Stairs
Stairs can be wrapped around the corner of a deck or
landing. Curved stairs and stairs with multiple
subsections cannot be wrapped. See “Style Panel” on
page 247.
To wrap stairs around a deck
1. Begin by drawing a deck. See “Decks” on page

138.
2. Use the Straight Stairs tool to place a stair

section on each side of the corner around which
you want them to wrap.
3. Move the stair sections toward the corner of the
deck. When the two sections are sufficiently
close to the corner, they will merge to form
wrapped steps.
You can also draw stairs down from a deck
by right-clicking to draw them or by pressing
the Alt key while you drag. See “To draw stairs
going downward” on page 236.
To wrap stairs around a landing
1. Use the Draw Stairs tool to create two per-

pendicular stair sections with top ends that share
a corner.
242
Other Special Railings and Stairs
2. Click between them to create a landing. 4. The stairs wrap around the corner. Notice that
3. Rotate one stair section 180°. the Up arrow displays on the most recently
edited stair section.
Other Special Railings and Stairs

Stairs can be customized to meet a variety of needs.
Solid Railings
To create a solid rail along a staircase, position a
solid Railing or Half Wall against, but not
underneath, the stairs.
If any balusters extend beyond the railing, eliminate

Solid Railing them by unchecking Left Railing or Right Railing
in the Staircase Specification dialog. See “Style
The solid railing recognizes the adjacent stairs and Panel” on page 247.
climbs alongside them.
Note: To create housed stringers, check Trim

Against Wall in the Staircase Specification dialog.
See “Stringers Panel” on page 247.
Creating a Stairwell
An interior staircase must be located in a stairwell, Auto Stairwell edit button. This button is only
an opening to the floor above. A stairwell is an Open available when a living space exists above the
Below room type on the floor above. See “Room staircase. It will not be available if the space above is
Types” on page 132. Open Below or on the Attic Floor.
If you create a stairwell away from other walls so the Auto Stairwell automatically creates a room on
Open Below is created in the center of another room, the floor above enclosed by railings, defined as
connect a wall of the Open Below room to another Open Below in the Room Specification dialog, and
wall using an invisible wall. given a Stairwell room label. This room can be
selected and edited like any other room.
Creating a Stairwell Automatically
To create a stairwell that matches the Creating a Stairwell Manually
perimeter of a selected staircase, click the Stairwells can also be created manually.
243
To create a manual stairwell 6. When the railings are positioned properly, select
Tools> Floor/Reference Display> Reference
1. Draw a two-story building. Create the staircase
on the first floor. Display to turn off the display of the Refer-
ence Floor.
2. Make the second floor the Current Floor and
the first floor the Reference Floor. See “The 7. Click inside the room using the Select Objects
Reference Floor” on page 231. tool to select it, then click the Open Object
3. Select Tools> Floor/Reference Display> edit button.
Reference Display to show the Reference 8. On the GENERAL panel of the Room
Floor, including the stairs. Specification dialog, select “Open Below” from
the Room Type list. Click OK to close the dia-
4. On the upper floor, use the Railing tool to log.
create a room around the stairs. Use the edit han-
dles to position the railings as needed.
9. Place a Doorway in the railing at the top

step for an opening.
5. Select the railings one at a time and move them
into position. 10. Select the doorway and define a large width in
the Door Specification dialog. If the doorway is
• When a railing is selected, its bounding box
specified wider than the railing, its width adjusts
shows the location of the outer surface of the
to fit the available space.
railing’s drywall layer. For best results, this
outer surface (which does not display when the
railing is not selected) should meet the top edge
of the stairs.
• If you prefer, you can also go Down One
Floor and adjust the top edge of the stair-
case to snap it to the surface of the railing on
the floor above.
Rooms Below Staircases

Rooms such as closets or storage areas are 2. On the same floor as the staircase, draw the
commonly located beneath staircases. Interior Walls under them, following their
shape.
To create a room below a staircase
3. Reposition the walls as needed, making sure that
1. Draw a staircase, select it, and click the Open each is entirely under the stairs.
Object edit button to open the Staircase 4. The wall at the foot of the stairs should be
Specification dialog. placed no closer to the bottom than the second
• On the FILL STYLE panel, select “No Pattern” step.
so the walls and other objects under the stairs 5. Add a door and specify the Room Type.
can be seen.
244
Staircase Specification Dialog

Staircases can be defined with the greatest is the Selected Section; however, information about
accuracy in the Staircase Specification all the sections is available and can be edited in the
dialog. To open this dialog, select a stair section and dialog.
click the Open Object edit button or double-click a
stair section using the Draw Stairs , Straight It is recommended that all floor heights, ceil-
Stairs , or Select Objects tool. ing heights and platform thicknesses be
established before using the Staircase Specifica-
If a staircase is composed of multiple stair sections, tion dialog.
the section that you clicked on to select the staircase
General Panel
1 Staircase Information - Structural information Automatic Heights is unchecked, this comment

about the selected staircase displays here for instead says “Start and end heights are set manu-
reference and updates as changes are made on the ally”.
GENERAL panel. • The second comment, Best fit riser height of
• The first comment tells whether or not the stair- ___ requires ___ total risers to reach ___ to
case reaches the next level. It also indicates next level, describes the ideal rise and run for the
whether its rise angle is either steeper or more selected staircase. The program defines the Best
shallow than the Best Fit, described below. If Fit Riser Height as the riser height closest to 6 3/
245
4” (168.75 mm) that allows the selected staircase to maintain the multiple sections’ individual set-
to meet the next level precisely. This comment is tings.
only active if Automatic Heights is checked,
below. 3 The specifications for each stair section and
subsection are listed and can be edited here. Up
• The total number of stair Sections, Landings, to ten items total can display.
and Risers associated with the selected staircase
also display here. A change in one value usually affects other values.
You may need to reposition the staircase after
• The Rise Angle of the currently active stair sec- making changes.
tion also displays here.
• The Section Number column identifies the
• Click the Make Best Fit button to add or remove Selected Section and the number of each section
risers to the Selected Section. Only available of the selected staircase. The radio button to the
when Automatic Heights is checked and the left indicates which section or subsection is
staircase does not currently use the Best Fit Riser selected. See “Displaying Stairs, Ramps, and
Height. Landings” on page 237.
Make Best Fit will also extend stairs drawn in a • Define the Length, or run, of each section.
downward direction until they reach the terrain. See
“Terrain Perimeter” on page 349. When the length of a section changes, other sec-
A diagram of a sample staircase’s structure displays tions and landings in the staircase unit move in
here for reference, as well. response. You can specify whether the bottom or
top edge of the Selected Section moves when you
2 The Advanced Options apply to all sections resize it by selecting either the Lock Bottom or
and subsections. Lock Top radio button, above.
• Select Automatic Treads to have the program • Define the Width of each section. If a section is
define the depth and number of stair treads. If the connected to a landing, its width should equal the
staircase has multiple sections, each may have length of the landing edge that it connects to. See
different tread depths. “Landings” on page 240.
• Select Lock Tread Depth to specify the Tread • Specify the Tread Depth, or run, of each stair
Depth for each stair section, below, and prevent tread in the selected section.
them from changing. When Lock Tread Depth is
• Define the number of Treads in a stair section or
selected and the length of the stairs is changed,
subsection.
the number of treads will change.
• Define the Riser Height, the height of the risers
• Select Lock Number of Treads to specify the
in each stair section.
number of treads in each stair section and prevent
it from changing. When Lock Number of Treads
4 A preview of the selected staircase displays on
is selected and the length of the stairs is changed, the right side of the panel. If the staircase
the tread depths will change. includes any landings, only the section that was
• If a staircase with multiple sections is selected, selected when the dialog was opened will display.
No Change may be an option as well. Select this See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
246
Style Panel
1 Specify characteristics of the staircase Treads. beneath stairs is to use walls. See “Rooms Below
See “Anatomy of a Staircase” on page 234. Staircases” on page 244.
• Specify the Tread Overhang, which is the dis-
tance that each tread overhangs the riser. 3 Specify the attributes of the staircase’s carpet
Runner. Only available when Open Risers is
• Specify the Tread Thickness. unchecked, above.
• Specify the Runner Width. The default value of
2 The Open Options control whether the 0 does not create a runner.
selected stairs have open risers or an open
underside. • Uncheck Runner Tucked to have the runner
• Check Open Risers to eliminate the riser face drop straight down from the tread front to the
under each tread and expose the stringers. riser below. This is checked by default.
• Uncheck Open Underneath to add a skirt below 4 A preview of the selected staircase displays on
the staircase along the two sides. It looks like a the right side of the panel. If the staircase
wall in 3D, but only has a single face. Base mold- includes any landings, only the section that was
ing does not generate along the bottom of the selected when the dialog was opened will display.
skirt, and doors cannot be placed in it. In most See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
cases, the recommended way to enclose the area
Stringers Panel
The settings on the STRINGERS panel affect all
sections of a selected staircase.
247
1 Stringer Style - 3 Options -

• Click a radio button to specify the number of • Extend Stringer Top is checked by default and
stringers assigned to the staircase. extends a triangular portion of the stringer under
• Specify the Height Above Tread, measured the landing or platform at the top of the stairs.
straight down from the top outer edge of the tread • Check Large Stringer Base to widen the string-
nosing to the top of the stringer. Only available ers at the foot of the staircase. This is helpful
when 2 Closed Side Stringers is selected, above. when walls are created below the stairs.
• Specify the Height Below Tread, measured
straight down from the back bottom edge of the
tread to the bottom of the stringer. Not available
when Custom Stringers is selected, above.
2 Specify the attributes of the Trim Against Wall

that generates when the staircase is positioned
against a wall. Large Stringer Base shown at right
• Specify the Height Above Tread, measured
straight down from the top outer edge of the tread 4 A preview of the selected staircase displays on
the right side of the panel. To see the stringers,
nosing to the top of the tread.
click in the preview and drag upward to rotate. See
• Specify the Height Below Tread, measured “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
straight down from the back bottom edge of the
tread to the bottom of the trim.
248
Railing Panel
1 Specify how the Railing is applied to the 3 Top/Bottom Rail -

selected staircase.
• Stair Rail Height defines the height from tread • Check Include Top Rail to produce a top rail on
surface directly over the riser to railing top. the stair railings that receives the top baluster
• Landing Rail Height defines the height of the ends and typically acts as a handrail.
landing rail top from the landing surface. • Check Include Bottom Rail to place a low rail
• Railing at Wall - Select Left and/or Right to on the landing surface that receives the balusters
specify the placement of wall railings. Not avail- ends.
able for ramps.
2 Style -
• Select Balusters to create regularly spaced balus-
ters between larger newel posts.
• Select Open to create with only newels posts.
• Select Open with Middle Rail to create railings • Check Raise Bottom, then specify the distance to
with newel posts and a middle rail. raise the bottom rail or panel from the stair tread.
• Select Panels to create railings composed of pan-
els. The panel style is specified on the NEWELS/ 4 A preview of the selected staircase displays on
the right side of the panel. If the staircase
BALUSTERS panel. See “Newels/Balusters Panel” includes any landings, only the section that was
on page 249. selected when the dialog was opened will display.
The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel will attached to the selected staircase. See “Landings” on
also affect the appearance of railings on any landings page 240.
249
1 Newels - able when the railing Style specified as “Panels” on

the Railing Panel.
• Uncheck Has Newel Posts, to prevent newels • Specify the panel’s Thickness.
from generating in the selected staircase’s rail- • Select “Solid” or “Library” from the Type drop-
ings. When this box is checked, newels are gener- down list.
ated and can be edited using the settings that
follow.
You can also apply newels, balusters, and
• Type - Select Square, Round, or newels from panels onto stair or ramp railing directly from
the Library. Selecting Library from the drop- the Library Browser. See “Inserted Objects” on
down list is the same as clicking the Library but- page 282.
ton to the right and allows selection of a newel
from the library.
4 A preview of the selected staircase displays on
• Specify the Width, which is the width or diame- the right side of the panel. If the staircase
ter of each newel. For Library newels, this is the includes any landings, only the section that was
width at its widest point. selected when the dialog was opened will display.
• Specify the Height, which is the height from the
landing surface to the top of the newel. Only
Rails Panel
available when Rail Passes Over Newel is
unchecked below. The settings on the RAILS panel are similar to those
• Specify the on-center Spacing of the newel posts. on the RAILS panel of the Wall Specification dialog
as well as the MOLDINGS panel of a variety of other
2 The first three Balusters settings are similar to dialogs. See “Moldings Panel” on page 268.
the Newels options of the same names, above.
By default, the settings on the RAILS panel will also
• Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally has two affect the appearance of railings on any landings
to three balusters, growing longer toward its attached to the selected staircase. See “Landings” on
back. The default is to use the same baluster and page 240.
cut it off at the bottom to shorten it toward the
tread front. Check this box to cut the balusters at
Line Style Panel
the top instead.
The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available
3 Specify the characteristics of the selected for a variety of other objects in the program. For
railing’s Panels. These settings are only avail-
information about these settings, see “Line Style
250
Ramp Specification Dialog
Fill Style Panel Materials Panel

The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
appearance of the selected staircase in plan view. For appearance of the selected staircase in 3D views and
information about these settings, see “Fill Style are available for a variety of objects throughout the
Panel” on page 76. program. For information about these settings, see
The settings on this panel will also affect the
materials applied to any landings attached to the
selected staircase. See “Landings” on page 240.
Ramp Specification Dialog

Ramps can be defined with the greatest click a ramp section using the Ramp or Select
accuracy using the Ramp Specification
dialog. To open this dialog, select one or more ramps Objects tool.
and click the Open Object edit button or double-
General Panel
1 A diagram of a sample ramp’s structure • Specify the Max Thickness, which is the ramp’s
displays here for reference. maximum thickness. At the low end of the ramp
where it meets the floor or terrain, its thickness
2 Size - Specify the Ramp Length and Width. may be less than this value.
4 Specify the structure of the ramp’s Tread,

3 Options - which an optional surface layer placed over the
top of the ramp.
• Check Open Underneath to remove the skirt
• Check Has Tread Surface to apply a top tread
around the bottom of the ramp so that it has a uni-
surface to the ramp and enable the settings below.
form, sloped thickness that may not reach the
floor or terrain at the high end. This is unchecked • Specify the Tread Overhang, which is the dis-
by default. tance the tread surface extends past the ramp’s
edges.
251
• Specify the Tread Thickness, which is the tread By default, the settings on this panel will also affect
surface’s vertical depth. the appearance of railings on any landings attached
to the selected ramp. See “Landings” on page 240.
5 A preview of the selected ramp displays on the
right side of the panel. If the ramp is composed
of multiple sections separated by landings, only the Rails Panel
section that was selected when the dialog was opened The settings on the RAILS panel are similar to those
will display. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25. on the RAILS panel of the Staircase Specification
dialog as well as the MOLDINGS panel of a variety of
Selected Line/Arc Panel other dialogs. See “Moldings Panel” on page 268.
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the By default, the settings on this panel will also affect
selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. For more the appearance of railings on any landings attached
information, see “Line Panel” on page 103. to the selected ramp. See “Landings” on page 240.
The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the
selected edge has been converted to an arc. For more Line Style Panel
information, see “Arc Panel” on page 104. The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available
See, too, “Selected Edge” on page 80 and “Change for a variety of other objects in the program. For
Line/Arc” on page 96. information about these settings, see “Line Style
Railing Panel
Fill Style Panel
The settings on the RAILING panel are similar to
those on the same panel in the Staircase The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the
Specification dialog. For information about these appearance of the selected ramp in plan view. For
settings, see “Railing Panel” on page 249. information about these settings, see “Fill Style
By default, the settings on this panel will also affect
the appearance of railings on any landings attached Materials Panel
to the selected ramp. See “Landings” on page 240.
The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
Newels/Balusters Panel appearance of the selected ramp in 3D views and are
available for a variety of objects throughout the
The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel are program. For information about these settings, see
similar to those on the same panel in the Staircase “Materials Panel” on page 296.
Specification dialog. For more information, see
“Newels/Balusters Panel” on page 249. The settings on this panel will also affect the
materials applied to any landings attached to the
selected ramp. See “Landings” on page 240.
Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Select a landing and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Stair Landing
Specification dialog. See “Landings” on page 240.
252
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
General Panel
1 Landing - to a stair section or has an adjacent landing, but to

produce a railing where that is not the case. See
“Landing Railings” on page 241.
Uncheck Auto Adjust Height to specify the selected
landing’s Top Height. • Select No Railing to suppress the railing on the
selected edge of this landing.
• A free-standing interior landing will have a
default Top Height equal to one riser plus the • Select Has Railing to produce a railing along the
thickness of the default floor finish. A free-stand- selected edge, even where it connects to a stair
ing exterior landing will have a default top height section or has an adjacent landing.
equal to its thickness. When this box is checked, • Check Apply to All Edges to apply your selec-
the landing height may adjust as needed to main- tion to all edges of the landing. This is an action
tain consistent riser height in all connected stair rather than a state - the next time this dialog is
sections or adjacent landings. opened, this box will be unchecked.
• The Top Height field is only active when Auto
Adjust Height is unchecked. See “Landing 3 A preview of the selected landing displays on
the right side of the panel. See “Dialog Preview
Height and Thickness” on page 240. Panes” on page 25.
Note: A network of adjacent landings can only be Polyline Panel

created when Auto Adjust Height is checked. See
“Adjacent Landings” on page 240. The POLYLINE panel states the length of the landing’s
Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and its Volume.
Uncheck Auto Adjust Thickness to specify the The settings on this panel are available for a variety
selected landing’s Thickness. of other objects in the program. See “Polyline Panel”
• A free-standing landing will have a default thick- on page 106.
ness of 6 3/4” (169 mm). When checked, the
thickness is based on the riser height of the stair Selected Line/Arc Panel
sections it is attached to, or the thickness of the
ramps it is attached to. The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the
selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. For more
• The Thickness field is only active when Auto information, see “Line Panel” on page 103.
Adjust Thickness is unchecked.
2 Specify how railings are applied to the selected edge has been converted to an arc. For more
landing’s Selected Edge. See “Selected Edge” information, see “Arc Panel” on page 104.
on page 80.
See, too, “Selected Edge” on page 80 and “Change
• Select Automatic to suppress the railing on any
portion of the selected edge that either connects
253
Railing Panel Specification dialog. For more information, see

The settings on the RAILING panel are similar to
those on the same panel in the Staircase By default, the settings on this panel will also affect
Specification dialog. For information about these the appearance of railings on any landings attached
settings, see “Railing Panel” on page 249. to the selected ramp. See “Landings” on page 240.
There is one setting that is unique to the Landing

Line Style Panel
for a variety of objects throughout the program. See
Fill Style Panel

The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the
Uncheck Use Connected Stair or Ramp Railing to appearance of the selected landing in plan view. See
enable the settings on this panel and the NEWELS/ “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
BALUSTERS panel. When checked, the selected
landing derives all railing settings from the Materials Panel
connected stairs or ramp. When a landing is attached to stairs, its initial
If the selected landing is not connected to a stair or materials are derived from the stairs.
ramp, this checkbox will be named Use Default The settings on this are available for a variety of
Interior or Exterior Stair Railing, depending on objects throughout the program. For information
where the landing is located. about these settings, see “Materials Panel” on page
296.
The settings on the NEWELS/BALUSTERS panel are
similar to those on the same panel in the Staircase
254
Chapter 22:
Roofs
Home Designer Suite’s automatic Roof Tools allow Chapter Contents

you to draw almost any roof style. • Roof Defaults
Proficiency with the Roof Tools can only be attained • The Roof Tools
through practice, but mastering these tools saves you • Automatic Roofs
time and effort in plan development. For information • Build Roof Dialog
about creating specific roof styles, see “Roof • Editing Roofs
Tutorial” on page 43 of the User’s Guide. • Gable Over Door/Window
• Gable Line Specification Dialog
• Skylights
• Skylight Specification Dialog
• Dormers
• Editing Auto Dormers
• Dormer Specification Dialog
• Roof Returns and Other Details
Roof Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings, to open the The floor and ceiling heights in individual rooms
Default Settings dialog for a variety of also influence roof heights and are specified in the
drawing tools, several of which directly affect roof Room Specification dialog. See “Structure Panel”
generation. on page 143.
Roof Defaults Dialog If Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the Build

Roof dialog and you change floor or ceiling
The Build Roof and Roof Defaults dialogs are
heights, wall positions or roof directives in walls,
nearly identical in appearance and function. The only the roof rebuilds to reflect your changes. See
difference is that the Build Roof dialog has a “Rebuilding Roofs” on page 256.
checkbox that allows you to automatically generate
roof planes. See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 256. Wall Specification Dialog
Floor and Ceiling Heights By default, when a roof is built, a roof plane is
generated over each exterior wall, creating a hip roof.
The initial heights of floors and ceilings, which
influence roof heights, are specified in the Floor Any deviations from this default hip roof, such as a
Defaults dialog for each floor. See “Floor Defaults gable or a different pitch, can be specified in the Wall
255
Specification dialog for any exterior wall. See “Roof and are much like those in the Dormer Specification
Panel” on page 126. dialog. See “Dormer Specification Dialog” on page
262.
Dormer Defaults
The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
determine the initial settings for automatic dormers
The Roof Tools

Select Build> Roof to access the Roof Tools. Skylight
Select Build> Roof> Skylight, then draw a
Build Roof
rectangle over an existing roof plane to create
Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to open the a skylight. The skylight, skylight shaft, and ceiling
Build Roof dialog, specify the settings for hole (if a ceiling exists) are drawn at the same time.
automatically generated roof planes, and build or See “Skylights” on page 259.
rebuild a roof. See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 256.
When roofs are automatically generated, a roof plane Dormer
is created over each exterior wall by default, Select Build> Roof> Dormer and click
resulting in a hip roof. within an existing roof plane to place an auto
To automatically generate a roof plane using values floating dormer. See “Dormers” on page 261.
other than the defaults or to not generate a roof plane
bearing on a particular wall (as with a gable or the Delete Roof
sides of a shed roof), you can change the settings in Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof to delete all
the Wall Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel” on roof planes in the plan. See “Deleting Roof
page 126. Planes” on page 258.
For more information about creating different roof
styles, see “Roof Tutorial” on page 43 of the User’s
Guide.
Automatic Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a roof plane Rebuilding Roofs
is created over each exterior wall by default,
resulting in a hip roof. By default, whenever changes are made to wall
placement, floor/ceiling heights, or roof directives in
walls, the roof will update in response. If you do not
Roof Directives in Walls
want the roof to rebuild automatically, uncheck Auto
To automatically generate a roof plane using values Rebuild Roofs in the Build Roof dialog. See “Roof
other than the defaults or to not generate a roof plane Panel” on page 257.
bearing on a particular wall (as with a gable or the
You can also rebuild the roof at any time to reflect
sides of a shed roof), you can change the settings in
the current state of the model by opening the Build
the Wall Specification dialog for that wall. See
Roof dialog and clicking OK.
“Roof Panel” on page 126.
For more information about creating different roof
styles, see “Roof Tutorial” on page 43 of the User’s
Guide.
Build Roof Dialog

The Build Roof dialog is used to
automatically build or rebuild roof planes. To
256
Build Roof Dialog
open the Build Roof dialog, select Build> Roof> Aside from a checkbox on the ROOF panel that
Build Roof . allows you to automatically generate roof planes, the
settings in this dialog are also found in the Roof
Roof planes are generated based on the positions and Defaults dialog. See “Roof Defaults” on page 255.
roof directive settings for each exterior wall in the
plan. If you make changes to any of these walls, you There are three panels in the Build Roof dialog:
will need to build the roof again for them to take • Roof Panel
effect. See “Roof Panel” on page 126. • Materials Panel
• Roof Styles Panel
Roof Panel
1 The Build options are commands related to an eave. On the right, the alcove is less than the 36"
building and rebuilding roofs. minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
• If you check Auto Rebuild Roofs, the program
automatically rebuilds the roof if you make a
change that affects the roof, such as to exterior
wall positions or ceiling heights.
• Check Ignore Top Floor to build the roof so that
it bears on the walls of the floor below the top liv-
ing floor in the plan. When unchecked, the roof
builds so that it bears on the walls on the top floor
of the plan. The Roof Overhang is measured horizontally from
The Specifications settings affect basic roof the exterior surface of the wall’s framing layer to the
2 end of the top of the rafter. It does not include
structure.
gutters, sheathing or siding.
• Enter a value to describe the Pitch. In plans using
U.S. units of measurement, pitch is described as a • Normal is the overhang at the eaves and is always
ratio over 12; in metric plans, it is measured in the overhang for a roof plane having the default
degrees. Pitch specified above. If the pitch for a particular
roof plane is set differently, its overhang may try
• Minimum Alcove Size - Specify the minimum
to maintain its fascia at the same height. Over-
width of an alcove (depression into an otherwise
hang can be greater for a shallower pitch, lesser
straight exterior wall). Any alcove less than the
for a greater pitch.
specified width is treated as though the exterior
wall continues straight across. Alcoves that mea- • Gable is the overhang dimension at gable ends or
sure wider than this value are not roofed over; rake walls.
they cause a change in roof planes.
Following is an example showing this difference. If
Min Alcove is 36", a 36" wide alcove requires a
change in the roof line. Each wall of the alcove has
257
Roof Styles Panel

If the roof overhang values are not suffi-
cient to extend past the outer layer of The ROOF STYLES panel provides links to tutorial
exterior walls, the walls may not generate information about creating different roof styles
correctly in 3D views. automatically. Click on a roof style to launch the
online Help to a page with information about the roof
Materials Panel style you selected. See “Roof Tutorial” on page 43 of
the User’s Guide.
The settings on this panel allow you to specify the
default materials for the roof’s various components.
See “Materials Panel” on page 296.
Editing Roofs
Unlike most other objects in Home Designer Suite, if the roof is later rebuilt. See “Material Painter
roof planes cannot be selected and edited. To make Tools” on page 295.
changes to the roof, you must edit the edit roof
directives in walls and/or settings in the Build Roof Deleting Roof Planes
dialog, and then rebuild. See “Rebuilding Roofs” on
page 256. There are several ways to delete roof planes.
Delete the entire roof quickly by selecting
An exception to this rule is the Material Painter Build> Roof> Delete Roof.
tool, which you can use to change the materials used
by individual roof planes without rebuilding the You can also delete all roof planes at once in
roof. Bear in mind, though, that any changes made the Delete Objects dialog. See “Delete
Objects Dialog” on page 99.
using the Material Painter will not be retained
Gable Over Door/Window

The Gable Over Door/Window edit button
allows you to add a small gable dormer over
one or more selected doors or windows the next time
automatic roof planes are built.
To use the Gable Over Door/Window tool
1. Select one or more doors or windows.
2. Click the Gable Over Door/Window edit • Each gable will extend 12” (300 mm) on either
button. side of its door or window.
• If two of these openings are within 30” (750
• Gable Over Door/Window is not mm) of each other on the same wall, a single
available for openings placed in Full Gable gable will be created.
Walls or for Bay, Box or Bow Windows. See
• If you move or resize the door or window(s),
“Bay, Box, Bow Windows and Roofs” on page
the associated Gable Line will not update until
195.
the roof is built again.
3. In the Gable Line Specification dialog, specify
5. To remove a Gable Over Door/Window, select
the desired Pitch and Overhang for the gable
the door(s) or window(s) and click the Delete
roof. See “Gable Line Specification Dialog” on
page 259. Gable Over Opening edit button. The next
4. The next time automatic roof planes are built, time the roof is built, the gable will be removed.
gables will be created over each of these doors
and windows.
258
Gable Line Specification Dialog
Gable Line Specification Dialog

To open the Gable Line Specification dialog,
select a door or window and click the Gable
Over Door/Window edit button.
Gable Line Panel

The settings on this panel affect the structure of the The defaults for these settings are set in the Build
two roof planes associated with the selected Gable Roof dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page 257.
Over Door/Window.
• Specify the Pitch of the roof planes that form the Line Style Panel
gable.
• Specify the Overhang of the roof planes that for a variety of other objects in the program. See
form the gable. “Line Style Panel” on page 103.
Line Panel Arrow Panel

The settings on the LINE panel are available for a The settings on the ARROW panel are available for a
variety of other objects in the program. See “Line variety of other objects in the program. See “Arrow
Panel” on page 103. Panel” on page 103.
Skylights
A skylight can be created by selecting Build>
Roof> Skylight and drawing a rectangular
polyline within a single roof plane. You can also
simply click once within a roof plane to place a 2’ x
2’ skylight. These measurements describe the
skylight’s projected size, as measured in plan view:
roof pitch is not taken into account.
The Skylight tool places a flat panel skylight

into a roof hole, produces a hole in the ceiling
platform below, and automatically generates the
skylight shaft between these two holes.
To place a skylight in a vaulted ceiling, uncheck Flat
Ceiling Over This Room in the Room
Specification dialog, draw the ceiling planes to
produce the vault and edit them as needed, and then
draw the skylight. See “Structure Panel” on page
143.
259
Although inserted into roof planes, skylights are able log. See “Skylight Specification Dialog” on page
to display in both plan and 3D views when their 260.
containing roofs do not.
Skylights must always be contained by a single roof
plane. If the roof plane is deleted, any skylights it
Editing Skylights contains are also deleted. Aside from this restriction,
Skylights can be edited using the edit handles, edit skylights can be edited much like standard closed
toolbar buttons, or the Skylight Specification dia- polylines. See “Editing Closed Polyline-Based
Skylight Specification Dialog

Select a skylight and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Skylight Specification
dialog. See “Skylights” on page 259.
General Panel
1 Specify the Frame Width and Height of the • The Framing Area is the area of the skylight
selected skylight. These values describe the with the pitch taken into account.
skylight’s projected size, as measured in plan view: • The Projected Area is the area of the skylight as
roof pitch is not taken into account. seen in plan view.
2 The Inside Hole Rim settings define how the
hole for the skylight is framed, as well as the Line Style Panel
shape of the skylight well where it passes through the
roof plane.
• Select Square Sides to cut the framing for the
skylight square to the pitch of the roof. Fill Style Panel
• Select Plumb Sides to produce framing for the
The settings on the FILL STYLE panel control the
skylight that is plumb-cut.
appearance of the selected skylight in plan view. See
• Select Plumb/Square to produce framing with “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
the bottom edge plumb-cut and the top edge,
square-cut. Materials Panel
Polyline Panel For information about the MATERIALS panel, see
The POLYLINE panel states the skylight’s Perimeter,
its Framing Area, and its Projected Area. Label Panel
• The Perimeter is the length of the skylight’s
Skylight labels display when the “Roofs, Labels”
perimeter with the pitch taken into account. It
layer is turned on and use the “Default Label Style”
does not equal the perimeter as measured in plan
view.
260
Dormers
Text Style. The Automatic Label for these objects is For information about the settings on this panel, see
blank, but you can specify a custom label. “Label Panel” on page 166.
Dormers
Dormers can be drawn manually or placed A dormer can be placed in plan view on the same
automatically using the Dormer tool. floor that its underlying roof plane displays on, or it
can be placed on the floor above. Normally, it does
Automatic Dormers can be placed only under certain
not matter what floor the dormer is on; but in some
conditions:
cases, it may need to be on the floor above so that the
• Automatic Dormers can only be placed entirely dormer walls do not interfere with walls or railings in
within a single roof plane. They cannot extend the room below.
past the eaves or ridge of this roof plane.
Regardless of which floor it is placed on, a dormer
• Automatic Dormer side walls cannot be posi- must always fit within a single roof plane. When
tioned above other walls in the plan. placing a dormer on the floor above, you may find it
If you click within a roof plane to place an automatic helpful to turn on the Reference Display . See
dormer, but click too close to an eave or the ridge, a “The Reference Floor” on page 231.
dormer will not be created; however, its outline will.
Move this outline box to a location that meets the Manually Drawn Dormers
dormer’s requirements and it will be created.
Once you are familiar with Home Designer Suite’s
The initial width, height, roof style and other settings
roof tools, drawing dormers manually can be quite
of Auto Dormers are set in the Dormer Defaults
simple. There are several different ways to draw
dialog. See “Dormer Defaults” on page 256.
dormers; some methods work better in certain
applications.
Dormer
A variety of resources with information about
Select Build> Roof> Dormer and click the drawing dormers manually is available at HomeDe-
roof plane where you would like to place the signerSoftware.com.
center of the dormer's front wall.
See, too, “Manually Drawn Dormers” on page 54 of
The bottom edges of all dormer walls are cut off by the User’s Guide.
the underlying roof plane.
The images below show both the outside and inside
of a typical dormer.
261
Editing Auto Dormers

Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that behave • Dormers move at 90° angles unless the Ctrl key is
as one. When a dormer is selected, it can be edited pressed before moving them.
using its edit handles, edit tools, and specification • The dormer must be contained within one under-
dialog. See “Dormer Specification Dialog” on page lying roof plane.
262.
• Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond the
required knee wall.
Using the Mouse
When selected, an auto dormer displays three edit Editing the Window
handles. The Move handle displays over the front
wall and allows you to relocate the dormer. Two Dormer windows can be selected, edited, deleted and
resize handles display on the side walls and allow replaced just like other windows. See “Editing
you to change the width of the dormer. Windows” on page 187. You can place several
windows in the front wall.
Unless the dormer's window has been edited or
changed in the Window Specification dialog, when
the dormer width is changed, its width changes
automatically to fill the front dormer wall. If the
window has been edited, its width stays fixed. If a
Move Resize change to the dormer makes its front wall too short to
hold the window, the window reverts to auto width.
There are some things to keep in mind when editing
auto dormers and auto floating dormers using the
mouse.
Dormer Specification Dialog

Select a dormer and click the Open Object The settings in this dialog are also found in the
edit button to open the Dormer Specification Dormer Defaults dialog, where they apply to all
dialog. dormers as they are created rather than to a selected
dormer.
Roof Panel
1 Specify the selected dormer’s Roof Style. • Choose a roof Type from the drop-down list. You
can choose from Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel,
262
Roof Returns and Other Details
Mansard, Barrel, Curved Eave, Hip Curved Eave 12 pitch. For Gambrel and Mansard types, this
or Eyebrow. applies to the lowest, or eave, roof planes.
• Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch in
degrees; uncheck it to display the pitch in terms of
rise and run.
3 Roof Overhang - Specify the depth of the

selected dormer’s Eave and Gable Overhangs.
4 Check Auto Roof Returns to generate roof

returns on the selected dormer. Roof Returns
can be only specified for Gable dormers. See “Roof
Dormer Roof Types
Returns” on page 263.
2 Describe the Pitch of the dormer’s roof planes. • Specify the horizontal Length of the roof return
•Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof planes. in inches (mm).
The default dormer pitch applies to all dormer • Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
roof types except Shed, which has a default 3 in
• Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return.
Walls Panel
• Select a Wall Type for the dormer walls from the dormer. Not available in the Dormer Defaults
drop-down list. dialog.
• Specify the Height of the dormer, as measured • Specify the dormer’s Width, measured from the
from where the top of the underlying roof plane outside surfaces of the dormer side walls.
meets the dormer front wall exterior to the top
plate of the dormer roof’s bearing walls. Line Style Panel
• Check Set to Existing Ceiling to assign the ceil- For information about the settings on this panel, see
ing height of the room behind the dormer to the “Line Style Panel” on page 103.
Roof Returns and Other Details

Home Designer Suite offers a selection of tools to
add architectural details to your roof design.
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane that
connects to the low side of a gable roof overhang and
extends below the upper triangular portion of the
gable wall. Three styles of roof returns that can be
produced.
The first two styles are called Gable and Hip returns
since the return ends in a gable or hip. Hip Return Gable Return
263
The third is called a Full return because it extends Roof returns are generated automatically on a wall
under the entire gable to connect both sides and is by wall basis using settings found in the Wall
sometimes referred to as a water table. In order for a Specification dialog. See “Roof Panel” on page 126.
Full return to be created, the roof planes on each side
These roof return settings are also found in the
must have the same height.
Dormer Specification dialog for gable roof dormers
and function similarly. See “Roof Panel” on page
262.
The pitch of an automatically generated roof return is
the same as that of the roof plane above it.
Full Return
264
Chapter 23:
Trim Tools
The Trim Tools allow you to place corner boards and Chapter Contents
quoins at wall intersections that form corners. • Trim and Molding Defaults
You can also assign moldings to a variety of objects, • Corner Boards
such as rooms and cabinets, in those objects’ • Corner Board Specification Dialog
specification dialogs. See “Specification Dialogs” on • Quoins
page 25. • Quoin Specification Dialog
• Editing Corner Boards and Quoins
• Millwork
• Applying Moldings
Trim and Molding Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings to open the • Click the + beside “Door” to access the defaults
Default Settings dialog where you can access for Interior and Exterior Doors. See “Door
the defaults for a variety of drawing tools, including Defaults” on page 169.
a number that affect trim and moldings. • Select “Window” and click the Edit button to
• Click the + beside “Floors and Rooms”, then specify the default casing for windows. See “Win-
beside “Floor Levels”. Select a floor level and dow Defaults” on page 183.
click the Edit button to specify the default mold-
Wall and Full Height cabinets in many of the new
ings for rooms on that floor. See “Floor Level
plan Style Templates have crown molding. These
cabinets can be placed from the library into any plan.
See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 199.
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building exterior
in any view by selecting Build> Trim>
Corner Boards.
265
Click at a wall corner where you want to add trim. Be A selected corner board or boards can be moved, but
sure to click where the outside wall surfaces meet. If only to another wall corner or corners. In 3D views,
you click where the inside surfaces meet, corner trim corner boards can be lengthened or shortened using
will be created inside the room. the edit handles. Corner boards can be copied,
deleted and resized similar to other objects using the
Corner boards extend from the top plate down to the
edit toolbar or the Corner Board Specification
bottom of the floor platform of the floor on which it
dialog.
is placed, but do not extend to other floors. You must
add corner boards to all floors of the building that The default material for corner boards is defined by
you want to have corner boards. the Exterior Trim entry in the Material Defaults
dialog. See “Material Defaults” on page 294.
Corner Board Specification Dialog

Select a corner board and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Corner Board
General Panel
Specify the Width of the selected corner board. information about these settings, see “Materials
Materials Panel
The settings on the MATERIALS panel are available
for a wide variety of objects in the program. For
Quoins
Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any view and A selected quoin or quoins can be moved, but only to
click at a wall corner where you want to place another wall corner or corners. In 3D views, quoins
quoins. can be lengthened or shortened using the edit
handles. Quoins can be copied, deleted and resized
similar to other objects using the edit toolbar or the
Quoin Specification dialog.
The size of quoins in plan view is relative on their

size in 3D.
Initially, quoins use the same material as the default
material of the wall surface they are placed against.
Quoin Specification Dialog

Select a quoin and click the Open Object edit
button to open the Quoin Specification
dialog.
266
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins
General Panel
1 Specify the Size of the quoins in the selected • Uniform - Produce quoins that are of equal length
Quoin object. on both sides of the corner.
• Specify the Width, which is the horizontal • Staggered - Produce quoins that have one long
dimension of each quoin in the selected Quoin side and one short side staggered on opposite
object. The dimension along the other wall is half sides of the corner.
this value when they are staggered or mirrored.
• Specify the Quoin Height for individual quoins Materials Panel
in the selected Quoin object. The settings on the MATERIALS panel are available
for a wide variety of objects in the program. For
2 Specify the arrangement of quoins used by the information about these settings, see “Materials
selected Quoin object.
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins

Before a corner board or quoin can be edited, it must • In 3D views, corner boards and quoins can be
be selected. Click on a trim object when the Select moved, lengthened, and shorted much the other
Objects tool is active. Corner boards and quoins line-based objects are. See “Editing Line-Based
can also be group selected and edited. See “Selecting Objects” on page 82.
Objects” on page 79
Using the Edit Buttons
Corner boards and quoins can be edited using their
edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons, and their A selected corner board or quoin can be edited in a
specification dialogs. variety of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
Using the Mouse
Deleting Corner Trim
Depending on the type of view, a corner board or
quoin displays a different set of edit handles when Corner boards and quoins can be selected
selected. individually or in groups and deleted using the
• In plan view, corner boards and quoins display Delete edit button or the Delete key on the
one edit handle and can be moved from one eligi- keyboard. They can also be removed using the
ble location at a wall corner to another. Delete Objects dialog. See “Deleting Objects” on
page 98.
Millwork
A selection of various types of millwork including Most millwork objects are designed to be placed in a
columns, corbels and finials is available in the plan as free-standing objects. Some - notably,
Library Browser. See “The Library Browser” on newels and balusters - can be assigned to objects
page 271. such as railings and stairs. See “Placing Library
267
Millwork assigned to an object can be replaced from

the library in 3D views. See “Replace From Library”
on page 283.
Applying Moldings
Moldings can be applied to a variety of different then click on a molding assigned to an object in the
types of objects in Home Designer Suite, including plan. See “Replace From Library” on page 283.
rooms, doors, windows, and cabinets. Moldings are
In a 3D view, select a molding profile from the
assigned to their containing object in that object’s
Library Browser and move your mouse pointer into
specification dialog.
the view window. When a molding is selected, the
Replacing an Existing Molding pointer displays the Moldings icon. When the
mouse pointer is moved over a molding in the view,
If a molding profile has already been applied to an
object, it can be replaced by another directly from the the Replace From Library icon displays instead.
library in a 3D view. Select a molding in the library, Click on the molding in the view to change its
molding profile.
Moldings Panel
The specification dialogs for a variety of and click the Open Object edit button to open the
objects in the program include a MOLDINGS specification dialog for that selection.
panel. Select an object or group of similar objects
1 At the top of the dialog, one or more check Check this box to use the defaults set in the Floor
boxes may be available. Defaults dialog for the current floor. See “Floor
• Only available for rooms, uncheck Use Floor Level Defaults” on page 132.
Default to make the settings that follow active.
268
Applying Moldings
• If multiple objects with different moldings • Click the Delete button to remove the currently
assigned to them are selected, a No Change check selected profile from the table.
box will be available. Uncheck this box to make • Click the Move Up or Move Down button to
the settings that follow active but note that only change the order of the line items in the table.
moldings that all selected objects have in com- This does not change a selected item’s Height,
mon will be retained. Offset, To Top setting, or Type: only its position
in the table.
2 The selected object’s Molding Profiles are
listed in a table and can be edited here.
3 The Selected Profile Options only apply to the
• Select the name of a molding to edit it or remove molding profile selected above.
it from the object. • A preview of the molding profile(s) displays here.
• Click in the Width and/or Height column and When multiple moldings of the same Type, To
type to specify the selected molding’s size. Top setting, or similar Height are specified, they
• Specify the Vertical Offset of the selected mold- will display together here, even when only one is
ing, measured relative to the default molding selected. The selected profile is identified by
location on the object it is assigned to. thicker edge lines than the others. When multiple
moldings of different Types, To Top, or Height
• A check mark in the To Top column means that settings are selected, no preview will display.
the Vertical Offset value is measured from the top
of the molding. When unchecked, this value is • Click the Rotate Profile button to rotate the
measured from the bottom of the molding. Click selected profile 90° counterclockwise, or to the
to place or remove a check mark. left. Not available for stacked moldings or a
selected molding symbol.
• When Retain Aspect Ratio is checked, if you
change either the Height or Width, the other value • hoose the currently selected molding’s Type from
changes to maintain their original ratio. When this the drop-down list: Base Molding, Chair Rail, or
is unchecked, the two values can be edited inde- Crown Molding. See “Room Moldings” on page
pendently. 141.
The buttons on the right allow you to manage the

Note: The Default Base Molding is a basic rectan-
moldings listed in the table.
gular stock profile rather than a profile from the
• Click the Add New button to open the Select library.
Library Object dialog and add a new molding
profile to the selected object. See “Select Library
4 Many specification and defaults dialogs have
Object Dialog” on page 283. previews of the selected object in which the
• Click the Make Copy button to add a copy of the moldings assigned to it can be seen. See “Dialog
selected molding profile at the bottom of the list. Preview Panes” on page 25.
• Click the Replace button to remove the selected

profile and replace it with a new profile from the
Library.
269
270
Chapter 24:
The Library
Home Designer Suite’s library offers thousands of Chapter Contents

symbols, materials, and images that can enhance any • The Library Browser
plan. • Searching the Library
New library catalogs and enhancements are made • Find in Library
available by Chief Architect on a continuing basis • Library Content
and are available for download for the current • Downloading Library Content
program version. • Importing Library Catalogs
• Adding Library Content
You can also customize items from the library or • Organizing the Library
import new items from outside the program and then • Exporting Library Catalogs
save them in the library for future use. • Placing Library Objects
• Select Library Object Dialog
• Displaying Library Objects
• Editing Library Objects
• Symbol Object Specification Dialogs
The Library Browser

The Home Designer Suite Library Browser • The search options at the top.
allows you to manage the contents of the • The Directory and Search Results Pane.
library as well as add library content to your
drawings. • The Selection Pane.
• The Preview Pane.
To open the Library Browser:
To adjust the height or width of a section, place the
• Select View> Library Browser . pointer over the split bar you want to move. When
the double-headed arrow displays, click and
• Click the Library Browser button . drag.
• Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard.
By default, the Library Browser is docked to the You can control the configuration of the
Library Browser panes in the Preferences
right side of the program window, but can be
dialog. See “Library Browser Panel” on page 52.
undocked or docked to another side. See “Docking
the Library Browser” on page 274.
You can work on your drawing with the Library
The Library Browser has four sections: Browser open. To close the Browser, click the Close
271
button or double-click on an object in the • Click the Search Filtering Options button to
Selection Pane. customize your search parameters. If the Library
The library directory is presented in a tree list with Browser is resized so that it is narrow, this button
five categories: Home Designer Core Catalogs, will be replaced by two arrows.
Home Designer Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer
Catalogs, User Catalog and Trash. See “Library 2 The library Directory and Search Results
display here. The basic structure of the
Content” on page 276. directory tree is:
Library items are always placed in alphabetical order

within their hierarchy.
The Library Browser includes a Trash bin, where
deleted items are moved until you choose to Empty
Trash. See “Deleting Library Items” on page 281.
Navigate the Directory Pane using the mouse. Click
the gray Expand arrow beside a catalog or folder
to display its contents. Once expanded, you can click
the black Collapse arrow to close it again. You
can also browse the list using the arrow keys on your
keyboard.
Click on an item to select it. Preview images display
in the Selection and Preview Panes and basic
information about it also displays in the program’s
Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on page 26.
3 The Selection Pane shows a thumbnail image

of the item selected in the Directory Pane.
When an item is selected in the Directory Pane, a
1 Search the library using keywords and optional basic line-based representation of the item displays
search filters. See “Searching the Library” on
in the Selection Pane.
page 274.
• If the selected item is a single object, a preview
• Begin typing in the text field to search for library
of that object displays in the Preview Pane. You
items. As you type, search results will display in
can move your cursor into the drawing area to
the Directory Pane.
place the item. See “Placing Library Objects” on
• Search a specific catalog or folder by right-click- page 281.
ing on it and selecting Search Folder. Multiple
• If the selected item is a folder, a thumbnail image
items can be searched in this manner.
displays, representing each item inside. Move
• Right-click on an item in the Search Results list your pointer over an item in this pane to see a
and select Show in Browser to view the item’s Tool Tip with the item’s name. Click on a folder
location in the Directory list. in the Selection Pane to display its contents here
and make it the item selected in the Directory
• Click the Browse button to stop searching Pane.
and restore the Directory list.
• Some folders may have too many items to display
• Click the Search button to display the search useful thumbnails for each; when this is the case,
results for your search entry. they do not display.
272
The Library Browser
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane button to Using the Contextual Menus
toggle the Selection Pane on and off. A number of important library functions can be
accessed using the contextual menus. Right-click on
4 When an individual item is selected in either an item in the Library Browser to open a contextual
the Directory or Selection Pane, an image of it
displays in the Preview Pane. If the item is designed menu displaying options related to that item. See
to be inserted into another object such as a cabinet, Contextual Menus.
that parent object will also display in the preview.
You can click the Toggle Preview Display

button at the bottom of the browser window to switch
between preview images in high and low detail.
If the selected object is a 3D symbol, you can rotate
and zoom in or out on the Preview using the mouse.
If you have rotated a view in the Preview Pane, you
can restore the default angle either by clicking in the
Selection Pane or by right-clicking on the Preview
Pane and selecting Reset Preview.
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane button to

toggle the Preview Pane on and off.
5 The toolbar at the bottom of the browser aids in The options in the contextual menu vary depending
searching, displaying panes, and managing
library content. on the item selected, but may include:
Click the Plant Chooser button to open the • Search Folder
Plant Chooser dialog. See “Plant Chooser • Cut/Copy/Paste
Dialog” on page 372. • Paste Shortcut
Click the Get Additional Online Content • Locate Shortcut Source
button to launch your default web browser to
• New
the Home Designer Suite web site, where additional
library content is available for download. • Rename
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane button • Delete
to toggle the Selection Pane on and off. • Export Library
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane button to • Open Object
toggle the Preview Pane on and off. • Reset Preview
Click the Toggle Preview Display button to • Expand All/Collapse All
switch between high and low detail images of • Show in Browser
a selected library object in the Preview Pane.
A selected material will display on a shape in Keyboard Commands
the Preview Panel. The initial shape is a
The Library Browser can be navigated using the
Sphere, but you can select a Cube, Teapot, or 2D
arrow keys on your keyboard.
Plane instead if you prefer.
• The right and left arrow keys expand and collapse
Click the Preferences button at the bottom of folders.
the Library Browser to open the Preferences
dialog, where display properties for the Library • The up and down keys change which library
Browser can be controlled. See “Library Browser object is currently selected.
Panel” on page 52. • Select an item and press F2 to rename it.
• Select an item and press the Delete key to delete
it.
273
Expand/Collapse All or horizontal orientation, depending on its location.

You can prevent the Library Browser from docking
When a library category or folder is selected in the by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging it.
Directory Pane, Expand All and Collapse All are
available in the contextual menu, allowing you to To return the Library Browser to its original position
expand or contract its contents in the tree view. and size, click the Restore Position/Size button in
the Preferences dialog. See “Reset Options Panel”
Docking the Library Browser on page 55.
Initially, the Library Browser side window is docked Closing the Library Browser
to the right side of the main Home Designer Suite
program window. To undock it, click and drag its The Library Browser can be closed in either of two
title bar towards the center of the program window. ways:
Once undocked, it can be moved and redocked in the
• Click the Close button at the top right corner
same manner. See “Side Windows” on page 22.
of the browser window.
When moved to the top, bottom, or side of the
program window, it automatically docks in a vertical • Select View> Library Browser .
Searching the Library

The Library Browser filtering options let you focus Substrings are not included. For example, searching
your searches to meet parameters that you define. for “windows” will not produce “window” as a
search result. On the other hand, searching for
To search the Library Browser “window” will produce “windows” as a search
result.
1. Select View> Library Browser and click in
the Search field at the top of the Library To search using custom filters
Browser.
1. Click the Turn on search filtering options
2. Begin typing a keyword to search for. As you
button.
type, the search results will populate in the
Directory Pane below. • Check Keyword to match the entered search
keyword with an object’s search attributes.
3. You can use quotation marks “” to search for an
• Check Entire Word to match the entire key-
exact word or phrase, but other operations are
word or words with the complete name of the
not supported.
object.
4. You can click the Clear button on the right • Check Folders to include library folders in
side of the Search field to remove anything your search.
typed in this field. 2. Click the arrow beside Type, Style, or Manu-
5. If you move your mouse pointer over the Search facturer to expand that category.
field, a Tool Tip will state the number of results • Check the box beside one or more Type of
of your search. library item that you want to include in your
6. Right-click on an item in the Search Results list search.
and select Show in Browser to view the item’s • Check the box beside one or more architectural
location in the Directory list. or design Style to include items of that style in
your search.
You can also search the contents of one or more
specific catalogs and/or folders. Right-click on a • Check the box beside one or more Manufac-
catalog or folder level item or group-select multiple turer to include in your search. Manufacturer
catalogs and/or folders and right-click on them, catalogs that were imported during the current
select Search Folder from the contextual menu, and program session will not be listed here until
proceed with step 2, above. See “Shift and Ctrl you exit out of and restart Home Designer
Select” on page 81. Suite.
274
Find in Library
3. Type a keyword in the Search field. The results

To save time, check the box beside Type, will be filtered to match your selected filtering
Style, or Manufacturer to select all of the options.
options in that category at once; uncheck the box
to deselect all of the options.
Find in Library
You can find out whether a selected object is • If a single line item was selected in the Find in
saved in the library and if so, where, using the Library dialog was clicked, that item will be
Find Original in Library edit tool. selected in the tree list of the Library Browser.
The Find Original in Library edit tool also allows • If the single line item is not found in the library, a
you to locate any objects inserted into the selected message box will inform you of this and give you
object as well as any materials or moldings assigned the option of adding it to the library.
to it. See “Inserted Objects” on page 282. • If multiple line items were selected, the Show in
Library Results dialog will open, summarizing
Find in Library Dialog the status of each.
The Find in Library dialog opens when you select
one or more objects and click the Find Original in Show in Library Results
Library edit button This dialog lists all of the If multiple line items are selected in the Find in
selected objects as well as all objects assigned to and Library dialog, the Show in Library Results dialog
inserted into them. will report where, or if, they are found in the library.
Each line item selected in the Find in Library dialog

is listed here.
• Click on a line item to select it. Multiple lines can
also be selected. See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on
page 81.
• Click the Show in Library button to locate and
select the selected line item in the tree list of the
Library Browser. Not available if the selected
item is “Not Found in Library Browser”, or if
multiple line items are selected.
Highlighted line items are categories that may have
multiple components beneath them. • Click the Add to Library button to add the
selected line item(s) to the User Catalog in the
• Check the box beside a line item to find that
library.
object in the library.
• Click the Done button to close the dialog.
• Check the box beside a category heading to select
all items in that category.
When you click OK, the dialog will close and one of
three things will happen:
275
Library Content
The Home Designer Suite library has five categories: The User Catalog
Home Designer Core Catalogs, Home Designer
Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs, User The User Catalog is the location for items that you
Catalog and Trash. add to the library either from a drawing or by
importing. See “Adding Library Content” on page
279.
Home Designer Core Catalogs
You can create and organize custom library folders
The Home Designer Core Catalogs category contains
and imported items such as symbols, images,
a wide selection of 3D symbols, images, and
backdrops, and materials. See “Organizing the
materials. If you install the program from USB drive,
this library content will also be installed; if you
download the software, you will be able to download
the Core Catalogs separately, after the program is Updating Library Catalogs
installed. The Home Designer Core Catalogs, Bonus Catalogs,
When you launch the program for the first time, it and Manufacturer Catalogs are updated periodically
will ask if you want to download the Core Catalogs. to include new and improved content. You can
Click Yes to begin the download. If you click No, update your installed catalogs to include the latest
you can download at any time by selecting Library> content by selecting Library> Update Library
Install Core Content from the menu. Catalogs at any time.
The program will gather information about the
Home Designer Bonus Catalogs content in each of these three categories, and then
download and replace any content that is not up to
Chief Architect regularly posts new library catalogs
date, and you may see a progress indicator at the
available for download. Select Library> Get
bottom of the Library Browser while it is doing so.
Additional Content Online from the menu to See “Download Progress” on page 277.
access the bonus catalogs and content.
Most Bonus Catalogs can be purchased for a nominal Library Content Location
fee, while others are available free of charge. In All library content aside from your User Catalog is
addition, some Bonus Catalogs are only available to stored in the System Library Database Folder. This
Chief Architect Support and Software Assurance folder is created in the directory intended for shared
program members. application data in your operating system
(C:\ProgramData in Windows; /Library/Application
Manufacturer Catalogs Support in macOS).
A variety of name brand library catalogs is available The Home Designer User Catalog File,
for download on the Home Designer web site with User_Library.calib, is located in the Home Designer
content ranging from materials to fixtures. Suite 2021 Data folder by default. See “Home
Select Library> Get Additional Content Online Designer Suite Data” on page 32.
to access these Manufacturer Catalogs. You can specify a different location for the Data
folder if you wish in the Preferences dialog. If you
As with the Bonus Catalogs, some Manufacturer choose a removable drive or network location,
Catalogs are available free of charge while others can library slowness may result. See “Folders Panel” on
be purchased, and some are available for Support and page 53.
Software Assurance members only.
If you choose to use a different location, it is
important that you specify a directory on a hard drive
Note: Support and Software Assurance is an with sufficient space to hold these files.
optional program for holders of Chief Architect
Premier and Chief Architect Interiors software
licenses and is not available for Home Designer
licenses.
276
Downloading Library Content
To back up your custom library content

Library catalogs are not designed to be
shared between program titles or versions. 1. Launch Home Designer Suite and select View>
Items designed for use in Home Designer Suite
2021 are not compatible with earlier program ver- Library Browser from the menu.
sions. 2. Right-click on a folder or item in the User Cata-
log.
Backing up Custom Content 3. Select Export Library from the contextual
The best way to back up your custom library content menu.
is to export the items in your User Catalog, as this 4. The Export Library Data dialog is a typical
will ensure that the textures used by custom materials Save dialog. See “Exporting Files” on page 36.
or imported symbols are not lost. See “Backing Up • Notice that the file type in the Save as type
Your Files” on page 36. field is “Library File with Textures/Images
Exported libraries use the .calibz file format: a (*.calibz)”.
zipped file type that can include textures and images
along with other library data.
Downloading Library Content

The Home Designer Core Catalogs, Home Designer
Bonus Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs are all
available for internet download.
Core Catalogs
When you launch Home Designer Suite for the first
time, you will be asked if you want to download the Pausing and Resuming
Core Catalogs. Click Yes to begin the download. Library downloads can only take place while Home
If you click No, you can download at any time by Designer Suite is running. If you close the program
selecting Library> Install Core Content from the while a download is in progress, a dialog will
menu. confirm whether you wish to stop the download.
• Click Stop Download and Close Program to
Bonus and Manufacturer Catalogs stop the download and close the program.
Bonus and Manufacturer Catalogs can be • Click Cancel to leave the program open and con-
downloaded from our web site, tinue downloading.
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com. Select Most catalogs are composed of a single file. If you
Library> Get Additional Content Online to stop the download midway, none of the downloaded
launch your default internet browser to our Content data will be retained.
Resources page. The Core Catalogs, on the other hand, contain a large
volume of data saved in multiple files. If you close
Download Progress the program and stop the Core Catalogs download
midway, only data associated with the file currently
When library content is downloading, a green
being downloaded will be lost. You can resume the
progress bar will display at the bottom of the Library
download beginning with that file at a later time by
Browser. If you choose to download the Core
selecting Library> Install Core Content.
Catalogs while the library is not open, the Browser
will open so the progress indicator can display.
Download Errors
Click on the progress bar to display the name of the
current file being downloaded, the total amount of If any problems occur during the library download
data to be downloaded in KB, and the amount process, a dialog box will notify you at the end of the
downloaded so far. download. Click Retry Download to repeat the
277
download and correct any errors or click Cancel to

discard the downloaded catalog.
Importing Library Catalogs

Home Designer Suite library files have two different • To select all files in the directory, click on one
file extensions: .calib and .calibz. Both files can and press Ctrl + A. Only do this if you wish to
include any combination of Home Designer Suite import all files in the folder.
library items; in addition, .calibz files are able to 3. Click the Open button.
save data associated with textures and images. Both
file types can be imported into the Home Designer 4. A progress bar will display, telling you the prog-
Suite library. ress of each library data file as it is imported.
5. Once imported, each file will be listed in its cor-
There are several ways to import a .calib or .calibz
responding library category and will be selected
file into the program library:
in the Library Browser tree list. See “Library
• Double-click on the file in an operating system Content” on page 276.
window while a plan file is open.
When a .calibz file is imported into the program, any
• Drag the file from an operating system window images or textures saved in it will be copied into the
and drop it into the Home Designer Suite pro- Home Designer Suite 2021 Data\ Images and
gram window. Textures folders for backup purposes. The program
• Select Library> Import Library from the pro- will only reference these copies if it cannot locate the
gram menu. files in their original locations. See “Home Designer
Suite Data” on page 32.
Although multiple versions of Home Designer can be
installed on a computer, the operating system will
only associate .calib and .calibz library files with Library Catalog Migration
one version. If they are not associated with Home If you have library catalogs from Home Designer
Designer Suite 2021, click the Associate Files with Suite 2014 through 2020 installed on your computer,
this Program button in the Preferences dialog. See the initial startup of Home Designer Suite 2021 will
“File Management Panel” on page 53. give you the opportunity to migrate that content into
the Home Designer Suite 2021 Library. See
Note: Library files cannot be imported if no plan “Migrating Content and Settings” on page 13.
file is open, or when a Materials List window is
active. Legacy Library Conversion
To import library files into the library You can import .calib and .calibz files created in
Home Designer versions 2012, 10, or 9 for use in
1. Select Library> Import Library to display the version 2021 at any time. See “Exporting Library
Import Library Data dialog. Catalogs” on page 281.
2. Browse to the .calib or .calibz file(s) that you
want to import and either single or group-select Note: Library content exported from Home
the files so that their names display in the File Designer Suite 10 will not include catalog names.
Name field. Any subscribed content from version 10 that has
not been downloaded will not be included, either.
• To select a group of files, click on the first one,
hold down the Shift key, then click on another In addition, legacy .alb files created in Home
file. The two files plus all files in between are Designer versions 8.0 and prior can be converted for
selected. use in version 2021.
• To select multiple files individually, click on
one, hold down the Ctrl key, then click on addi- To convert legacy library files
tional files. Only the files you click on are
selected. 1. Select Library> Convert Legacy (.alb)
Library Files.
278
Adding Library Content
2. In the Select a Legacy Library File Folder dia- 4. Click the Open button to import the prior ver-
log, select an .alb file that you want to bring in sion third party .alb file into the User Catalog.
to Home Designer Suite 2021. 5. Organize the imported content to suit your
3. The selected file’s name will display in the File needs. See “Organizing the Library” on page
name: field. 279.
Adding Library Content

In addition to downloading Home Designer Suite • Images - See “Images” on page 326.
Content and importing entire catalogs into the • Materials - See “Creating Materials” on page
library, you can also add a variety of individual 299.
objects to the library.
• Plant Image - See “Plant Image Specification
Add to Library
• 3D Symbols - See “Importing 3D Symbols” on
Nearly any object imported into a plan or placed page 345.
from the Library Browser can be added to the User
Catalog in the library. See also “Using the Contextual Menus” on page 273
and “Adding New Folders” on page 279.
• Check Add to Library in the Import 3D Symbol
dialog. See “Importing 3D Symbols” on page
345. Creating a Customized Library Item
• Select an object in your plan and click the Add to You can customize an existing library item and save
your changes for future use by first copying the item
Library edit button.
into an unlocked library.
A few objects cannot be added to the library: notably
terrain objects, CAD objects, imported pictures, To customize a library object
metafiles, and PDF files.
1. Right-click on a library item and select Copy
Any object created using a drawing tool in Home from the contextual menu.
Designer Suite will automatically be added to the
User Catalog using the name of that tool, whereas a 2. Browse to the User Catalog or a folder within it
symbol will automatically use the Symbol Name. and right-click on it.
See “Native Objects vs Symbols” on page 284. 3. Select Paste from the contextual menu to make
a copy of the library item in this new location.
Once added to the library, objects in the User Catalog
can be renamed. See “Renaming Library Items” on 4. Right-click on the copied item and select Open
page 280. Object from the menu.
5. The item’s specification dialog opens, and you
Using the Contextual Menu can make any changes that you wish to the item.
A variety of new content can be added to the User 6. Make any needed changes to the item, then click
Catalog by right-clicking on it or on a folder within it OK. Your changes will be saved with this item
and selecting New> from the contextual menu: for use in any plan.
• Backdrops - See “3D Backdrops” on page 333.
Organizing the Library

Library folders and objects can be copied, pasted, Adding New Folders
moved, and deleted: allowing you to organize your
User Catalog to best suit your work style and needs. New folders can be added to the User Catalog or to
any folder located within it. To add a new folder,
right-click on User Catalog or one of its sub-folders
and select New> Folder from the contextual menu.
279
The new folder is created inside the library item you them. Release the mouse button to relocate the
right-clicked on and is initially named “Untitled”. selected library item in the highlighted location.
Type a short, descriptive name and press Enter.
You can also cut a library item from one location and
paste it in another. When an item is cut, it is removed
from its current location and saved to the system
clipboard. To cut an item:
• Right-click on it and select Cut from the contex-
tual menu.
• Click on the library item and press Ctrl + X on
your keyboard.
To Paste the item, click on a library catalog or folder
in the Library Browser tree view and either:
• Right-click on the new location and select Paste
Selecting Library Items from the contextual menu.
To select a library object, folder, or category, simply • Press Ctrl + V on your keyboard.
click on it.
When an item is selected, preview images display in
Copying Library Items
the Selection and Preview Panes and basic All library folders and library objects can be copied
information about it also displays in the program’s and pasted to new locations in the User Catalog.
Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on page 26.
There are two ways to copy a library item to the
A selected library item can be modified in a number system clipboard:
of ways to help meet your organizational needs.
• Right-click on it and select Copy from the con-
textual menu.
Renaming Library Items
• Click on the library item and press Ctrl + C on
Only folders and objects in the User Catalog can be your keyboard.
renamed. There are several ways to do this from the
tree list: To Paste the item, click on a library catalog or folder
in the Library Browser tree view and either:
• Right-click on the item, select Rename from the
contextual menu, and type a new name. • Right-click on the new location and select Paste
from the contextual menu.
• Click once on the item, press F2 on your key-
board and type a new name. • Press Ctrl + V on your keyboard.
• Click once on the item, pause for a moment, then When a library item is copied and pasted, the new
click a second time and type a new name. item that results is independent of the original item.
If you make changes to it, the original item is
Library names are case-sensitive and can contain up unaffected. Similarly, changes to the original item do
to 63 characters. While you can have more than one not affect the copy.
library item that uses the same name, it is best to use
short, descriptive and unique names. Library Shortcuts
Moving Library Items In addition to copying and pasting to create new,
independent library items, you can copy and paste to
Folders and objects in the User Catalog can be create Library Shortcuts. Library Shortcuts are not
moved to new locations within the User Catalog. independent items - they are linked to the original
Folders and library objects are always organized item and are affected if changes are made to the
alphabetically within each hierarchy. original.
To move an item to a different location, select it in Library Shortcuts are advantageous because you can
the tree list, then click and drag it to the new location place a given library item in multiple locations to suit
in the list. Directories and folders able to accept new your organizational style without increasing the size
content highlight as your mouse pointer moves over
280
Exporting Library Catalogs
of the library database and without having to Items in the library that are eligible for deletion can
maintain multiple copies of the same item. be deleted in either of two ways:
To create a Library Shortcut, copy a library item to • Right-click on it and choose Delete from the con-
the system clipboard. Then, right-click on the textual menu.
location where you would like to create a copy and • Select it and press the Delete key on your key-
select Paste Shortcut from the contextual menu. board.
Library Shortcuts use the same name as their source
When items from the User Catalog are deleted, they
item but use the Library Shortcut icon.
are moved to the Library Browser Trash . Items
To locate a Library Shortcut’s source item, right- in the Trash can be retrieved by clicking and
click on it in the tree list and select Locate Shortcut dragging them into any location in the User Catalog.
Source.
If you move or delete an item from the library, any To empty the Trash , right-click on it and select
shortcuts to it will not be updated or removed. If you Empty Trash from the contextual menu.
try to use a “hanging” shortcut, a message about its Depending on how much content is in the Trash,
status will display in the library preview panes. emptying it can be time consuming. You can click
the Cancel button to end the process if you wish.
Deleting Library Items
The five installed library categories: Home Designer The Empty Trash command is both immedi-
Core Catalogs, Home Designer Bonus Catalogs, ate and permanent. It cannot be undone, so
use care when using it. You should back up all
Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog, and Trash
your library files regularly. See “Backing up Cus-
cannot be deleted. tom Content” on page 277.
Catalog level folders in all categories can be deleted;
however, individual subfolders and objects can only
be deleted out of the User Catalog.
Exporting Library Catalogs

Exporting library files allows you to: • Click the Save as type: drop down list and
• Back up your custom library content. select whether or not you want the library to
include Textures/Images.
• Transfer library content between computers.
Exporting is often preferable to simply copying If any of the items being exported are
library files because it allows you to include images images or use textures, be sure to select
and textures in the exported library. the .calibz file type.
To export content from the library • Click Save.

3. Your exported library file can now be copied to a
1. Locate an object, folder, or catalog that you want
network location or storage device in an operat-
to export, right click on it, and select Export
ing system window.
Library.
2. In the Export Library Data dialog. Any Shortcuts present in a catalog will be
• Choose the appropriate Save in: location for converted to regular library objects when exported.
your exported library file. See “Library Shortcuts” on page 280.
• Type a short, descriptive name for your library
file in the File Name field.
Placing Library Objects

Library objects are subject to placement restrictions
based upon typical real-life placement. Most library
281
objects require sufficient free space at the location placement. See “The Library Browser” on page
where they are placed, for example, and some library 271.
objects have additional requirements. 2. Move your mouse pointer into the view area and
Library windows and doors, for example, must be notice that it displays an icon indicating the type
placed in a wall just like standard windows and of object selected instead of an arrow.
doors, and some fixtures are designed to be placed in 3. Click to place the selected object at that location.
cabinets.
4. Continue clicking to place as many instances of
Library symbols have placement restrictions that are the selected object as needed. When you are fin-
determined when the symbol is created but can be ished, click the Select Objects button.
changed later. See “Native Objects vs Symbols” on
page 284 and “Symbol Specification Dialog” on Once a stand-alone object has been placed, it can be
page 183. edited in a variety of ways. See “Editing Library
If a warning message displays when placing a library
object, it will indicate where the object can be
placed.
Inserted Objects
Some objects cannot stand alone and must be placed
There are three main categories of items available in
into other objects in a plan. For example, doors and
the Library Browser:
windows must be inserted into a wall, while some
• Stand-alone objects that can be placed directly appliances and plumbing fixtures are designed be
into a plan. Examples include cabinet modules, placed inside a base cabinet. See “Doors” on page
furnishings and images. 169, “Windows” on page 183 and “Cabinets” on
• 3D objects designed to be inserted into another page 199.
3D object. Examples include cabinet fixtures, With the exceptions of doors, windows, and
windows and doors. Some items, such as cabinet skylights, an inserted library object can only display
doors and fixtures and fence panels, can be in a 2D or 3D view if the object that contains it is set
inserted into another object or placed as stand- to display. This is the case even if the inserted
alone objects. object’s layer is turned on. See “Displaying Library
• Materials, which cannot stand alone and must be Objects” on page 283.
assigned or applied to another object.
To insert a library object
Stand-Alone Objects
1. Click on an item in the tree view or Selection
Most library categories contain objects that can be Pane of the Library Browser to select it for
selected in the Library Browser and placed directly placement. See “The Library Browser” on page
in a 2D or 3D view. 271.
• Most stand-alone objects are designed to rest on 2. Move your pointer into the drawing area.
the floor or terrain.
3. Click on the object into which you wish to insert
• Some objects will rest on top of a cabinet, shelf, the selected library item. If the selected library
furniture or roof plane object if one is located at item is designed to be inserted into that type of
the point where they are first placed. object, it will be placed into it.
• A few objects, notably some light fixtures, will 4. Continue clicking on other objects to place as
mount on the bottom of a wall cabinet or on the many instances of the selected item as needed.
ceiling. When you are finished, click the Select Objects
• In addition, some objects will attach to a wall if button.
one is nearby.
When an object has been inserted into another object,
To place a stand alone library object it can be replaced directly from the library. See
“Replace From Library” on page 283.
1. Click on an object in the tree view or Selection
Pane of the Library Browser to select it for
282
Select Library Object Dialog
Assigned Items • By selecting the item in the library and then

clicking on the containing object.
Some library items, such as materials, are not objects
in themselves but can be applied to objects in a • Materials can be assigned to objects directly from
variety of ways. the library in 3D views by selecting the material
and then clicking on an object’s surface. See
• Using the specification dialog of the containing “Eyedropper and Painter Tools” on page 97.
object. See “Select Library Object Dialog” on
page 283.
Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a modal version object. For example, if this dialog is accessed from
of the Library Browser that is accessible from object the GENERAL panel of the Door Specification
specification dialogs. See “Specification Dialogs” on dialog, only door symbols will be listed:
page 25.
The Select Library Object dialog is similar to the

LIBRARY MATERIALS panel of the Select Material
dialog. See “Select Material Dialog” on page 297.
The Select Library Object dialog only displays
categories of items that are related to the selected
Replace From Library

In 3D views, an inserted object can be replaced by a
3. The Replace from Library icon will display
different item from the library with a single click.
near the mouse pointer when it passes over an
See “Inserted Objects” on page 282.
object that can be replaced by the selection from
the library.
To replace an inserted object
4. Click once to replace the object in the plan with
1. Open the Library Browser, and browse to an the selected object from the library.
object of a type similar to the one you wish to
Some types of inserted objects - notably, doors and
replace.
cabinet doors and drawers - can also be replaced in
2. Select the object and move the mouse pointer this manner in plan view. The Replace from Library
into the 3D view window.
icon does not display in plan view, however.
Displaying Library Objects

The display options available for library objects In Plan View
depend on the type of object in question, as well as
the view. All library objects except materials, doors and
drawers applied to cabinets, and backdrops can
If the display of an object is turned off in a 2D or 3D display in plan view. Library objects are represented
view, any objects inserted into it will not display in in plan view by 2D symbols that resemble the size
that view, either - even if the inserted object’s layer is and shape of the object when viewed from above.
turned on. The exception to this rule is doors and
windows, which can display in 3D views when their As with other architectural objects, the display of
containing wall does not. See “Inserted Objects” on library objects is controlled by layer in the Display
page 282. Options dialog. Each library category has its own
layer. See “Display Options Dialog” on page 74.
283
Like other objects, each library symbol is placed in a example, are located on the “Fixtures, Labels” layer.
Drawing Group that affects whether it displays in See “Object Labels” on page 166.
front of or behind other objects. You can modify a
You can specify a custom label for many library
selected symbol’s place in the drawing order by
objects in its specification dialog. See “Symbol
clicking the View Drawing Group Edit Tools Object Specification Dialogs” on page 285.
edit button. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools” on
page 76. In 3D Views
Object Labels All library objects can display in 3D views.
Free-standing library objects can display labels in By default, images rotate to face the camera in 3D
plan view when the appropriate layer is set to display views. For information about turning off image
in the Display Options dialog. Fixture labels, for rotation, see “Image Specification Dialog” on page
328.
Editing Library Objects

Library objects can be customized to suit your design In addition to the symbols available in the library,
needs. There are three approaches to doing so: you can import additional symbols into the program
• Select an object in the User Catalog, edit it using from 3D .obj, .3ds, .skp, or .dae files. See
any of the options in its contextual menu, and “Importing 3D Symbols” on page 345.
your changes will be reflected when you next Any changes made to objects like fixtures and
place this library object in a drawing. furniture will not be reflected in their Materials List
• Place an object in a drawing and then edit it using Description, although they may be seen in other
the various edit tools available for it. This will columns, such as Size. See “Materials Lists” on page
not affect the original object still saved in the 377.
library.
• Place an object in a drawing, edit it using the Using Edit Handles
available edit tools, and then add it back to the Most free-standing library symbols are box-based
library for future use. This will not replace the objects and can be edited as such once placed in a
original object still saved in the library. See “Add drawing. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on page
to Library” on page 279. 89. Depending on the type of view and the surface
Library objects placed in a drawing can be selected selected, the edit handles a symbol displays will vary.
individually or as a group, like other objects in Home When a typical symbol is selected in plan view or on
Designer Suite. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79. the top surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles
Once selected, a library object can be edited in a display. They are the Move handle at the center, the
variety of ways using dimensions, the edit handles, Rotate handle just outside the front indicator (a V)
the edit toolbar buttons and its specification dialog. and a Resize handle on each edge and at each corner.
See “Symbol Object Specification Dialogs” on page When a symbol is selected on a side in a 3D view, it
285. displays six edit handles: the Move handle, a Rotate
handle, and a Resize handle on each edge. See
Native Objects vs Symbols “Selected Side” on page 80.
In Home Designer Suite, objects created using the When a free-standing symbol is selected on its side
program’s standard tools, such as the Door Tools and rotated, you will be prompted to choose whether
to update its plan view symbol to reflect its new
and Cabinet Tools , are referred to as native orientation, as viewed from above. See “In Plan
objects. View” on page 283.
On the other hand, objects placed from the library, Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are subject to
such as fixtures and furnishings, are symbols. bumping/pushing behavior when moved. See
Symbols are typically more limited than native “Bumping/Pushing” on page 93.
objects in how they can be edited.
284
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs
In the Specification Dialog Specification dialogs are not available for native
objects saved in the library.
The specification dialog for an individual symbol,
image, or plant image in the User Catalog can be
Deleting Built-in Fixtures and
edited from the Library Browser Directory Pane.
Right-click on the item and select Open Object from Appliances
the contextual menu. See “Specification Dialogs” on A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet becomes
page 25. a cabinet face item, like a door or drawer. It can be
Individual or multiple group-selected materials can resized or deleted like other face items in the
be edited by right-clicking and selecting Open Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Front Panel” on
Object as well. See “Define Material Dialog” on page 207.
page 300.
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs

The Fixture, Furniture, Geometric Shape, For example, selecting a library object placed from
Hardware, and Millwork Specification the Interiors Core Catalog and clicking the Open
dialogs all feature the same options. The actual name Object edit button opens the Furniture
of the dialog is determined by the type of object that Specification dialog.
is currently selected.
General Panel
1 The Name of the selected symbol object Does not affect the behavior of the object’s edit
displays here. handles.
• Click Reset Size to reset the symbol’s original,
2 Size/Position - unmodified size. The symbol’s elevation is not
affected by this option.
• Specify the Width, Height, and Depth of the
object. • Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-
• Check Retain Aspect Ratio to maintain the ratio
between the object’s Height, Width, and Depth
setting labels.
when it is resized in the specification dialog.
285
• Specify the height to Top, measured from the as an appliance in a cabinet, the parent object will
selected Elevation Reference to the top of the also display. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page
object. 25.
selected Elevation Reference to the bottom of the Materials Panel
object. The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
appearance of the selected object in 3D views. See
3 Options - “Materials Panel” on page 296.
Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the object’s

Label Panel
appearance, so that features on its left are positioned
on its right, and vice versa. This turns a right-hand A variety of library objects can display labels in plan
refrigerator, for example, into a left-hand view. Labels use the Text Style assigned to the layer
refrigerator. This option has no effect on objects that they are on.
are symmetrical.
For information about the settings on this tab, see
• Check Flush Mounted to specify that the “Label Panel” on page 166.
selected object follow the pitch of either the ceil-
ing or roof. Only available when “From Ceiling” Manufacturer Panel
or “From Roof” is selected as the Elevation Ref-
erence, above. The MANUFACTURER panel provides contact
information for the selected object’s manufacturer.
4 If the selected object has a Copyright, Only available for symbols from Manufacturer
information about it displays here. library catalogs. See “Manufacturer Catalogs” on
page 276.
5 A preview of the selected library object
displays here and updates with changes. If the
selected symbol is inserted into another object, such
286
Chapter 25:
Architectural Blocks
A selection of pre-arranged rooms library catalogs is blocked together, these objects retain many of their
available for download. These pre-arranged rooms own attributes, such as materials.
are a collection of fixtures, furnishings and
Architectural blocks can also be exploded so that the
accessories that are grouped together so that they can
individual sub-objects become independent of one
be placed and moved as a single object. See
another.
“Downloading Library Content” on page 277.
3D objects that are grouped together like this are Chapter Contents
referred to as Architectural Blocks. Although • Displaying Architectural Blocks
Displaying Architectural Blocks

As with individual objects, the display of • If an architectural block is composed of objects
architectural blocks is controlled in the that are on the same layer, the block will be
Display Options dialog. See “Layer Attributes” on placed on that layer, as well.
page 74. • If an architectural block is composed of objects
on different layers, the block will be placed on
the “Architectural Blocks” layer.
Editing Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks can be selected and edited in 2D Using the Edit Tools
and 3D views. See “Selecting Objects” on page 79
A selected architectural block or blocks can be edited
Once selected, an architectural block can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
using its edit handles and edit toolbar buttons. toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 23.
Using the Edit Handles Editing Sub-Objects

A selected architectural block displays a Move The individual objects included in an architectural
handle and a Rotate handle. block can also be selected and edited. See “To select
Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but the a sub-object” on page 288.
individual objects in the block can be.
Explode Architectural Block
You can break an architectural block to make
its objects independent. Select the
287
architectural block and click the Explode Once exploded, an architectural block cannot be
Architectural Block edit button. made into a single object again.
Note: If you open a plan created in another ver-

sion of Home Designer and an architectural block
includes an object that you cannot create in your
version of the software, you cannot unblock it or
edit its components.
Architectural Blocks and Sub-Objects

An architectural block is composed of a group of button. Some attributes may not be editable while
sub-objects that have been blocked together. For the object is part of a block. See “Editing Archi-
example, a kitchen island architectural block may tectural Blocks” on page 287.
consist of cabinets, appliances, and other accessories.
To select a sub-object
Each of the sub-objects in an architectural block may
contain additional parts called components. The 1. Click the Select Objects button, then click
cabinets in a kitchen island, for example, may on the sub-object that you would like to edit.
contain handles, hinges, and drawer glide.
2. With the architectural block selected, click the
Sub-Objects Select Next Object edit button or press the
Tab key.
Certain attributes of an architectural block can be
edited at the sub-object level. A sub-object can be The selection switches to the individual object
edited by accessing its specification dialog in either and it can be edited using its edit handles, edit
of two ways: toolbar and specification dialog.
• Explode the architectural block, select the sub- The options for editing a sub-object may be more
restricted than if the object were independent. If
object, and click the Open Object edit
more extensive editing is required, the architectural
button.
block must be exploded.
• Select the sub-object while it is part of the archi-
tectural block and click the Open Object edit
288
Chapter 26:
Other Objects
Home Designer Suite has additional objects that can Chapter Contents
be used to customize your design. • General Shapes
• Soffits
• Special Applications for Soffits
• Soffit Specification Dialog
General Shapes
Items in the Home Designer Core Catalogs> General Shape objects are placed and edited much
Shapes library catalog allow you to create a like other library objects. See “Editing Box-Based
variety of custom objects using basic geometric Objects” on page 89.
shapes. These shapes can be used individually or
combined to create a wide variety of custom objects.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between the • The default soffit should be the same width as
tops of wall cabinets and the ceiling, but they and 1" (20mm) deeper than the default wall cabi-
are very versatile and can be used to create almost net. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 199.
any other object that can be modeled as a 3D box. • The default soffit Floor to Bottom value should
Select Build> Cabinet> Soffit to activate this tool. equal the sum of the default wall cabinet’s Floor
to Bottom value plus its Height. See “General
Soffit Defaults Panel” on page 291.
The default settings for soffits are set in the • The default soffit Height should be equal to or
Soffit Defaults dialog. The settings in this greater than the space between the ceiling and the
dialog are similar to those in the Soffit Specification top of the wall cabinets.
dialog. See “Soffit Specification Dialog” on page
If the sum of the default soffit’s Floor to Bottom
291.
value and Height is larger than the ceiling height of
When a soffit is created, it is placed on the “Cabinets, the room in which a soffit is placed, the Floor to
Soffits” layer. See “Layer Attributes” on page 74. Bottom value will be retained and its Height will be
adjusted so that it fits under the ceiling.
For best results when placing soffits above wall
cabinets: The maximum soffit width is 250 feet (48m), and the
minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
289
Once a soffit is placed in a plan, you can change its When positioned against a wall in a room, soffits will
size and position to meet a variety of needs. automatically display any moldings present in that
room that are at the same height as the soffit. Soffits
Placing Soffits can also have custom molding profiles assigned to
them. See “Moldings Panel” on page 144.
Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D views by
When positioned against the ceiling in a room, a
simply clicking with the Soffit tool active. See
soffit will prevent the Ceiling Finish layers directly
“Click-to-Create” on page 69.
above it from generating in 3D. See “Lowered
To create a corner soffit, click as close to an inside Ceilings” on page 139.
wall corner as possible. A corner soffit retains its
shape when it is moved, edited, or copied.
Special Applications for Soffits

Nearly any object with straight, flat sides can be
represented by one or more Soffits. They can be
resized to as small as 1/16" (1mm) per side, or as
large as 250 feet (48m).
Soffits can have materials applied to them to
represent simple mirrors, posts, chimneys and so on.
Following are some additional examples.
Coffered Ceilings
Soffits can be used to create coffered ceilings. They
will display any moldings assigned to the room it is
in that are at its height.
Masonry Veneer
You can use a soffit to create a brick or stone veneer
over part of a wall. Specify a soffit depth equal to the
masonry material to be used.
Accent Tiles
A material such as ceramic tile can be assigned to
one or more soffits applied to the walls above tubs or
in showers.
Soffits automatically stop at the floor platform when

moved downward or at the ceiling platform when
moved upward - even when the soffit is not located
in a room. To move or resize a soffit through a floor
290
Soffit Specification Dialog
or ceiling platform, select it and hold the Ctrl key • If the soffit depth is greater than both 4 inches (10
down while dragging its edit handles. See mm) and 1 ½ times the material thickness, then
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 93. the surface areas of the soffit back, sides and top
are used in addition to the front, if these surfaces
Calculating Materials on Soffits are not attached to a wall or other soffit. How-
ever, only those portions of the sides, top and bot-
By default, soffit materials are not calculated in the tom remaining after subtracting twice the
Materials List. In order for a soffit’s material to be material thickness are used. So, for Dark Red
counted, it must be edited so that it is not using the brick, which has a depth of 4", the sides, top and
default material. See “Material Defaults” on page bottom surface areas cannot contribute to the
294. brick count unless the soffit depth is greater than
The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes or other 8 inches.
materials applied to a soffit is calculated using the • If surface materials such as brick are applied to a
following rules: large soffit, the soffit center is assumed to be hol-
• If the soffit depth is less than the larger of 4 low, with only a single layer of the material
inches (10 mm) or 1 ½ times the material thick- applied to each applicable face.
ness, then only the front area of the soffit is used. • For shingles and shakes, the overlap amount
Thus if a soffit is 48"x48”x4” thick, and the Dark should be subtracted from the height, as opposed
Red brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8” mor- to brick or tile, where the joint width is added to
tar joint) the front of the soffit is 48"x48”=2304 the size.
square inches. Including the mortar joint, each
• For materials in the area category, the soffit area
brick requires 3 3/8” x 8 3/8” = 28.26 square
calculation above is used, with the material thick-
inches. 2304 sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per
ness treated as zero.
brick gives 81.5 bricks.
• For materials in the volume, concrete or earth
categories, the true volume of the soffit is used.
Soffit Specification Dialog

To open the Soffit Specification dialog, select The settings in this dialog are similar to those in the
the soffit and click the Open Object edit Soffit Defaults dialog, but affect only the selected
button or double-click on a soffit using the Soffit object(s).
tool.
General Panel
1 Define the Size and Position of the selected • Define the vertical Height of the soffit.
soffit relative to the floor or terrain. • Define the Depth, which is the distance between
• Specify the Width of the soffit. the front and the back of the soffit. When selected
291
in plan view, the front of a soffit has a “V,” and Moldings Panel
the back of the soffit has a triangular rotation
handle. The settings on the MOLDINGS panel allow you to
assign one or more horizontal moldings around the
• If the selected soffit is a corner soffit, the Width selected soffit.
controls its left side width, and Depth controls its
right side width. For information about the settings on this panel, see
“Moldings Panel” on page 268.
• Specify the distance from Floor to Top of the
soffit.
Materials Panel
• Specify the distance from Floor to Bottom of the
soffit. Soffits are not calculated in the Materials List unless
a non-default material is specified. See “Calculating
• When the selected soffit is outside a room, its
Materials on Soffits” on page 291.
Floor to Bottom height is measured relative to the
terrain. Check Auto Adjust Height to maintain For information about the settings on this panel, see
the same distance above the terrain if the soffit is “Materials Panel” on page 296.
moved to a location with different terrain height.
Uncheck this to maintain the same absolute Label Panel
height regardless of the terrain below. When
Auto Adjust Height is checked, the Floor to Soffit labels display in plan view when the
Bottom value may automatically adjust if the sof- “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on and use the
fit is moved. Text Style assigned to that layer. The Automatic
Label for Soffits is blank, but you can specify a
2 custom label.
Check Ignore Room Moldings to prevent the
selected soffit from displaying moldings assigned to For more information about the settings on this
the room that it is placed in. See “Special Applica- panel, see “Label Panel” on page 166.
tions for Soffits” on page 290.
3 A preview of the soffit displays on the right

side of the dialog box. See “Dialog Preview
292
Chapter 27:
Materials
The objects used in Home Designer Suite have a Chapter Contents

variety of 3D properties. These objects - walls, • About Materials
windows, doors, cabinets, roof planes, lot perimeters, • Material Defaults
etc. - can have materials assigned to them so that • Material Painter Tools
they look realistic in 3D views. These materials can • Materials Panel
also be used to generate materials lists that can help • Select Material Dialog
with cost estimations. • Editing Materials
Designing with objects that look correct in 3D and • Creating Materials
calculate properly in the Materials List requires that • Define Material Dialog
you use realistic material definitions and apply them
appropriately to objects in your plan.
Home Designer Suite comes with many materials
that are ready for use. From siding, roofing, flooring,
masonry, tile, and paneling, to grass, water, and
wood materials, Home Designer Suite has materials
for every application, inside and out. If you cannot
find a material that suits your needs, you can
customize the materials provided or create your own.
Redefining only the visual properties of a

material may create unexpected results. For
example, changing the image of a brick material to
represent siding does not cause the material to be
considered as siding during material calculations.
293
About Materials
The materials that are assigned to objects in Home Textures
Designer Suite perform two important roles:
In Home Designer Suite, materials have textures
• They determine what the surfaces of objects look associated with them that determine how they look in
like in 3D views. 3D views.
• They influence how objects are calculated in the
Textures are created using special image files that tile
Materials List. See “Materials Lists” on page 377.
seamlessly when applied to surfaces.
Materials are stored in the Library Browser and can
In 3D views, you can turn the display of textures on
be applied to objects in either of two ways:
and off by selecting 3D> Render View Options>
• Using the Material Painter . Toggle Textures . When textures are turned off,
• In an object’s specification dialog. See “Materials materials are represented using solid colors.
Material Defaults
Most objects in the program have defaults rial Default, all of these objects in the plan can be
dialogs which allow you to set up a variety of affected.
attributes, including materials, before the objects are • The “Cabinet”, “Cabinet Door/Drawer”, “Coun-
created. These defaults dialogs are accessed by tertop”, and “Hardware” Material Defaults can be
selecting Edit> Default Settings. See “Preferences used in your Cabinet Defaults dialogs to ensure
and Default Settings” on page 47. that all cabinets use the same materials.
The Material Defaults dialog serves two purposes. It
allows you to: Material Defaults Dialog
• Set the default materials for objects that do not
Select Edit> Default Settings from the menu,
have a defaults dialog: for example, fireplaces and
select “Materials”, and click the Edit button to open
furnishings from the library.
the Material Defaults dialog.
• Set the initial materials that can then populate a
variety of defaults dialogs. Door, Window, and
Cabinet Defaults are examples of defaults dia-
logs that can draw their material assignments
from the Material Defaults dialog.
Material defaults are dynamic, which means that if
you change a particular default material, all objects
that are set to use that default will automatically
update to use the new material. See “Dynamic
Because material defaults are dynamic, you can use
the Material Defaults dialog to apply a material to
multiple objects that share similar components. For
example: • Select a material category from the scrollable list.
Select multiple line items using the Shift or Ctrl
• The “Room Moldings” Material Default applies key. See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page 81.
to the base, crown, and chair rail moldings that
can be assigned to rooms, as well as to interior • Click the Select Material button or material pre-
door and window casing. If you change this Mate- view box to open the Select Material dialog. See
“Select Material Dialog” on page 297.
294
Material Painter Tools
Material Painter Tools

In a 3D view, select 3D> Material Painter to 5. Note that the name of the material being painted
access the Material Painter Tools, which are displays on the left side of the Status Bar at the
used to apply materials to object surfaces. bottom of the program window. See “The Status
Bar” on page 26.
The Material Painter tools are not available in Glass
House views. See “Glass House” on page 323. • Move your pointer over a surface in the 3D
view. The Status Bar now states both the mate-
rial being painted and the current material on
Material Painter
the target surface.
The Material Painter tool allows you to 6. Click on a surface to apply the selected material
apply a selected material to other objects in to that surface. The material is applied to sur-
3D views. It can be activated in several ways: faces in the model based on the active Material
• Select 3D> Material Painter> Material Painter Painter Mode.
. 7. If either the Component or Object Mode
• Select a material in the Library Browser while a is active, you can continue to click on sur-
3D view is active. faces to apply the selected material. When you
• The Material Painter also becomes active when are finished, select a different tool.
the Material Eyedropper is used.
Material Eyedropper
The Material Painter is similar to the other
Painter tools but has some additional considerations. The Material Eyedropper tool allows you to
See “Painter Tools” on page 97. load the material assigned to an existing
object into the Material Painter and apply that
To use the Material Painter tool material to other objects and is similar to other
Eyedropper tools. See “Eyedropper Tools” on page
1. In a 3D view, select 3D> Material Painter> 97.
Material Painter .
Blend Colors With Materials
2. Choose a material from the Select Material dia-
log. See “Select Material Dialog” on page 297. The Blend Colors With Materials option
• Check Use Default Material at the bottom left allows you to apply a solid color to a surface
of the dialog to apply the default material to displaying a texture and blend the two.
any object that has a defaults dialog. See
Blend Colors With Materials works in all five
“Material Defaults” on page 294.
Material Painter Modes. See “Blending Materials”
3. Select one of the Material Painter Modes from on page 299.
the edit toolbar.
Material Painter Modes
There are five Material Painter Modes, each
4. If you selected a solid color material, choose specifying how broadly or narrowly the selected
whether to use the Blend Colors with material will be applied to surfaces in your plan.
They are similar to other Painter Modes in the
Materials option and click the edit button to program, but rather than modify instances of an
turn this feature on or off. object type, the Material Painter Modes replace
• The mouse pointer displays a paint roller icon instances of a material based on the selected scope.
when Blend Colors With Textures is See “Painter Modes” on page 98.
active. • Material Painter Component Mode is
• The mouse pointer displays a spray can icon unique to the Material Painter Tools. It is the
default mode and applies the selected material to
when the Material Painter is active
a single component on the target object. For most
and Blend Colors With Textures is not. object types, using this tool is the same as
295
opening an object’s specification dialog and • Component and Object Modes only
changing the material of one of its components on paint the section of the wall that defines the room
the MATERIALS panel. See “Materials Panel” on located where you click to apply a new material.
page 296. Sections of the same wall that define other rooms
• Material Painter Object Mode replaces all are unaffected.
instances of a material on the target object. • Room Mode applies the material to all walls
• Material Painter Room Mode replaces all and solid railings that define the room where you
instances of a material in the current room. click provided that they have the same original
surface material as the one being painted. Any
• Material Painter Floor Mode replaces all other objects in the room with that original mate-
instances of a material on the current floor. rial are also affected, but railings are not unless
they are specified as Solid.
• Material Painter Plan Mode replaces all
instances of a material in the entire plan. • Floor and Plan Modes apply the material
to all walls, all railings, and any other objects with
Material Painter and Walls the same original surface material as the one
being painted: either on the current floor, or
Painting walls is an obvious use for the Material throughout the plan.
Painter ; however, it is important to note that the
Material Painter Modes affect walls and rooms Note: Wall materials applied using the Material
somewhat differently than they do other objects: Painter tool are not calculated in the Materials
particularly if a wall defines multiple rooms on the List. See “In the Materials List” on page 118.
side that is being painted.
Materials Panel
The specification dialogs for most objects include a appearance of the preview image on the right side of
MATERIALS panel. Select an object and click the the dialog updates.
Open Object edit button to open the If the selected object is using a material that is
specification dialog for that selection.
missing its texture, a Caution symbol will
On the MATERIALS panel, you can specify material display next to the Materials panel name in the list on
assignments for the components that make up that the left side of the object’s specification dialog. See
object. When a new material is assigned, the “Referenced Files” on page 39.
296
Select Material Dialog
1 The table on the left side of the panel lists the

components of the selected object that can be Note: If the selected object is a wall or a room mod-
assigned unique materials, along with the names of ified using the Material Painter, a component’s
those materials and whether or not the default Material may be described as “No Change”. See
materials are used. Some objects may have only one “Material Painter and Walls” on page 296.
component while more complex objects may have
many. As changes are made to the selected object, 2 The box to the right of the table displays a
components may be added to or removed from this preview of the material assigned to the selected
table. component. If “No Texture” displays in the preview
window, the material has no texture assigned to it; if
• Click on a Component in the table to select it.
Multiple line items can be added to the selection a Caution symbol and the words,“Texture
set by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key. See Missing” display, the texture file could not be found
“Shift and Ctrl Select” on page 81. on the system.
• The selected component’s Material is stated in the • Click Select Material to open the Select Material
list, to the right of the component name. If the dialog. Choose a material and click OK to assign
component is using the default material, the name that material to the selected component. See
will be preceded by the word “Default:”. If it is “Select Material Dialog” on page 297.
using a Material Default, it will be preceded by
the word “Default” followed by the name of an 3 A preview of the selected object displays on the
right side of the panel. To view material
object type. See “Material Defaults” on page 294. textures, select Standard as the View Type. See
Select Material Dialog

The Select Material dialog allows you to select a Panel” on page 296 and “Material Painter Tools” on
material to apply to one or more objects and is page 295.
opened by clicking the Select Material button on the
Most of the time, the Select Material dialog has a
MATERIALS panel of most specification dialogs or by
single panel; however, if a component of a library
using the Material Painter . See “Materials symbol is selected in an object specification dialog,
two panels will be present.
Library Materials Panel

The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel is a modal version
of the Library Browser that lists only materials. See
“The Library Browser” on page 271.
Most of the settings on this panel are also found in
the Select Library Object dialog. See “Select
Library Object Dialog” on page 283.
297
The LIBRARY MATERIALS panel has most of the • A preview of the selected material displays on the
functionality that the Library Browser has, including right. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
the search and preview options.
The OK button is only active when a library item is
• To locate a material, either search using keywords selected. If a library folder or catalog is selected, the
or browse the tree list. See “Searching the OK button cannot be clicked.
• To apply a material to an object, either click on Material Defaults Panel
the material and click OK or double-click on the
The MATERIAL DEFAULTS panel will only be present
item in the Selection Pane.
if the Select Material dialog was accessed via an
• Click the Add New Material button to open object specification dialog where a component of an
the Define Material dialog and create a new mate- inserted library symbol was selected.
rial saved in the user Catalog. See “Define Mate- Rather than apply a specific material to the selected
rial Dialog” on page 300. component, you can dynamically associate it with a
• Check Use default material to apply the default Material Default category. See “Material Defaults”
material to the selected object, if one exists. See on page 294.
“Material Defaults” on page 294.
Editing Materials
Much like objects, materials in Home Designer Suite way will affect any instances of that material in
can be edited so that they better suit your design the current plan only.
needs. There are two approaches to material editing:
Editing the material applied to an object is not the
• Select a material in an unlocked library in the same as applying a different material to that object.
Library Browser, edit it, and your changes will be See “Material Painter Tools” on page 295.
used when you next use the material in any plan.
Changes made in this manner do not affect mate- Library Browser
rials already in use in a plan.
Right-click on a material in an unlocked library and
• Apply a material to an object in a plan and then
edit that applied material using the Adjust Mate- select Open Object from the contextual menu to
open the Define Material dialog for that material. See
rial Definition tool. Changes made in this
“Define Material Dialog” on page 300.
298
Creating Materials
Adjust Material Definition in the Define Material dialog. See “Define Material
The Adjust Material Definition tool is useful
for changing plan materials directly from a 3D Changing a material definition with this tool affects
view. all objects in the current plan that are using that
material but does not affect any materials saved in
Select 3D> Materials> Adjust Material Definition the library or materials used in other plans. See
and then click any surface in a 3D view to “Adding Library Content” on page 279.
modify the material currently assigned to that surface
Creating Materials
Home Designer Suite provides a wide variety of PAINTED:” followed by the name of the solid color
materials - including numerous name brand material material.
catalogs - that are ready to download and use. If you
cannot find a suitable material, you can edit an
existing material or create a new one. See “Editing
Materials” on page 298.
Texture File Management

Note: Adding a material to a plan is not the same
as adding it to the library. If you want a new mate- In order to display a material’s texture, Home
rial to be available for use in other plans, create it Designer Suite needs to be able to locate the image
in the Library Browser. file associated with it on your computer. See
“Referenced Files” on page 39.
In the Library Browser If a texture referenced by a newly created material is
Materials can be created in the Library Browser, not located in either the Home Designer Suite 2021
making them available for use in any plan. See Data folder or the installation folder for the
“Adding Library Content” on page 279. program’s library textures, a copy of the file will be
made in Home Designer Suite 2021 Data\Tex-
In the directory pane of the Library Browser, right- tures\Material Data and the material will reference
click on an unlocked folder and select New> that copy. See “Home Designer Suite Data” on page
Material from the contextual menu. See “Using 32.
the Contextual Menus” on page 273.
Stretch to Fit
The Define Material dialog opens, allowing you to
specify the new material’s attributes. See “Define Some special textures, often used for artwork, stretch
Material Dialog” on page 300. across any surfaces that they are applied to. Materials
that behave this way are specified as Stretch to Fit in
Blending Materials the Define Material dialog.
In 3D views, you can create a new material by To display an artwork texture, first place a wall or
blending a solid color such as a paint color desk frame in your plan. A selection of both are
with a textured material. Select 3D> Material available in the library. See “Placing Library
Painter> Blend Colors With Materials to toggle Objects” on page 281.
this feature on or off. See “Blend Colors With Next, simply apply a material specified as Stretch to
Materials” on page 295. Fit to the center portion of the frame. See “Material
The result is a new material that is saved in the Painter Tools” on page 295.
current plan. For more information about creating and using
Materials created using the Blend Colors With custom materials, see “Materials Tutorial” on page
91 of the User’s Guide.
Materials tool are given the name of the pat-
terned/textured material with the extension “--
299
Define Material Dialog

The Define Material dialog allows you to adjust how • Right-click on material in the Library Browser
materials look in 3D views and can be accessed in a User Catalog and select Open Object from
number of ways: the contextual menu. See “Using the Contextual
• Use the Adjust Material Definition tool. See Menus” on page 273.
“Adjust Material Definition” on page 299. • You can also right-click on the User Catalog and
select New> Material.
1 The Material Name displays here. In this field, Select Color button to specify the color you
you can type a new name if you wish. would like to blend it with. When a new material
Renaming the material does not create a new is created using the Blends Color With Materi-
material: it redefines the existing material in the als tool, the resulting material has this box
current plan. checked. See “Blend Colors With Materials” on
• Click the Solid Color radio button to specify the page 295.
material as a solid color, then click the Select but- • Specify the X and Y Scale for the chosen texture
ton to open the Select Color dialog and select a in inches (mm). If you specify x and y values of
new color. See “Select Color Dialog” on page 77. 30”, the pattern repeats every 30 inches in both
• Click the Texture radio button to specify a texture directions along a surface.
for the material instead of a solid color, then click • Check Stretch to Fit to stretch the texture image
the Select button to open the Select Texture File over the entirety of each surface it is applied to.
dialog, a standard Open File dialog, and specify This is useful when you wish to create a painting
an image saved on your computer to serve as the or photo material to display in a frame. See
texture. “Stretch to Fit” on page 299.
2 The Texture Options are only enabled when
Texture is selected, above. Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch to Fit
• Check Blend Color and Texture to blend the can cause textures to appear distorted if they are
selected texture with a solid color, then click the mapped to a surface using a different aspect ratio
than they were originally created with.
300
Define Material Dialog
• Check Retain Aspect Ratio to maintain the ratio

4 Any Copyright information about the material
between the texture image’s height and width and displays here.
prevent distortion when either its X or Y Scale
value is adjusted. 5 A preview of the selected texture or color
displays in the square pane.
• Rotate Angle - Specify how the texture is rotated
on the surface it is applied to. 6 A preview of the material applied to an object
displays here and updates as changes are made
General Options - to the material definition. Various options allow you
3
to view different aspects of the material’s attributes:
• Brightness controls how bright the material • Zoom and orbit the object in the view.
appears relative to other materials.
• Toggle Color on or off.
• Shininess controls the sheen of the material when
• Select an object shape: Cube, Sphere, Teapot, or
it is rendered with a point or spot light source on
Plane.
it. Shiny materials such as metal will reflect light
when viewed at the right angle.
Manufacturer Panel
• Transparency controls the opacity of the mate-
rial. A transparency value of 0 results in a com- If the selected material is from a Manufacturer
pletely opaque material, while a value of 100 library catalog, the Define Material dialog will have
creates a material that is completely invisible. a second panel: the MANUFACTURER panel, which
lists contact information. See “Manufacturer
• Use the Emissive slider bar or text field to control
Catalogs” on page 276.
how bright a material appears independent of the
lighting in the scene. It can be used to simulate
surfaces that are glowing with their own light,
such as the glass on a light fixture.
301
302
Chapter 28:
3D Views
Little preparation is needed to create a 3D view of a Chapter Contents

model: simply click a button to create an overview or • OpenGL and Hardware
click and drag to create a camera or elevation view. • Camera Defaults Dialogs
To improve the quality of the rendering and create a • 3D View Tools
custom look, you can adjust lighting and edit the • Creating Camera Views
materials used in the plan. You can create Final • Creating Overviews
views that are even more realistic. See “3D • Elevation Views
Rendering” on page 319. • Displaying 3D Views
• Repositioning Cameras
Many objects can be placed and edited in 3D views, • Editing 3D Views
and any camera view or overview can be saved or • Cross Section Slider
even used to record a walkthrough. See “Pictures, • Working in 3D
Images, and Walkthroughs” on page 325. • Saving and Printing 3D Views
• Camera Specification Dialog
• Elevation Camera Specification Dialog
OpenGL and Hardware

Home Designer Suite features an easy to use To take full advantage of these rendering capabilities
rendering engine that makes use of OpenGL of Home Designer Suite, a graphics card or chipset
rendering technology, which has good hardware that supports OpenGL 3.3 on Windows or 4.1 on
support on most video cards. Mac is required. For more information, visit
Camera Defaults Dialogs

There are several defaults dialogs for cameras, The settings in the Camera Defaults dialogs control
which can be accessed by selecting Edit> the initial use of effects that improve the appearance
Default Settings. In the Default Settings dialog, of 3D views.
click the arrow next to “Camera tools”, then select a
The settings in these defaults dialogs are also found
subheading and click the Edit button to open the
in the Camera Specification dialog. See “Camera
defaults dialog associated with your selection.
303
Once a camera is created, its attributes can be

customized. See “Editing 3D Views” on page 311.
Full Camera Defaults

Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using The settings in this dialog are the same as those the
Full Camera Specification dialog.
the Full Camera tool. See “Camera Views” on
page 304.
Note: The Reflections setting in the Full Camera
The settings in this dialog also affect Glass House Defaults is used by walkthroughs created using
Cameras . the Walkthrough Path tool. See “Recording a
Walkthrough” on page 337.
Perspective Full Overview Defaults

Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using The settings in this dialog also affect Perspective
the Perspective Floor Overview tool. See “Full Framing Overviews .
Overview” on page 305.
The settings in this dialog are the same as those in the
Perspective Full and Framing Overview
Specification dialogs.
Doll House View Defaults

Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using The settings in this dialog are the same as those in the
Doll House View Specification dialog.
the Doll House View tool. See “Doll House
View” on page 306.
Elevation Defaults
Specify the initial attributes of cameras created using Although Elevation views do not have a specification
the Elevation tool. See “Elevation Views” on dialog, the settings in this dialog can be found in the
Camera Specification dialog. See “Camera
page 304.
3D View Tools
Select 3D> Create Camera View to display the Overviews
Camera View Tools.
The Full Overview tool creates views of the
entire model including all floors, ceilings, and
Camera Views
the roof.
The Full Camera tool creates multi-floor
The Doll House View tool creates views of
views of the 3D model. It can be used to
the current floor with the ceiling removed and
create interior and exterior perspectives, and is good
all floors beneath it visible.
for displaying cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts,
stairwell openings, and other variation in floor and The Framing Overview tool creates views of
ceiling levels. the framing in the model. See “Framing
Overview” on page 306.
The Glass House Camera tool creates full
camera view of the 3D model using the Glass
House Rendering Technique. See “Glass House” on Elevation Views
page 323. The Wall Elevation tool creates views similar
to the traditional, orthographic views often
used in drafting. See “Elevation Views” on page 306.
304
Creating Camera Views
• When an interior view is created, an elevation of • When an exterior view is created, the entire
a wall on a single floor and in a single room is model is shown.
shown.
Creating Camera Views

All Camera views are created using the same 3. When you release the mouse button, a view gen-
method. erates in a new window.
4. Return to the plan view. A camera symbol now
To create a camera view displays in plan view. See “Working in Multiple
1. In plan view, select the desired camera tool. The Views” on page 61.
mouse pointer displays the camera icon.
Camera Height
2. Click and drag a line to define the view direc-
tion. By default, Cameras are created at a height of 60”
• Where your line begins is the camera’s posi- (1500 mm). Where this height is measured from
tion. depends on the location of the camera:
• The line that you drag defines the direction the • If the camera is inside of a room, it is measured
camera is pointed. from that room’s subfloor.
• The end of the line is the focal point of the • If the camera is outside of a room but inside of
view, the point the camera rotates around. the Terrain Perimeter, it is measured from the ter-
• By default, the field of view is 55°. rain at the location of the camera.
• If the camera is located in neither a room nor
within the Terrain Perimeter, it is measured from
1. Camera the default height of the subfloor for the current
(click)
floor.
2. Line of Sight
(drag) Once created, a camera’s height can be modified in
its Camera Specification dialog See “Camera
3. Focal Point
Field of View (release)
Indicator
Creating Overviews
Overviews generate as soon as you select the tool Full Overview
and are always created at the same angle. The focal
point is always located at the center of the model; Select 3D> Create Camera View>
however, the position of the camera will vary Perspective Full Overview to generate an
depending on the size of the 3D model. The larger or exterior view of the entire model.
more spread out the model, the further away the
camera will be from the focal point so that the entire
model can be seen in the view.
Once generated, an overview window’s title bar
indicates its view type and a camera symbol
representing the overview displays in plan view, The
overview ‘camera’ can be edited much like regular
camera views can. See “Editing 3D Views” on page
311.
305
Doll House View make another floor current before generating the
Doll House View.
Select 3D> Create Camera View> Doll
House View to create a view of the current
Framing Overview
floor with the ceiling removed and all floors beneath
it visible. Select 3D> Create Camera View> Framing
Overview to create a view of the entire model,
Doll House Views are an effective tool for
displaying only framing and the foundation.
illustrating traffic flow and the relationships between
spaces. Select 3D> Create Camera View> Framing
Overview to create a view of the entire model,
displaying only framing and the foundation.
To see a different floor, select Tools> Floor/

Reference Display> Up One Floor or Down
Framing overviews include all floor, wall, and roof
One Floor . You can also return to plan view and framing as well as foundations.
Elevation Views
The Elevation tool produces views in which
all lines and dimensions are their true lengths, 1. Camera
regardless of their distance from the camera. (click) 2. Line of Sight
(drag) 3. Focal Point
When an Elevation camera is created inside of a (release)
room, it is referred to as a Wall Elevation and shows
a single wall defining that room, along with any
objects in the room that are located between that wall
and the camera. The camera does not cut through
walls or show the ceiling, floor, or roof and any
adjacent rooms are not shown.
To create an elevation view Clip Plane Indicators
1. Select the Elevation tool. The pointer 3. Drag in the direction of the Line of Sight to draw
changes to a with crosshairs marking the a camera arrow.
position of the pointer. • Always drag the camera arrow perpendicular to
• Click in the building’s interior to create an ele- the wall to be viewed.
vation of a wall on a single floor and in a single 4. When you release the mouse button, the view
room. generates in a new window.
• Click outside of the building to create a view of If the Line of Sight does not cut through a 3D object,
the entire model. such as a window shown in elevation, the object
2. Click and drag a line in plan view. retains its 3D definition and can be selected, moved,
• A Camera symbol displays where you click. stretched, or otherwise modified in the view. The 3D
model is updated in all views.
306
Displaying 3D Views
Displaying 3D Views
A variety of tools and settings allow you to control display in plan view. See “Floor Up / Floor Down”
the appearance of 3D views. There are also on page 230.
numerous ways to adjust a 3D view’s position, focal
point and field of view. See “Editing 3D Views” on Active cameras can have labels indicating the camera
page 311. number. Camera labels are located on the “Cameras,
Labels” layer. They are numbered sequentially in
The name of the current plan file and the type of each plan in the order they were created.
view displays at the top of each view window in its
title bar. Camera symbols are an on-screen reference: they do
not print unless Print Image is used.
There is no limit to the number of 3D view windows
that you can have open at a given time; bear in mind, In Rendered Views
though, that each window demands use of your
computer’s resources and that you may see poor There are a number of factors that contribute to the
performance if too many views are open. See appearance of rendered 3D views:
“Working in Multiple Views” on page 61.
• Select 3D> Toggle Textures in a 3D view to
turn off the display of material textures. See
Display Options “About Materials” on page 294. Not available in
Which objects display in a 3D view is Glass House Views.
controlled in the Display Options dialog. See
“Display Options Dialog” on page 74. • Select View> Color to toggle between color
and grayscale in 3D views. See “Color On/Off”
Different view types use different layer sets when on page 76.
they are created. See “Layer Sets” on page 75.
• Select 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight to turn
on and off the light source that represents the sun.
In Plan View This feature can be used to simulate day vs. night
Cameras are represented in plan view by symbols exterior views. User defined exterior lights are
that indicate the camera’s position, field of view and turned off in day views and turned on in night
focal point. views. See “Generic Sunlight” on page 321.
• Select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Sunlight to

open the Default Sun Light Specification dialog.
Several other factors can contribute to the overall
quality of a rendered 3D view. See “Rendering Tips”
on page 319.
3D Backdrops
A backdrop is an image, usually of an exterior view,
that displays in the background of 3D views to help
place the model into a realistic setting and add a
sense of perspective. If a backdrop is not specified,
The symbols for Elevation views and Full Overviews Home Designer Suite applies a background color.
display on all floors, while those for Full Cameras See “3D Backdrops” on page 333.
and Doll House Views display only on the floor
where the view was created. See “Creating Camera Delete 3D Surface
The individual surfaces that make up objects
You can move a camera to a different floor by can be temporarily removed from any 3D
clicking the Up One Floor or Down One Floor view by selecting 3D> Delete Surface and then
clicking on a surface. When the pointer is over a
button while the camera view is active. Note that
surface, that surface will become highlighted.
this may affect what is seen in the view as well as its
307
Surfaces removed in one view are removed in all 3D There are several ways to restore all deleted surfaces:
views, but are not permanently removed from the • Select Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/Floors/
model. Continue clicking surfaces to remove them, Ceilings.
then select another tool when you are finished.
• Exit the 3D view and reopen it.
Surfaces in 3D views are composed of multiple
• Generate a new 3D view.
triangles. Hold the Alt key while clicking to delete
one triangular face at a time rather than all triangles
forming a surface. Rebuild 3D
To restore the most recently deleted surface, select Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to regenerate all 3D
3D> Delete Surface or click the toolbar button. data associated with the current plan. All open
views will remain open.
Repositioning Cameras
Once a 3D view is created, there are many ways to See “Camera Specification Dialog” on page 315.
manipulate the camera location and the direction of
Each time you move the camera, the view is updated.
its line of site using the mouse, the keyboard, and the
If you are using either the toolbar or keyboard to
menus.
move the camera, you can hold down the Shift key,
When the keyboard, toolbar buttons, or menu suppressing the redraw of the view until the Shift key
commands are used to move or rotate a camera, the is released and allowing you to move multiple
adjustments occur in regular increments. The size of increments more quickly.
these increments is specified in the Camera
You can also move a camera to a different floor by
clicking the Up One Floor or Down One Floor
• The Incremental Move Distance controls Pan-
ning movement and forward and backward Dolly button while the camera view is active. Note that
movement. this may affect what is seen in the view as well as its
• The Incremental Rotate Angle controls Orbit display in plan view. See “Floor Up / Floor Down”
movement, Tilt movement, and side to side Dolly on page 230.
movement.
Mouse Scroll Wheel and Trackpad

3D views can be panned and zoomed when any tool faster in an exterior view of a large model, slower
is active using the mouse scroll wheel or trackpad in an interior view of a small room. See “Creating
gestures. See “Trackpads” on page 20. Camera Views” on page 305.
The program adjusts the speed of these actions By default, panning and zooming adjusts the position
depending on characteristics of the camera: and direction of the camera. It does not, however,
• Zoom speed depends on how close the camera is adjust the distances at which surfaces are clipped.
to the object located behind the mouse pointer. This means that if you zoom in closely on an object,
When the target object is far from the camera, some of its surfaces may be removed from the view.
zooming is faster; as the camera gets closer to the One way to avoid this is to lower the camera’s Clip
target, zooming slows. Surfaces Within value in the Camera Specification
dialog. See “Camera Specification Dialog” on page
• Panning speed depends on the length of the cam- 315.
era’s Line of Sight. In general, it is likely to be
3Dconnexion® 3D Mice
3Dconnexion®'s 3D mice can be used to navigate in In the Windows version of Home Designer Suite,
all views - including camera views and overviews. pre-programmed view direction hotkeys are
supported on devices with buttons for that purpose.
308
Repositioning Cameras
MacOS™ does not provide mapping support to the Rolling is not supported in Home Designer Suite, In
view direction commands. See Hotkeys. addition, 3D mice cannot be used to move the mouse
pointer. For details about using your 3D Connexion®
You can specify whether navigation is centered about
mouse, refer to its documentation.
the camera or its focal point in the Preferences
dialog. See “Render Panel” on page 54.
Gamepads
In the Windows version of Home Designer Suite, of thumbstick functionality when used in Home
gamepads can be used to navigate in camera views Designer Suite. See “Gamepad Settings Dialog” on
and overviews as well as elevation views. page 59.
To use a gamepad in Home Designer Suite, check You can specify whether navigation is centered about
Enable Gamepad in the Gamepad Settings dialog. the location of the camera or its focal point in the
You can also adjust the sensitivity and other aspects Preferences dialog. See “Render Panel” on page 54.
Move Camera with Mouse

An active camera’s position can be edited Mouse modes. These tools are not available in
using the mouse. Select 3D> Move Camera Elevation views.
With Mouse to access the Move Camera with
Description
Mouse-Orbit Camera lets you move the mouse to rotate the camera around its focal point.
The camera’s position and direction both change.
To continuously rotate the camera around its focal point, click in the 3D view, drag the
mouse, and release the mouse button to “throw” the view. Click again in the view to stop it
from rotating.
To temporarily activate Mouse-Orbit Camera in the Windows version, hold down the Alt
key and then click and drag using the middle mouse button. In the Mac version, hold down
the Option + Shift keys, then drag using the left mouse button. When mouse button and
keys are released, whatever tool was previously in use will still be active.
Mouse-Pan Camera lets you move the camera up, down, left and right using the mouse.
The camera’s position changes, but its direction does not.
Mouse-Dolly Camera lets you move the camera forward and backward by moving mouse
up and down. Move the mouse left or right to rotate the camera side to side.
Mouse-Tilt Camera lets you move the mouse to tilt the camera in any direction while
staying in the same location.
3D Center Camera on Point lets you focus the camera at a particular point in the scene.
This changes the camera’s direction and focal point, but not its position. To use the 3D
Center tool, activate the tool and then click on any object in the scene.
3D Focus on Object lets you focus the camera on a specific object, changing the camera’s
position, direction, focal point, and the length of its line of sight. To use this tool, activate it
and then click on an object in the scene. Alternatively, select an object in the view and click
the Focus on Selected edit button.
309
Move Camera with Keyboard

An active camera’s position can be changed using the • Keyboard-Pan Camera lets you move the cam-
Arrow keys on your keyboard. Select 3D> Move era up, down, right, and left using the keyboard.
Camera with Keyboard to access the Move Camera The camera’s position changes, but its direction
with Keyboard modes. These modes are not does not.
available in Elevation views. • Keyboard-Dolly Camera lets you move the
These modes use the Incremental Move Distance camera forward and back using the Up and Down
and Incremental Rotate Angle set in the active 3D Arrow keys, and rotate side to side using the Left
view’s Camera Specification dialog. and Right keys.
• Keyboard-Orbit Camera lets you use the key- • Keyboard-Tilt Camera lets you use the Arrow
board to rotate the camera around the focal point. keys to tilt the camera up, down, or side to side to
The camera’s position and direction both change. change the focal point. The camera’s direction
changes, but its position does not.
Move Camera Tools

Select 3D> Move Camera in a 3D view to These tools use the Incremental Move Distance set
access these tools. These tools change the in the active 3D view’s Camera Specification
active camera’s position, but not its direction and are dialog.
not available in Elevation views.
Description
Move Camera Forward moves the camera and its focal point forward.
Move Camera Back moves the camera and the focal point back.
Move Camera Left moves the camera and the focal point to the left in a line perpendicular
to the line of sight.
Move Camera Right moves the camera and the focal point to the right in a line
perpendicular to the line of sight.
Move Camera Up moves the camera and the focal point up.
Move Camera Down moves the camera and the focal point down.
Orbit Camera Tools

Select 3D> Orbit Camera in a 3D view to Rotate Angle set in the active view’s Camera
access these tools. Orbiting the camera rotates Specification dialog.
it about the focal point using the Incremental
These tools are not available in Cross Section/
Elevation views.
310
Editing 3D Views
Description
Move Camera In moves the camera closer to the focal point along the line of sight. The
camera cannot move past the focal point using this tool.
Move Camera Out moves the camera away from the focal point along the line of sight.
Orbit Camera Upward rotates the camera up about the focal point. The camera cannot
rotate past a vertical line looking straight down on the focal point.
Orbit Camera Downward rotates the camera down about the focal point. The camera
cannot rotate past a vertical line looking straight up at the focal point.
Orbit Camera Left rotates the camera to the left about the focal point.
Orbit Camera Right rotates the camera to the right about the focal point.
Tilt Camera Tools

Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access these tools. dialog and is similar to tilting your head up and down
Tilting keeps the camera in one place and or turning it side-to-side.
pivots the camera about its vertical or horizontal
These tools are not available in Elevation views.
axis. This movement uses the Incremental Rotate
Angle set in the active view’s Camera Specification
Description
Tilt Camera Upward tilts the camera up while keeping it in the same location. The camera
cannot tilt beyond the vertical position.
Tilt Camera Downward tilts the camera down while keeping it in the same location. The
camera cannot tilt beyond the vertical position.
Turn Camera Left turns the camera to the left while staying in the same location.
Turn Camera Right turns the camera to the right while staying in the same location.
Editing 3D Views
In addition to its position and direction, there are appearance, and other attributes. See “Camera
other ways to modify a 3D view. Specification Dialog” on page 315.
In the Specification Dialog Tile a 3D view and plan view and use the
camera movement tools to see how they
You can make adjustments to a camera view
affect the camera. See “Tiling Views” on page 62.
or overview in the Camera Specification
dialog. This dialog is particularly helpful for making
fine adjustments to the camera’s position,
311
Using the Edit Tools the contextual menu. See “Contextual Menus” on
page 23.
A camera symbol or symbols selected in plan view
can be edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
on the edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page
23.
The Copy/Paste edit tool is available for a

selected camera or overview. It is not, however,
available for Elevation views. See “Copying and
These options are a selection of tools and toggles
Pasting Objects” on page 70.
specific to the current view.
Up One Floor/Down One Floor
Return to plan view without closing the 3D view. See
You can move a camera to a different floor. While
“Working in Multiple Views” on page 61.
the camera view is active, select Tools> Floor/
Using the Select Objects tool, select the camera Reference Display> Up One Floor or Down
object. When a camera symbol is selected it displays
One Floor . Note that this may affect what is seen
four edit handles.
in the view as well as its display in plan view. See “In
Plan View” on page 307.
Line of Sight The position and movement of a camera is affected
by its location within the model. When the camera is
outside a building, its height is relative to the terrain
Move and follows the terrain as it is moved. When inside a
building, the camera height is relative to the floor of
the room it is drawn in.
Focal Point If the camera is on an upper floor and you move the
camera outside of the building, the camera remains at
Rotate
the same height relative to the floor it was created on.
• Drag the Line of Sight handle to change the cam-
era angle without moving the focal point. Zooming
• Drag the Move handle to relocate the camera The Zoom Tools are available in all 3D views.
while maintaining its relative angle. See “Zoom Tools” on page 63.
• Drag the Focal Point handle to reposition the
Selecting Window> Zoom In , Zoom Out or
focal point and change the line of sight without
moving the camera. Fill Window does not change the camera’s
• Drag the Rotate handle to rotate the camera’s location or field of view. Instead, the extents of the
line of sight about its center. view are expanded or cropped.
The 3D view corresponding to the camera symbol Field of View

reflects changes made to the symbol in plan view.
The Field of View refers to a camera’s field of
Multiple camera symbols can be selected; however, vision. A wider field of view makes the focal point
their editing options are limited to being moved, appear further away, as more of the image is included
rotated, and deleted. in the same view window.
Using the Contextual Menu In plan view, the angled lines of a camera symbol
indicate its field of view.
In a 3D view, right-click in an empty space in which
the backdrop or background color displays to access
312
Cross Section Slider
A camera’s field of view can be adjusted in the

FOV Indicators Camera Specification dialog. See “Camera
Cross Section Slider

Select 3D> Cross Section Slider when a
camera view or overview is active to open the
Cross Section Slider dialog.
To use the Cross Section Slider • Position the Cutting Plane with accuracy using
1. Check the box beside a cross section cutting the text field to the right of the slider.
plane to select it and make its Position slider and 3. Repeat steps 1-3 to use additional cutting planes
text box active. if you wish.
2. Move the Position slider to adjust the position of 4. Click OK to close the dialog. If the active cam-
the cutting plane. era is saved, its Cross Section Slider settings will
also be retained. See “Saving 3D Views” on
• The cutting plane Position is measured from
page 314.
the edge of the model that is cut first by the
selected cutting plane.
Working in 3D
A variety of tools are available in 3D views that appropriate tool and click in the 3D view. You can
allow you to edit your 3D model. Y then edit the object’s size and placement.
When created in 3D, most objects must be placed
Creating Objects in 3D Views against a wall, on a floor platform, or within the
You can place windows, doors, and most library Terrain Perimeter.
objects directly into 3D views. To do this, select the
313
You can also click and drag to draw some objects Temporary dimension lines display when many
such as terrain features and road, in camera views objects are selected to help you resize the object and
and overviews views. determine its height.
Because Elevation views are orthogonal and display
Selecting and Editing Objects objects at their actual dimensions, they are
in 3D Views sometimes more suitable for editing objects than
Most objects can be selected and edited in 3D views. camera views or overviews. See “Elevation Views”
on page 306.
Select Edit> Select Objects and click on the
surface of an object to select it. Once selected, When several 3D views are open, changes made in
objects can be edited using their edit handles, buttons the plan automatically rebuild the model in all views.
on the edit toolbar, and the object’s specification Because of this, it is typically faster to make changes
dialog. See “Editing Objects” on page 79. to your plan with as few windows open as possible.
When you select an object, edit handles and a handle Editing Materials in 3D Views
surface display. The handle surface is a rectangle
around the perimeter of the object that indicates the Select 3D> Materials> Adjust Material
overall height and width of the selected surface. The Definition, then click on a surface in the 3D
edit handles that display depend on the type of object view to open the Define Material dialog for that
selected. Walls, for example, display two resize edit material. See “Adjust Material Definition” on page
handles when selected while a slab displays ten 299.
handles, allowing you to move, resize and reshape it.
Select 3D> Material Painter to apply
materials to surfaces in the view using the
Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room is Material Painter Tools. See “Material Painter Tools”
adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or Ceiling on page 295.
Height of the entire floor is changed. See “Floor
and Room Defaults” on page 132. Select 3D> Material Painter> Material
Eyedropper to apply the material on a
All moving or resizing is in the plane of the handle surface in the view to other surfaces in the view. See
surface. You cannot move an object directly towards “Material Eyedropper” on page 295.
or away from the camera, for example, because that
surface plane cannot be seen in the view. Rebuild 3D
By default, object movement is restricted to one inch As changes are made to your plan, a 3D view
or 10 mm increments. See “Grid Snaps” on page 68. automatically updates to reflect any changes
Unrestricted positioning can also be enabled by visible in the view. If you find that a view is not
holding down the Ctrl key while moving or resizing updating as expected, select 3D> Rebuild 3D to
an object. See “Unrestricted Movement” on page 93. rebuild the entire 3D model.
Saving and Printing 3D Views

3D camera views, overviews and Elevation views and Glass House settings. See “Cross Section Slider”
can be saved with the plan in which they are created, on page 313, “Adjust Sunlight Dialog” on page 322,
exported and saved as image files, as well as printed. “Shadows” on page 319, and “Rendering
Techniques” on page 323.
Saving 3D Views
Activating Saved Views
Select 3D> Save Active Camera to save the
current camera in the plan. You can also save There are three ways to open a saved 3D view:
a camera view by checking the Saved box in the • Select the camera symbol in plan view and click
Camera Specification dialog. See “Camera
Specification Dialog” on page 315. the Open View edit button.
• Double-click the camera symbol using the Select
Saved cameras can be closed and re-opened for later
use, and retain their Cross Section Slider, Shadows, Objects tool.
314
Camera Specification Dialog
• Right-click on it and select Open View from the Printing 3D Views

contextual menu.
Since 3D views are created using pixels
Unsaved cameras that are open in another view instead of lines, File> Print> Print Image
window can also be activated using the Open View must be used when printing. Print Image is a special
edit button. Home Designer Suite function that prints the screen
in picture format. The entire view prints, including
If you open a saved camera view and then modify its images such as plants and textures.
location or direction using any of the tools available
in that view, the program will confirm whether you The quality of your print image is affected by your
want to re-save the camera using these new settings current window size and screen resolution. To
when you close it. See “Repositioning Cameras” on maximize the quality of your printed image, generate
page 308. it in full screen size and use the maximum screen
resolution.
Exporting 3D Views
Closing 3D Views
All 3D views can be exported and saved as
.bmp, .jpg, .png, or .tif files. Select File> Although you can have any number of 3D views
Export> Picture to save the current screen image as open at a time, to conserve resources on your
an image file. See “To export a picture” on page 329. computer it is a good idea to close views when you
no longer need them. There are a number of different
Once saved, a picture can be opened and converted ways to do this. See “Closing Views and Files” on
into many other formats using a graphics program. page 65.

The Camera Specification dialog can be The selected view’s specific type is indicated in the
accessed in plan view by selecting one or dialog’s title bar: the specification dialog for a Full
more camera symbols and clicking the Open Object Camera , for example, is named Full Camera
edit button. See “In Plan View” on page 307. Specification.
This dialog can also be accessed while a camera view The settings in this dialog are also found in the Full
or overview is active by selecting 3D> Edit Active Camera and all Overview Defaults dialogs. See
Camera . “Camera Defaults Dialogs” on page 303.
315
Camera Panel
1 General - the selected camera is not in motion. See “Edge

Smoothing” on page 320.
• Specify the Name that displays in the camera • Select the amount of Ambient Occlusion in the
label in plan view. view using the slider bar or text field. Ambient
• Check Show Shadows to turn on shadows in the Occlusion allows variation in the strength of the
selected camera view. When unchecked, shadows ambient light in Standard renderings. It is more
are not generated. See “Shadows” on page 319. realistic than uniform ambient light, but can take
longer to render. See “Ambient Lighting and
• Check Ray Casted Sun Shadows for higher Occlusion” on page 321.
quality shadows cast by sun light. Ray Casted
Sun Shadows take longer to generate than regular 2 The Lighting settings control which and how
shadows and only refresh when the camera is not many light sources are used in the current view.
moving. See “Lighting Modes” on page 322.
• Check Reflections to turn on reflections in the • Select Automatic, then specify the Maximum
selected camera view. When unchecked, reflec- Number of lights that can be used in the current
tions are not generated. See “Reflections” on camera view.
page 320. • Select Use Light Settings to use all light sources
• Light Bloom occurs around areas of intense illu- in the entire plan provided that they are turned
mination and looks as though the light is ‘bleed- On .
ing’ beyond the edges of the light source. It adds
realism to the view but can take longer to render. 3 The Positioning settings determine the position
Only affects Standard and Watercolor renderings. and orientation of the camera. See
See “Rendering Techniques” on page 323. “Repositioning Cameras” on page 308.
• Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to apply • The Height Above Floor defines the height that
high quality edge smoothing to edge lines when the camera is above the floor level for the current
floor. See “Camera Height” on page 305.
316
• The Tilt Angle determines the vertical angle that

4 Options -
the camera is tilted. The camera maintains its
focal point and position in plan view, but if the • Clip Surfaces Within - Objects located within
camera is tilted, the focal point is above or below this distance from the camera do not display in
the current camera height. the view. Decrease this value to display objects
• The Incremental Move Distance controls how located close to the camera; increase it to
far the camera moves each time you Pan in any improve the appearance of some surfaces in
direction or Dolly forwards or backward using Overview cameras with very large extents.
the keyboard, toolbar buttons, or menu. For inte- • Check Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls to
rior views a small number is good, but for exte- suppress the display of any exterior walls that
rior you may want a larger increment. face the camera. Interior walls set as Attic walls
• The Incremental Rotate Angle defines how are also suppressed. This setting only has an
many degrees the camera rotates each time you effect when the selected camera’s position is on
Tilt, Orbit, or Dolly side to side using the key- the exterior of a structure and can also has an
board, toolbar buttons, or menu. A setting of 90° associated toggle. See “Hide Camera-Facing
would make one full rotation in four moves. Exterior Walls” on page 320.
• The Field of View defines the camera’s field of
vision in angular degrees. See “Field of View” on
page 312.
3D Backdrop Panel
The settings on the 3D Backdrop panel allow you to your model in the selected 3D view. See “3D
specify a backdrop image or color to display behind Backdrops” on page 333.
1 Specify Backdrop -A preview of the selected • Click Select Backdrop to choose a backdrop
backdrop image is shown here. A backdrop image from the library. See “Select Library
cannot be selected or removed when Use Generated Object Dialog” on page 283.
Sky is checked, below. • Click Remove Backdrop to use a solid color
• Backdrop Name - The selected backdrop instead of a backdrop image in all 3D views, then
image’s name displays for reference. specify the color below.
• Click the Color bar to select the Background
Color that displays when a backdrop image is not
317
being used. See “Select Color Dialog” on page

77. Note: If Use Generated Sky is in use as the back-
drop in the current view and Sun Follows Camera
The Background Color for plan views is set in the is checked, the Generated Sky will not update if
Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel” on page 51. the camera is moved.
2 Backdrop Options - • Specify a Haze Level of Low, Medium, or High.

This determines the degree to which light in the
• Check Use Generated Sky to simulate a daytime sky backdrop appears to be scattered by particles
sky backdrop. When checked, Spherical Pan- in the air.
oramic Backdrop will also be checked and a pre-
• Specify a Horizon Level using the text field or
view of the Generated Sky will display above.
slider bar. The default value of 44% works well
in most situations.
Elevation Camera Specification Dialog

The Elevation Camera and Wall Elevation This dialog can also be accessed while an elevation
Camera Specification dialogs can be camera view is active by selecting 3D> Edit Active
accessed in plan view by selecting an elevation Camera .
camera symbol and clicking the Open Object edit
button. See “In Plan View” on page 307. The settings in this dialog are also found in the
Elevation Defaults dialog. See “Camera Defaults
Dialogs” on page 303.
Camera Panel
The Camera Name displays in plan view. • Check Ignore Railings and Invisible Walls to
• Check Show Shadows to turn on shadows in the ignore the room definition created by these types
selected camera view. When unchecked, shadows of walls in a selected interior Wall Elevation
are not generated. See “Shadows” on page 319. view. When this is unchecked, interior Wall Ele-
vation views only recognize room definition cre-
• Check Ray Casted Sun Shadows for higher ated by regular walls. See “Elevation Views” on
quality shadows cast by sun light. Ray Casted page 306.
Sun Shadows take longer to generate than regular
shadows and only refresh when the camera is not
Backdrop Panel
moving.
• Check Edge Smoothing When Idle to apply The settings on the BACKDROP panel allow you to
high quality smoothing to edge and pattern lines specify a backdrop image or color to display behind
when the camera is not in motion. See “Edge your model in the selected 3D view. See “3D
Smoothing” on page 320. Backdrop Panel” on page 317.
318
Chapter 29:
3D Rendering
There are a variety of tools available to create 3D Chapter Contents

views of a model: simply click a button to create an • Rendering Tips
overview, or click and drag to create a camera or
• Lighting
elevation view. See “3D Views” on page 303.
• Displaying Lights
To improve the quality of the rendering and create a • Lighting Modes
custom look, you can adjust lighting, edit the • Adjust Sunlight Dialog
materials used in the plan, choose from several • Rendering Techniques
rendering techniques and fine-tune 3D view quality • Rendering Technique Options
settings.
Rendering Tips
There are a variety of factors which affect the direction and color can have a large impact on image
appearance and quality of rendered 3D views. You quality. See “Lighting” on page 320.
can use these tools and settings to achieve renderings
that meet your needs. Shadows
• Lighting Like lighting, shadows have an important
• Shadows effect on image quality. Shadows can be
• Reflections generated in any type of camera view using any
Rendering Technique aside from Glass House. See
• Material Definitions “Rendering Techniques” on page 323.
• Images
When shadows are enabled and the sun is shining
• Backdrops directly at a window, its light can shine through the
• Edge Smoothing window and into an interior room. These shadows
use Ray Casted Sun Shadows by default, but this
• Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls
option can be unchecked if it slows performance in
3D views. See “Generic Sunlight” on page 321.
Lighting
Shadows are enabled in Full Camera views by
Lighting is extremely important in most 3D default. You can, however, check or uncheck Show
renderings. Lighting controls the visibility of objects Shadows and Ray Casted Sun Shadows in the
in a view, affects the appearance of surfaces, and defaults dialog for any camera tool or in the Camera
influences the appearances of colors and textures on Specification dialog. In addition, you can select 3D>
those surfaces. Even small changes to light intensity,
319
Camera View Options> Toggle Shadows in Backdrops

any camera view. See “Camera Panel” on page 316. A backdrop is an image, usually of an exterior view,
that displays in the background of 3D views to help
Reflections place the model into a realistic setting and add a
Reflections are another aspect of lighting that sense of perspective. If a backdrop is not specified,
can increase a 3D view’s realism. When a flat Home Designer Suite applies a background color.
surface is assigned a Mirror material, it can display See “3D Backdrops” on page 333.
the reflections of other objects in the scene.
Edge Smoothing
Note that a Mirror surface cannot display the
reflection of another mirror. When one mirror can be Angled surface edges will sometimes display on
seen in another, its material is shown rather than a screen as jagged or stair-stepped. Edge Smoothing
reflection. softens this effect, producing cleaner lines.
Reflections only generate in Perspective 3D views You can specify how much Hardware Edge
using the Standard Rendering Technique. They can Smoothing occurs in 3D views in the Preferences
slow down 3D view generation and responsiveness dialog. Hardware Edge Smoothing is set to “High”
considerably. by default; however, if 3D views render slowly on
your system, you can try using a lower setting. See
Reflections can be toggled on or off in a camera view “Render Panel” on page 54.
by selecting 3D> Camera View Options> Toggle
Even higher quality Edge Smoothing can be
Reflections as well as in the Camera produced by checking Edge Smoothing When Idle
Specification dialog. See “Camera Specification in the Camera Specification dialog. This setting
Dialog” on page 315. does not affect a camera while its position or
orientation are being changed, but applies additional
Material Definitions smoothing to edge lines when the camera is not in
Textures are graphic files that represent contoured motion. See “Camera Specification Dialog” on page
surfaces of objects such as carpet, bricks, tile, and 315.
wood in 3D views. Textures are assigned to materials This high quality Edge Smoothing option is view-
which in turn are assigned to objects. See “Textures” specific and can also be toggled on or off by
on page 294. selecting 3D> Camera View Options> Toggle Edge
The display of materials in 3D views is controlled by Smoothing When Idle .
settings in the Define Material dialog. See “Define
Material Dialog” on page 300. Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls
Brightness, shininess and transparency control how Occasionally, it can be very helpful to view
light sources affect the display of surfaces in 3D the interior of a structure from an exterior
views. See “Lighting” on page 320. view. To achieve this, create an exterior camera view
If no texture is selected for a material or if the display or overview and select 3D> Camera View Options>
of textures is turned off, affected surfaces are a solid Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls. This option
color instead. is view-specific and can also be set in the Camera
Specification dialog. See “Camera Panel” on page
Images 316.
Images are very important for the appearance of 3D Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls is also an
views. Images are picture files that represent option for Walkthrough Paths. See “Walkthrough
individual objects such as trees, flowers, and Options Dialog” on page 337.
vehicles. See “Placing Images” on page 326.
Lighting
Lighting controls the visibility of objects in 3D influences the appearances of colors and textures on
views, affects the appearance of surfaces, and those surfaces.
320
Displaying Lights
By default, a maximum of eight lights can display in Generic Sunlight

a given camera view or overview. If more than eight
are present, those with the highest intensity located When you create a 3D view, the program creates a
in the same room as the camera are rendered. Lights Generic Sun light source.
in adjacent rooms may also be rendered, with the The Generic Sun’s intensity, color, and angle can be
highest intensity lights rendered first. modified in the Adjust Sunlight dialog. In addition,
You can specify a different Maximum Lights number you can specify that it follow the camera in 3D views
in the Camera Specification dialog. See “Camera so surfaces are always illuminated. See “Adjust
Panel” on page 316. Sunlight Dialog” on page 322.
You can also manually turn on and off individual When standard shadows are enabled, sunlight can
lights in order to get the desired lighting effects. See shine through windows into interior rooms. See
“Displaying Lights” on page 321. “Shadows” on page 319.
When the camera is outside a building, the program Select 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight turn the
normally uses sunlight for lighting calculations and Generic Sun on or off to simulate either daytime or
turns off all other light sources. You can turn the nighttime exterior lighting.
sunlight off and use all the other exterior lights to
simulate nighttime views. Ambient Lighting and Occlusion
There are four types of light sources in Standard 3D Ambient lighting simulates the way light bounces
views: around a scene, producing a basic level of uniform
• Default Interior Light illumination on all surfaces. It is used in camera
views and overviews using the Standard Rendering
• Light Fixtures
Technique.
• Generic Sunlight
There are three types of ambient light in Home
• Ambient Lighting and Occlusion Designer Suite:
Default Interior Light • Interior Ambient controls the ambient light in

interior views.
If you create a Standard interior in a room where no • Daytime Ambient controls the ambient light in
lights have been placed, the program creates a
Default Light source within that room. The Default exterior views when Toggle Sunlight is on.
interior light acts like a central point light source but • Nighttime Ambient controls the ambient light in
cannot be selected or edited. exterior rendered views when Toggle Sunlight
Because the Default Light cannot be adjusted, if you is off.
want to control the light in an interior 3D view, you
You can control the brightness of each in the
must add lights to the rooms in your plan by placing
Rendering Technique Options dialog. See
light fixtures and Added Lights
“Standard Panel” on page 323.
Light Fixtures Ambient occlusion adds shading to surfaces near
corners which, because of their location, reflect less
An electric symbol that represents a Light Fixture light compared to other surfaces. Too little ambient
has a light source associated with it. When a light is occlusion can result in a view having a flat
placed in a room, it will be used as a light source in appearance. You can specify the amount of Ambient
3D views instead of the Default Light. In large Occlusion to use in Standard renderings in the
rooms, more than one light fixture may be needed for Camera Specification dialogs. See “Camera Panel”
sufficient light. on page 316.
Displaying Lights
The display of light fixtures in floor plan and dialog. Light fixtures are placed on the “Electrical”
3D views is controlled in the Display Options layer. See “Display Options Dialog” on page 74.
321
In addition, they can serve as sources of light in In plan view, light fixtures can display labels when
rendered 3D views. They can be turned on and off, as the “Electrical, Labels”layer is turned on.
well.
Sunlight will shine through windows into interior
To turn one or more light fixtures on or off in 3D rooms when shadows are enabled. See “Shadows” on
views, select them and click the Turn Light(s) Off page 319.
in 3D or Turn Light(s) On in 3D edit
button.
Lighting Modes
By default, cameras use an Automatic Lighting • Regardless of their intensity or proximity to the
Mode that allows a set number of lights to illuminate camera, lights on floors above the camera are not
the view. This number can be specified in the used in Floor Overviews. See “3D View Tools”
Camera Specification dialog. See “Camera Panel” on page 304.
on page 316. The Automatic Lighting Mode is useful because it is
If more than the set number of lights are present, an easy way to produce reasonable lighting without
lights are prioritized in this order: taxing your video memory.
• Lights in the same room as the camera before An alternative to the Automatic Lighting Mode is the
those in different rooms. Use Light Settings option. When Use Light
Settings is selected, all lights in the current plan that
• Higher intensity lights before lower intensity
are turned On are used in 3D views. This gives you
lights.
control over which lights are used as light sources
• Lights closer to the camera before those further but may require more resources on your system.
away.
Adjust Sunlight Dialog

The Adjust Sunlight dialog allows you to achieve special lighting effects, but may alter the
control the intensity, direction and color of the appearance of your material colors and textures.
Generic Sun light source in the currently active 3D • Check Sun Follows Camera to adjust the posi-
view. See “Generic Sunlight” on page 321. tion of the Generic Sun so that it is always behind
To open this dialog, select 3D> Lighting> Adjust the camera, illuminating surfaces in the view.
When this is checked, the Tilt and Direction
Sunlight while a 3D view is active.
Angle settings that follow are disabled.
• Specify the Tilt Angle, which is the angle of the
sunlight with respect to the horizon. A value of
90° means that the light points straight up, while
a value of -90° means that the light points straight
down. 0° is parallel to the horizon.
• Specify the Direction Angle, which is the direc-
tion that the sunlight points toward. 0° is mea-
sured horizontally on screen, pointing to the
right. Positive values rotate in a counter-clock-
wise direction from there, while negative values
rotate clockwise.
• Use the Intensity slider bar or text field to con- • Click the Restore Initial Settings button to
trol how bright the Generic Sun light appears. restore the original Generic Sun settings.
• Click the Color bar to define the color of the light By default, the Generic Sun light color is pure white,
being modeled. Colored sunlight may be used to which has the least effect on the appearance of
material colors and textures. See “Materials” on page
322
Rendering Techniques
293.
Rendering Techniques
Any camera view, elevation view, or overview In plan view, the camera symbol for a
can be generated using either of two view using the Standard technique
Rendering Techniques. When a 3D view is active, displays an S in its center. See
select 3D> Rendering Techniques to access these “Displaying 3D Views” on page 307.
tools.
Glass House
Standard Rendering
Glass House rendering uses different shades of a
Standard rendering is a photo-realistic single color to display the model with surface edge
technique that represents materials using lines and semi-transparent surfaces. Lighting and
textures, models lighting, and can also display shadows are not modeled, and materials are not
shadows. represented, so textures are not used.
In plan view, the camera symbol for a

view using the Glass House technique
displays a G in its center.
Rendering Technique Options

The settings in the Rendering Technique options active on the right. When this dialog is first
Options dialog allow you to control the opened, the technique currently used by the view is
specific effects of each rendering technique on an selected.
active 3D view. To access this dialog, create a
As changes are made in the Rendering Technique
camera view or overview and select 3D> Rendering
Options dialog, the 3D view automatically updates
Techniques> Technique Options.
to reflect those changes.
In the Rendering Technique Options dialog, select
a technique from the list on the left to make its
Standard Panel
The active 3D view immediately updates to There are a variety of other tools that affect the
reflect any changes made to the Rendering appearance of Standard rendered views, as well. See
Technique Options for Standard renderings. “Displaying 3D Views” on page 307.
323
Specify the amount of Ambient light to use in • Nighttime Ambient affects nighttime exterior
different situations in Standard renderings. See views.
“Ambient Lighting and Occlusion” on page 321. • When Use Backdrop is checked, the backdrop
• Interior Ambient affects interior views. image specified for this view is used. When
• Daytime Ambient affects exterior views. unchecked, the specified Backdrop Color is used
instead. See “3D Backdrops” on page 333.
Glass House Panel

The active 3D view immediately updates to Technique Options settings for Glass House
reflect any changes made to the Rendering renderings.
• Click the Color bar to select a color for the semi- • When Use Backdrop is checked, the backdrop
transparent surfaces and lines in a Glass House image specified for this view is used. When
view. See “Select Color Dialog” on page 77. unchecked, the specified Backdrop Color is used
• Specify the Transparency of the surfaces in instead. See “3D Backdrops” on page 333.
Glass House view. For example, to create a wire- • Click Reset to Defaults to restore the default set-
frame line drawing of your structure, turn trans- tings used when the Glass House technique was
parency to full and minimize line thickness. first enabled.
• Specify the Line Thickness of surface lines in
Glass House view.
324
Chapter 30:
Pictures, Images, and

Walkthroughs
Home Designer Suite uses picture files in a variety of Chapter Contents

ways to enhance your drawings. • Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects
The Library Browser contains images of real world • Images
objects like plants and vehicles that can display in 3D • Displaying Images
views. • Editing Images
• Image Specification Dialog
Picture files can also be imported into Home • Pictures
Designer Suite and shown in most views. • Picture File Box Specification Dialog
You can save any view using a variety of picture file • Metafiles
formats. In addition, Home Designer Suite allows • Metafile Box Specification Dialog
you to create virtual tour videos that can be played • PDF Files
back later and shared with others. • PDF Box Specification Dialog
• Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
• Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
• 3D Backdrops
• Backdrop Specification Dialog
• Walkthrough Paths
• Recording a Walkthrough
325
Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects

In common computer language, picture files, pictures dimensional only and do not display in camera views
and images are more or less synonymous. In the or overviews.
Home Designer Suite environment, however, there
An Image object is also based on a picture file, but it
are some notable differences between these terms.
does display in both 2D and 3D views. Images have
In Home Designer Suite, a two dimensional image 3D width and height data associated with them, as
file such as a .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png is referred to as well as a 2D symbol which displays in plan view.
a picture file or an image file. Examples of these files
Picture files have additional uses in Home Designer
are saved on most computers and can be opened in a
Suite, as well:
variety of applications.
• Backdrops are picture files that display behind
A Picture, on the other hand, is a file that has been 3D views. See “3D Backdrops” on page 333.
imported into the program. Pictures can be imported
into plan view and Elevation views. They are two- • Textures are picture files that realistically repre-
sent materials in 3D views. See “About Materi-
als” on page 294.
Images
Images add realistic detail to 3D views without To create an Image in plan view
adding many surfaces to the model. For example, a
tree image with a single surface can be used instead 1. In plan view, select Build> Image> Create
of a tree symbol with thousands, dramatically Image or Billboard Image to open the
improving realism without compromising drawing Image Specification dialog. See “Image Speci-
time. fication Dialog” on page 328.
There are two types of Images in Home Designer 2. On the IMAGE panel:
Suite: • Click the Browse button to select a picture file
on your computer or enter the path to a valid pic-
• Images rotate so that they always face the ture file in the Image File field. If the file is not
camera in 3D views. located in the Home Designer Suite 2021 Data
• Billboard Images do not rotate to face the folder, a copy of the file will be created at Home
camera. An example of when this may be useful Designer Suite 2021 Data\Images\-My Images
is an image of a trellis, which might look awk- and the Image object will reference that copy.
ward when facing a camera from a side view. See “Home Designer Suite Data” on page 32.
• Select a 2D Plan Symbol from the drop-down
Placing Images list or click the Library button and select a sym-
bol from the library. The selected symbol repre-
A selection of Images are available in the sents the image in plan view. See “Image Panel”
Library Browser. Select one and click in a on page 328.
plan view, camera view or overview to place it. See • Specify the Size and Position of the image.
“Placing Library Objects” on page 281.
3. Specify transparency information on the TRANS-
PARENCY panel.
Creating Images
4. Click OK to close the Image Specification dia-
Custom Images can be added to the User log.
Catalog in the library, as well as created in
plan files. Home Designer Suite can use any image 5. Click to place the new Image in plan view.
with a *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif, or *.tif extension.
To create an image in the Library Browser
Generally, .png files work best as Images because
this format has good compression and allows for the 1. In the Library Browser, right-click on an
Image to contain transparency information. unlocked folder.
326
Displaying Images
2. Select New> Image from the contextual menu Using Paste Image
to open the Image Specification dialog.
You can also import an image by first copying
3. Browse to the image file you want to add and it to the system clipboard, then navigating to a
select your other options. See “Image Home Designer Suite window and selecting Edit>
Specification Dialog” on page 328. Paste> Paste from the menu. See “Paste Special” on
4. Once created, the image is listed in the library page 71.
folder that you right-clicked on. Size and other
data is saved.
Displaying Images
The display of images in floor plan and 3D In 3D Views
views is controlled in the Display Options
dialog. See “Layer Attributes” on page 74. The actual picture associated with an image object
can be seen in 3D views, as can any transparency
Images are placed on the “Images” layer. data associated it. See “Image Specification Dialog”
on page 328.
In Plan View
Images can be set to either rotate so that they always
In plan view, most images are represented by an face the camera or remain stationary, like billboards.
Image symbol. You can specify a different See “Images” on page 326.
symbol to represent an image if you wish. See
“Image Specification Dialog” on page 328.
Editing Images
Images can be selected in 2D and 3D views and When an image is resized using the edit handle, its
edited using the edit handles, edit tools and the aspect ratio is retained and 2D symbol resizes
Image Specification dialog. proportionally.
Using the Mouse Using the Edit Toolbar

In plan view, a selected image can be rotated, moved, A selected image or images can be edited in a variety
and resized. In 3D views, a selected image only has of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. See
two edit handles: the circular Resize handle and “The Edit Toolbar” on page 23.
square Move handle.
327
Image Specification Dialog

Select an image and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Image Specification
dialog.
Image Panel
1 General information about the selected Image outside of this dialog and is an action rather than
can be specified here. a state: the next time you open this dialog, it will
• The Image File associated with the Image can be be checked.
specified. Click Browse to choose a file saved on • Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to reset
your computer or type the file’s full pathname in the image’s original aspect ratio and remove any
the text field. distortion caused by resizing.
• Select a 2D Plan Symbol from the drop-down • Select the Elevation Reference from the drop-
list to represent the Image in plan view. See “Dis- down list. This determines where the next two
playing Images” on page 327. settings are measured from and also affects their
setting labels.
2 Specify the Size/Elevation of the image as it • Specify the height to Top, measured from the
displays in 3D views.
selected Elevation Reference to the top edge of
• Enter a Height for the selected image.
the image.
• Enter a Width for the selected image.
• Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio of X if you would selected Elevation Reference to the bottom edge
like to modify the Height or Width without of the image.
affecting the other value. If you do this, the image
may appear distorted. 3 Specify the location of the X and Y Coordi-
This check box does not affect editing performed nates of the selected image’s Center Point.
328
Pictures
4 Options - 6 A preview of the selected Image displays here.

The Glass House Rendering Techniques is not
• Check Reverse Image to reflect the appearance available for images. See “Dialog Preview Panes” on
of the image about an imaginary vertical line page 25.
through its center.
Fill Style Panel
• Check Image Always Faces Camera to prevent
the image from rotating to face the camera in 3D The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the
views. This box is unchecked for Billboard appearance of the selected image’s 2D Plan Symbol
Images. See “Images” on page 326. in plan view, provided that the selected symbol is a
closed shape. For information about these settings,
5 Any Copyright information associated with the see “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
selected Image will be stated here.
Pictures
A variety of picture file types can be imported into type, and location. See “Exporting Files” on
and exported out of Home Designer Suite. page 36.
Metafiles are also types of picture files that can be
imported and exported. See “Metafiles” on page 330. Export Picture Dialog
Exporting Pictures
There are several ways to save a picture of a view in
Home Designer Suite:
Using the Export Picture tool is similar to
creating a screen capture of everything in the
current view window. Pictures can be saved in
various file formats and used in other applications.
Export Picture is best suited for 3D views.

When exporting a line-based view, best results can
be achieved by saving it as a Metafile. See “To
export a metafile” on page 330. 1 Specify the exported file’s Image Size in pixels
or inches (mm).
Use the Print Image tool to either print or
save the current view as a PDF file. See “Print • Check Use Active Window Size to export the
Image Dialog” on page 389. picture at the same size as the active view win-
dow. The window’s Width and Height are
To export a picture described below. In camera views only, these val-
ues can be changed, in which case this box
1. Open the view that you would like to export as a becomes unchecked automatically.
picture file. • Select either Pixels or Units as the method by
2. Zoom, pan or otherwise adjust the view so that which the picture’s dimensions are measured.
what you see on screen suits your needs. See • Specify the Width and Height of the image. The
“Displaying 3D Views” on page 307. initial values correspond to the view window’s
3. Select File> Export> Export Picture (BMP, size. In plan view, they display for reference
JPG, PNG) to open the Export Picture dia- only.
log, below, and specify the desired image size • Specify the Resolution of the image. Select
and other properties. Dots/Inch or Dots/mm from the drop-down list.
4. In the Export Picture File dialog, which opens • Uncheck Retain Aspect Ratio if you would like
next, give the file to be exported a name, file to modify the Height or Width without affecting
329
the other value. Leave this box checked to pre- dialog, which is a typical open file dialog. See
vent the image from becoming distorted. “Importing Files” on page 38.
• Click and drag an image file from an operating
2 Check Transparent Background to produce system window into the Home Designer Suite
alpha transparency in the spaces between all
objects that can be seen in the current view. Trans- window.
parency associated with Fill and Text Styles is • In any application, copy an image to the system
retained, as well. Note that the .png and .tif file types
clipboard, then select Edit> Paste> Paste
support transparency, while the .jpg and .bmp file
from the Home Designer Suite menu in an eligi-
types do not.
ble view window. See “Paste Special” on page
71.
Importing Pictures
Pictures can be imported into and displayed in
Note: Importing large, or multiple, Pictures into a
plan view. Pictures do not display in camera plan file can result in program slowness.
views or overviews. See “Displaying Pictures,
Metafiles, and PDF Boxes” on page 332. An imported picture is placed in the center of the cur-
There are several ways to import a Picture into Home rent view. Once imported, pictures can be selected
Designer Suite: and edited. See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and
PDF Boxes” on page 333.
• Select File> Import> Import Picture (BMP,
JPG, PNG) to open the Import Picture File
Picture File Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported picture file and click the The settings in this dialog are similar to those on the
Open Object edit button to open the Picture LINE STYLE panel in numerous other dialogs, with
File Box Specification dialog. one exception: check Show Outline to turn on the
display of the picture’s border polyline. For more
information, see “Line Style Panel” on page 103.
Metafiles
A metafile (.emf, .wmf) is a special picture file To export a metafile
format made up of vectors (lines) that allow the
image to be rescaled without loss of quality. High 1. Accurately position the view on screen.
resolution pictures of line-based views can be 2. Select File> Export> Export Metafile
exported as a metafile. (EMF) .
Note: Metafiles are not supported in Mac operat- 3. Drag a marquee from corner to corner,
ing systems and cannot be imported or exported defining the area that will included in the meta-
in Mac versions of the software. file.
4. Release the mouse button to open the Export
Exporting Metafiles Metafile dialog, which is a typical Save As dia-
An enhanced metafile (.emf) can be exported log. See “Saving, Exporting, and Backing Up
from plan view. Files” on page 34.
5. When you click the Save button, the Metafile
Only objects that display on screen are included in an
Size dialog opens.
exported metafile.
330
Metafile Box Specification Dialog
camera views or overviews. See “Displaying

Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes” on page 332.
There are two ways to import a metafile into Home
Designer Suite:
• Select File> Import> Import Metafile
(EMF,WMF) to open the Import Metafile
dialog, which is a typical open file dialog. See
“Importing Files” on page 38.
6. Specify the desired Width or Height of the • You can also click and drag a metafile file from
metafile. When one value is edited, the other an operating system window into the Home
changes to maintain its aspect ratio. Designer Suite window to import it.
Specify, too, the desired Dots Per Inch (DPI) An imported metafile is placed in the center of the
for the metafile. A larger value results in a current view. Once imported, metafiles can be
higher quality metafile, but also a larger file size. selected and edited. See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles,
and PDF Boxes” on page 333.
Importing Metafiles
Metafiles can be imported into and displayed
in plan view. Metafiles do not display in
Metafile Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported metafile and click the The settings in this dialog are similar to those on the
Open Object edit button to open the Metafile LINE STYLE panel in numerous other dialogs, with
Box Specification dialog. one exception. Check Show Outline to turn on the
display of the picture’s border polyline. For more
information, see “Line Style Panel” on page 103.
PDF Files
Portable Document Format (.pdf) files are a special will open either the Print View or Print Image
type of file that can be viewed on nearly any dialog, depending on the view type.
computer and can include a wide variety of visual
You can also save any view as a 2D .pdf file by
information.
selecting “Chief Architect Save as PDF” as the
Destination printer Name in either of these dialogs.
Printing and Exporting PDF Files See “Printing to a PDF File” on page 387.
You can save any view as a 2D .pdf file by
selecting File> Export> Export PDF. This
Importing PDF Files

To import a .pdf file, select File> Import> metafiles. See “Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF
Import PDF. Boxes” on page 333.
You can also import a .pdf file by dragging it from an Some .pdf files can contain both 2D and 3D
operating system window into the Home Designer information; however, Home Designer Suite can
Suite window. only support 2D data in an imported .pdf file. When
a 3D .pdf file is imported, it may display text, a static
You can import .pdf files into Home Designer Suite
image of the 3D model, or it may not import at all.
in plan view. Once imported, PDF boxes behave and
can be edited similar to imported pictures and
331
Note: Importing large, or multiple, .pdf files into a

plan file can result in program slowness.
1 The full pathname of the .pdf file displays here. 3 Specify how much of the .pdf file you wish to
If the pathname is not that of a valid .pdf file, Import. When multiple pages are imported, a
this text will display in red. separate PDF box is created for each one.
• Click the Browse button to choose a new .pdf • Select Current Page to import only the page
file or to relink to a missing file. specified above and shown in the preview to the
• Specify the Page of the .pdf file that displays in right.
the preview on the right. Type a page number in • Select Pages, then specify the starting page in the
the text field or use the spin control arrows to From field and the ending page in the To field.
browse the pages sequentially. • Select All to import the entire .pdf file.
A preview of the page selected above displays
2
on the right.
PDF Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported PDF box and click the one exception: Check the Show Outline box to turn
Open Object edit button to open the PDF Box on the display of the PDF box’s border polyline.
See “Line Style Panel” on page 103.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those on the
LINE STYLE panel in numerous other dialogs, with
Displaying Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes

The display of Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF was imported and cannot be imported into a camera
Boxes is controlled in the Display Options view or overview.
dialog. See “Layer Attributes” on page 74.
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes are placed on the Drawing Groups
“CAD, Default” layer. Each object in a plan file is included in a Drawing
Group, which influences whether it displays in front
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be imported
of or behind other objects. By default, imported
into and displayed in plan view. A Picture, Metafile,
or PDF Box can only be seen in the view where it
332
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
pictures and PDF Boxes are placed in the Back Once imported, the drawing order of pictures,
Group, and imported metafiles are placed in the same metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be customized. See
Drawing Group as CAD objects. “Drawing Groups” on page 75.
Editing Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes

Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be selected To resize a picture or metafile
and edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar,
and their specification dialogs. 1. Find two items on the imported picture or meta-
file that are separated by a known horizontal or
vertical distance, such as two walls or plot lines.
2. Draw parallel CAD lines to represent these two
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be items and use dimensions to position the lines so
customized in their specification dialog. See: that they are the known distance between the
• “Picture File Box Specification Dialog” on page two items in the imported picture. See “The
330 CAD Drawing Tools” on page 101.
• “Metafile Box Specification Dialog” on page 331 3. Click and drag one of the imported picture’s cor-
• “PDF Box Specification Dialog” on page 332 ner edit handles to resize it concentrically until
the two items are aligned with the two CAD
lines.
Using the Mouse
Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes have edit Using Dimensions
handles similar to other box-based objects. See
“Editing Box-Based Objects” on page 89. Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes can be relocated
relative to other objects with precision using
• The corner Resize handles behave do not behave dimensions.
the same for Pictures, Metafiles, and PDF Boxes
as they do for CAD boxes, however. If you drag a To avoid changing the selected object’s aspect ratio,
corner handle of one of these objects while the make sure you choose to move the entire object
Default Edit Behavior is active, its contents will rather than the selected edge. See “Moving Objects
resize and height to width ratio will be retained. Using Dimensions” on page 154.
• If you drag an Extend handle along a Picture,
Metafile, or PDF Box’s edge, the contents of the Using the Edit Tools
box will not be resized. If you resize it larger, an A selected Picture, Metafile, or PDF Box can be
empty space will be created between that edge edited in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
and the contents; if you resize it smaller, the con- edit toolbar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on page 23.
tents will be cropped.
3D Backdrops
A backdrop is an image, typically of an exterior
view, that displays in the background of 3D views to
help place the model into a realistic setting and add a
sense of perspective.
The backdrop in this view includes hills and clouds
333
Backdrops automatically adjust to fit each view Backdrop Defaults

window, so they look best when they are created with
a height to width ratio that is similar to the window By default, Home Designer Suite uses backdrop
you are working in. images in Full Cameras only. You can, however,
specify which types of views use backdrops by
default, and also select the default backdrop images
You can create digital photos of a building for each, in the Camera Tools Defaults dialogs. See
site for use as a backdrop.
“Camera Defaults Dialogs” on page 303.
Specifying a Backdrop Image Similarly, backdrop images are only used by default
in Standard renderings. You can choose whether a
Backdrop images are view specific. You can select a backdrop is used in either technique in the
backdrop image for a camera view from the library in Rendering Technique Options dialog. See
either of two ways: “Rendering Technique Options” on page 323.
• In a 3D view, open the Library Browser. Select a
Backdrop image, then move your mouse pointer Adding New Backdrops
into the view window. Click anywhere in the A new backdrop image can be created using a variety
view to apply the selected backdrop. of graphic file formats and can be imported into
• Open the Camera Specification dialog, and on Home Designer Suite in several ways:
the BACKDROP panel, click the Select Backdrop
button. See “3D Backdrop Panel” on page 317. • Select File> Import> Backdrop to open the
Import Backdrop File dialog, which is similar to
When a backdrop image is not applied, Home the Import Picture File dialog. See “Importing
Designer Suite applies a background color instead. Pictures” on page 330.
This color can be specified on the BACKDROP panel
• Right-click on the User Catalog and select New>
of the Camera Specification dialog, as well.
Backdrop from the contextual menu.
The Use Generated Sky option produces a special • Copy and paste an image into Home Designer
Spherical Panoramic Backdrop that simulates a Suite. See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on
daytime sky using the Generic Sun. page 70.
Backdrop Specification Dialog

To open the Backdrop Specification dialog, You can also open this dialog by right-clicking on a
select File> Import> Import Backdrop or backdrop image in the User Catalog in the Library
right-click on the User Catalog in the Library Browser and selecting Open from the contextual
Browser and select New> Backdrop from the menu.
contextual menu. See “Adding New Backdrops” on
page 334.
334
Walkthrough Paths
1 A preview of the selected image displays here. not located in the Home Designer Suite 2021
Data folder, a copy of the file will be created at
2 Backdrop - Specify backdrop’s Name and the Home Designer Suite 2021 Data\Backdrops\-My
image file associated with it.
Backdrops and the program will reference that
• Type a Name for the selected backdrop, to be copy. See “Home Designer Suite Data” on page
used in the Library Browser and 3D View 32.
Defaults dialog.
• In the Location field, type the full pathname of 3 If the selected image has a Copyright,
information about it will display here.
the image file or click the Browse button and
browse to the file on your computer. If the file is
Walkthrough Paths
A 3D Walkthrough is a series of pictures to draw a Walkthrough Path. See “To use the
saved as an .mp4, .wmv, or .avi file that can Spline tool” on page 107.
be played like a video by other applications such as 3. Edit the direction and curvature of the spline’s
Windows Media Player. segments, as needed. See “Editing Spline-Based
Create Walkthrough Path
4. Add Key Frames to the path and modify
There are several ways to create a walkthrough along their specifications.
a path, but the Create Walkthrough Path tool is the
fastest and most flexible option. 5. Select the path and click the Record Walk-
through Along Path edit button. See
To create a Walkthrough Path “Record Walkthrough Along Path” on page 337.
1. Begin by choosing a codec for recording walk-
throughs. See “Selecting a Codec” on page 339. Walkthrough Paths can follow stairs and
ramps to span multiple floors. See “Walk-
2. In plan view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Cre- through Paths and Stairs” on page 336.
ate Walkthrough Path , then click and drag
335
You can also create a walkthrough based on a regular 2. Each Key Frame on the selected Walkthrough
CAD polyline or spline by selecting it and clicking Path will display a Move and Rotate edit handle.
the Record Walkthrough Along Path edit • Click and drag the square Move handle to repo-
button. This was the only way to record a sition the Key Frame along the path.
walkthrough along a path in Home Designer Suite • Click and drag the rectangular Rotate handle to
versions and does not provide as many options as change the Key Frame’s direction angle
using a Walkthrough Path. 3. When you are finished adjusting the Key
Walkthrough Paths display in plan view when the Frames, click the Main Edit Mode edit tool
“Walkthrough Paths” layer is turned on. When to restore the Walkthrough Path’s normal edit
displayed, Walkthrough Paths display in front of handles.
other objects and will print. They are included in
views exported to .dxf. See “Layers” on page 74. Walkthrough Paths and Stairs
Key Frames If you draw a Walkthrough Path up or down a
staircase or ramp, it will follow the height of the
Key Frames are points along a Walkthrough Path that stairs or ramp and continue on the next floor.
allow you to change:
• Camera direction, tilt angle, and height; To create a multiple floor walkthrough
• Changes in walkthrough speed; 1. Draw a Walkthrough Path so that it extends into
• The floor that the walkthrough is on. a staircase or ramp in the same direction as its
Direction Arrow. See “Displaying Stairs,
These changes are applied as the camera moves Ramps, and Landings” on page 237.
along the Walkthrough Path from one Key Frame to
• Do not drag the Walkthrough Path across the
another.
entire length of the stairs or ramp. If you do, its
To add a Key Frame to a Walkthrough Path, select height will remain relative to the current floor.
the path and click the Add Key Frame edit 2. When you release the mouse button, the pro-
button. Then click on the path to add a Key Frame at gram will automatically display a dashed line
that location. with an arrow extending past the last Key Frame
on the current floor.
In plan view, each Key Frame is represented by a
camera symbol centered along the walkthrough path. • If it follows stairs or a ramp going upward, the
It displays the frame number, is pointed in the path will also extend to the top end of the stair-
direction of its Camera Angle, and its position along case or ramp.
the path corresponds to its Time setting. 3. Go up or down one floor, select the Walkthrough
Path, and resize and reshape it as needed. You
can use the Create Walkthrough Path tool
to draw more segments and additional Key
Frames can be added, as well.
Key Frame Time, Angle, and other properties can be Playing a Walkthrough
edited in the Walkthrough Path Specification
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 339. Once a walkthrough has been recorded, it can be
played using a media player.
You can also use the Edit Key Frames edit tool
to enable Move and Rotate edit handles for each Key To play a walkthrough
Frame on the selected Walkthrough Path.
1. Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Play Walkthrough
To use the Edit Key Frames edit tool to open the Select Video File dialog.
1. Select a Walkthrough Path and click the Edit 2. Browse to the .mp4, .wmv, or .avi file on saved
on your computer. Your default video applica-
Key Frames edit tool. tion plays the walkthrough video.
336
Recording a Walkthrough
Recording a Walkthrough
There are two approaches to recording a walkthrough
of a plan:
• Select a path in plan view, then direct the pro-
gram to record a walkthrough along that path.
• Create a 3D view, then begin recording and use
the Move Camera tools to navigate through the
view.
Record Walkthrough Along Path

Once a Walkthrough Path has been drawn, you can
use it to record a walkthrough video. See “Create
Walkthrough Path” on page 335.
To record a walkthrough along a path
1. In plan view, select a Walkthrough Path or a

CAD polyline or spline.
2. Click the Record Walkthrough Along Path
edit button.
3. In the Walkthrough Options dialog, specify the
desired Quality, Resolution, Rendering Options,
and Video Codec, then click OK. 1 The Quality settings control the compression
and total number of individual frames in the
walkthrough.
Note: You can specify your preferred settings,
including Frame Rate and Compression, in the • Specify a Compression percentage between 0
Walkthrough Defaults dialog. See “Default Set- and 100. A value of 0 gives the highest quality
tings” on page 47. images and largest file sizes.
• Specify the desired number of Frames Per Sec-
4. In the Save Video As dialog, specify a name ond, between 1 and 100. A higher number results
and saved location for your walkthrough file. in a higher quality recording but also a larger
The available file type will vary depending on video file.
the Codec you are using. See “Exporting Files”
• Specify a Duration Along Path, in seconds.
on page 36.
• The Total Frames to Record displays for refer-
5. When you click Save, a camera view will open,
ence and equals the Frames Per Second times the
showing the progress of the recording.
Duration along Path.
To cancel the recording as it is being created, press
the ESC key on your keyboard. 2 The Resolution settings control the size of the
walkthrough’s frames.
Walkthrough Options Dialog • Select a size from the drop-down list. “Current
Size” is selected by default. If you modify the
Most of the settings in this dialog are also found in Width or Height below, “Custom” will become
the Walkthrough Defaults dialog. selected.
• The current Width, based on the selected Reso-
lution, is stated here. If you change this value,
the selected Resolution will become “Custom”.
• The current Height, based on the selected Reso-
lution, is stated here. If you change this value,
the selected Resolution will become “Custom”.
337
• Check Retain Aspect Ratio to retain the origi- To record a walkthrough frame by frame
nal ratio between the frame Width and Height. If
you modify either value while this is unchecked, 1. Create a camera view. This view is the first
the walkthrough may appear distorted. frame of the walkthrough.
2. While the camera view is active, select 3D>
3 Rendering Options - Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough .
• Select the walkthrough’s Rendering Technique 3. In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
from the drop-down list. See “Rendering
Techniques” on page 323.
• Check Show Shadows to turn on shadows in the
walkthrough. See “Shadows” on page 319.
• Check Ray Casted Sun Shadows for higher
quality shadows cast by sun light. Ray Casted
Sun Shadows take longer to generate than regu-
lar shadows.
• Select a Frame Rate between 1 and 100. The
• Bloom occurs around areas of intense light and value entered is the number of frames per sec-
looks as though the light is ‘bleeding’ beyond ond.
the edges of a light source. It adds realism to the
• Select a Compression Percent between 0 and
view but takes longer to render. Only available
100. A value of 0 gives the highest quality
when a Rendering Technique that supports light-
images and the largest file size.
ing is selected above.
• Select a Codec from the drop-down list. See
• Check Hide Camera-Facing Exterior Walls to
“Selecting a Codec” on page 339.
suppress the display of any exterior walls that
face the camera. Interior walls set as Attic walls • Click OK.
are also suppressed. This setting only has an 4. In the Save Video As dialog, specify the name,
effect when the walkthrough path is on the exte- location, and file format for the walkthrough
rior of a structure. file, then click Save. The available file formats
will vary, depending on the codec you selected.
Note: Reflections will be used in a walkthrough if 5. Use the camera movement tools to navigate the
they are enabled in the Full Camera Defaults dia- view. Each time the screen redraws, it is
log when the walkthrough is recorded. See “Full recorded as the next frame in sequence. See
Camera Defaults” on page 304. “Editing 3D Views” on page 311.
6. To move the camera without saving a view,
4 Select a Video Codec from the drop-down list. select 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause Recording
This setting is retained between sessions and is
also global, affecting all walkthroughs in all plan to temporarily stop recording.
files. See “Selecting a Codec” on page 339. • You can then select 3D> Walkthroughs> Save
When you click OK, the Save Video As dialog will Frame button to control what views are
open, allowing you to specify the name, location, and saved.
file format for the walkthrough file. The available • You can start recording again by selecting Pause
file formats may vary, depending on which codec
you selected. Recording once more.
7. When the walkthrough sequence is complete,
Frame by Frame Walkthroughs select 3D> Walkthroughs> Stop Recording
You can also create a walkthrough by recording it or close the view.
frame by frame. Although time-consuming, creating
a walkthrough in this manner lets you see exactly Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll
what is being recorded as you record it. bars does not change the viewpoint and does not
produce a frame for the walkthrough.
338
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog
If you resize the current view window while you open either dialog, even if you do so in another
recording a walkthrough, the program will stop plan.
recording.
“Windows Media Video 9” is the default codec in the
Windows version and “H.264”, in the Mac version;
Selecting a Codec but any codecs installed on your system will be
A codec is a utility that compresses and available to use.
decompresses media files, and is used when both To choose the codec that best suits your needs, it is a
recording and viewing videos such as walkthroughs. good idea to create a test walkthrough using each of
When you record a walkthrough in Home Designer the codecs installed on your system to see how well
Suite, you can choose which of the codecs installed their walkthrough quality and file compression meet
on your system you want to use. This selection is your requirements. Note that your choice of codec
universal and is retained between program sessions: may affect the file formats in the Save Video As
when you choose a codec in either Walkthrough dialog.
Options dialog, it will become selected the next time
For more information about codecs, visit
Walkthrough Path Specification Dialog

Select a Walkthrough Path and click the Open Path Specification dialog. See “Walkthrough Paths”
Object edit button to open the Walkthrough on page 335.
General Panel
1 A list of the selected path’s Key Frames dis- • Specify the Time in seconds at which the
plays on the left. Click on a Frame in the list to selected Key Frame is found in the duration of
select and edit it using the settings on the right. When the walkthrough. Frame 1 is always at 0.0 and
the dialog is opened, the last key frame edited in the cannot be moved; similarly, the last frame is
current program session will be selected automati- always at the end of the walkthrough Duration.
cally. See “Key Frames” on page 336. • Specify the Speed After (ft/s), which is how fast
• Specify the Floor that the selected Key Frame is the camera moves along the walkthrough path
located on. See “Multiple Floors” on page 227. from the current Key Frame to the next. Not
available if the last Key Frame is selected.
339
• Specify the Camera Angle at the selected Key

Frame. Note: When Relative Angles are used, a Camera
Angle of 0° points in the direction of the walk-
• Specify the Tilt Angle of the camera at the through path. When Absolute Angles are used, 0°
selected Key Frame. always points in the positive direction along the X
• Specify the Height of the camera at the selected axis.
Key Frame.
Specify how Camera Height is measured:
• Click the Delete button to remove the selected
Key Frame from the path. • Select Relative to Floor/Terrain to measure
camera height relative to the floor or terrain at
• Specify the Key Frame Symbol Size, which is each Key Frame location.
the size of the symbols representing the selected
walkthrough path’s Key Frames in plan view. See • Select Absolute to measure camera height rela-
“Key Frames” on page 336. tive to the plan’s Z axis.
2 Walkthrough Options - Polyline Panel

• Specify the Duration, or total length of the walk- The POLYLINE panel states the length of the path’s
through video in seconds. Perimeter. The Area and Volume of a walkthrough
path will always be described as “Not closed”. See
Specify how Camera Angles are measured: “Polyline Panel” on page 106.
• Select Relative to Path to measure each camera
angle relative to the direction of the walkthrough Line Style Panel
path at each Key Frame location.
This panel is similar to the LINE STYLE panel in the
• Select Absolute to measure each camera angle Line Specification dialog. See “Line Style Panel” on
relative to the plan’s X, Y, and Z axes. See “3D page 103.
Drafting” on page 19.
340
Chapter 31:
Importing and Exporting
Importing is the process of opening a file that was Chapter Contents

produced in a different program in Home Designer • Chief Architect Account Login
Suite. Exporting, on the other hand, is the process of • Export Chief Architect 3D Viewer File
saving information in a Home Designer Suite file to a • Import Room Planner File
format that can be read by another program. • DXF vs DWG File Formats
Home Designer Suite allows you to import and • Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files
export a variety of information from and to other • Additional 2D Export Information
applications. This chapter focuses on exporting 2D • 3D Data Import Requirements
.dwg/.dxf files and importing a variety of 3D file • Importing 3D Symbols
formats. Other importing and exporting options are • Symbol Specification Dialog
described in the chapters in which those objects or • 3D Symbols and Materials
settings are discussed. • Export 360 Panorama
Chief Architect Account Login

Your online Chief Architect Account allows you to Architect Account or Help> Log out of Chief
take advantage of a variety of valuable resources Architect Account.
including catalog downloads, license management,
and technical support. See “Creating a Chief Chief Architect Account Login Dialog
Architect Account” on page 14.
In order to export a 3D model to a Chief Architect
3D Viewer, export a 360° Panorama image file, or
import a drawing from the Room Planner mobile
app, you must first log in your Chief Architect
account. See “Export Chief Architect 3D Viewer File” on
page 342, “Export 360 Panorama” on page 348, and When importing a Room Planner file, use the same
“Import Room Planner File” on page 343. E-mail Address and Password that you used to save
If you try to do any of these tasks while you are the drawing to the cloud in Room Planner.
logged out of your account, the Chief Architect When exporting a Chief Architect 3D Viewer or
Account Login dialog will open, giving you an 360° Panorama file, use the E-mail Address and
opportunity to log in. Password that you use to log in to the account on our
You can also log into or out of your online account at website that is associated with your software product
any time by selecting Help> Log in to Chief key.
341
Export Chief Architect 3D Viewer File

The Chief Architect 3D Viewer allows a Export 3D Viewer File Dialog
model created in Chief Architect to be viewed
in either:
• A web browser on a computer.
• The 3D Viewer app on a mobile device.
In order to export a Chief Architect 3D Viewer file,
you must be logged in to your Chief Architect cloud
account.
For more information about the Chief Architect 3D
Viewer, visit HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
To export a file to the cloud for viewing with either • The Name of the current plan file populates this
option, select File> Export> Export Chief field by default. Specify a different name for the
Architect 3D Viewer File while a 3D view is exported 3D Viewer file if you would like.
active. • Type a brief Description of the model.
Any light sources that are On in the current view, as • Click the Cameras button to open the Select
well as ambient light, will be exported along with the Cameras to Export dialog and specify which
model. See “Lighting” on page 320. saved cameras to export with the model. See “3D
3D Viewer Export Options • The Surface Count and Texture Size display
here for reference. Large Surface Count and/or
Texture Size values can impact performance in
the app.
To reduce Surface Count and Texture Size,

consider turning off unnecessary layers in
the current 3D view before exporting. See “Lay-
ers” on page 74.
When you click OK, the 3D model is exported using

the layer settings in the camera view that was active
• Select Create New Model to export a new model when the model was exported.
without affecting any previously exported files.
On the 3D Viewer page, you can also choose to share
• Select Replace Existing Model to select a previ- an exported model with someone so that it can be
ously-exported model in the list and replace it opened in a 3D Viewer page or in the 3D Viewer
with the model being exported now. mobile app.
• To select an existing model to replace, click on its
line item in the list. Select Cameras to Export Dialog
When you click OK, the Export 3D Viewer File
dialog opens, where you can specify the exported
model’s name, description, and other details.
342
Import Room Planner File
• The Camera Name of each saved Perspective • In the Initial View column, add a check mark for
Camera and Overview in the plan is listed here. the camera that you would like to be active when
The camera that is active when you export the the model is opened in 3D Viewer.
model, if listed, is followed by “(source)”. Doll • Click the Include All button to export all saved
House Views can be exported; however, they cameras with the model. A large number of saved
behave like Full Overviews in the 3D Viewer. cameras may slow down the interface of the 3D
• In the Include column, click to add or remove a Viewer app.
check mark for each camera that you would like • Click the Include None button to export no saved
to export. By default, only cameras of the same cameras with the model. When the model is
type, on the same floor, and using the same layer opened, an unsaved 3D Overview will be the ini-
set are Included. tial view.
Import Room Planner File

Select File> Import> Import Room Planner the current plan, while interior walls will retain the
File, then select and download a Room thickness that was set in Room Planner. See
Planner file from the cloud. When prompted to log “Exterior and Interior Wall Defaults Dialogs” on
in, use the same credentials you used to save a plan page 110.
to the cloud in Room Planner.
Unless a custom ceiling height has been specified in
Files created in Room Planner version 2 and newer Room Planner, rooms in an imported file use the
can be imported into Home Designer Suite 2021. Default ceiling height set in the Floor Defaults
dialog. See “Floor Level Defaults” on page 132.
Note that the exterior walls in an imported Room
Planner drawing will inherit their thickness and other Visit roomplanner.chiefarchitect.com for more
properties from the Exterior Wall Defaults dialog in information about the Room Planner mobile app.
DXF vs DWG File Formats

.dwg is the native AutoCAD® file format. Originally Many design programs can read and write .dxf and
a proprietary format, it is now widely used with .dwg files. Both formats interpret data as CAD
many different products. objects such as lines, polylines, and circles.
.dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a standard file Binary .dxf format is another related file format. It is
format created by Autodesk for the transfer of data easier for computers to read, is more accurate, and
between other programs. occupies less disk space and regular .dxf files. When
exporting, however, bear in mind that not all
applications support binary .dxf.
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files

Line-based 2D files can be exported from Home Export All Floors
Designer Suite in both .dxf and .dwg file formats.
To export the plan view for all floor plans
You can specify the version of AutoCAD® to export
simultaneously, select File> Export> All
to. Compatibility with other software may vary.
Floors (DWG/DXF) from any floor of the plan. The
There are two ways to export a 2D drawing file in floor plans are exported to a single .dxf or .dwg file.
Home Designer Suite: Export Current View and
If you choose to export all floors, the file will contain
Export All Floors.
all floors superimposed on each other. Upon export,
each layer in your Home Designer Suite drawing is
Export Current View divided into separate layers: one for each floor. For
To export a plan view that is currently active, example: “Electrical-2” contains objects on Floor 2
select File> Export> Current View (DWG/ that were originally on the “Electrical” layer.
DXF).
343
Export Drawing File Dialog Specify which Compatible Version of AutoCAD®

you want your .dwg/.dxf file to be compatible with.
Click the Export button to save the exported file as a
.dwg or .dxf file. See “Exporting Files” on page 36.
Additional 2D Export Information

The export process converts high level Home • Three kinds of dimensions are generated:
Designer Suite objects (doors, windows, etc) into Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular.
simple, CAD-based objects (lines, arcs, etc). Home
• Please refer to AutoCAD® documentation for
Designer Suite exports all data to AutoCAD®’s more information.
Model Space.
Note: Uncheck “Use Associative Dimensions” in

Supported Entities
the Export Drawing File dialog if the CAD program
The following entity types are currently supported you are using does not support AutoCAD® Asso-
for 2D export: ciative dimensions. See “Export Drawing File Dia-
log” on page 344.
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD®, lines are 3
dimensional with the Z coordinate set to zero. Layers
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and radius. Layers in other systems are similar to Home
Circle - Fully Supported. Designer Suite layers, but there are some subtle
differences. Layer information is mapped as follows:
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an AutoCAD®
release that supports multi-line text, Home Designer Home Other Systems
Suite writes the file as multi-line text. If exporting to Designer
a version that does not support multi-line text, the Suite
file is written as simple text. Name Name
Polylines - Polylines are a collection of points with Color Nearest AutoCAD® Color. Home
lines or arcs connecting them. Home Designer Suite Designer Suite uses the default Auto-
supports both lines and arcs. Arcs are referred to as CAD® color table to determine this
bulges in AutoCAD®. mapping.
Display On
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference to a
block, which is a named collection of entities. A Size Line Weight. In AutoCAD®, line
block can also contain block inserts. weights are determined by a table of
mm line widths. Home Designer Suite
maps to the closest match in this
Dimensions table based the current view’s Line
Weight Scale. See “Drawing Sheet
Each dimension has an associated block containing a
Setup Dialog” on page 384.
representation of the dimension as it is drawn in
Home Designer Suite. It also contains all the data to Style Line type
recreate that information. Lock Lock
• When an exported dimension is modified in Auto- Line Types

CAD® or other CAD program, its appearance
changes. A line type, or line style, is used by layers and
entities to determine how lines are drawn. Home
• Home Designer Suite does not support arrowhead Designer Suite line types installed with the program
styles or fonts. are supported on export.
344
3D Data Import Requirements
3D Data Import Requirements

Importing a symbol that can be used by Home rectly before importing it into Home Designer
Designer Suite is a relatively simple process that Suite. For more information about defining the
begins with previously created 3D data. This 3D data origin, see “Symbol Origin” on page 191.
often comes from a program other than Home • If a symbol with faces that have more than four
Designer Suite. If you use another 3D modeling vertices is imported, the faces are truncated,
program to create the 3D data, be aware of the resulting in an object that appears to have holes.
following requirements before attempting to create The best remedy is to re-export the model from
symbols. the original application using only triangular or
quadrilateral faces.
Home Designer Suite does not provide sup- • Home Designer Suite does not support grouped
port for any third party software.
objects in symbols imported from .3ds files.
There are a number of requirements that must be met
Surface Normals
before any 3D data can be used to create a symbol in
Home Designer Suite: If you use third party software to create an .obj/.3ds./
• The 3D data must be stored in an, object (.obj), skp file that will be imported as a symbol, you
should be familiar with the concept of surface
3D Studio® Mesh (.3ds), COLLADA (.dae), or
normals.
SketchUp version 2019 and prior (.skp) file for-
mat. If you have 3D data in another format, you
must convert it into one these formats first.
• Geometry and material information stored in .3ds
files are imported; cameras and lights are not.
• The 3D model must be composed of 3DSOLID
solid entities, or face data. Faces are typically
referred to as 3D faces, polygonal faces, or poly
meshes. Other types of entities such as lines, A surface normal is a vector that is perpendicular to
curves, circles, polylines, and free form surfaces the plane of a surface. This vector points in one
can exist in the file but are not imported when the direction, determined by the way the face is drawn.
symbol is created. This is true for all (.obj/.3ds/
If a face is drawn clockwise, the surface normals are
.skp) file types.
directed outward; if a face is drawn counter-
• The face data should be assigned to different lay- clockwise, the surface normals point inward. Home
ers so that you can map them to the correct mate- Designer Suite assumes that the face on the positive
rials when viewing them in 3D. It is helpful to side of the normal vector is the outside face.
name your layers using a convention that identi-
fies that materials should be assigned to each sub- Many objects can be drawn using only one side of
component. each face. A cube is a good example: the inside of a
cube is not visible, so it is not necessary to create its
• Pay attention to the origin and orientation of the inside faces. When inside faces are not calculated,
3D data when designing symbols. Home Designer 3D views in Home Designer Suite can generate more
Suite allows some adjustment when creating the quickly.
symbol, but it is easier to build the 3D data cor-
Importing 3D Symbols
Home Designer Suite supports the import of • By selecting File> Import> Import 3D Symbol
3D surface and 3D solid objects saved in .3ds, tool.
.obj, .dae, and .skp formats.
There are three ways to import a 3D symbol into • By selecting New> 3D Symbol from the con-
Home Designer Suite: textual menu in the Library Browser. See “Using
the Contextual Menus” on page 273.
345
• By dragging and dropping the file from an operat- 3. Resize and position the window so that the
ing system window into plan view. Home Designer Suite program window can be
seen behind it.
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging are
imported for use in the current plan, while those 4. Click on the desired .3ds, .obj .dae, or .skp file
imported using the Import 3D Symbol dialog are and drag it into the Home Designer Suite pro-
also saved in the library. See “The Library” on page gram window.
271. 5. When your cursor changes to a +, click in the
drawing area to place as many copies of the
To drag and drop a 3D symbol file symbol as desired. When you are finished, select
1. Open the plan in which you would like to import a different tool.
a 3D symbol and remain in plan view. Symbols imported by clicking and dragging cannot
2. Open an operating system window in front of be edited in the Symbol Specification dialog. If a
the Home Designer Suite program window. symbol needs to be rotated, or its unit of
measurement specified, use the Import 3D Symbol
tool to import it.
Symbol Specification Dialog

To import a symbol object, select File> The Import 3D Symbol File dialog, which opens
Import> Import 3D Symbol. first, is a typical Open File dialog in which multiple
files can be group-selected for import. See
Home Designer Suite supports the import of 3D
“Importing Files” on page 38.
surface and 3D solid objects saved to .3ds, .obj, and
.skp formats and treats imported symbols as stand The Symbol Specification dialog opens next.
alone fixtures.
3D Panel
1 3D Geometry - Select the Drawing Unit that 2 The Rotation settings allow you to rotate the
was used to create the symbol. If any units selected symbol about the X, Y, and Z axes.
other than inches or mm are selected, the program • Select the X, Y, or Z Axis.
will convert the data into units appropriate for Home
Designer Suite. • Specify the Angle to rotate the symbol in the text
field. 90° is set by default.
• Click the Rotate + or Rotate - button to rotate the
Note: SKP files are always imported using inches,
regardless of the default units used in the plan object around the selected axis in a clockwise or
file. See “Creating a New Plan” on page 33. counterclockwise direction, respectively.
346
3D Symbols and Materials
3 The Number of Faces that the symbol has selected, the most recently selected symbol displays.
displays here for reference. When multiple See “Dialog Preview Panes” on page 25.
symbols are being imported, nothing displays.
Although there is no limit to the number of surfaces Materials Panel
that a symbol can have, large numbers can increase
the rendering time for 3D views significantly. The MATERIALS panel allows you to assign materials
to the symbol’s components and is similar to the
4 A preview of the symbol’s appearance displays same panel in many specification dialogs. See
here and updates as changes are made to the “Materials Panel” on page 296.
settings in this dialog. When multiple symbols are
3D Symbols and Materials

When a symbol is imported into Home Designer in Home Designer Suite until that symbol has been
Suite, material definitions may be included with it. placed into a plan. The associated texture files are
How material information is included depends on the then copied to the user’s Textures folder. See “Home
symbol’s file format. See “About Materials” on page Designer Suite Data” on page 32.
294. 3DS and DAE Files
OBJ Files
Material definitions for .3ds and .dae files refer to
Material definitions for most .obj files are saved in a texture information in separate image files.
separate file with the .mtl file extension. If such a file
In order to properly import a .3ds and .dae file,
exists, the materials associated with the .obj file
Home Designer Suite needs these referenced image
display in the list on the left side of the MATERIALS
files. If a texture file is not available, the material it is
panel of its specification dialog.
associated with will be created without it. The
If Home Designer Suite does not receive material associated texture files are copied to the user’s
definition information in an accompanying .mtl file, Textures folder.
default material properties are assigned.
SKP Files
Material definitions for .obj files can also include
The textures associated with a .skp file are saved in
texture information in the form of image files (.jpg,
the file. After you import a symbol and either place it
.png, etc).
in a plan or add it to the Library, these textures are
In order to properly import an .obj file, Home saved in the Home Designer Suite Textures folder.
Designer Suite needs the .obj file, the .mtl file, and
Home Designer Suite does not support deformed
any referenced texture files. If a texture file is not
textures. If a texture associated with a .skp file is
available, the material it is associated with is created deformed, it will be imported without the
without a texture. deformations.
The material definitions associated with an imported
.obj symbol are not available for use by other objects
Texture Filename Conflict

If a texture of the same name already exists in the
plan when an .obj, .3ds, or .skp file is imported, the
Texture Filename Conflict dialog displays.
347
• Select Rename the imported texture, then click

the Browse button to create a copy of the tex-
ture’s image file with a new name that you spec-
ify.
• Select Use the existing texture instead of the
imported texture to keep the existing texture.
• Select Replace the existing texture with the
imported texture to replace the texture already
present in the plan with the new, imported one.
• Check Do this for all remaining textures in this
object to use the same selection for all textures
with filename conflicts associated with this sym-
bol.
Export 360 Panorama

The Export 360 Panorama tool creates a igible value is entered, it will adjust up or down
spherical panoramic image that can be to the nearest power of two. Although not
opened in various panorama viewers. Select File> required, this option is recommended for best
Export> Export 360 Panorama while a 3D view is results in some panoramic image viewers.
active to access this tool. • The Retain Aspect Ratio check box displays for
For best results, position the camera as near as you reference and cannot be changed. The ratio
can to the center of the scene before exporting. between Width and Height is 2 to 1 when Limit
Dimensions to Powers of Two is unchecked,
Export 360 Panorama File above.
All of the settings in this dialog are retained during 2 Check Save to Disk to save the exported
the current program session. panoramic image file on the local computer
system.
• Specify the full pathname of the File you wish to
export, or click the Browse button to open the
Export 360 Panorama File dialog, which is a typ-
ical File Save dialog. See “Exporting Files” on
page 36.
3 Check Save to Chief Architect Cloud to save

the exported panoramic image file to your
Chief Architect Cloud Account. See “Chief Architect
Account Login” on page 341.
• Type a short, descriptive Name for the exported
panoramic image file.
• Type a brief Description of the file.
When you click OK, a panoramic image is created
and a progress dialog may display. Because spherical
1 Specify the size of the exported image, in panoramas are composed of multiple images stitched
pixels. together, they may take longer to create than a
• Specify the Height and Width of the exported standard exported picture.
image file, in pixels.
• Check Limit Dimensions to Powers of Two to Note: You can also upload a previously saved
restrict the Width and Height to values that are panoramic image file to the cloud on the 360 Pan-
oramas page of your online account.
powers of two. When this is checked and an inel-
348
Chapter 32:
Terrain
Home Designer Suite allows you to model the terrain Chapter Contents
around a house. Begin by specifying elevation data • Terrain Perimeter
that creates the surface contours, and then add • Elevation Data Tools
surface features such as planting areas and water • Terrain Modifier Tools
features. • Terrain Feature Tools
You can import terrain data from a variety of sources • Garden Bed Tools
and use this data to produce your 3D model. • Water Feature Tools
• Stepping Stone Tools
Driveways, parking lots and sidewalks as well as • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
plants and sprinklers are among the objects that can • Terrain Objects in the Library
be placed in your terrain and are discussed in • Displaying Terrain
“Plants” on page 371 and “Roads, Driveways and • Editing Terrain Objects
Sidewalks” on page 367. • Importing Elevation Data
Terrain Perimeter
The Terrain Perimeter is a closed polyline If you create a terrain perimeter in plan view but do
defining the boundary of the terrain that not see it, select Window> Fill Window . See
generates in 3D views and of the contour lines that “Zoom Tools” on page 63.
generate in plan view. Select Terrain> Create
Terrain Perimeter to create a terrain perimeter. Once created, the terrain perimeter can be resized
and edited like other polyline-based objects. See
“Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects” on page
87.
When a terrain perimeter is first created, it is
completely flat and is placed at a height of 0’-0”, or
sea level.
Terrain Perimeter
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a 3D view
349
The terrain perimeter by itself does not have center point of the building footprint. Then, it
elevation data associated with it. You can use the determines the elevation of the terrain at that point..
Elevation Data and Terrain Modifier tools Finally, it adds the thickness of the floor platform to
to create terrain that slopes in a wide variety of ways. this value plus either 6” (150 mm) or 8” (200 mm)
If you do not create elevation data within the terrain depending on the foundation type. The resulting
perimeter, the terrain remains flat at an elevation of 0' value, referred to as the automatic Subfloor Height
- 0". See “Elevation Data Tools” on page 350 and Above Terrain, is how far the default height of Floor
“Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 352. 1 is above sea level in the current plan. See
“Foundations and the Terrain” on page 225.
Terrain Height vs Floor Height The Subfloor Height Above Terrain distance is stated
and can be modified in the Terrain Specification
Home Designer Suite always defines the default
dialog. You can specify a custom value to produce a
height of Floor 1 at 0’-0”. This height value is the
daylight or walkout basement. See “General Panel”
constant by which the heights of structural elements
on page 357.
in the program like walls, floors, and ceilings are
measured. The heights of architectural object can be
measured relative this absolute height, as well. See
Build Terrain
“Floor 1 Default Height” on page 132. Select Terrain> Build Terrain to generate
The default height of Floor 1 is not, however, the the terrain surface based on the provided
absolute by which terrain elevation is measured. elevation data. Build Terrain also updates the
Instead, elevation data is measured relative to sea Building Pad Elevation value in the Terrain
Specification dialog. See “Building the Terrain” on
level. This means that if you want to, you can use
real-world elevation data to generate a 3D terrain page 356.
model without also having to measure floor and The Terrain Perimeter has a variety of editable
ceiling heights from sea level. See “Importing properties that affect the appearance of the terrain in
Elevation Data” on page 363. 2D and 3D views. See “Terrain Specification
The program automatically positions Floor 1 a set Dialog” on page 357.
distance above the terrain. To do this, it first finds the
Elevation Data Tools

Select Terrain> Elevation Data to add placed, the terrain will be flat regardless of the
elevation information to your terrain. object’s specified elevation.
When terrain is generated, this data is used to
To avoid unexpected results, do not draw
calculate the surface of your site and is represented Elevation Data objects with different eleva-
by contour lines in plan view and a curved surface in tion information at the same location.
3D. See “Displaying Terrain” on page 356.
Elevation data can be specified using the Elevation Elevation Points
Point , Elevation Line , , Elevation Region An Elevation Point contains the absolute
elevation data for one point in the terrain
tools.
model. Typically, Elevation Points are imported
Elevation data can also be imported. See “Importing rather than placed manually.
Elevation Data” on page 363.
Home Designer Suite requires many points to make
The elevation of each Elevation Line, Spline and an accurate approximation of your site. Even small
Region is specified relative to sea level. sites may require over a hundred points to generate
an accurate model of the terrain if it is sloped. For the
In order to create rising and/or falling terrain,
sake of illustration, the following example shows
multiple terrain data objects with different elevation
only a few elevation points.
values must be used. If only one terrain data object is
350
Elevation Data Tools
To place an elevation point constant elevation. Elevation lines can be connected

to create a polyline with many straight sections. For
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation the sake of illustration, the images in the following
Point and click in plan view at the point example show single-section elevation lines.
where you would like to place elevation data.
2. The Elevation Point Specification dialog To draw an elevation line
opens. Enter an elevation value and click OK. 1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation
See “Elevation Point Specification Dialog” on
page 358. Line , then click and drag a line inside the
Terrain Perimeter in plan view.
3. Click somewhere else in plan view and the
Elevation Point Specification dialog opens 2. Click on the elevation line to select it, then click
again with the last elevation value entered. the Open Object edit button.
3. At first, an elevation line is at elevation 0' - 0".
In the Elevation Line Specification dialog,
specify the desired elevation and click OK. See
“Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog”
on page 359.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to draw additional eleva-
tion lines as needed.
120"
Elevation Points before terrain generation
4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 to place additional eleva-

tion points with varied elevation values as
needed.
0"
5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See
“Building the Terrain” on page 356.
Elevation Lines before terrain generation
5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See

“Building the Terrain” on page 356.
Contour lines after terrain generation
Elevation Points are most effective when

they are imported. When adding elevation
data manually, use Elevation Lines instead. See Contour lines after terrain generation
“Importing Elevation Data” on page 363.
Elevation Lines
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points along a line at a
351
An Elevation Region can also be created by

drawing a closed polyline using Elevation
Lines .
240"
Full Overview after terrain generation
After it is drawn, an Elevation Line can be edited 120"

much the way other line-based objects can. See
“Editing Line-Based Objects” on page 82.
Elevation Regions 0"
An Elevation Region contains absolute

elevation data for an enclosed region and is Elevation lines create a terrain grade; an
ideal for creating a flat surface in your terrain. elevation region creates a building pad.
To create an elevation region
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Elevation

Region .
2. There are two ways to add a Terrain Modifier to
your plan:
• Click once to place an 8’ (0.6 m) square feature
at that location.
• Click and drag from end-to-end to draw a fea-
ture sized as needed. See “Draw Polyline” on
page 102.
Contour lines after terrain generation
3. Click on the region to select it, then click the
4. At first, an elevation line is at elevation 0' - 0".
In the Elevation Region Specification dialog,
specify the desired elevation and click OK. See
“Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog”
on page 359.
After it is drawn, and Elevation Region can be
reshaped much the way other closed polyline-based Full Overview after terrain generation
objects can. See “Editing Closed Polyline-Based
Terrain Modifier Tools

Select Terrain> Modifier to access tools that Raised and Lowered Regions
allow you to modify the existing elevation
data by drawing a closed polyline. Their height is The Raised Region tool creates a raised
relative to the terrain surface generated from the area with a top surface that is flattened
Elevation Data provided in your plan. like a plateau but follows the surface of the terrain.
The Lowered Region tool creates a depression with
The elevation data associated with a Terrain Modifier a bottom that follows the terrain and is flattened.
only affects the terrain within its perimeter. The rest
of the terrain is unaffected.
352
Terrain Feature Tools
There are two ways to add a Terrain Modifier to your

plan:
• Click once to place a modifier with endpoints that
form a 10’ (4 m) square at that location.
Raised
Region • Click and drag from end-to-end to draw a feature
Lowered
Region sized as needed. See “Draw Polyline” on page
102.
Hills and Valleys Terrain Modifiers can only be drawn when a Terrain
Perimeter is present, and will only display in 3D
The Hill and Valley tools create raised when they are drawn within the perimeter. See
and lowered areas in the terrain that come “Displaying Terrain” on page 356.
to a point rather than flattening at their highest or
lowest elevations. Once created, Terrain Modifiers can be selected and
edited in a variety of ways. See “Editing Spline-
Hill
Valley
Terrain Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Feature to access tools for Polyline-Based Objects” on page 87 and “Editing
drawing bounded areas that follow the Spline-Based Objects” on page 90.
contours of the terrain rather than modifying them.
Terrain Features are useful for creating landscaping Terrain Features can be drawn in 2D and 3D
views.
features because they have specified heights and
materials. You can, for example, create paths and Rectangular Features
planting beds with gravel or mulch materials that
stand out in a grassy Terrain Perimeter. See “Adding The Rectangular Feature tool can be used to
Terrain Features” on page 111 of the User’s Guide. create straight-sided features that can be
edited into a wide variety of shapes.
In fact, Driveways , Garden Beds , Water Rectangular Features can also be edited like other
Features and Stepping Stones are special closed polyline-based objects. See “Editing Closed
Terrain Features with material and height attributes Polyline-Based Objects” on page 87.
already applied to them, saving you time when
drawing these objects. Round Feature
Terrain Features can only be drawn when a Terrain The Round Feature tool can be used to create
Perimeter is present, and will only display in 3D features with rounded edges and smoothly
when they are drawn within the perimeter. See curved corners.
“Displaying Terrain” on page 356.
Round Features can be edited like other closed
Terrain Features can be created in either of two ways: spline-based objects. See “Editing Spline-Based
• Click once to place a feature with endpoints that Objects” on page 90.
form a 10’ (4 m) square at that location.
• Click and drag from end-to-end to draw a feature
Kidney Shaped Features
sized as needed. See “Draw Polyline” on page The Kidney Shaped Feature tool allows you
102. to quickly create features with curved edges,
smooth corners and a right angle bend in its shape.
Once created, Terrain Features can be edited into
nearly any shape you require. See “Editing Closed
353
Kidney Shaped Features can be edited like other on the same floor as the Terrain Perimeter. The shape
closed spline-based objects. See “Editing Spline- of these holes follow the exterior surfaces of the
Based Objects” on page 90. walls and will automatically update if any of those
walls are moved.
For information about adding height and material
information to Terrain Features, see “Terrain Feature A Terrain Hole is a Terrain Feature that cuts a
Specification Dialog” on page 360. hole in the terrain. Terrain Holes are useful
for manually clipping the terrain around a foundation
Terrain Holes that does not match the footprint of the first floor.
By default, the program automatically cuts a hole in

the terrain around any structures located within and
Garden Bed Tools

Select Terrain> Garden Bed to access tools Kidney Shaped Garden Bed
that can be used to place garden bed features
in your terrain. You can draw a kidney shaped garden bed
with this tool. See “Kidney Shaped Features”
on page 353.
Polyline Garden Bed
Garden Beds are basically Terrain Features with
This tool draws a garden bed with straight
material and height attributes typical of planting
sides and four right angles. See “Rectangular
beds. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 353.
Features” on page 353.
You can specify a Garden Bed’s material and height
Round Garden Bed in its Terrain Feature Specification dialog. See
“Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on page 360.
Use this tool to draw garden beds with
rounded edges and smoothly curved corners. In addition, you can choose to distribute copies of a
See “Round Feature” on page 353. plant image within a Garden Bed. See “Distributed
Plant Panel” on page 360.
Water Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Water Feature to access Stream
tools for drawing ponds and streams in your
terrain. Select the Stream tool, then click and drag to
draw a stream. Streams are drawn and edited
Ponds are basically Terrain Features with material the same way that splines are. See “Draw Spline” on
and height attributes typical of bodies of water. See page 102 and “Editing Spline-Based Objects” on
“Terrain Feature Tools” on page 353. page 90.
Similarly, Streams are Terrain Curbs with a water Streams follow the contours of the terrain, so they
material. See “Terrain Wall and Curb Tools” on page may appear to flow uphill if they are not drawn
355. correctly in the terrain. Try to draw them so that they
follow a downward course for their entire length.
Round Pond
Once drawn, Water Features can be selected and
Use this tool to draw a pond with rounded edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
edges. See “Round Feature” on page 353.
Specify the material and set the height of Water
Features in their specification dialogs. See “Terrain
Kidney Shaped Pond Feature Specification Dialog” on page 360 and
This tool draws a kidney shaped pond. See “Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on page 362.
“Kidney Shaped Features” on page 353.
354
Stepping Stone Tools
Stepping Stone Tools

Select Terrain> Stepping Stone to place a Polyline Stepping Stone
walkway made of individual stepping stones.
The Polyline Stepping Stone tool draws
Stepping Stones are basically Terrain Features with rectangular stepping stones. See “Rectangular
material and height attributes typical of walking Features” on page 353.
paths. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 353.
There are two ways to draw Stepping Stones: Round Stepping Stone
• Click once to place a stepping stone with end- The Round Stepping Stone tool draws
points that form a 1’ (300 mm) square at that loca- stepping stones with rounded edges. See
tion. “Round Feature” on page 353.
• Click and drag from end-to-end to draw a step- Once drawn, Stepping Stones can be selected and
ping stone sized as needed. See “Draw Polyline” edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
on page 102.
By default, Stepping Stones have a concrete material;
however, you can specify the material and set the
height of Stepping Stones in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

Select Terrain> Terrain Wall and Curb to Retaining Walls
draw landscaping walls and curbs that follow
the contours of the terrain. Use the Straight Retaining Wall tool draws a
straight wall that holds back sloped terrain.
Straight and curved Terrain Walls and Curbs are
drawn just as other walls are. See “Creating Walls” Use the Curved Retaining Wall tool to draw
on page 114. a curved retaining wall.
Terrain Walls and Curbs are examples of Terrain A Retaining Wall’s height is determined by the
Paths. Other examples include Sidewalks and elevation of the terrain on each side. By default, the
Streams. See “Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on height of the wall matches the terrain on the high side
page 362. of the break and the bottom matches the low side. If
you insert a Retaining Wall into flat terrain, it looks
like a concrete strip in 3D views.
Terrain Walls
Once drawn, a Retaining Wall can be edited much
Use the Straight Terrain Wall tool to draw a
like other walls. See “Editing Walls” on page 119.
wall that sits on top of and follows the terrain.
Use the Spline Terrain Wall to draw a curved Terrain Curbs
terrain wall. This wall is drawn the same way
as a CAD Spline. See “Draw Spline” on page 102. Terrain Curbs are useful for creating curbs around
planting beds and along paths, driveways and roads.
Once drawn, a Terrain Wall can be like other line-
based objects. See “Editing Line-Based Objects” on Use the Straight Terrain Curb tool to draw a
page 82 and “Editing Spline-Based Objects” on page straight landscaping curb.
90. Use the Spline Terrain Curb tool to draw a
Terrain walls are 5’ (1500 mm) high and concrete by curved landscaping curb. This curb is drawn
default, but you can specify the material, height and the same way as a CAD Spline. See “Draw Spline”
more in the Terrain Path Specification. See “Terrain on page 102.
Path Specification Dialog” on page 362. Once drawn, a Terrain Curb can be like other line-
based objects. See “Editing Line-Based Objects” on
355
page 82 and “Editing Spline-Based Objects” on page Specification. See “Terrain Path Specification Dia-
90. log” on page 362.
You can specify the height of straight and spline ter-
rain curbs on the GENERAL panel of the Terrain Path You can also add Fencing to your terrain,
complete with gates from the Doors Library.
See “Fencing Tools” on page 112.
Terrain Objects in the Library

The Library Browser contains a variety of roadway objects. See “The Library Browser” on
objects that can be placed in a plan’s terrain, page 271.
including plants, exterior fixtures, accessories and
Displaying Terrain
The display of terrain objects in 2D and 3D A variety of tools are available to help you adjust the
views is controlled in the Display Options perspective of your 3D views. See “Editing 3D
dialog. See “Display Options Dialog” on page 74. Views” on page 311.
Like other objects, terrain objects are placed in
Drawing Groups that affect whether they display in Building the Terrain
front of or behind other objects. You can modify a When terrain is generated, Home Designer
selected object’s place in the drawing order by Suite gathers all elevation data that has been
clicking the View Drawing Group Edit Tools added to the model and creates a terrain surface. The
edit button. See “Drawing Group Edit Tools” on program interpolates the data to produce smooth
page 76. contours.
You can customize appearance of Terrain Features, A terrain perimeter with no additional elevation data
Roads and other terrain objects in plan view by drawn within it generates terrain that is flat at the
changing their line and fill styles. elevation 0' - 0", or sea level.
Plant images are represented in plan view by 2D The terrain is automatically built before a 3D view is
CAD symbols. You can select a plant’s symbol in the generated. This process takes a variable amount of
Plant Image Specification dialog. See “Image time, depending on the amount of elevation data and
Panel” on page 374. number of terrain features in the plan. The Building
Terrain progress dialog displays as terrain is
When elevation data has been drawn or imported into generated, sometimes only briefly, indicating the
a plan, contour lines will display in plan views. See progress.
“Elevation Data Tools” on page 350.
Terrain and 3D Drawing Time
In 3D Views
Terrain is typically large with many surfaces, which
In order for objects such as Terrain Features and often increases the drawing time of 3D views. The
Roads to be visible in 3D views, they must be drawn time required is affected by the amount of elevation
within the Terrain Perimeter. Any portions of these data and number of terrain features present.
objects drawn outside of the Terrain Perimeter will
not be seen in 3D views. See “Terrain Feature Tools” Lights and symbols can be placed outdoors and
on page 353. included in 3D views when the terrain is generated.
These objects can also contribute to the time needed
to generate 3D views. See “Rendering Tips” on page
319.
Editing Terrain Objects

Before a terrain object can be edited, it must be
selected. All terrain objects can be selected in plan
356
Terrain Specification Dialog
view. In addition, the Terrain Perimeter and Terrain • Elevation Lines are edited like other line-based
Features can be selected in 3D views. See “Selecting objects.
Objects” on page 79. • The shape of a Raised Region, Lowered Region,
A selected terrain object can be edited using its edit Hill, and Valley can be edited like a spline.
handles, edit tools and specification dialog. See • Terrain Features are edited like other spline- and
“Specification Dialogs” on page 25. polyline-based objects.
Any time elevation data is changed, the terrain must
be rebuilt. This can be done by selecting Terrain> Using the Edit Tools
Build Terrain , and occurs automatically when a A selected terrain object can be edited in a variety of
3D view is created. ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. The edit
tools available for a terrain object depends on the
Using the Edit Handles type of object selected. See “The Edit Toolbar” on
page 23.
Terrain objects can be moved, resized, and reshaped
using their edit handles. How a selected object can be
Note: If you copy terrain objects from one plan to
edited depends on what type of object it is. See another, you cannot view the pasted objects in 3D
“Editing Objects” on page 79. unless a Terrain Perimeter exists.
• The Terrain Perimeter can be moved, resized, and
Using Dimensions
reshaped like a polyline-based objects.
• Elevation Points can be moved in plan view using Like many other types of objects, terrain objects can
the Move edit handle. be resized and moved using dimensions. For more
information see “Moving Objects Using
Terrain Specification Dialog

The Terrain Specification dialog controls • Select the Terrain Perimeter and click the Open
how your terrain is modeled, as well as its Object edit button.
appearance. It can be accessed in any of two ways:
• Double-click the Terrain Perimeter using the
Select Objects tool.
General Panel
1 Specify how the Building Pad is generated • Check Automatic to have Home Designer Suite
beneath the structure. See “Foundations and the automatically lower the terrain relative to the first
Terrain” on page 225. floor. See “Terrain Height vs Floor Height” on
• To specify the distance between Floor 1 and the page 350.
terrain at the building footprint center, uncheck • Check Flatten Pad to flatten the area beneath the
Automatic and enter a value in the Subfloor building. To create a walkout basement, uncheck
Height Above Terrain field. this box.
357
2 Clipping - Check Hide Terrain Intersected The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the
by Building to cut out the portion of the terrain selected edge has been converted into an arc. See
that is intersected by the first floor footprint. “Arc Panel” on page 104.
Checking this box prevents the generation of contour
lines inside the house.
Polyline Panel Line Style Panel
The POLYLINE panel states the length of the Terrain
Perimeter’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and its
for a variety of other objects in the program. See
Volume.
The settings on the this panel are available for a
variety of other objects in the program. For Fill Style Panel
information about these settings, see “Polyline
Panel” on page 106. The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the
appearance of the Terrain Perimeter in plan view. See
Selected Line/Arc Panel
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the Materials Panel
selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. See
“Line Panel” on page 103. The settings on the MATERIALS panel let you specify
the terrain surface and terrain skirt materials used in
3D views. These materials are not calculated in the
Materials List. See “Materials Panel” on page 296.
Elevation Point Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Point Specification vation Point using the Select Objects tool.
dialog, select an elevation point and click the
Open Object edit button, or double-click on an Ele- Use the Elevation Point Specification dialog to
define the selected elevation point and control its
appearance in plan view.
1 Location - Specify the exact location of the 2 Display -

elevation point.
• Specify the Elevation of the selected Elevation • In the Text field, type any notes that you would
Point. like to display beside the selected Elevation Point
• X Position - Enter the x coordinate of the eleva- in plan view.
tion point. • Enter the Marker Radius, which is the size of the
• Y Position - Enter the y coordinate of the eleva- point marker, measured from the center to an
tion point. edge.
358
Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog
Line Style Panel Text Style Panel

The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available The settings on the TEXT STYLE panel control the
for a variety of other objects in the program. For appearance of the selected Elevation Point’s text. For
information about these settings, see “Line Style more information, see “Text Style Panel” on page
Panel” on page 103. 165.
Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line or Elevation Polyline Panel
Region Specification dialog, select one or
more Elevation Line, or a polyline composed of ele- The POLYLINE panel states the Length of an open
vation Lines, or an Elevation Region and click the polyline or the Perimeter of a closed polyline. If
Open Object edit button. You can also double-click multiple Elevation Line segments form a closed
Elevation Region, its Area will be calculated.
an Elevation Line using the Select Objects tool. Elevation Lines do not have a thickness, so they have
The Elevation Line Specification dialog is used to no Volume.
define the selected Elevation Line and controls its
appearance in plan view. Selected Line/Arc Panel
The settings in this dialog are the same as those in the The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the
Elevation Region Specification dialog. See selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. See
“Elevation Regions” on page 352. “Line Panel” on page 103.
Elevation Panel selected edge has been converted into an arc. See
“Arc Panel” on page 104.
Line Style Panel

• Specify the Elevation of the selected Elevation The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available
Line, Spline, or Polyline. for a variety of other objects in the program. See
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

The Hill/Valley Specification defines the • Enter a Height for the selected Hill or Valley.
selected Hill or Valley and controls its This height is relative to the terrain surface that is
appearance in plan view. generated from the Elevation Data in your plan.
See “Terrain Modifier Tools” on page 352.
To open the Hill/Valley Specification dialog, select a
Hill or Valley and click the Open Object edit button,
or double-click the region(s) using the Select Polyline Panel
Objects tool. The POLYLINE panel states the length of the hill or
valley’s Perimeter and its enclosed Area. Hills and
Hill / Valley Panel Valleys do not have a volume measurement.
Line Style Panel

359
Fill Style Panel

appearance of the selected object in plan view. See
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

To open the Raised/Lowered Region The Raised / Lowered Region Specification dialog
Specification dialog, select a raised or is similar to the Hill / Valley Specification dialog.
lowered region and click the Open Object edit See “Hill / Valley Specification Dialog” on page 359.
button, or double-click the region(s) using the Select
Objects tool.
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature Specification including Water Features, Stepping Stones,
dialog, select a Terrain Feature and click the Driveways, and Parking Lots.
Open Object edit button, or double-click the Terrain
Garden Beds are also a type of Terrain Feature and
Feature using the Select Objects tool. have an additional Distributed Plant panel in their
Most of the panels in this dialog are similar to those specification dialog. Garden Beds also have a
for a variety of other objects in the program, preview pane on the right side of their specification
dialog.
General Panel
• Specify the top Height of the Terrain Feature, rel- • Check Clip Overlapping Terrain Features to
ative to the terrain surface, using a positive or suppress the 3D display of any part of the selected
negative number. Terrain Feature intersected by other Terrain Fea-
• Specify the feature’s Thickness. tures with a lower Height value. Clipping is use-
ful for creating features that contain other features
If a feature’s height above the terrain is greater than such as planters or swimming pools.
its thickness, the program will fill in the resulting
gap.
Distributed Plant Panel

This panel is only available when the selected
Terrain Feature is a Garden Bed. See “Garden Bed
360
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
1 Specify the Current Object assigned to the • Specify the Distance between the objects in the
selected garden bed. When an object is garden bed, as measured from their center points.
assigned, its name and a preview of a single instance • Select Standard Grid to position the objects in
of it display here. rows and columns based on the standard X/Y grid
• Click the Select button to choose an object from in the program.
the library. See “Select Library Object Dialog” on • Select Alternate Grid to position the objects in
page 283. rows and columns based on the shape of the gar-
• Click the Delete button to unassign the Current den bed.
Object from the selected garden bed.
• Click the Edit button to open the Current Object’s 4 Object Orientation - Specify how or if the
objects in the garden bed are rotated. These
specification dialog. Changes made here affect all settings do not affect the garden bed itself or its
objects generated within the garden bed. See edges.
“Specification Dialogs” on page 25.
• Specify the Angle that the distributed objects
should be placed at.
You can replace the plant assigned to a
Garden Bed by applying a new one directly • Select Absolute Angle to rotate the objects to the
from the library. See “Replace From Library” on specified Angle as measured from an imaginary
page 283. horizontal line drawn from the origin towards the
right.
2 Display Options - • Select Relative Angle to rotate the objects rela-
tive to the angle of the region’s first edge or, if
• Check Show Objects to display the distributed
that edge is curved, to the angle of its chord. The
objects in plan view.
first edge is typically located at the top of the gar-
3 Object Spacing - Specify how the objects in den bed when it is first created; however, this can
the garden bed are spaced. change as the bed is edited.
361
• Select Random Angle to rotate the objects in the Selected Line/Arc Panel
region at a variety of random angles.
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the
5 Object Positioning - Specify the positioning of selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. See
the distributed objects relative to a point of “Line Panel” on page 103.
origin within the garden bed.
• Specify the X Offset, the horizontal distance in selected edge has been converted into an arc. See
plan view from the garden bed’s specified point of “Arc Panel” on page 104.
origin.
• Specify the Y Offset, the vertical distance in plan
view from the garden bed’s specified point of ori-
gin.
Line Style Panel
• Select From Polyline Center to measure the off-
set from the garden bed’s center point. The settings on the LINE STYLE panel are available
• Select Polyline Start to measure the offset from
the garden bed’s start point. This start point is typ-
ically located at the top left of the garden bed
when it is first created; however, this can change Fill Style Panel
as the garden bed is edited. The settings on the FILL STYLE panel affect the
appearance of the selected object in plan view. See
6 A preview of the garden bed displays on the “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
right side of the dialog box. See “Dialog
Preview Panes” on page 25.
Materials Panel
Polyline Panel The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
The POLYLINE panel states the length of the garden appearance of the selected object in 3D views. See
bed’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and its Volume. “Materials Panel” on page 296.
Garden Bed Specification Dialog

To open the Garden Bed Specification Because a Garden Bed is a type of Terrain Feature,
dialog, select a Garden Bed and click the the settings in this dialog are essentially the same as
Open Object edit button or double-click the Garden those in the Terrain Feature Specification dialog.
Bed using the Select Objects tool. See “Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on page
360.
Terrain Path Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Path Specification button or double-click the terrain path using the
dialog, select a Sidewalk, Stream, Terrain Select Objects tool.
Wall or Terrain Curb and click the Open Object edit
Most of the panels in this dialog are similar to those
for a variety of other objects in the program.
362
Importing Elevation Data
General Panel
Size - Enter the Width of the object and the Height See, too, “Selected Edge” on page 80 and “Change
above the terrain. If the Height value is a negative Line/Arc” on page 96.
number, the object sinks into the terrain.
Line Style Panel
Polyline Panel
The POLYLINE panel states the length of the Terrain for a variety of other objects in the program. See
Path’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and its Volume. “Line Style Panel” on page 103.
See “Polyline Panel” on page 106.
Fill Style Panel
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when the appearance of the selected object in plan view. See
selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. See “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
“Line Panel” on page 103.
The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the Materials Panel
selected edge has been converted into an arc. See The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
“Arc Panel” on page 104. appearance of the selected object in 3D views. See
Importing Elevation Data

Elevation data can be added to a plan using the tools Elevation data saved in text files can be imported
and techniques described in this chapter or it can be using the Import Terrain Assistant.
imported from a file.
Home Designer Suite can import elevation data GPS Exchange Files
saved in GPS Exchange (.gpx) and a variety of text Elevation data in standard format .gpx files created
file formats (.txt, .csv, .prn, .xyz, .auf and .nez). If using a GPS system can also be imported using the
your terrain data is not saved in one of these file Import GPS Data Assistant. See “Import GPS Data
formats, there are third party programs available that Assistant” on page 365.
can convert to these formats.
GPS data may include three types of points - Way,
Track, and Route. Home Designer Suite can only
Text Files
import a .gpx file if it includes one or more Way
Elevation data can be saved in text files as x, y, and z Points, and cannot use Route Points at all. If a .gpx
coordinates where x and y define the location of a file does not include any Way Points, it will not be
point on a Cartesian grid, and z defines the elevation imported, and if it includes any Route Points, they
for that point. Each data point must be on a separate will be ignored.
line in the text file.
Home Designer Suite supports the import of data in
Importable text files can come from surveyors, other standard .gpx files that adhere to the GPX 1.1
software programs, or you can create your own using Schema. Files that do not follow this standard cannot
a GPS system. be imported.
363
Import Terrain Assistant

The Import Terrain Assistant allows you to have a brief description. In order to import elevation
import elevation data saved in text (.txt) file data from a text file, you need to know how the data
format into a plan. in the file is organized.
Each data point in this format has information about To launch the Import Terrain Assistant, select File>
its X-axis (East to West location), Y-axis (North to Import> Terrain Data . Click Next.
South location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might also
Select File
1 Select a file to import. • #XYZ - Information in this format begins with a

number that belongs to each data point followed
• Click the Browse button to locate a file on your by the X coordinate, the Y coordinate, and the Z
computer. See “Importing Files” on page 38. coordinate.
• If a file has been selected, its full pathname dis- • #XYZ Description - Information in this format
plays here for reference; if a file has not been begins with a number that belongs to each data
selected, the directory of the last file imported point followed by the X coordinate, the Y coordi-
displays. If the pathname is not that of a valid .txt nate, the Z coordinate, and a description.
file, this text will display in red. • YXZ - Information in this format begins with the
Y coordinate followed by the X coordinate and
2 Select the organization of the data. the Z coordinate.
• #YXZ - Information in this format begins with a
Elevation information can be organized in one of six number that belongs to each data point followed
different ways, and can be separated by either a by the Y coordinate, the X coordinate, and the Z
comma (comma delimited) or a space (space coordinate.
delimited).
• #YXZ Description - Information in this format
• XYZ - Information in this format begins with the begins with a number that belongs to each data
X coordinate, followed by the Y coordinate and point followed by the Y coordinate, the X coordi-
the Z coordinate. nate, the Z coordinate, and a description.
Click Next to continue.
364
Import GPS Data Assistant
Scale Data
1 The total number of data points to be imported 2 Select the Units of measurement used for each
and the ranges of their coordinates are axis.
described here.
Click Next to finish.
Import GPS Data Assistant

The Import GPS Data Assistant allows you
to import terrain data from the standard .gpx Due to the lack of accuracy in some GPS
file format. See “GPS Exchange Files” on page 363. systems, exact distances using the Import
GPS Data Assistant are not guaranteed.
Select File> Import> GPS Data to open the Import
GPS Data Assistant, then click Next to continue.
Select File
1 Select a file to import. displays. If the pathname is not that of a valid

.gpx file, this text will display in red.
• Click the Browse button to locate a .gpx file on
your computer. See “Importing Files” on page 38. Note: Not all GPS programs use the standard
.gpx file format; however, only files using the
• If a file has been selected, its full pathname is standard format can be imported.
reported here for reference; if a file has not been
selected, the directory of the last file imported Click Next to continue.
365
Import Data As
1 Specify which items you want to import by • Select “Terrain Perimeter” to create a closed Ter-
checking the box to the left of the Name. Items rain Perimeter polyline based on the position of
with unchecked boxes are not imported. either Way Points or Track Points. The points
themselves are not imported. A Terrain Perimeter
2 Specify what you would like the selected item has no elevation data associated with it. See “Ter-
to Import As from the drop-down list.
rain Perimeter” on page 349.
• Only Way Points have elevation data associated
with them. To import this data, import them as Way Points are typically imported as “Eleva-
“Elevation Points”. tion Data”, while Track Points are imported
• Select “Marker” to import either Way Points or as “Markers”, “Polylines’, or “Terrain Perimeter”.
Track Points as location markers. Markers have Click Next to finish.
no elevation data associated with them.
If you do not see the imported terrain, select
• Select “Polyline” to create an open CAD polyline
based on the position of Way Points or Track Window> Fill Window .
Points. The points themselves are not imported.
Polylines have no elevation data associated with
them.
366
Chapter 33:
Roads, Driveways and

Sidewalks
Roads and sidewalks are modeled in 3D like other Chapter Contents

terrain objects in Home Designer Suite. Because they • Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools
have much in common with terrain objects and rely • Displaying Road Objects
upon terrain data to be viewed in 3D, it is helpful to • Editing Road Objects
be familiar with terrain modeling before using these • Road Specification Dialog
tools. See “Terrain” on page 349.
Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools

Road objects can be drawn in plan view, “Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects” on page
camera views and overviews, but only when a 87.
Terrain Perimeter exists in the plan. See “Terrain
Once road objects have been placed, they can be
Perimeter” on page 349.
edited individually or as a group. See “Editing Road
Straight and Spline road objects: Objects” on page 368.
• Are typical line- and spline-based objects, and
can be edited as such. Road Tools
• Are flat along their widths, which makes it easy Select Terrain> Road and Sidewalk>
to create roads on sloping terrain. Straight Road, then click and drag to draw a
• Can be joined end-to-end to form intersections line within the Terrain Perimeter to draw a Straight
and networks. Road.
• Have a consistent width that can be defined in The ends of multiple road sections can be connected
their specification dialogs. See “Road Specifica- together. Roads are edited along their center line and
tion Dialog” on page 369 and “Terrain Path Spec- can be edited much like other line-based objects. See
ification Dialog” on page 362. “Editing Line-Based Objects” on page 82.
Driveways and Parking Lots, on the other hand, are Select Terrain> Road and Sidewalk> Spline
actually Terrain Features which follow the contours Road, then click and drag to draw a curved
of the terrain rather than cut into them. They are road composed of spline segments.
drawn as rectangles but can be edited to any shape. Spline roads are drawn and edited like other spline-
See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page 353 and based objects. See “Editing Spline-Based Objects”
on page 90.
367
Sidewalk Tools corner to draw a rectangle. See “Draw Polyline” on

page 102.
To create a sidewalk with no curves, select
Terrain> Road and Sidewalk> Straight Height, thickness and material information can be
Sidewalk, then click and drag a line within the specified in a driveway’s specification dialog. See
Terrain Perimeter. “Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on page 360.
Sidewalks are edited along their center line like line- Driveways can be edited like other closed polylines.
based objects. See “Editing Line-Based Objects” on See “Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects” on
page 82. page 87.
Select Terrain> Sidewalk> Spline Sidewalk,

Parking Lot
then click and drag to draw a curved sidewalk
composed of spline segments. A Parking Lot is a terrain feature with an
asphalt material assignment. To place a
Driveway Area parking lot, select Terrain> Road and Sidewalk>
Parking Lot, then click and drag from corner to
A Driveway Area is a terrain feature with a corner to draw a rectangle. See “Draw Polyline” on
concrete material assignment. To create a page 102.
driveway, select Terrain> Road and Sidewalk>
Driveway Area, then click and drag from corner to Height, thickness and material information can be
specified in a parking lot’s specification dialog. See
“Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on page 360.
Displaying Road Objects

Roads and sidewalks display in floor plan and Any portions of these objects drawn outside of the
3D views based on the settings in the Display Terrain Perimeter will not be seen in 3D views.
Options dialog. See “Layers” on page 74.
By default, the terrain rebuilds automatically when
road objects are added, removed or edited. If it does
In 3D Views
not, you can select Terrain> Build Terrain . See
In order for Road objects to be visible in 3D views, “Terrain Perimeter” on page 349.
they must be drawn within the Terrain Perimeter.
Editing Road Objects

Road objects can be selected in 2D and 3D views and • Spline Roads , Spline Sidewalks , Spline
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar and
their specification dialogs. Terrain Walls , and Spline Terrain Curbs
are edited along their centerline like CAD
Terrain Walls and Terrain Curbs are also splines. See “Draw Spline” on page 102.
examples of Road objects. See “Terrain Wall and
Curb Tools” on page 355. • Driveway Areas and Parking Lots are
edited like other closed polyline based objects.
Using the Mouse See “Editing Closed Polyline-Based Objects” on
page 87.
The edit handles available for a selected road object
depend on the type of object selected.
• Straight Roads straight Terrain Walls , Road objects can be customized in their
straight Terrain Curbs , and Straight specification dialogs. See “Road Specification
Dialog” on page 369, “Terrain Feature Specification
Sidewalks are edited along their centerline
Dialog” on page 360, and “Terrain Path Specification
like a line or open polyline. See “Editing Line-
368
Road Specification Dialog

A selected road object can be edited in a variety of
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. See “The
Road Specification Dialog

To open the Road Specification dialog, select Many of the settings in this dialog are similar to
a Straight Road or Spline Road and click the those in the Terrain Path Specification dialog. See
Open Object edit button. “Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on page 362.
General Panel
Size - Specify the Width and Height of the road Line Style Panel
relative to the terrain.
This panel is the same as the LINE STYLE panel in
many other specification dialogs. See “Line Style
Polyline Panel
The POLYLINE panel states the length of the road’s
Perimeter, its Area and its Volume. For more Fill Style Panel
information, see “Polyline Panel” on page 106.
appearance of the selected object in plan view. For
information about these settings, see “Fill Style
The SELECTED LINE panel is available when a Panel” on page 76.
Straight Road is selected. For more information, see
“Line Panel” on page 103. Materials Panel
The SELECTED ARC panel is available when the The settings on the MATERIALS panel affect the
curved segment of a Straight Road is selected. See appearance of the selected object in 3D views. For
“Arc Panel” on page 104. information about these settings, see “Materials
The material selected here is not calculated in the
Materials List. See “Materials Lists” on page 377.
369
370
Chapter 34:
Plants
The Plant Tools allow you to create planting designs Chapter Contents
in your terrain. • Plant Tools
The Terrain Tools are discussed in their own chapter. • Plant Chooser Dialog
See “Terrain” on page 349. • Hardiness Zones
• Plant Image Specification Dialog
Plant Tools
Select Terrain> Plant to add plants to your Garden Beds
landscaping plan. Plants can also be placed in
a plan directly from the library. See “Placing Library Garden Beds are special Terrain Features
Objects” on page 281. with material and height attributes typical of
planting beds. In addition, you can choose to
Plant objects are actually images, which provide distribute copies of a plant image within a Garden
realism while avoiding high 3D surface count. Once Bed. See “Garden Bed Tools” on page 354.
created, plant images can be selected and edited
much like other image objects. See “Editing Images” Plants Library Catalogs
on page 327.
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser to Designer Core Catalogs> Plants to access a
open the Plant Chooser dialog and find plants selection of plant images. Select the library object
based on their characteristics and requirements. See you want, then click in any view to place it in the
“Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 372. plan. See “The Library” on page 271.
Select Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Image A selection of Bonus Catalogs of plants is also
to create a plant image. Once a plant image is available for download. See “Home Designer Bonus
created, it can be added to the library for future use. Catalogs” on page 276.
See “Creating Images” on page 326.
In addition, you can add plants to the library. See
Select Terrain> Plant> Show Hardiness “Adding Library Content” on page 279.
Zones to access regional climate zone maps.
See “Hardiness Zones” on page 373.
371
Plant Chooser Dialog

Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Chooser or The search parameters in this dialog correspond to
click the Plant Chooser button at the bottom the settings on the PLANT INFORMATION panel of the
of the Library Browser window to open the Plant Plant Image Specification dialog. See “Plant
Chooser. Information Panel” on page 375.
Use this dialog to search the library for plant images
that match your search parameters. You can search
using any or all of the options in the Plant Chooser.
1 Type the Name of a plant that you would like to 3 Check one or more boxes to specify the
find. selected Sub-Type to search for.
• Specify the plant’s Common Name, Scientific
Name, or its Variety Name. 4 Specify the plant Needs to search for. These
include the Sun, Water, Soil pH, and
• A Pronunciation field is also provided. In the Hardiness Zone range. See “Hardiness Zones” on
Plant Image Specification dialog, it is populated page 373.
with a phonetic pronunciation guide for the
plant’s scientific name. 5 Flowers and Foliage -
2 Check one or more boxes to indicate selected • Specify the Flower Color to search for. Multiple
plant Type to search for. colors can be selected.
372
Hardiness Zones
• Specify the Leaf Color to search for. Multiple

8 Select which types of plant Object Type to
colors can be selected search for. 3D Plants are symbol objects, while
• Specify the Bloom Time to search for, which is Plant Images are two dimensional images.
the season when the plant produces flowers.
9 Click the Search button at the bottom of the
dialog to search for plants that meet your search
6 Specify the plant Height at maturity to search criteria. The search results display to the right.
for.
• An average mature height range can be entered 10 Your search results display here.
using the From and To drop-down lists.
• A specific Height at Maturity to search for can • The Number of Items that match your search
be entered in the text field. criteria is stated.
• A specific Starting Age, in months, can be • Specify whether you want the search results to
entered in the text field. use the Common Name or Scientific Name.
• A specific Age at Maturity, in months, can be • Click on the name of a plant in the list to see its
entered in the text field. location in the Library Browser.
7 Check one or more boxes to search for plants 11 Click the View Item button to see more
with Special Characteristics. information about the selected plant in the
Plant Information dialog. See “Plant Image
Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show Hardiness
Zones to view a selection of regional
Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the drop-down list at
the top left to select various regions.
Plant Image Specification Dialog

Select a plant in a plan view or 3D view and
click the Open Object edit button to open the
Plant Image Specification dialog.
This dialog can also be accessed by selecting

Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Image .
The PLANT INFORMATION and PLANT DESCRIPTION
panels are also found in the Plant Information
dialog, which can be accessed from the Plant
Chooser dialog. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on
page 372.
373
Image Panel
1 General - • Specify the to Top distance, measured from the

Elevation Reference to the top edge of the image.
• The path and name of the selected plant’s Image • Specify the to Bottom distance, measured from
File displays here. the Elevation Reference to the bottom edge of the
• Click Browse to specify the saved location on image.
your computer of the image that represents the
plant in 3D views. 3 Specify the location of the selected plant
image’s Center Point.
• A number of 2D Plant Symbols are available to • Position the selected plant image in reference to
represent the image in plan view. Select one from the plan coordinates by specifying its X Coordi-
the drop-down list. nate and Y Coordinate.
2 Specify the Size/Elevation of the plant image, 4 Options -

as seen in 3D views.
• Specify the Height and Width of the image. • Check Reverse Image to reflect the appearance
• When Retain Aspect Ratio of is checked, if you of the image about an imaginary vertical line
change either the Height or Width, the other through its center.
value changes to maintain this ratio. If this is • Check Image Always Faces Camera to prevent
unchecked and you resize the plant image, it may the plant image from rotating with the camera.
become distorted.
• Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to reset 5 If the selected plant image has been
copyrighted, its Copyright Information
the image’s original aspect ratio and remove any displays here.
distortion caused by resizing.
• Select the Elevation Reference from the drop- 6 A preview of the selected plant image displays
here. The Glass House Rendering Technique is
not available for plant images. See “Dialog Preview
setting labels.
374
Plant Image Specification Dialog
Plant Information Panel

The settings on the Plant Information panel
correspond to the search parameters in the Plant
Chooser. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 372.
Plant Description Panel
1 A detailed Description of the plant displays in assigned to that layer. See “Label Panel” on page
this text field. 166.
2 Information in the Lighting Comments fields

describes the plant’s light requirements.
3 Hardiness Zone Comments are given here.

See “Hardiness Zones” on page 373.
Fill Style Panel

The Fill Style panel controls the appearance of the
selected plant’s 2D Plant Symbol in plan view. By
default, plant images’ fill style is None
(Transparent). For information about the settings on
this panel, see “Fill Style Panel” on page 76.
If the plant’s 2D Plan Symbol does not form a closed
shape, the settings on the Fill Style panel will have
no effect on the appearance of the plant in plan view.
Label Panel
Plant labels display in plan view when the “Plants,
Labels” layer is turned on and use the Text Style
375
376
Chapter 35:
Materials Lists
Home Designer Suite can calculate a Materials List

in three ways: for All Floors, From Area, or for The Materials List’s calculations are based on
Room. assumptions that may not match your building
style. Home Designer Suite makes no representa-
Materials Lists can be created, edited, and printed tion as to the accuracy or reliability of the Materials
directly from the program. They can also be exported List generated by Home Designer Suite. Always
as text files for use in other programs. compare the Materials List with a manual take-off
before providing a quote or ordering materials for a
job.
The Materials List Tools

Select Tools> Materials List to access the Calculate From Area
Materials List tools.
In plan view only, select Tools> Materials
A Materials List is like a snapshot of the current plan List> Calculate From Area to produce a
at the time that the list is made. Any changes made to Materials List for the portion of a plan on a single
the model after a Materials List is generated are not floor that is included within a temporary rectangular
included in that list. Create a new Materials List if Materials List Polyline.
you would like it to include these changes.
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is complete To use Calculate from Area
to generate a Materials List. In fact, you can create a 1. In plan view, select Tools> Materials List>
series of Materials Lists reflecting costs at various
stages of a project. Calculate from Area .
2. Click and drag to draw a rectangular marquee
Calculate from All Floors around the area of the current floor that you
would like to produce a Materials List for.
Select Tools> Materials List> Calculate
Materials for All Floors to generate a 3. When the mouse button is released, a Materials
Materials List for the entire model. List for the area within the rectangle will dis-
play.
Materials lists calculated from all floors can be
lengthy, and only a portion of the list may display on Calculate From Area rectangles are temporary and
your screen at one time. Use the scroll bars to scroll do not display in plan view after the list is created.
through the complete list. Move the pointer to cells
in the list and click to make changes.
377
Calculate Materials in Room not included. An object will be counted in the

Materials List if its center point is located inside of
To create the Materials List for a room, select the room.
the room and then select Tools> Materials
List> Calculate Materials for Room.
Calculate Structural Materials
Calculate Materials in Room is also available for Deck
on a selected room’s edit toolbar. See “Editing The structural materials for a selected deck
Rooms” on page 135. can be calculated in a Materials List by
A Materials List calculated from a room is created clicking the Calculate Structural Materials for
for only the contents of that room: wall materials are Deck edit button. See “Decks” on page 138.
Creating an Accurate Materials List

In order to take full advantage of Home Designer symbol or structural element. See “Architectural
Suite’s Materials List capabilities, there are several vs CAD Objects” on page 67.
things to keep in mind. • Bear in mind that using generic objects like
• The accuracy of your Materials List is directly geometric shapes from the library to represent
related to the accuracy of your model. Floor and objects that aren’t available in Home Designer
ceiling heights, wall lengths, and structural set- Suite can result in items being calculated in the
tings all directly affect Materials List calculations. Materials List in a manner that you might not
• It takes more than just making your drawing look expect.
right to generate an accurate Materials List. If, for
example, you use CAD lines to draw an item on a Framing in the Materials List
floor plan, that item will not be included in the You can specify whether framing materials are
Materials List. A better way would be to use a calculated by lineal foot, as a cut list, or as a buy list
in the Structural Member Reporting dialog.
Structural Member Reporting

The Structural Member Reporting dialog counting the individual pieces present in the
allows you to specify the method used to model.
calculate framing members in the Materials List. • Buy List calculates the framing materials of the
There are four options to choose from: different structural components of the plan by
• Lineal Length calculates the framing materials of counting individual pieces and matching them to
the different structural components of the plan in common board lengths.
linear feet. • Mixed Reporting calculates framing materials
• Cut List calculates the framing materials of the using a combination of lineal lengths and piece
different structural components of the plan by counts and is recommended for saved Materials
Lists in legacy plans.
Structural Member Reporting Dialog

To open the Structural Member Reporting list and click the Edit button. See “Default Settings
dialog, select Edit> Default Settings , then vs Preferences” on page 47.
select “Structural Member Reporting” from the tree
You can also open this dialog by selecting Tools>
Materials List> Structural Member Reporting
378
Organizing Materials Lists
• Select Total Lineal Length to calculate framing

materials in linear feet.
• Select Cut List to calculate framing materials by
counting the individual pieces present in the
model.
• Select Buy List to calculate framing materials by
counting individual pieces and matching them to
common board lengths.
• Select the Length Units that you want to use
from the drop-down list. The selected unit(s) are
Choose a Materials List Report Method. The used in the Materials List when either Cut List or
selected method will affect subsequently created Buy List is the selected method of reporting. Not
Materials Lists, but not any that may already exist. available when Mixed Reporting or Total Lineal
Length is selected.
• Select Mixed Reporting to calculate framing
materials using a combination of lineal lengths
and piece counts.
Organizing Materials Lists

You can control what items are calculated in the platforms are prime examples. If you need to
Materials List by specifying which categories are generate a Materials List for only part of a plan, such
used. as an addition, consider making a copy of the plan
file. In the copy, delete the as-built portion of the
There are some parts of a model that cannot be
plan and then generate a Materials List.
excluded from the Materials List. Floor and ceiling
Columns
Categories
Edit
Toolbar
Categories and Framing, which display in the ID column.
The line items in the Materials List are organized Unlike other categories that calculate materials or
into a set of predefined categories, such as Electrical objects, the General category lists information about
379
the building’s thermal envelope. See “Conditioned of the dialog to view their location in a plan view
Area Totals” on page 382. window.
To specify a line item’s category Find Object in Plan

1. Create a Materials List. To find out where a line item in the Materials
2. Click in the cell in the ID column for a line item. List is located in the model, select its row or
any cell in its row and click the Find Object in Plan
3. Select the desired category from the drop-down edit button. A view window opens in which theobject
list that becomes available. or objects associated with that line item are selected.
The categories that are available cannot be altered; If a plan view showing the floor that the object is on
however, you can specify which categories are is open, that view will become active and the object
included for individual lists in the Materials List will be selected. If no such view is open, a new
Display Options dialog. unsaved view showing the object’s floor will be
created. See “View Windows” on page 61.
Details Dialog
If the selected item is a component of a complex
For information about one or more selected object like an Auto Dormer, Mulled Unit, Bay
line items in a Materials List, click the Details Window, or Architectural Block, the parent object
edit button. The Details dialog displays all Materials will be selected in the plan instead of the individual
List columns for reference, which can be helpful component.
when not all columns are in use in the Materials List.
It also lists the Source Object of the selected line
Note: The Find Object in Plan tool is not available
item or items.
for objects that cannot be selected: for example,
This dialog will also open when multiple objects wall framing objects and roofs.
located on more than one floor are selected in a
Materials List and you click the Find Object in Plan If the selected row or rows in a Materials List refer to
objects on different floors, the Details dialog will
edit button.
open when you click the Find Object in Plan
When one or more line items located on the same edit button.
floor are selected, click the Find button at the bottom
Materials List Specification Dialog

When a Materials List is open, select The Categories listed here appear in the ID column
Tools>Display Options to open the Materials of the Materials List in the order they are presented
List Specification dialog for the current list. here.
• Check the box beside the name of each category
that you want to display in the currently active
Materials List.
• Multiple rows can be selected together using Shift
and Ctrl keys. See “Shift and Ctrl Select” on page
81.
Note: The information in a suppressed category is

still part of the Materials List. If the Materials List is
exported, suppressed categories are exported, as
well.
380
Editing Materials Lists
Editing Materials Lists

Materials lists can be edited in a variety of ways. You Tool Tips
can adjust the width of a column by clicking and
dragging the bar on the right side of the column Whenever you mouse over a cell in the Count
name. column, a Tool Tip will display, providing
information about the cell’s contents. When the
Count is a total length, area, or volume, it may be
Adding Information
rounded. The Tool Tip will show the value with
You can enter information in the Price and Comment greater accuracy.
column for each line item.
Adding price or other information for any item is Total Cost
straightforward. Simply click in the cell and type the Total Cost for a line item is calculated using the
desired information. Count, Price, %Markup, Labor and Equipment
columns to calculate the cost. The formula used is:
Changing Information
(Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (% Markup/100))
You can change the information in any column in an + ((Count + Extra) * Labor) + ((Count + Extra) *
individual Materials List. As with added information, Equipment)
click in a cell to select the existing text, then type in
If a column does not appear, 0 is used for the value of
the desired text.
that column with the exception of Count and Price,
To move an item in a Materials List to a new which are always used in the calculation even if they
category, select the cell in the ID column and choose are not shown.
a new category from the drop-down list that becomes
available. See “Categories” on page 379. Copying Information
Portions of a Materials List can be copied and then
Changing Count Units
pasted into a Text object or into a word
The material for a given object component will be processing program or spreadsheet program using
counted either by piece; linear feet or meters; square the standard Windows Copy (Ctrl + C), Cut (Ctrl +
feet or meters; or cubic yards or meters. The same X), and Paste (Ctrl + V) commands. See “Copying
method and unit used in the Count column will be and Pasting Text” on page 162.
used in the Extra column.
When the Count is linear, area, or volume, you can Number Formatting Dialog
choose a different unit of measurement:
Double-click in a cell in the Count column of
• Double-click in a cell in the Count column to the Materials List and click the Number
select and edit it, then choose a unit of measure- Formatting button to open this dialog and specify
ment from the drop-down list to the right of the the units, formatting, and accuracy of the value in
selected cell. that cell.
• You can also click the Number Formatting The settings in this dialog are also found in the
button when a Count cell is selected to specify the Dimension Defaults dialog. See “Format Panel” on
units and accuracy of the value in the selected page 148.
field. The specified unit is also used in the Extra
field for that row. See “Number Formatting Dia-
log” on page 381, below.
Printing and Exporting the Materials List

To print a Materials List, select File> Print A Materials List can also be exported into a
while the Materials List window is active. See tab delimited text (.txt) file that can be opened
“Print View Dialog” on page 387. directly by most spreadsheet programs. In a
381
Materials List window, select File> Export Materi- in whose databases you can keep your current pricing
als List. and generate reports based on this data.
The Write Materials Export File dialog will open. Before purchasing an estimating software program,
This is a typical File Save dialog. See “Exporting be sure that the program supports the direct import of
Files” on page 36. Chief Architect Materials Lists.
Any questions regarding estimating software
Estimating Software packages and how they interact with Home Designer
You can export a Materials List to a word processor Suite should be directed toward the company
or spreadsheet program to arrange it in your providing the estimating software. Home Designer
estimating format. You can also export the Materials Suite is unable to provide any technical support for
List to a number of commercial estimating programs third party programs.
Conditioned Area Totals

Conditioned Area is the space within a building that included; however, other hybrid Room Types as well
is heated and/or air conditioned, and a Thermal as exterior Room Types are not. See “Room Types”
Envelope is a three dimensional boundary built on page 132.
around the Conditioned Space that separates it from
the unconditioned space around it. Thermal Building Orientation
Envelopes are composed of floor platforms, ceiling
platforms, walls, doors, and windows. Walls, doors, and windows are categorized as north-,
south-, east-, or west-facing for the purposes of
When a Materials List is created, Home Designer conditioned area totals. The definition of North in a
Suite calculates the total areas of the components that plan is straight up on screen in plan view.
make up a structure’s Thermal Envelope and lists
• If a wall is oriented at 45º or less to north in a
them in the General category of the Materials List.
plan, it will be categorized as a “North” wall. Any
See “Categories” on page 379.
doors and windows in this wall will also be cate-
Doors are always categorized as doors rather than as gorized as “North”.
windows. This is the case even when a door is • Similarly, walls, doors, and windows oriented
specified as a Glass Door or when it is part of a within 45º of south, east, or west will be classified
mulled unit. as “South”, “East” or “West”, respectively.
Conditioned area totals can be entered into third The orientation of a curved wall is based on the
party programs such as REScheck™ to determine direction of its chord.
whether the plan meets the energy code in use in
your area. The General Category
The General category of the Materials List lists
Home Designer Suite does not check plans
information about the Thermal Envelope of the
for compliance with building or energy codes.
current plan. The total linear length of each wall type
used in the plan is also calculated in the General
Conditioned Area category. Walls with different heights are each listed
With the exception of Unspecified rooms, rooms that separately. See “Wall Type Definitions” on page 124.
are assigned an interior Room Type are included in
the Conditioned Area. “Open Below” rooms are also
382
Chapter 36:
Printing
Home Designer Suite provides a variety of printing Chapter Contents

options, from printing scaled plan views and 3D • Introduction to Printing
perspectives, to a set of templates that can be • The Printing Tools
assembled into a 3D model. • Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog
Home Designer Suite also allows you to save your • Print Preview
drawings in .pdf file format that can then be sent to a • Printing to Scale
printing service. • Printing Across Multiple Pages
• Printing to a PDF File
• Print View Dialog
Note: Screen captures are provided for • Print Image Dialog
illustrative purposes only and are not an
endorsement of any products.
Introduction to Printing
Home Designer Suite offers printing options to suit a Terminology
variety of needs. It is helpful to be familiar with these
options and choose the one that makes the most sense Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to be
for the project at hand. printed on. Specifying a paper size that is smaller
than the scaled drawing allows large drawings to be
printed across multiple pages.
Output Options
Drawing Scale - Drawings are often printed to scale
Printing a View - Floor plan and elevation views
for accuracy. ¼" = 1' and 1 m = 50 m are examples of
can be printed to scale. See “The Printing Tools” on
common scales. You can specify this scale in the
page 384.
Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. See “Drawing Sheet
Printing an Image - Any view of your plan can be Setup Dialog” on page 384.
printed as an unscaled image. See “Print Image
When a particular scale is not important, drawings
can also be sized to fill a particular area. See
Printing to PDF - Plans can be printed to a .pdf file “Printing to Scale” on page 386.
and printed remotely. See “Printing to a PDF File” on
page 387.
383
Printing Problems
Options available with one driver may not be
If you encounter difficulties when trying to print, see available with another. Printers supported in
“Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues” on one operating system may not be supported by
page 422. the manufacturer in another.
Printer Drivers Clearing Printer Information

A printer driver is a program that allows a printer to Some information specific to individual printers,
communicate with the rest of the computer system. such as available paper sizes, is saved with each plan
Drivers are usually created by the printer file. You can select File> Print> Clear Printer Info
manufacturer, are typically updated regularly, and to clear the printer-specific information stored with
can usually be downloaded free of charge from the the plan file.
manufacturer’s web site.
In addition to interpreting between the printer and the Displaying Objects
rest of the system, printer drivers save default page
You can control the display of objects when
size, orientation, margin size, and other information
printing directly from a view in the Display
that Home Designer Suite refers to unless you
Options dialog. See “Display Options Dialog” on
specify otherwise. See “Print View Dialog” on page
page 74.
387.
Objects must be visible in order for them to print;
If you experience printing problems, consider
however, not all items that are visible will print. See
installing updated drivers for your printer. Visit your
“Print Preview” on page 385.
printer manufacturer’s web site for more
information.
The Printing Tools

Select File> Print to view the Print Tools current scale and other settings. See “Print Preview”
submenu. These tools fall into two categories. on page 385.
Print Setup Tools Print Tools

Drawing Sheet Setup - Opens the Drawing Print - Prints the current plan to a specified
Sheet Setup dialog. See “Drawing Sheet scale. See “Print View Dialog” on page 387.
Setup Dialog” on page 384.
Print Image - Prints the current view
Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a scale including images, textures, and backdrop.
that fits your plan to the printer page. See Views printed with Print Image are not scaled. See
“Printing to Scale” on page 386. “Print Image Dialog” on page 389.
Center Sheet - Automatically centers the You can also select File> Export> Export
drawing sheet on your drawing. See “Center PDF to open the Export PDF dialog. See
Sheet” on page 386. “Print View Dialog” on page 387.
Print Preview - Shows on screen how the Clear Printer Info - Clears the printer information
current view will appear printed, based on the associated with the current page setup.
Drawing Sheet Setup Dialog

Select File> Print> Drawing Sheet Setup to
open the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog.
The Drawing Sheet Setup dialog is only available
when plan view or an Elevation view is active. When
384
Print Preview
a perspective view is active, Drawing Sheet Setup

is not available.
The settings in this dialog are specific to the current
view and are saved with the .plan file..
1 Specify the Orientation and Size of the • Uncheck Remember Print Settings after Print-
Drawing Sheet, which is the final printed ing to use the default settings every time a Print
output. dialog is opened. When checked, the program
remembers your settings for each type of view.
Check Show Drawing Sheet in View to turn on the
This setting is global, affecting all plan files.
display of the Drawing Sheet in orthographic views.
See “Drawing Sheet” on page 386.
3 Specify the Drawing Margins which define
the extents of the printable area of the active
2 Specify the Drawing Scale for the active view. view’s Drawing Sheet.
This scale is applied only when the view is
printed. • Specify the width of the Top, Bottom, Left, and
Right margins.
The scale is specified in two parts, which by default
are ¼ inch = 1 ft or 1 m = 50 m. Both imperial and
Clearing Printer Information
metric units of measurement are available and can be
selected independently. Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info to clear the
printer-specific information stored in the Drawing
Sheet Setup dialog.
Print Preview
Print Preview and its related display toggles The printer page displays as a solid white rectangle,
allow you to get a sense of what the current and blue lines along the edges of the printer page
view will look like when it is printed. indicate the edges of the printable area, as defined by
the currently selected printer. See “Drawing Sheet
Print Preview Setup Dialog” on page 384.
Select File> Print> Print Preview for an on- Objects such as camera symbols, and the Reference
screen representation of how the current view Grid that do not print do not display in Print
will appear when printed. Print Preview is only Preview . Text and dimension objects appear on-
available in plan view. See “Printing to Scale” on screen as they will on the printed page.
page 386.
385
When Print Preview is enabled, color will Drawing Sheet

display depending on whether Print in Color is The Drawing Sheet is a representation of the size and
selected in the Print View dialog. See “Print View orientation of the final printed output. It is different
Dialog” on page 387. from the printed page size, which means that you can
The Reference Display does print if it is visible. See print a large Sheet to multiple smaller pages.
“The Reference Floor” on page 231. The Drawing Sheet size and orientation are specified
in the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. See “Drawing
Color Sheet Setup Dialog” on page 384.
The Color toggle turns the on-screen display of color When the Drawing Sheet is set to display, a blue
on or off in all views. border representing the margins of the printable area
will also display for reference.
Reference Grid
The Reference Grid is an on-screen grid composed
Center Sheet
of regular squares that can be used to convey a sense Select File> Print> Center Sheet to center
of scale while drawing. It does not print, and its size the printer page on the drawing. This moves
can be specified in the General Plan Defaults the printer page relative to the drawing but does not
dialog. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page affect the coordinates of objects in the drawing. The
49. location of the printer page is independent for each
floor of the model.
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are available. Imperial drawing scales are typically noted in inches
The type of view that you are printing determines per foot. Larger scales, such as 1 inch = 50 feet or
which options you may choose from. 1:200m, are often used for property layouts.
Orthogonal Views Perspective Views

Plan views are orthogonal views, which means: Camera views and overviews display the model
• Your line of sight is at a right angle to all objects much the way the eye would see it and cannot be
in the view. scaled.
• Objects do not appear to decrease in size as their • Objects in the view may be at any angle relative
distances from the viewer increase. to your line of sight.
• Objects seem to decrease in size as their distances
Orthogonal views can be printed to scale.
from the viewer increase.
The scale set in the Page Setup dialog is inherited
Perspective views can only be printed using the
by the Print dialog. This scale can be overridden on
an individual basis in the Print dialog. See “Print Print Image tool. See “Print Image Dialog” on
View Dialog” on page 387. page 389.
Select File> Print> Scale to Fit in an orthogonal

view to select a suitable scale and re-center the
printer page so that everything fits on the page.
Printing Across Multiple Pages

When printing directly from a plan view it is possible To see on-screen what the drawing will look like
to print at a scale that does not fit the drawing on one when printed, select File> Print> Print Preview
page.
and then Window> Fill Window . Grey lines
across the drawing sheet indicate where the page
386
Printing to a PDF File
breaks will occur. See “Print Preview” on page 385. page is located within the printable area of the
page.
To print across multiple pages
4. Select File> Print> Print . In the Print dia-
1. Select File> Print> Print Preview to display log, make sure To Scale is selected, then click
the white rectangle representing the printer OK. See “Print View Dialog” on page 387.
paper. See “Print Preview” on page 385. 5. Select the printer paper rectangle and move it so
that the desired contents of your second printed
2. Click the Select Objects button, then click page are within the printable area and print To
near an edge of the printer paper rectangle to Scale.
select it.
6. Continue moving the printer paper and printing
When selected, the printer paper is highlighted as needed.
in pale grey and a square Move edit handle
displays at its center. When printing multiple pages, it is generally a good
idea to leave some overlap on the edges of each page
3. Click and drag the Move edit handle to position
to make sure that information near those edges is not
the printer paper so that the portion of your
left off the printed pages by mistake.
drawing that you would like to print on your first
Printing to a PDF File

Portable Document Format, or .pdf files, are one of You can also print to .pdf from any view by selecting
the most universally compatible and efficient file File> Export> Export PDF . See “PDF Files” on
formats and can be viewed and printed on most page 331.
computer platforms.
When you print to .pdf, you will be asked to create a
You can save any view as a .pdf file by selecting file name and choose a destination to save it in the
“Chief Architect Save as PDF” or any other PDF Save as PDF File dialog. See “Saving, Exporting,
writer installed on your system as the Destination and Backing Up Files” on page 34.
printer Name in either the Print View or Print Image
dialog. See “Print View Dialog” on page 387 and You can also import .pdf file into Home Designer
“Print Image Dialog” on page 389. Suite. See “Importing PDF Files” on page 331.
Print View Dialog

To print from plan view and the Materials settings that are available will vary depending on
List, select File> Print> Print. The Print which version of the dialog is open.
View or Print Materials List dialog opens. The
Select File> Export> Export PDF to open
the similar Export PDF dialog.
387
Note: 3D views can be printed using Print Image.
1 Select the Name of the Printer that you would • Select Drawing Sheet to print the entire sheet
like to use from the drop-down list. To print to even though you may be zoomed in on a portion
.pdf, select “Chief Architect Save as PDF” from the of the view. This is selected by default when the
list, or choose a .pdf writer installed on your system. Drawing Sheet is set to display in the current
See “Printing to a PDF File” on page 387. view.
• Select the DPI, or Dots Per Inch to use when • Select Current View to print only that portion of
printing, from the drop-down list. The available the active view that is currently visible on screen.
options may vary depending on the selected If you are zoomed out, any blank space outside of
printer. the printable objects in the view is ignored. This
is selected by default when the Drawing Sheet is
2 Select the Paper Orientation, Size, and not displaying in the current view.
Source. The available Size and Source options
are controlled by the selected printer’s driver.
4 Specify the Drawing Scale of the printed
• When possible, the program will automatically output. Changes to these options may cause the
set the Size and Orientation to match those of the Paper Size to change, above. Not available in the
Drawing Sheet. Print Materials List dialog or in camera views or
overviews.
• The Paper Size may be automatically adjusted if
the Drawing Scale option is changed, below. • Fit to Paper prints the view on one page. The
program uses whatever scale is necessary to fit
3 Specify the Print Source. Not available in the the plan on one page.
Print Materials List dialog.
388
Print Image Dialog
• When Fit to Paper is selected, specify the per-

7 Control the appearance of the print job Preview
centage of the paper to be used. The default value on the right side of the dialog.
is 95%. • Specify the Page that displays in the Preview
area.
Note: The Fit to Paper percentage value is global • Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Fit
- affecting all views in all files, and is retained
the selected Page to the extents of the Preview
between sessions.
area.
• Select To Scale to print at the scale specified in • Uncheck Update Automatically to turn off the
the Drawing Sheet Setup dialog. See “Drawing print job Preview and prevent it from updating as
Sheet Setup Dialog” on page 384. changes are made to the settings in this dialog.
• Click the Update button to update the print job
5 Options - Preview to reflect the current settings in this dia-
log. If Update Automatically is unchecked, click-
• Specify the number of Copies you would like to ing Update may force the Preview to be blank.
print.
• Check Print in Color to print in color or clear the 8 When Update Automatically is checked, a
preview of the current print job displays here.
check box to print in either grayscale or black and
The drawing sheet displays as a white rectangle, and
white. In the Print Materials List dialog, system
if multiple sheets are required, you can scroll through
default colors are used when this box is
them. If the print job is large, a progress dialog may
unchecked.
display briefly as the preview draws or updates.
6 Advanced Options - Click the Open System
Print Dialog button to close the Print View 9 To help prevent unwanted printed output,
information messages regarding page size,
dialog and print using your operating system’s Print
resolution, and scale may display here, depending on
dialog instead. Not available when No Printer is
the settings in this dialog.
selected.
Print Image Dialog

Any view can be printed by selecting File> The Print Image dialog is similar to the Print View
Print Image. This is the only way to print 3D dialog; however, the printing process is different.
views. See “3D Rendering” on page 319. Print Image prints individual pixels as opposed to
vectors (lines).
389
1 Select the Name of the Printer you wish to use • Specify which Page displays in the Preview area.
from the drop-down list. To print to .pdf, select • Click the buttons to Zoom In, Zoom Out, or Fit
“Chief Architect Save as PDF” from the list, or the selected Page to the extents of the Preview.
choose a .pdf writer installed on your system. See
“Printing to a PDF File” on page 387. • Uncheck Update Automatically to turn off the
print job Preview and prevent it from updating as
2 Select the Paper Orientation, Size, and changes are made to the settings in this dialog.
Source. The available Size and Source options
• Click the Update button to update the print job
are controlled by the selected printer’s driver. See
Preview to reflect the current settings in this dia-
“Printer Drivers” on page 384.
log. If Update Automatically is unchecked, click-
3 Specify the number of Copies you would like ing Update may force the Preview to be blank.
to print.
6 When Update Automatically is checked, a
4 Advanced Options - Click the Open System preview of the current print job displays here. If
Print Dialog button to close the Print View the print job is large, a progress dialog may display
dialog and print using your operating system’s Print briefly as the preview draws or updates.
dialog instead. Not available when No Printer is
selected. 7 To help prevent unwanted printed output,
information messages regarding page size and
Control the appearance of the print job Preview resolution may display here, depending on the
5
on the right side of the dialog. settings in this dialog.
390
Appendix A
Resources and
Support
Chief Architect technical support and training • Learning and Inspiration

resources to help you be successful using our • Contacting Technical Support
software. • Error Messages
• Program Paths Dialog
Learning and Inspiration

Chief Architect offers a variety of resources that help of creating a complete model, from the first wall to
you learn how to use the software, discover new the interior design and landscaping.
drawing techniques, and connect with other Home
This guide is available online by selecting Help>
Designer users.
View User’s Guide.
Home Designer Web Site Online Help Videos
The Home Designer web site has an array of
Another resource that illustrates Home Designer
resources, including downloadable library content,
Suite’s tools is the collection of tutorial videos
program updates and more. Select Help> Visit
available on our web site. To view the online videos,
Home Designer Web Site from the program select Help> View Online Help Videos from the
menu to launch your default internet browser to program menu or visit
HomeDesignerSoftware.com. www.homedesigner.chiefarchitect.com/videos.
Reference Manual Online Knowledge Base

The Home Designer Suite Reference Manual is a The Home Designer Knowledge Base is a collection
comprehensive source of information about the of online articles that address common technical
entire Home Designer Suite 2021 program interface. issues as well as a range of how-to questions with
This manual is available online in .pdf format by illustrations and step-by-step instructions. To access
selecting Help> View Reference Manual . these resources, visit HomeDesignerSoftware.com .
User’s Guide HomeTalk Online Forum

Written for new Home Designer Suite users, but a The HomeTalk User Forum hosts ongoing discussion
helpful reference for users of all experience levels as on a variety of topics related to the use of Home
well, the User’s Guide walks you through the process Designer Suite. It is rich with useful tips and
391
available free of charge to all registered Home To visit HomeTalk, select Help> HomeTalk or go to
Designer Suite users. hometalk.chiefarchitect.com.
• Discussions are initiated and carried out by users.
Online Samples Gallery
• Experienced users share knowledge with each
other and beginners. A collection of plan sets and renderings is available
• Home Designer Suite Staff members post for viewing and download on our web site. Select
announcements, advice and technical informa- File> Download Sample Plans to launch your
tion. internet browser to HomeDesignerSoftware.com
Contacting Technical Support

Chief Architect’s world class technical support • When calling Technical Support, have Home
services can be accessed both online and by Designer Suite running on the computer where
telephone. Select Help> Technical Support from the problem occurs. This is necessary in order to
the program menu to visit troubleshoot the issue and verify that a solution is
HomeDesignerSoftware.com. found.
Before contacting Technical Support, take a moment • Be prepared to reproduce and describe the prob-
to see if the answer to your question is found in the lem in detail. If we cannot reproduce the prob-
program’s Help, Training Videos, or other online lem, there is a reduced chance that we will be
resources. When you contact us, you will be referred able to resolve it.
to these resources if the answer can be found there.
Telephone Support
There are a number of things you can do to ensure a
speedy answer to your question when you contact Our Technical Support team is committed to
Technical Support. answering your questions as quickly as possible and
• Select Help> About Home Designer Suite (PC) in the order received. We can resolve most issues in
or Home Designer Suite> About Home just a few minutes and are happy to help you find the
Designer Suite (Mac) and make a note of the best resource to answer your questions. So that we
first characters of your Product Key and the pro- can quickly answer all calls, though, we may ask that
gram’s Build number. you limit your inquiry to one question.
• We periodically release updates to the current

Online Support
program version. Before contacting Technical
Support, select Help> Download Program If a Support technician needs to see a copy of a plan
Updates and make sure you are running the most or other file, they will ask you submit it to us using
current update for your program version. the Chief Architect Online Support Center .
• When you encounter an error message, click the Questions can also be submitted directly to the
Send Report button if possible and copy the Technical Support department using the Online
message’s exact wording. See “Error Messages” Support Center as well. Be sure to provide a detailed
on page 392. description of the problem you are encountering in
your ticket.
Error Messages
Most common error messages have a known cause If the message is discussed in an article it will
and simple resolution. When you encounter an error display, providing information about the message
or warning message in Home Designer Suite, you and how best to avoid it.
can click the Check Knowledge Base button in the
It is important that abnormal errors be reported to
message box to launch your default internet browser
Chief Architect Technical Support so that we can
to the Home Designer Knowledge Base on our Web
identify and resolve any problems.
site, HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
392
Program Paths Dialog
The content of an error message is useful in Error Reporting

diagnosing its cause. If you encounter an error
message, make a note of the error number and the When an error occurs, you may have the option in
full text of the message. You can also click the the message box to send the report to Chief Architect
Details button and copy the text into a text document by clicking the Send Report button in the error
or Online Support Center ticket. message box. A report containing technical details
about the error, but no personal information, is sent
If you encounter the error more than once, make a to our Testing team for evaluation.
note of your steps prior to receiving the message.
After clicking the Send Report button, please
Finally, check to see if there are program updates contact Technical Support with any additional
available. Program updates contain enhancements information that you may have about the
and other changes that allow the software to perform circumstances of the error: for example, the type of
at an optimum level. Select Help> Download view that was open and the tool that was active.
Program Updates from the Home Designer Suite
menu and follow the instructions on our Web site,
Program Paths Dialog

Some technical issues can be caused by problems To avoid unintended problems that could prevent you
with support files used by Home Designer Suite. In from using the software, it is strongly recommended
the event of such an issue, Chief Architect Technical that you make no changes to any of the files in this
Support may direct you to the Program Paths list except with the direct assistance of Technical
dialog. This dialog displays a list of files utilized by Support.
the software along with the pathname of each.
393
394
Index
Numerics Architectural Blocks
Displaying ......................................... 287
Edit Sub-Objects ............................... 287
360 Panorama Export ....................... 348
Explode ............................................ 287
3D Sub-objects ....................................... 288
Backdrops ......................................... 317
Archive Files ....................................... 37
Data Import ....................................... 345
Delete Surface ................................... 307 Area
Mice .................................................... 20 Living Area calculation ....................... 133
Symbols, Importing ............................ 345 of a Polyline ...................................... 106
of Rooms .......................................... 136
3D Roof Designer .............................. 258
Arrow
3D Views
Auto Positioning ................................ 165
Display .............................................. 307
Panel ................................................ 103
Doll House ................................ 305 – 306
Text Line With ................................... 164
Editing .............................................. 313
Framing Overview .............................. 306 Artwork
Full Overview .................................... 305 Creating textures ....................... 299 – 300
Overviews ......................................... 304 Attic
Save ................................................. 314 Floor ................................................. 231
Working in ......................................... 313 Rooms .............................................. 133
3D Wall Designer............................... 114 Walls ................................................ 123
Auto
Archive ............................................... 36
A Dormers, Editing ............................... 262

Floating Dormer ................................ 261
Interior Dimensions ........................... 150
Adding
Place Outlets .................................... 215
to the Library ..................................... 279
Roof Returns ..................................... 263
Adjust Save Files ........................................... 37
Material Definition .............................. 299 Stairwell ............................................ 243
Align Auto Rebuild
Curved Stairs Between Floors .............. 94 Attic Walls ......................................... 110
Curved Walls Between Floors ............. 122 Foundation ........................................ 223
Objects ............................................... 93 Roofs ................................................ 256
Text .................................................. 162
Automatic
Walls ................................................. 121
Exterior Dimensions .......................... 150
Alphabets
International ...................................... 158
Unicode ............................................ 158
Ambient Light B
Daytime ............................................ 321
Backdrops ......................................... 333
Interior .............................................. 321
3D .................................................... 317
Nighttime ........................................... 321
Definition .......................................... 333
Angle Snaps ........................................ 68 Generated Sky .................................. 318
Angle Style Background Color .............................. 51
Dialog ................................................. 55
Backup
Appearance Preferences .................... 50 Entire Plan or Project .......................... 40
Appliances Files ................................................... 36
Built into cabinets .............................. 201 Balusters ........................................... 128
Arc Definition .......................................... 234
Panel ................................................ 104 Base
Specification Dialog ........................... 104
395
Cabinets ............................................ 200 Island ............................................... 205

Basements Lazy Susan ....................................... 207
Daylight ............................................. 225 Minimum Width ................................. 200
Walkout ............................................. 225 Module Lines .................................... 203
Moving, with Wall .............................. 203
Bay Windows ..................................... 184
Normal .............................................. 204
Bay/Box Window Peninsula radius ............................... 204
Specification Dialog ........................... 196 Radius end ....................................... 204
Blend Colors with Materials ............ 295 Resize Increment .............................. 200
Blind Cabinets ................................... 205 Reverse Appliance ............................ 208
Shaped ............................................. 204
Bonus
Special shapes .......................... 204 , 206
Library Catalogs ................................ 276
Wall .................................................. 200
Rooms .............................................. 231
CAD
Bow
Angle Snaps ....................................... 68
Window Specification ......................... 196
Circles .............................................. 102
Bow Windows .................................... 184 Drawing Tools ................................... 101
Box Ellipses ............................................. 102
Windows ........................................... 184 Ovals ................................................ 102
Break Polyline ............................................ 102
Line .................................................... 95 Polylines ........................................... 105
Line, complete ..................................... 96 Rectangle ......................................... 102
Line, partial ......................................... 95 CAD Box
Brick Ledges...................................... 113 Specification Dialog ........................... 107
Build CAD Objects
Foundation ................................ 222 , 229 Displaying ......................................... 108
House ................................................. 42 Calculate
New Floor .......................................... 228 From All Floors.................................. 377
Roof Dialog ....................................... 256 From Room ....................................... 378
Terrain .............................................. 356 Loan ................................................... 44
Bumping/Pushing ............................... 93 Materials on soffits ............................ 291
Camera
Activating .......................................... 314
C Change Settings ................................ 315
Create Views .................................... 305
Cabinet Defaults ............................................ 303
Defaults ............................................ 199 Field of View ..................................... 312
Designer ........................................... 199 Move Tools ....................................... 310
Modules Library ................................. 200 Move Up/Down One Floor .................. 312
Specification Dialog ........................... 206 Orbit Tools ........................................ 310
Tools ................................................. 200 Specification Dialog ........................... 315
Tilt Tools ........................................... 311
Cabinets
Angled front ....................................... 204 Casing
Backsplash ........................................ 207 Door ......................................... 173 , 179
Base ................................................. 200 Cathedral Ceilings ............................ 140
Blind ................................................. 205 Ceiling
Built-in appliances ............................. 201 Break Lines ....................................... 140
Corner ............................................... 204 Heights ............................................. 138
Delete face items ............................... 208 Shelf ................................................. 139
Door/drawer style .............................. 200 Ceilings
Doors, diagonal ................................. 207 Cathedral .......................................... 140
Doors, glass ...................................... 209 Lowered ............................................ 139
Editing .............................................. 203 Over this room .................................. 144
End cabinets ..................................... 204 Special ............................................. 139
Fillers ................................................ 201 Trey .................................................. 140
Front Indicators ................................. 203
Front Panel ....................................... 207 Center
Full Height ......................................... 200 Doors ............................................... 173
General Defaults ................................ 199 Object edit tool .................................... 94
Glass doors ....................................... 209 Sheet ................................................ 386
396
Text .................................................. 162
Change
D
Door Swings ...................................... 173 Deck ................................................... 138
Floor/Reference ................................. 231 Designer ........................................... 111
Line to arc ......................................... 239 Edges ............................................... 111
Chimneys ........................................... 226 Framing ............................................ 138
Circle Railing .............................................. 111
Specification Dialog ........................... 105 Roof Over ......................................... 138
Circles ................................................ 102 Decks ................................................. 138
Ovals ................................................ 102 Default
Click Stairs ........................................ 234 Lights ............................................... 321
Close Default Sun Light
Plans and Views .................................. 65 Specification Dialog ........................... 322
Program .............................................. 40 Defaults
Views .................................................. 65 Cabinet ............................................. 199
Color Camera ............................................. 303
Off/On ................................................. 76 Defined ............................................... 47
Dimension ......................................... 147
Color Chooser
Door ................................................. 169
Eyedropper ......................................... 78
Dormer ............................................. 256
Colors Dynamic ............................................. 48
Selecting ............................................. 77 Floor ......................................... 132 , 227
Compatibility Foundation ........................................ 221
with other programs ............................. 31 General Plan ....................................... 49
Connect Material ............................................ 294
Electrical ........................................... 215 Reset .................................................. 49
Walls ................................................. 116 Roofs ................................................ 255
Contextual Menus ............................... 50 Room ............................................... 132
In Render views ................................. 312 Settings .............................................. 47
Structural Member Reporting ............. 378
Copy Wall .................................................. 110
Folders and Library Objects ............... 280 Window ............................................. 183
Copy/Paste Define Material Dialog...................... 300
Main Edit Mode .................................... 71
Sticky Mode ......................................... 71 Delete
3D Surface ........................................ 307
Corner Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 285
Boards .............................................. 265 Current Floor .................................... 229
Windows ........................................... 185 Floors ............................................... 229
Corner Board Foundation ........................................ 224
Specification Dialog ........................... 266 Gable Over Opening .......................... 258
Create Library Content ................................. 281
New Plan Dialog .................................. 33 Objects ............................................... 99
Plant Image ....................................... 373 Roof Planes .............................. 256 , 258
Cross Section Slider......................... 313 Wall Hatching .................................... 114
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Dimension
Specification Dialog ........................... 318 Defaults ............................................ 147
Tools ................................................ 149
Crosshairs ........................................... 21
Aligning with ........................................ 93 Dimension Defaults .......................... 147
Dialog ............................................... 147
Crown Molding
Cabinets ............................................ 204 Dimension Line
Current
Floor ................................................. 230 Dimensions
Floor, Delete ..................................... 229 Auto Interior ...................................... 150
Editing .............................................. 151
Curved
End to end ........................................ 150
Deck Edge ........................................ 111
Exterior ............................................. 150
Deck Railing ...................................... 111
Interior .............................................. 150
Stairs ................................................ 234
Locating railings ................................ 125
Walls, Draw ....................................... 116
Move Objects Using .......................... 154
397
Number Height .................................. 155 with Railing ....................................... 175

Tape Measure ................................... 150 Dormer
Temporary ......................................... 150 Defaults ............................................ 256
Zeroes in ........................................... 149 Specification Dialog ........................... 262
Display Dormers ............................................. 261
3D Views ........................................... 307 Gable Over Door/Window .................. 258
CAD Objects ..................................... 108 Manually drawn ................................. 261
Drawing Groups ................................... 75 Windows in ....................................... 262
Drawing Sheet ................................... 386
Draw
Electrical ........................................... 216
Curved Railing .................................. 116
Foundations ...................................... 222
Curved wall ....................................... 116
Images .............................................. 327
Objects ............................................... 74 Drawing Group
Room labels ...................................... 136 Edit Tools ........................................... 76
Terrain .............................................. 356 Move to Back ...................................... 76
Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... 117 Move to Front ...................................... 76
Display Options Dialog ...................... 74 Drawing Groups .................................. 75
Distributed Object Tab ..................... 360 Drawing Sheet
Center .............................................. 386
Doll House View ........................ 305 – 306
Select ............................................... 386
Door Show ................................................ 386
Casing .............................................. 173
Driveway Tools ................................. 367
Defaults ............................................ 169
Specification Dialog ........................... 176 Driveways .......................................... 368
Swing Angle ...................................... 177 DWG
Tools ................................................. 169 File Format ....................................... 343
Trim .................................................. 173 DXF
Doors File Format ....................................... 343
Arched .............................................. 179 DXF/DWG
Bifold Doors ...................................... 170 DXF vs. DWG ................................... 343
Casing .............................................. 179
Dynamic
Center ............................................... 173
Defaults ........................................ 27 , 48
Change Opening/Hinge Side .............. 174
Print Preview .................................... 385
Change Swing Side ........................... 174
Doorways .......................................... 170
Frame ............................................... 179
Gables Over ...................................... 258
Garage .............................................. 170
E
Garage, opening direction .................. 175 Edit
Handles ............................................ 180 Handles .............................................. 21
Hardware .......................................... 180 Preferences ........................................ 54
Hinged Doors ............................ 170 , 174 Toolbar ............................................... 23
Hinges .............................................. 180 Edit Area .............................................. 81
Ignore Casing when Resizing ............... 49 Electrical
Labels ............................................... 172 Auto Place Outlets ............................ 215
Library ...................................... 171 , 177 Connections ...................................... 215
Lites .................................................. 179 Deleting ............................................ 217
Locks ................................................ 180 Displaying ......................................... 216
Openings in railings ........................... 175 Editing Objects .................................. 217
Pocket Doors ..................................... 170 General ............................................ 213
Rough opening .................................. 177 Labels .............................................. 216
Size .................................................. 177 Library .............................................. 216
Sliding Doors ..................................... 174 Lights ............................................... 214
Style ................................................. 177 Outlets .............................................. 213
Swing, change ................................... 173 Switches ........................................... 214
Threshold lines .................................. 171 Tools ................................................ 213
Transoms .......................................... 175 Wiring ............................................... 215
Type ................................................. 177
Electrical Service
Wrapped Openings ............................ 175
Doorways
Elevation
Adding a Door ................................... 171
398
Data Tools ......................................... 350
Points ............................................... 350 F
Regions ............................................ 352
F6 Key
Tab ................................................... 359
Fill Window ......................................... 64
Elevation Data
Fence Designer ................................. 112
Tools ................................................. 350
Field of View ..................................... 312
Elevation Line
Specification Dialog ........................... 359 File
Backing Up Your Files ......................... 36
Elevation Point
Create New ......................................... 33
Management ....................................... 31
Elevation Region Open .................................................. 37
Specification Dialog ........................... 359 Organization ....................................... 32
Elevation Views ................................. 306 File Management Preferences .......... 53
Ellipse................................................. 102 Fill
Specification Dialog ........................... 105 Patterns .............................................. 76
End Window ............................................... 64
Cabinets ............................................ 205 Window Building Only .......................... 64
To-End Dimensions ........................... 150 Fill Style Panel .................................... 76
Enhanced Metafiles .......................... 330 Filter
Error Messages ................................. 392 Library Search .................................. 274
Estimating Software ......................... 382 Find Object in Plan........................... 380
Exit Program ........................................ 40 Fireplace
Expand/Collapse All ......................... 274 Library .............................................. 226
Symbol ............................................. 226
Explode
Architectural Blocks ........................... 287 Fireplaces
Chimneys .......................................... 226
Export
2D Drawings ...................................... 343 Fix
360 Panorama ................................... 348 Wall Connections .............................. 116
3D Viewer File ................................... 342 Fix Off Angle Walls .......................... 115
All Floors ........................................... 343 Fixtures
Current View ..................................... 343 Lights ............................................... 214
Drawing File Dialog ............................ 344
Floating Auto Dormer ...................... 261
EMF .................................................. 330
From the Library ................................ 281 Floor
Materials List ..................................... 381 3D Overview ..................................... 304
Picture Files ...................................... 329 Build New Floor ................................. 228
Windows Metafiles ............................. 330 Camera ............................................. 304
Windows Metafiles Dialog .................. 330 Defaults .................................... 132 , 227
WMF ................................................. 330 Heights ............................................. 138
Overview .......................................... 304
Extend
Tools ................................................ 228
Slope Downward ................................ 123
Floor Plan
Extension Lines
Drawing .............................................. 27
Adding .............................................. 152
View ................................................... 28
Deleting ............................................ 153
Editing .............................................. 152 Floors
Adding .............................................. 228
Extension Snaps ................................. 68
Attic .................................................. 231
Exterior Change Floor/Reference .................... 231
Dimensions ....................................... 150 Current Floor .................................... 230
Room types ....................................... 133 Deleting ............................................ 229
The Exterior Room ............................. 134 Exchange With Floor Above ............... 229
Walls ................................................. 112 Exchange With Floor Below ............... 229
Eyedropper Floor Up/ Floor Down ........................ 230
Object ................................................. 98 Maximum number .............................. 228
Reference Floor ................................ 231
Focus on Object ............................... 309
Folders Preferences ........................... 53
399
Fonts................................................... 158
and Alphabets ................................... 158 H
Footings ............................................. 221 Half
Foundation Walls ................................................ 128
Auto Rebuild ...................................... 223 Half-Walls .......................................... 110
Defaults ............................................ 221
Hardiness Zone Maps ...................... 373
Walls ................................................. 112
Hardware
Foundations
for Doors .......................................... 180
Build ................................................. 222
Daylight Basement ............................. 225 Hatch
Delete ............................................... 224 Fill Patterns ........................................ 76
Display .............................................. 222 Wall .................................................. 114
Garage .............................................. 224 Height
Mixed Types ...................................... 222 Railings ............................................ 129
Stem Wall .......................................... 222 Help
Stepped ............................................ 225 Tool Tips ............................................ 29
Walkout Basement ............................. 225
Hill / Valley
Framing Specification Dialog ........................... 359
3D Overview ...................................... 306
Hill/Valley .......................................... 353
Deck ................................................. 138
Structural Member Reporting .............. 378 Holes
In terrain ........................................... 354
Full
Height Cabinets ................................. 200 Home Designer
Overview ................................... 304 – 305 Product Key ........................................ 29
Version Number .................................. 29
Hotkeys .......................................... 23 , 58
G Create List .......................................... 59

House Wizard
Gable Editing Rooms ..................................... 41
Over Door/Window ............................. 258 Multiple Floors .................................... 42
Placing Rooms .................................... 41
Gamepad
Enable ................................................ 59
Gamepad Settings............................... 59
Gamepads .......................................... 309 I
Garage Image
Door Tool .......................................... 170 Specification Dialog ........................... 328
Garages Images................................................ 320
Foundation ........................................ 224 Adding to Library ............................... 326
Garden Bed Creating ............................................ 326
Kidney Shaped .................................. 354 Displaying ......................................... 327
Polyline ............................................. 354 Editing .............................................. 327
Round ............................................... 354 Place ................................................ 326
Tools ................................................. 354 Printing ............................................. 389
General Import
Cabinet Defaults ................................ 199 3D Data ............................................ 345
Preferences ......................................... 52 3D Symbols ...................................... 345
Getting Help......................................... 29 GPS Data ......................................... 365
PDF .................................................. 331
GFCI Outlet ........................................ 213
Terrain Assistant ............................... 364
GPS Terrain Data ...................................... 363
Importing ........................................... 365
Interior
Grid Dimension Tool ................................. 150
Snaps ........................................... 50 , 68 Dimensions, Auto .............................. 150
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt ........ 213 Room types ....................................... 133
Invisible Walls................................... 113
400
K Light Sources.................................... 320
Default Lights .................................... 321
Default Sun Light .............................. 321
Key Frames ........................................ 336
Fixtures ............................................ 321
Keyboard
Lights
Commands ............................ 23 , 58 , 273
Fixtures .................................... 214 , 321
Kidney Shaped Turn On/Off ....................................... 322
Garden Bed ....................................... 354
Line
Pond ................................................. 354
Color ................................................ 103
Terrain Features ................................ 353
Panel ................................................ 103
Kitchen Island ................................... 205 Specification Dialog ........................... 102
Knee Walls ................................. 123 , 126 Line Style........................................... 103
Panel ................................................ 103
Lites
L Craftsman ......................................... 191
Diamond ........................................... 191
Label Panel ........................................ 166 Doors ............................................... 179
Labels ................................................. 166 Normal .............................................. 191
Displaying ......................................... 166 Prairie ............................................... 191
Door .................................................. 172 Living Area ........................................ 137
Electrical ........................................... 216 and Room Types ............................... 133
Plant ................................................. 375 Calculation ........................................ 137
Room ................................................ 136 Delete label ....................................... 137
Window ............................................. 187 Label ................................................ 137
Landing .............................................. 240 Restore label .................................... 137
Landings Show .................................................. 50
Height ............................................... 240 vs. Footprint ...................................... 137
Landscape Designer ......................... 349 Loan Calculator .................................. 44
Layer
Layer Sets ........................................... 75
Layers M
Primary and Secondary ........................ 74
Main
Left Mouse Button Edit Mode ........................................... 71
Definition ............................................. 20
Manual
Library Dimensions ....................................... 150
Adding Folders .................................. 279
Manufacturer Libraries .................... 276
Bonus Catalogs ................................. 276
Content ............................................. 276 Marquee Select ................................... 80
Deleting Content ................................ 281 Marquee Select Similar ...................... 81
Export ............................................... 281 Material
Manufacturer Libraries ....................... 276 Defaults ............................................ 294
Renaming Libraries ............................ 280 Eyedropper ....................................... 295
Search .............................................. 274
Material Painter................................. 295
Shortcuts ........................................... 280
and Walls .......................................... 296
Trash ................................................ 281
Blending ........................................... 295
Library Browser ................................ 271 Modes .............................................. 295
Adding Items ..................................... 279 Using ................................................ 295
Docking ............................................. 274
Materials
Panes ............................................... 271
Add to Library ................................... 279
Preferences ......................................... 52
Artwork ..................................... 299 – 300
Library Object Blending ........................................... 299
Specification Dialog ........................... 285 Brightness ........................................ 301
Library Objects Calculating amounts .......................... 291
Editing .............................................. 284 Color ................................................ 300
Placing .............................................. 281 Creating ............................................ 299
Light Define Material Dialog ....................... 300
Ambient ............................................ 321 Editing .............................................. 298
On Soffits ......................................... 291
401
Panel ................................................ 296 Nudging ............................................... 93

Textures ............................................ 320
Walls ................................................. 117
Materials List ..................................... 377
Calculate from All Floors .................... 377
O
Calculate from Room ......................... 378 Object
Conditioned Areas ............................. 382 Based Design ...................................... 19
Display Options Dialog ....................... 380
Object Snaps ....................................... 68
Editing .............................................. 381
Extension Snaps ................................. 68
Estimating software ........................... 382
Export ............................................... 381 Off Angle Walls ................................. 115
Menus ................................................... 23 One-Click Auto Dimension .............. 150
Message Boxes One-Click Stairs................................ 234
Reset .................................................. 26 Open
Metafile Size Dialog .......................... 330 Below ............................................... 133
Object ................................................. 25
Metafiles ............................................. 330
Plan Files ............................................ 37
Middle Mouse Button.................... 20 , 63 Symbol ............................................. 285
Minimum View ................................................. 314
Alcove ............................................... 257 OpenGL .............................................. 303
Molding Organizing
Profiles, changing .............................. 268 your Files ............................................ 32
Moldings Panel .................................. 268 Orthogonal Views ............................. 386
Monolithic Slab ................................. 221 Outlets ............................................... 213
Mouse Above cabinet ................................... 214
3D....................................................... 20 Automatic ......................................... 215
Pointer Icons ....................................... 21 Dishwasher ....................................... 214
Mouse Buttons GFCI ................................................ 213
Using .................................................. 20 Manually placed ................................ 213
Place ................................................ 215
Move
Sink .................................................. 214
Along Rails ........................................ 120
WP ................................................... 214
Camera with Mouse ........................... 309
Folders and Library Objects ............... 280 Oval .................................................... 102
Nudging .............................................. 93 Specification Dialog ........................... 105
Object Using Dimensions ................... 154 Overview .............................................. 17
Objects ............................................... 92 Full ................................................... 305
Restrictions ......................................... 93
Walls with Cabinets Attached ............. 203
Mulled Unit
P
Mulled Units Page Setup Dialog ............................ 384
Labels ............................................... 167 Painting
Mullions Over Materials .................................. 299
Window ............................................. 191 Pan
Multiple Pan Window Tool ................................ 65
Select ................................................. 80 the Display .......................................... 64
Muntins Using the Keyboard ............................. 64
Window ............................................. 191 Using the Mouse ................................. 64
Using the Scroll Bars ........................... 64
Panorama Export .............................. 348
N Paragraph Options Dialog ............... 161
Partition Tool .................................... 200
Newels Pass-Through.................................... 184
Definition ........................................... 234
Paste .................................................... 70
Newels/Balusters Panel ................... 129 Hold Position ...................................... 71
Niche................................................... 184 Special ............................................... 71
No Locate Wall .................................. 125 Paste Image ......................................... 70
402
PDF ..................................................... 331 Folders Panel ...................................... 53
Importing ........................................... 331 General Panel ..................................... 52
Print to .............................................. 387 Global settings .................................... 50
Peninsula Radius Cabinets.............. 205 Library Browser Panel ......................... 52
Render Panel ...................................... 54
Picture File Box
Reset preferences ............................... 55
Print.................................................... 383
Picture Files
3D Views .......................................... 386
Export ............................................... 329
Across Multiple Pages ....................... 386
Import ............................................... 330
Center Sheet ..................................... 386
Scale ................................................ 333
Clear Printer Info ............................... 384
Pitch Color or Black and White ................... 389
Above Wall ........................................ 123 Dialog ............................................... 387
Place Drawing Scale ................................... 383
Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 185 Drivers .............................................. 384
Images .............................................. 326 Options ............................................. 384
Library Objects .................................. 281 Paper Size ........................................ 383
Outlets .............................................. 215 Perspective Views ............................. 386
Plan Preview ............................................ 385
Create New ......................................... 33 Printable Area ........................... 385 – 386
Drawing .............................................. 27 Scale to Fit ....................................... 386
Files, Opening ..................................... 37 Terminology ...................................... 383
General Defaults .................................. 49 Tiled ................................................. 386
Saving ................................................. 34 to PDF File ....................................... 387
View .................................................... 28 To Scale ........................................... 386
Plan Check ........................................... 43 Print Image ........................................ 315
and room labels ................................. 133 Dialog ............................................... 389
Dialog ................................................. 44 Printers
Hold .................................................... 44 Select Printer .................................... 388
Restart ................................................ 44
Plant
2D Symbols ....................................... 374
Chooser Dialog .................................. 372
Q
Encyclopedia ..................................... 372 Quoin
Labels ............................................... 375 Specification Dialog ........................... 266
Tools ................................................. 371
Quoins................................................ 266
Plant Image
Create ............................................... 373
Plant Shelf ......................................... 139 R
Pointer Radius
Crosshairs ........................................... 21 End Cabinets .................................... 205
Polygon Rail Style Panel................................. 127
Shaped Deck ..................................... 111 Railings .............................................. 111
Polyline Balusters .......................................... 128
Area .................................................. 106 Decks ............................................... 111
Definition ........................................... 105 for Stairs ........................................... 249
Garden Bed ....................................... 354 Glass ................................................ 112
Panel ................................................ 106 Half Walls ......................................... 110
Specification Dialog ........................... 106 in a Doorway ..................................... 175
Ponds ................................................. 354 Locate with dimensions ..................... 125
Round ............................................... 354 Middle Rail ........................................ 128
Preferences Newels ............................................. 129
Appearance Panel ............................... 50 Open ................................................ 128
Colors Panel ........................................ 51 Openings .......................................... 175
Definition of ......................................... 48 Solid ................................................. 128
Dialog ................................................. 50 Stairs ........................................ 243 , 250
Edit Panel ........................................... 54 Type ................................................. 128
File Management Panel ....................... 53 Raised / Lowered Region
403
Specification Dialog ........................... 360 Styles, Automatic .............................. 256

Ramp Tools ................................................ 256
Specification Dialog ........................... 251 Roof Designer ................................... 256
Rebuild ............................................... 256 Roof Hole/Skylight
3D..................................................... 314 Specification Dialog ........................... 260
Roofs ................................................ 256 Roof Planes
Rectangular Polyline ........................ 102 Delete ............................................... 258
Redo ................................................... 100 Roofs .......................................... 255 – 256
Reference Auto Rebuild ............................. 256 – 257
Grid .................................................... 50 Auto Roof Return .............................. 126
Build Roof Dialog .............................. 256
Remove
Defaults ............................................ 255
Backdrop ........................................... 317
Dormers ............................................ 261
Render Hole for skylights ............................... 259
Daytime Ambient ............................... 321 Knee walls ........................................ 123
Graphics card .................................... 303 Min. Alcove ....................................... 257
Interior Ambient ................................. 321 Overhang .......................................... 257
Light Sources .................................... 320 Pitch ................................................. 123
Nighttime Ambient ............................. 321 Returns ............................................. 263
Preferences ......................................... 54 Skylights ........................................... 259
Status ................................................. 55 Story-and-a-half ................................ 123
Tips .................................................. 319
Room
Rendering Techniques ..................... 323 Defaults ............................................ 132
Defaults ............................................ 323 Specification Dialog ........................... 141
Options ............................................. 323
Room Labels ..................................... 136
Reset Custom ............................................. 136
Defaults .............................................. 49 Display ............................................. 136
Message Boxes ................................... 26 Edit .................................................. 136
Preferences ......................................... 55 Interior room area .............................. 136
Reshape objects ................................. 95 Interior room dimensions ................... 136
Resize Room area ........................................ 136
House using Dimensions .................... 154 Standard room area ........................... 136
Objects ............................................... 94 Room Types ...................................... 133
Restrictions Rooms
Moving objects .................................... 93 Area ................................................. 136
Retaining Wall ................................... 355 Attic .................................................. 133
Below Stairs ...................................... 244
Reverse
Editing .............................................. 135
Plan .................................................... 97
Exterior types .................................... 133
Rich Text Flat Ceiling over ................................ 144
Defaults ............................................ 157 Interior .............................................. 133
Specification Dialog ........................... 159 Interior area ...................................... 136
Text Color ......................................... 160 Interior dimensions ............................ 136
Right Button Definition ...................... 20 Living Area ....................................... 133
Road Name for PlanCheck ............................ 44
Specification Dialog ........................... 369 Open Below ...................................... 133
Road Objects Roof over .......................................... 144
Different Types .................................. 367 Room Definition ................................ 131
Room Types ..................................... 133
Road Tools......................................... 367 Selecting .......................................... 134
Roads Standard area ................................... 136
Displaying ......................................... 368 The Exterior Room ............................ 134
Roof .................................................... 255 Types ............................................... 132
Extend Slope Downward .................... 126 Rotate objects ..................................... 96
Full Gable Wall .................................. 126 Round
Over this room ................................... 144 Garden bed ....................................... 354
Panel ................................................ 126 Pond ................................................. 354
Second pitch ..................................... 126
404
S Skylights .................................... 256 , 259
Sliding Doors .................................... 170
Sample Plans Snap Behaviors .................................. 67
Download .......................................... 392 Angle Snaps ....................................... 68
Save Extension Snaps ................................. 68
3D Views ........................................... 314 Grid Snaps .................................... 50 , 68
and Save As ........................................ 34 Object Snaps ...................................... 68
Plan .................................................... 34 Soffit
Thumbnail Image ................................. 36 Defaults ............................................ 289
Scale Specification Dialog ........................... 291
Picture Files ...................................... 333 Soffits ........................................ 200 , 289
Printing to ......................................... 386 Calculating Materials ......................... 291
Terrain Data ...................................... 365 Corner .............................................. 290
Text Size ........................................... 162 Special applications ........................... 290
to Fit ................................................. 386 Space Planning ................................... 41
Schematics, Wiring ........................... 215 Special
Scroll Bars ........................................... 64 Shaped Cabinets ............................... 204
Seat Specification Dialogs
in Bay Window ................................... 195 Arc ................................................... 104
Select Bay/Box Window ............................... 196
Backdrop ........................................... 317 Bow Window ..................................... 196
Components of Blocked Units ............. 186 Cabinet ............................................. 206
Ctrl+Click ............................................ 81 CAD Box ........................................... 107
Library Object Dialog ......................... 283 CAD Circle ........................................ 105
Marquee .............................................. 80 CAD Ellipse ...................................... 105
Material Dialog .................................. 297 CAD Oval .......................................... 105
Multiple Objects ............................. 80 – 81 Camera ............................................. 315
Next Object ......................................... 80 Corner Boards ................................... 266
Objects button ..................................... 80 Cross Section/Elevation Camera ........ 318
Objects in 3D Views ........................... 314 Default Sun Light .............................. 322
Room ................................................ 134 Dimension Line ................................. 154
Selected Edge ..................................... 80 Door ................................................. 176
Shift+Click ........................................... 81 Dormer ............................................. 262
Similar Objects .................................... 80 Electrical Service .............................. 217
Elevation Line ................................... 359
Select Color Dialog ............................. 77
Elevation Point .................................. 358
Selection Fill Color ............................. 51 Elevation Region ............................... 359
Shadows............................................. 319 Hill / Valley ....................................... 359
Ray Casted ....................................... 319 Image ............................................... 328
Shelf ................................................... 200 Library Object ................................... 285
Line .................................................. 102
Shelf Ceiling ...................................... 139
Plant Image ...................................... 373
Shelf Tool........................................... 200 Polyline ............................................ 106
Shelf/Partition Quoins .............................................. 266
Specification Dialog ........................... 210 Raised/Lowered Region ..................... 360
Shift Key Ramp ............................................... 251
Marquee selection ............................... 80 Rich Text .......................................... 159
Select multiple objects ......................... 81 Road ................................................ 369
Shininess ........................................... 301 Roof Hole/Skylight ............................. 260
Room ............................................... 141
Shortcut Keys ................................ 23 , 58 Shelf/Partition ................................... 210
Show Soffit ................................................. 291
Living Area .......................................... 50 Stair Landing .................................... 252
Reference Grid .................................... 50 Staircase .......................................... 245
Sheet ................................................ 386 Terrain .............................................. 357
Shutters.............................................. 193 Terrain Feature ................................. 360
Side Windows ...................................... 22 Terrain Path ...................................... 362
Text .................................................. 137
Sidewalk ............................................. 368
Wall .................................................. 124
SidewalkTools ................................... 367 Wall Hatch ........................................ 130
405
Window ............................................. 188 Startup Options .................................. 17

Splines ............................................... 107 Status Bar ............................................ 26
Split Angle style .......................................... 56
Level Entries ..................................... 230 Stem Walls......................................... 222
Level Floor Plans ............................... 229 Stepped Foundations ....................... 225
Stacked Windows.............................. 186 Stepping Stones ............................... 355
Stair Sticky Mode ......................................... 71
Landing Specification Dialog .............. 252
Story-and-a-half ................................ 123
Tools ................................................. 233
Straight
Stair Designer.................................... 233
Deck Edge ........................................ 111
Stair Landing Stairs ................................................ 234
Streams .............................................. 354
Stair Landings
Structural Member Reporting ......... 378
Height ............................................... 240
Sunlight Toggle ................................ 307
Stair Railing
Solid ................................................. 243 Swap
Views ................................................. 61
Stair Treads
Automatic .......................................... 246 Switch
Depth ................................................ 246 Three way ......................................... 216
Lock Number ..................................... 246 Symbol
Lock Tread Depth .............................. 246 Surface Normals ............................... 345
Number ............................................. 246 vs. Native Objects ............................. 284
Overhang .......................................... 247
Thickness .......................................... 247
Staircase
T
Stairs Tab Key ................................................ 80
Align Curved Stairs .............................. 94 Tape Measure .................................... 150
Auto Stairwell .................................... 243
Technical Support
Balusters ........................................... 249
Contact ............................................. 392
Change Line/Arc ................................ 239
Error Messages ................................. 392
Click ................................................. 234
Online ............................................... 392
Curved ...................................... 234 , 236
Online Knowledge Base ..................... 391
Deck to ground .................................. 236
Telephone ......................................... 392
Direction ........................................... 235
Down ................................................ 236 Temporary
Edit Handles ...................................... 237 Dimensions ....................................... 150
Editing .............................................. 237 Temporary Dimensions.................... 150
Handrails ........................................... 250 Terrain
Landings ........................................... 240 and 3D Draw Time............................. 356
Large Stringer Base ........................... 248 Build ................................................. 356
Make Reach ...................................... 245 Displaying ......................................... 356
Merge Sections .................................. 238 Editing .............................................. 356
Newels ...................................... 249 – 250 Elevation Data Tools ......................... 350
Railings ............................................. 243 Feature Tools .................................... 353
Reach Next Floor ............................... 245 Hill .................................................... 353
Rooms Below .................................... 244 Holes ................................................ 354
Section Width .................................... 246 Modifier Tools ................................... 352
Stairwell ............................................ 243 Specification Dialog ........................... 357
Starter Treads ................................... 241 Valley ............................................... 353
Straight ............................................. 234 Wall and Curb Tools .......................... 355
Stringers ........................................... 247 Terrain Data
Subsections ....................................... 245 Import ............................................... 363
Terminology ...................................... 234
Tread Depth ...................................... 241 Terrain Feature
Treads .............................................. 245 Specification Dialog ........................... 360
Wrapped ........................................... 242 Terrain Features
Stairwell Clip .................................................. 360
Automatic .......................................... 243 Height ............................................... 360
406
Terrain Modeler Memory ............................................ 303
3D Views ........................................... 356 OpenGL ............................................ 303
Terrain Path Status ................................................. 55
Specification Dialog ........................... 362 Videos
Terrain Perimeter .............................. 349 View Online Help Videos ................... 391
Text Views
Aligning ............................................. 162 Tiling .................................................. 62
Arrows .............................................. 164 Virtual Graph Paper...................... 49 – 50
Bullets ............................................... 161 Visual CAD Snaps .............................. 49
Copy, Cut and Paste .......................... 162
Volume
Creating ............................................ 159
Of a Polyline ..................................... 106
Displaying ......................................... 159
Editing .............................................. 161
Layer ................................................ 159
Line Spacing ..................................... 161
Lists .................................................. 161
W
Move ................................................. 162 Walkthroughs .................................... 335
Numbering ........................................ 161 Along a Path ..................................... 335
Paragraph Options ............................. 161 Codecs ............................................. 339
Printed Size ....................................... 162 Create Path ...................................... 335
Reshape ........................................... 162 Key Frames ...................................... 336
Resize ............................................... 162 Pause Recording ............................... 338
Rotate ............................................... 162 Playing ............................................. 336
Scaling .............................................. 162 Recording ......................................... 338
Specification Dialog ........................... 137 Save Frame ...................................... 338
Text Style Defaults Dialog ............... 165 Stop Recording ................................. 338
Text Styles ......................................... 165 Wall
Angles .............................................. 115
Texture Assemblies ....................................... 124
Filename Conflict Dialog .................... 347 Cabinets ........................................... 200
Textures ............................................. 320 Defaults ............................................ 110
Thumbnails .......................................... 36 Niche ................................................ 184
Creating .............................................. 36 Specification Dialog ........................... 124
Tiling Views ......................................... 62 Tools ................................................ 110
Toolbars ............................................... 22 Wall Hatch
Drop-Down .......................................... 57 Specification Dialog ........................... 130
Edit ..................................................... 23 Walls
Hide .................................................... 57 Align between floors .......................... 122
Parent-Child ........................................ 57 Align collinear ................................... 121
Transom Windows ............................ 175 and Material Painter .......................... 296
Attic Walls ......................................... 123
Transparency..................................... 301
Connecting ....................................... 116
Trim Curved .............................................. 116
Door .................................................. 173 Curved, align between floors .............. 122
Delete hatching ................................. 114
Display surfaces only ......................... 117
U Drawing ............................................
Editing ..............................................
114
119
Undo ................................................... 100 Exterior and Interior ........................... 112
Files .................................................... 37 Fix Connections ................................ 116
Undo Zoom ......................................... 64 Flip layers ......................................... 115
Foundation ........................................ 112
Unrestricted Movement ...................... 93
Full Gable Wall ................................. 126
Grid snapping ................................... 115
Half .................................................. 128
V Half Walls .........................................
Hatching ...........................................
110
114
Valley .................................................. 353 Heights ............................................. 120
Vents................................................... 185 Invisible ............................................ 113
Video Card Knee Wall ......................................... 126
407
Length ............................................... 121 Match roof ........................................ 192

Materials ........................................... 117 Mulled Units ...................................... 186
Move Along Rails ............................... 120 Mullions ............................................ 191
No Locate .......................................... 125 Muntins ............................................. 191
No Room Def ..................................... 125 Pass-Through ................................... 184
Opening with Railing .......................... 175 Shape ............................................... 192
Openings in ....................................... 116 Shutters ............................................ 193
Removing Breaks .............................. 116 Special Shapes ................................. 185
Resizing Using Dimensions ................ 154 Stacked ............................................ 186
Retaining Wall ................................... 355 Transom ........................................... 175
Reverse Layers ................................. 115 Trapezoid ......................................... 192
Solid Railings .................................... 128 Types ............................................... 183
Thickness .......................................... 120 Vents ................................................185
Water Features .................................. 354 Windows Metafiles ........................... 330
Waterproof Outlets ........................... 214 Wiring Schematics, Creating .......... 215
Winders Wrapped
Definition ........................................... 234 Openings .......................................... 175
Window Stairs ................................................ 242
Defaults ............................................ 183
Seat .................................................. 195
Windows
Z
Bay and Bow dimensions ................... 194 Zero
Bay, Box, Bow ................................... 194 in Dimensions ................................... 149
Bench Seat ....................................... 195 Zoom .................................................... 63
Component ........................................ 194 Fill Window ......................................... 64
Corner ............................................... 185 Mouse Wheel ................................ 20 , 63
Gables Over ...................................... 258 Tools .................................................. 63
Labels ............................................... 187 Undo Zoom ......................................... 64
Library .............................................. 185
408

Home Designer Suite 2021 Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Home Designer Suite 2021 Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Home Designer Suite 2021 Reference Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chief Architect®

Home Designer Suite® 2021

Chief Architect, Inc.

Created in the United States of America.

Chapter 1: Program Overview

Chapter 2: File Management

Chapter 3: Project Planning

Chapter 4: Preferences and Default Settings

Chapter 5: Toolbars and Hotkeys

Chapter 6: Window and View Tools

Chapter 7: Creating Objects

Chapter 8: Displaying Objects

Chapter 9: Editing Objects

Chapter 10: CAD Objects

Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog......................................................................... 105

Chapter 11: Walls, Railings, and Fencing

Chapter 12: Rooms

Chapter 13: Dimensions

Chapter 14: Text

Chapter 15: Doors

Special Doors..................................................................................................................... 175

Chapter 16: Windows

Chapter 17: Cabinets

Chapter 18: Electrical

Chapter 20: Multiple Floors

Chapter 21: Stairs, Ramps, and Landings

Rooms Below Staircases................................................................................................... 244

Chapter 22: Roofs

Chapter 23: Trim Tools

Chapter 24: The Library

Chapter 25: Architectural Blocks

Chapter 26: Other Objects

Chapter 27: Materials

Chapter 28: 3D Views

Displaying 3D Views......................................................................................................... 307

Chapter 29: 3D Rendering

Chapter 30: Pictures, Images, and Walkthroughs

Chapter 32: Terrain

Chapter 33: Roads, Driveways and Sidewalks

Chapter 34: Plants

Chapter 35: Materials Lists

Chapter 36: Printing

Appendix A: Resources and Support

Home Designer Suite is designed to help home Chapter Contents

The Home Designer Suite Environment

Edit Crosshair Pointer Reference Status Bar

• Display Elements like Print Preview, Show Line

Many of these interface elements are global

Using Input Devices

In macOS™, you can Command + click to pan.

Edit Handles Pointer Icons

The Move handle at the object’s center lets you move

View and Side Windows

Toolbars and Hotkeys

Note: Keyboard navigation in dialogs may vary

• To multiply, type the * character followed by the

• To divide, type the / character followed by the

Dialog Size and Position Dialog Preview Panes

located. The vertical splitters separating these